the 



PRINCIPLES 



OF 



GREEK GRAMMAR; 

COMPRISING THE SUBSTANCE OF THE MOST APPROVED 
GREEK GRAMMARS EXTANT. 



FOR THE 



USE OF SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. 



BY REV. PETER BULLIONS, D. D., 

late professor of languages in the albany academy ; author of ! 
of grammars, greek, latin, and english, on the same 
plan; a greek reader, etc. etc. 



TWENTY-SIXTH EDITION, EEVISED AND IMPEOVED. 



NEW- YORK : 
PRATT, WOODFORD, AND COMPANY, 

NO. 4 CORTLAN'DT STREET. 

1853. 



-?i\ 



V 



'S*l 



\* b 



':- 



Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year one thousand eight hundred and 
fifty -three, by Peter Bullions, in the Clerk's office of the District Court 
of the United States for the Northern District of New-York. 



PREFACE. 



This work has now been so long before the public, and is so 
well known, that a detailed account of it is unnecessary. It is 
sufficient to say, that the object intended to be accomplished was, 
to provide a comprehensive manual of Greek Grammar, adapted 
to the use of younger as well as of more advanced students in 
our schools and colleges. 

Time and experience have only strengthened the conviction, 
long entertained, that no system of Grammar will answer a good 
purpose, for those who pursue this study at an early age, which 
does not present the leading facts and principles in such a way 
as to be easily committed to memory, and so to be always ready 
for immediate application when necessary. This principle has 
been steadily kept in view in preparing the following work, as 
well as the others belonging to this series. The leading and fun- 
damental principles have been reduced to definitions and rules, 
brief, and easy to be committed to memory, and are rendered 
comprehensive by being printed in large type ; while, at the 
same time, copious illustrations of these principles, and of the ex- 
ceptions and varieties of usage under them, with every thing im- 
portant to aid the advanced student, have been inserted in their 
place in smaller type, in the form of Observations and Notes, 
all of which are numbered for the sake of easy reference. 

AY hen the leading parts of Grammar are first actually com- 
mitted to memory, and then constantly applied in the inflection 
of words, and in analyzing their forms, they soon become so 
thoroughly understood and fixed in the memory as hardly ever 
to be effaced, and to be always ready afterwards to account for 
every form which words, in their numerous changes, assume, and 
to solve every difficulty caused by these changes almost without 
an effort of thought. A student, though young, if thus exercised 
but for one year or two, has an immense advantage, in the future 
prosecution of his studies, over those who have not laid the foun- 
dation of their success in a thorough course of drilling. 

In the preface to the first edition, a full statement was given 
of the principal sources from which the materials here collected 
were drawn, and which need not here be repeated. Suffice it to 



IV PREFACE. 

say, the author has not hesitated to avail himself of every assist- 
ance within his reach, and to gather from every quarter, espe- 
cially from the ample stores of German Philologists, whatever 
appeared suited to his design. The labor of condensing and 
arranging, and, to borrow a term from the printers' vocabulary, 
justifying the several parts with due regard to harmony and pro- 
portion, into one compact whole, has been very great. 

I would beg leave, in this place, to call the attention of stu- 
dents and of teachers, who have not yet examined the subject, to 
the method of analyzing and forming the tenses of the verb 
which is here exhibited. No part of Greek Grammar has hither- 
to proved so puzzling and harassing to the pupil as this. For 
want of understanding the few simple principles, on which the 
numerous changes in the form of the verb depend, they appear 
to him intricate, arbitrary, and incomprehensible, to such a de- 
gree as to render his prospect of fully mastering them almost 
hopeless. That this is owing, in a great measure, to the method 
of forming the different tenses by deriving one tense from 
another to which it has some real or fancied resemblance, ap- 
pears to me beyond a doubt. As there is no foundation in truth 
for this mode of formation, so almost every writer, following 
imagination as his guide, has proposed a different theory upon 
the subject. One, for example, forms the perfect passive from its 
own future. Another, with equal ingenuity, forms the future 
from its own perfect, through the medium of the first aorist pas- 
sive ! Another supposes he has simplified the whole matter by 
deriving every tense in the passive voice from its corresponding 
tense in the active voice, by making the simple and natural 
change of -\pco into -gDih/co^aj, -Soo into -/#7/<jo^ca, -\pa into 
-q&qv, -%u iu to -y&rjv, -cpa into -ftpcu, -/a into -yfjiai, and -xa 
into -pai, sometimes into -o^ica. Another still, in order to arrive, 
for example, at the first aorist passive, starts with the present 
active, and, by a succession of stages, arrives at the end of his 
journey, thus, ozQecpco, sazQEipa, eazgecpa, eG7Qa[i[A,ou, tCTQUTzrai, 
ia-TQdcpd'rjv ; and when he gets there, he finds he has missed 
his way after all, for the first aorist of the verb is not eazQacfOtjv 
but iazQtcpd'qv ; and to bring him thither, another rule has to be 
invented nearly as dark as the road he has already travelled ; 
viz., u Verbs which change s of the future into o of the perfect 
active, and into a of the perfect passive, take e again in the first 
aorist ; as, lazqanzai, tGZQt'qj&qv" What can be more perplex- 
ing and arbitrary than such a process ? It is fortunate for the 
rising generation that such a system is beginning to pass away, 



PREFACE. V 

and to 1 ' Theirach, of < tarmany, musl ml our- 

chiefly indebted for the deliverance. Throwing aside 
ems of rules and exceptions which such theoi 
had rendered necessary, he directs to the more simple and philo- 
sophical method of observing an<J stating the bet, that the r 

stem runs unchanged, or but slightly so, through the whole 
verb; and that one part differs from another in form, only in the 
part prefixed and added to the stem, and that in ali rem it 
parts are nearly the same Instead, therefore, of forming one 
tense from another by a tedious and complicated process, ei 
tense is formed at once immediately from its root by simply an- 
nexing the proper tense-ending, and prefixing the augment in the 
tenses that require it. Thus, for the sake of comparison, in>t 
of the laborious and clumsy process above ; in order to form the 
1 aor. passive of GZQtcfco, all that is necessary is to annex the 
aorist tense-ending -&qp to the root GTQtcp, prefixing the aug- 
ment, and it is done, — you have lozQtcpOiiv at once; and so it is 
with every other tense. 

The whole system of forming the tenses from the root, accord- 
ing to this method, is given in a brief space (§ 93); and all its 
modifications, as applied to the different classes of mute, pure, 
and liquid verbs, occupy only about three pages. By forming 
the tenses in this way, the Greek verb will be found a simple, 
regular, and beautiful structure, as all that belongs to the lan- 
guage is. And I hesitate not again to say, after many years 1 
further experience, and after repeated examinations of other the- 
ories, that in my opinion " this method, for beauty, simplicity, and 
philosophical accuracy, greatly surpasses every other system of 
analysis; and that a more minute, familiar, and certain know- 
ledge of the Greek verb can be obtained, with much more e; 
and in a shorter time, by studying it in this way than in any 
other." 



REVISED, EDITION. 

New plates for this work having become necessary, the oppor- 
tunity thus offered has been embraced, to correct such errors and 
inaccuracies as had been observed, — to make such additions and 
improvements as were deemed important, to add to the value and 
- of the work, and to render it still more worthy ^i 
the public favor. In a few instances, the mode of expression has 
been slightly changed, partly to render it more accurate, and 
partly to make the Series of Grammars still more uniform. For 



VI PREFACE. 

this reason, also, a few changes have been made in the arrange- 
ment of the matter ; but none of these are of such a nature or 
extent as to alter the character of the book, or prevent its being 
used in the same class with the former editions. These changes 
are chiefly the following : The general rules for the accents have 
been added to § 5-1, and the special rules for each declension, 
and for verbs, have been transferred from § 209 to their respec- 
tive declensions, &c, in order to be studied in their place ; and 
the rules for contractions, in the first and second declensions, 
have been transferred to these declensions respectively ; so that 
all that belongs to each declension will be found in its proper 
place under that declension. The analysis of the terminations 
of verbs, formerly in the Appendix, has been added to § 91 ; and 
the table of contract verbs, also in the Appendix, has been placed 
after the Paradigm of the Verb, pp. 136, 137. The sections on 
Numerals have been placed before the sections on the Compari- 
son of Adjectives, in accordance with the arrangement in the 
English and the Latin Grammar. And lastly, the section on 
the Analysis of Sentences has been enlarged, and transferred from 
the Appendix to its place immediately after the Syntax. By 
these changes of arrangement, the several articles affected by 
them have been rendered more compact and complete ; and the 
matter belonging to them, being brought together, is less scat- 
tered than before. As a consequence of this, however, the pages 
in this edition do not correspond to those in former editions ; and 
also the section numbers from § 18 to § 41 of the former edition, 
and from § 51 to § 59, have been changed, while the matter in 
each section remains the same as before. In order to obviate any 
difficulty from this cause in the way of reference, a list of these 
sections, indicating the change of number, is given on p. xii. 

Thus have the Grammars belonging to this series, viz., the 
Analytical and Practical Grammar of the English Language, the 
Principles of Latin Grammar, and the Principles of Greek Gram- 
mar, been thoroughly revised, and, it is hoped, greatly improved ; 
greater similarity and uniformity have been effected both in ex- 
pression and arrangement, — the references from one work to 
another, for explanation and comparison, have been greatlv in- 
creased in number, and in all, a running series of numbers, from 
beginning to end, for the convenience of reference, has been in- 
troduced. No labor or expense has been spared to render this 
whole series of elementary books unique, practical, accurate, aud 
comprehensive. Each work, though connected with the others 
as a series, is complete in itself, and being equally remote from 



PREFACE. VU 

a meagre skeleton, or outline, on the one hand, and a diffuse, ex- 
tended treatise on the other, is convenient in size, pleasing to the 

. and carefully adapted to the purposes of instruction. 

The author takes this opportunity of acknowledging grate- 
fully the favor with which his works have been received by 
teachers and others, and begs leave to assure them, that while no 
change will hereafter be made in those now completed, no effort 
will be wanting to render those he may yet publish, worthy of 
their notice. 

New-York, July, 1853. 



HINTS RESPECTING THE METHOD OF STUDYING THIS 
GRAMMAR. 

Those who have had experience in teaching the Greek language, will 
need no instructions from me how to study this, or any other Grammar 
which they may think fit to use; but still a few hints as to the way in 
which it is intended to be used may not be useless to the young teacher, 
or to the student who may be under the necessity of prosecuting his 
studies without a teacher. 

It is by no means intended that the new beginner should study, and 
much less commit to memory, every thing in the book. It is presumed 
that he cones to the study of Greek with some knowledge of the Eng- 
lish and Latin Grammars, and he will therefore throughout meet with 
much with which he is already acquainted, and which will require no 
new labour. In general, definitions and rules printed in large type, to- 
gether with the paradigms of nouns, adjectives, pronouns, and verbs, are 
about all that should be attended to at first, but these should be com- 
mitted ver} T accurately to memory, and repeated so often in daily re- 
visals, as to become easy and familiar. If this is not done, the student's 
progress will be slow and embarrassed at every step, which otherwise 
would be rapid, easy, and pleasant. By youth of ordinary capacity, 
this will generally be effected in the course of six or seven weeks. It 
is then time to begin to read easy sentences, simply with a view to fur- 
nish a praxis on the rules and paradigms previously committed. In this 
exercise, every word should be declined, and every rule belonging to its 
inflection should be repeated, till it can be done not only correctly and 
easily, but almost without an effort. Two or three lines a day will be 
sufficient at first — increasing the quantity* no fa>ter than the pupil is 
able thoroughly to analyze every word. Simultaneously with this, as a 
part of each recitation, the part of the Grammar already committed 
should be reviewed repeatedly, first, in shorter, and then in longer 
portions, till the pupil is able to run over the whole in a recitation of 
fifteen or twenty minutes. All this may be effected in l lie spa -e of 
three or four months. Longer lessons will then be proper, and along 
with this, the study of the Grammar, taking up the more important 
parts of what was omitted before, not to commit to memory, but to 
study them so as to become familiar with them, and be able to refer to 
them at once when they may be needed. By going over the Gram- 



Vlll PREFACE. 

mar two or three times, in this manner, in the course of a year, every 
part will become connected in the mind with the rules to which these 
parts belong, so as to be readily reea led by th-mi. 

There are two or three points to which it is necessary for the pupil 
to pay special attention. First, The Rules of Euphony, § 6. To the eu- 
phony of their language the Greeks paid the greatest attention. In or- 
der to avoid the harsh sound which would be the result of certain con- 
sonants coming together, they often exchanged a consonant in certain 
situations for another of more pleasing sound ; sometimes they changed 
their order, sometimes dropped one of them, or inserted another. To 
this is owing, in part, the apparent irregularity in the flection of nouns 
and verbs, which has led to form so many perplexing rules for cases and 
tenses. The rules of euphony extend, not to the flection of nouns only, 
but to the whole structure of the language — to the composition and 
derivation of words, — and even to the collocation of them in a sen- 
tence. Those principles are few, thoroughly systematized, and very 
eas} T to be comprehended. This part, and, as fundamental to it, the 
fourth section, should be thoroughly mastered before pioceeding to the 
third declension, where these rules will be. needed. 

Another thing requiring special attention, and of almost equal im- 
portance, is, the rules for ctntr action. These should be studied in their 
place after each declension, or they may be omitted till the first re- 
visal. A perfect readiness in the rules of contraction renders a para- 
digm of contract verbs entirely unnecessary. Still, as some may wish 
to have such a paradigm, it i- furnished in §100. 

The last thing to which I would invite special attention, is the mode 
of teaching the Greek verb, which, on account of its numerous changes, 
and these effecred differently in different verbs by the rules of euphony, 
according to the consonants of which it consists, or which concur in the 
course of inflection, has been regarded as so intricate and difficult. First 
of all, it is necessary to ascei tain, in every verb, the root, or stern, which, 
in certain cases, undergoes changes peculiar to itself These, however, 
are few, and under a very few short and plain rules, §§ 82 — 85. On 
these the pupil should be drilled till he can, with perfect readiness and 
certainty, tell the root of any regular verb as soon as the verb is named ; 
and also its second and third forms, when they differ from the first. 
This may be the work of one or two days. To the root is prefixed the 
augment in certain tenses, the rules for which will be found in § 88, 
and require no special notice. The next step is to commit the tables of 
terminations, § 92, very accurately to memory, beginning at the top of 
each column and proceeding down the page; this will be much more 
easily accomplished than to commit the paradigm of the verb, and w.ll 
answer a better purpose. All that then remains is to learn the method 
of forming each tense by annexing the tense-endings, § 93, to the pro- 
per root, according to the rules for mute, pure, and liquid verbs in 
§§94, 96, 97. This is an important exercise, and should he persevered 
in, till the utmost accuracy, ease, and read ness is attained. 

The syntax of the Greek language is a highly important part of the 
subject, and should be diligent 1 }- and carefully studied ; but this may be 
postponed to the second year, as the rules of syntax common to he 
Latin and Greek will be sufficient for the earlier stapes. The subject of 
analysis and translation, at the end of Syntax, deserves special attention. 



INDEX. 



PAGE 

Accents 6 

first declension ... 21 

second declension . . 26 

third declension . . 29 

verbs 97 

Accusative of 3d decl. ... 34 
construction of . 250 
governed by an in- 
transitive verb . 252 

Adjectives, of 52 

of the 1st and 2d 

decl. .... 53 
of the 1st and 3d 

decl 55 

of two terminations 59 
irregular .... 61 
comparison of . 67, 68 
by -iu)v -igto<; 69 
comparison of irre- 
gular .... 70 
defective . . 70 
dialects of .71 
concord of, with a 

substantive . . 206 
other words used as 2( >6 
used adverbially . 268 
obs. on the con- 
cord of . . . 206 
pronouns, construc- 
tion and use of. 210 
words related, con- 
struction of . .221 
Adverbs, signification of . . 186 
formation and deri- 
vation of . . . 188 
comparison of . . . 189 
constructio ^ of . . 267 
Adverbial particles (insepara- 
ble) 190 

Alphabet 1 

Anacolutha 284 

Analysis 294 



PAGE 

Apostrophe 8 

Apposition 205 

Article 51 

dialects of 52 

construction and use of 214 
as a demonstrative pro- 
noun 52, 76 

as a relative and per- 
sonal pronoun 52, 78, 118 

Augment, of 106 

rules for 107 

place of, in compound 

words 109 

observations on . .109 
Auxiliary verbs 95 

Csesural pause 312 

Case, of 19 

Characteristic of the verb, of. 99 

Circumstances, construction of 259 

of cause or origin . 260 

of limitation . . 261 
of cause, manner, 

and instrument . 263 

of place .... 264 

of time .... 265 

of measure . . . 265 
of price . . . .266 

of exclamation . . 266 

Comparative deg., construc- 
tion and use of 209 

Comparison of adjectives . 67, 68 

gen end ruie for . 68 

in -lu)v and -Mrxoq . 69 

irregular. ... 70 

defective. ... 70 

dialects of . . . 71 

government of . . 235 

Conjunctions, of 196 

construction of. 292 

signif. and use of 196 

Consonants, of 4 



INDEX. 



PAGE 

Contractions, of 24 

of the 1st decl. . 25 

of the 2d decl. . 28 

of the 3d decl. . 41 

general rules for 41 

exercises on . . 42 

special rules for . 43 
examples of . 44-47 

Dative plural, 3d decl. of . . 36 
construction of . . . 241 
after substantives . . 241 
governed by adjectives 242 
by verbals in -rot; and 

-Tfoq 243 

by verbs 244 

by impersonal verbs . 248 
Declension, general rules for . 20 

first 21 

second .... 25 
do. Attic form of 27 

third 29 

gen. of. ... 31 
do. of adj. . . 33 
accusative of . 34 
vocative of . . 35 
dative plural of 36 
dialects of . . 38 
genders of . . 39 

Deponent verbs 167 

Dialects of the 1st decl. ... 23 
of the 2d .... 27 
of the 3d. .... 38 
of the article ... 52 
of comparison ... 71 
of the pronoun . . 81 
of the verb .... 144 

of Eifil 162 

Diaeresis 9 

Diastole 9 

Digamma 8 

Diphthongs 2 

Enclitics 6 

Etymology 15 

Euphony, rules of .... 10 

Figures affecting syllables . 9 
Final letters of the active voice 111 
Final letters of the mid. and 

pass, voices Ill 

of verbs in pi. .150 



PAGE 

Gender, of 18 

Genders of the 3d decl. . . 39 

Genitive of do 31 

of adjectives of do. . 33 
obs. on construction 

of 228 

governed by substan- 
tives 229 

by adj. in the 

neut. gender . 231 

by adjectives . 232 

by comp. degree 235 

by verbs ... 236 

Government, of 227 

Imperative mood, syntax of . 276 

Impersonal verbs 168 

construction of . 248 

Indicative, construction of . .274 

Infinitive, construction of . . 280 

as a verbal noun . . 281 

■without a subject .281 

with a subject . . 283 

used absolutely . . 285 



Metre, of. . . . 
Iambic . . 
Trochaic . 
Anaj sestic . 
Dactylic 
Choriambic 
Antispastic 
Ionic a majore 
Ionic a minore 
Pseonic . . . 

Metres compound, of 
tables of . . 

Mood vow^els, of . 

Moods, subjunctive and 
five, construction of 

Mutes 



opt 



. 307 
. 309 
. 309 
. 309 
. 310 
. 310 
. 311 
. 311 
. 312 
. 312 
. 313 
. 314 
. Ill 
a- 
. 276 
. 4 



New present, formation of . 170 

Negatives, of 269 

double .... 270 

Nom. case, construction of . 223 

concord of 225 

Nouns, of 16 

accidents of . . . . 17 

person of 17 

gender of 18 

number of .... 18 



INI. 



1 




PAQ1 


' 


19 


• >rds 






19 








49 






















. . 


:><> 




. . 


19 






ftuii:! I; ;il .... 


99 




. . 


04 






' 


65 


. . 




tab] . . 


C»r» 




299 


ee of . . . . 


99 





11 


0OSAF8T 


1 


]j. . . . 
pf th.- rerb, <>t' .... 




Paradigm of th< 


190 


of finding 




of til.- middle . . 




. . . . 




0/f t ! . . 




third 












m -in . . 


164 


oft!. .... 




Participles, of 








declension of . . . 




. simple and 




the construction <>f . 






Spirit 




for the intiniti 




7 


with 


290 






Avitli 


990 


tioil Mlhl .... 




in th«> case abi 




Syllables 


5 


Particles, eonjnnctire and ad- 




\X 




rbial 190, 


196 


parts of 




signification of . . 


194 


..nil priii- 




i 


16 


Of the verb .... 




indeclinable, of the 


16 










Table of rowel founds . . . 


3 


ih 




* 




. . . 


191 







: 191 







■f . 




table of 


117 


in eompo- 
ion . 




f 




-7 1 


. . 


13 


Prow onal .... 




of mute and j 




. . 


u 


forn 




-t rnction of 








in apposition . 




liquid re* 




definite .... 


71 


ti< ii of 




1 [on of 


210 


of \ 




reflexive .... 






si ... 


















the primitire . 169 




. . 






111 


eon 


218 


table of . . . 


114 






la /<» . 





XII 



INDEX. 



PAGE 

Verbs, of 82 

different kinds of . . . 84 

inflection of 85 

auxiliary 95 

conjugation of .... 98 

analysis of 99 

root of 99 

characteristic of ... 99 

augment of 106 

termination of . . . . Ill 
mute, special rules for . 118 
pure, do. do. . 122 
liquid, do. do. . 125 

contract, of 128 

paradigm of . .136 

dialects of 144 

of the 2d conjugation . 147 
Verbs in /**, tenses of . 150, 160 

root of 149 

final letters 149 

combination of ... 150 
paradigm of . . . .154 

obs. on 158 

irreg. and defective 160, 169 
inflection of . . .161 



Verbs, alphabetical list of . . 

deponent 

impersonal 

of peculiar signification 

concord of 

rules and obs. 
governing the genitive . 

dative 

accus. 

acc.ii: gen. 

aec. <fc dat. 

two accus. 



syntax of . . . 

Voice, of 

active, table of 

obs. on . . 
middle, of . . . 
tenses of . 
table of 
passive, table of . 
middle and passive, 
conj., obs. on 

Vowels, of 

pronunciation of 
Words 



2d 



PAGE 

172 
167 
168 
168 
224 
225 
236 
244 
250 
253 
254 
255 
274 
85 
130 
138 
86 
87 
132 
134 

158 

a 

3 
15 



The following is a list of the Sections whose numbers have 
been altered in the present edition. The first column contains 
the number of the sections in former editions; the second gives 
the number of the same sections in this edition. All the other 
sections are the same as in former editions. 



§18 is 


now T § 20 


§ 30 is now 


§33 


§ 51 is now § 54 


19 


21 


31 


39 


52 55 


20 


23 


32 


40 


53 56 


21 


24 


33 


41 


54 57 


22 


25 


34 


18 


55 58 


23 


26 


35 


19 


56 59 


24 


27 


36 


22 


57 51 


25 


28 


37 


34 


58 52 


26 


29 


3S 


35 


59 53 


27 


30 


39 


36 


60 60 


28 


31 


40 


37 


100 99 


29 


32 


41 


38 


218 100 



T, I J -.VAT LI EHE S DIB A B B 1 IWVIh YVI f )AM B 
/// , Indent OnrJ,- MS S. &Editwns. 



a, 
f 



r> 

1 

4/. 

<-# 



%(, ( 

opS- 



at, 

CIV, 

area, 

Y"?< 
yev, 

i 9 . 

SV, 

iy 

£vt€V, 
C<fT( , 



///, 



V*> 



K/, 0, ^ ci t , 

^y s KOTO , 






/"/ V > 
lUOV* 

oi\ O /', 



CT2, rrr -> eta O, 



■r,r<)a 






■ton 

Too, 
for*), 

r- 

r- 
?°- 

<fCL , 



(/"■ 

f 
(T? 

O 35, ^ 

on, 

s: 

%• 

J*. 

o.Y,, 

,r. 



rfn vf<z 

cr ?, 

Trt f , 

ta Z$ t 

TO, 

TO )\ 

ro v, 

TOl'S t 

) 

f o o, 

rrr>, 

VI , 
V \\ 

r.Tr 
r.7o 



','■ 






GREEK GRAMMAR. 



PART I. 

ORTHOGRAPHY. 

1. — Orthography treats of letters, and the mode 

of combining them into syllables and words. 

2. — A letter is a mark or character used to represent an ele- 
mentary sound of the human voice. The Greek alphabet con- 
sists of twenty-four letters, namely : 



FORM. 


FAME. 




POWER. 




A a 


Alpha 


a 


in 


father 


B $ 


Beta 


b 


in 


bee 


r yt* 


Gamma 


9 


in 


9° 


A d 


Delta 


cl 


in 


did 


E s 


Epsilon 


e 


in 


met 


z I 


Zeta zz ( 


= dz) 


in 


Nebuchadnezzar 


H n 


Eta 


ey 


in 


they 


& 


Theta 


th 


in 


thick 


I I 


Iota 


i 


in 


pin 


K y. 


Kappa 


h 


or ( 


7 hard, kin, care 


A I 


Lambda 


i 


in 


lay, eel 


M ft 


Mu 


m 


in 


madam 


.V v 


JSTu 


n 


in 


nun 


s-t 


Xi 


X 


in 


fox 


O o 


Omihron 





in 


tyro, not 


n n 


Pi 


P 


in 


pea 


P Q 


Rho 


r 


in 


row 


2 a, final g 


Sigma 


s 


in 


sun, us 


T t 7 


Tan 


t 


in 


tea, not 


r v 


Upsilon 


u 


in 


brute 


* q> 


Phi 


ph 


in 


philo 


*X 


Chi 


ch 


in 


buck (German) 


W if) 


Psi 


ps 


in 


lips 


fi O) 


Omega 





in 


no, tone 



* The letter y before x, y, /, or £, is sounded like ncj in sing , 
thus, ciyytloq, ayy.u'yv, pronounced cuicf-clos, ang-kon. 

1 



2 VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS. §1,2. 

The letters in the Greek alphabet are either Voircls or Con- 
sonants. 



3.— § 1. VOWELS. 

1. A vowel is a letter which represents a simple inarticulate 
BOUnd, alld, in a Word Or syllable, may be sounded alone. The 

ran; viz., 

Two short, f, o. 

Two long, /;, ca. 

Three doubtful, «, c, v. 

2. ^, /, r, are called doubtful, because they are sometimes 
short, and sometimes long. Thus, 

a in ttcct^o, is always short. 

a in lao*', is always long. 

a in %QTi$> may be either long or short. 

3. There are but five distinct vowel sounds in the Greek lan- 
guage, viz., «, e, i, o, v. The /;, and go, are used to express the 
lengthened sound of e and o. The vowel sounds then may be 
thus expressed : 

Short, £, o, a, i, v. 
Long, ?j, co f a, I, v. 



4.— § 2. DIPHTHONGS. 

1. The union of two vowels in one sound is called a diph- 
thong. Diphthongs are of two kinds, proper and improper. 

Xote 1. The first vowel of a diphthong in Greek, is called the pre- 
positive vowel ; and the second, the subjunctive vowel. 

2. A Proper Diphthong is one in which both the vowels are 
sounded. In Greek, the proper diphthongs are six ; and are 
formed from a, s, o, with /. or v subjoined : thus, 

From a are formed cu and av. 
From e are formed ti and tv. 
From o are formed oi and ov. 

3. An Improper Diphthong is one in which only one of the 

sounded. The improper diphthongs in Greek are also 

\ iz.. aty //, ok, commonly written r/, ;„ oi, in which the first 

I only is sounded ; and yv, ow, vi, in which the last vowel 

chiefly is sounded, slightly modified, however, by an imperfect 

sound of the first Th< ■ might very properly be classed 

as proper diphthoi] 



I ;;. 3 



I HE PR D MI'H- 

III 
5—- 















•f natural 










Um dog; froa 






• lx? aimed 


At — ftl 










m K 




• 












edly In 














' 




' 


■ 










1 \! 


lowing 














I 






!ik. 






as 








lik 


in ! 




M 








like e 






■j 










in t! 




M 






/, 


lik 


in tin 




a> 








lik. 


in i 




as 








like o 


in ' 




:i- 


• 


j , >\\ r 




like o 






as 








lik- 






as 








like u 






as 














as 


• 












as 








lik. 






as 














as 








lik* 






as 














as 














as 


M/mi; I 








in 1. 




as 
















: 



4 CONSONANTS. § 4. 

8 ._§ 4. CONSONANTS. 

1. A consonant is a letter which represents an articulate 
sound, and, in a word or syllable, is never sounded alone, but 
always in connection with a vowel or diphthong. 

Consonants are divided into mutes, semi- vowels, and double 
consonants. 

2. The mutes are nine, and are divided into three classes, ac- 
cording to their strength ; viz., 

Smooth, n, '/., r. 
Middle, |J, y, d. 

Aspirate, (jp, %, #. 

3. By strength is meant the force of voice, or of breathing re- 
quisite in pronouncing, which is different in each of the classes 
specified, — the smooth mutes requiring the least ; the aspirates, 
the greatest ; and the middle, a degree of force intermediate be- 
tween the other two. 

4. Each smooth mute has its own middle and its own aspi- 
rate ; and these three are called mutes of the same sound, or of 
the same order, because they are pronounced by the same organ ; 
thus, 

JT-Hiutes, or labials, it, [$, qp. 
2£- mutes, or palatals, •/., y, %. 
T-mutes, or dentals, r, 8, &. 

Obs. In mutes of the same sound, one is frequently changed 
for another. 

5. The semi-vowels are five, 1, [i, v, q, g. Of these )., //, r, q, 
are called liquids, because they readily unite with, or flow into, 
the sound of other consonants. 

6. The double consonants are three, ip, £, J. They are formed 
from the three orders of mutes with g ; thus, 

tz, |J, qp, ) ( xp, ) C ps. 

x > Y> /> f ^ith g makes -j £, > equivalent to < x. 

*, a, &, ) ( I ) ( z. 

7. In the declension of nouns and verbs, when a sr-mute, or a 
x-mute, would be followed by g, the double consonant \p or £ is 
substituted for the two ; thus, instead of stoafio'i or Tzlsxam, must 
be written jiqafyiy 7t)J£cq, &c But a z-mute, coming before g, 
must be rejected ; thus, for dvvzaco must be written urvoco. ifec. 



44-8?} 



§5. SYLLABLES. 6 

8. In lit r a doubl may be resolwd 

the mute fn.ni which it la formed, and ?; thus, 

i" ma] I 'I int.. .7- (fg. 

ini. 
j into rg, 

This is done when, in the declension of noons and verba, it 
becomes nee* urate the g from the mute with irbiofa it 

>mbined; thus, hu/.tu", by dropping the >• I laXXam] 

y.onc.'S becomes xoqccx] and so of other combinati 



§ 5. SYLLABLES. 

9. — A syllable is a distinct sound forming the whole of a 
word, or so much of it as can be sounded at once. 

Every word lias as many syllables as it has distinct v 
sounds. 

A word of one syllable is called a Monosyllable. 

A word of two syllables is called a Dissyllable. 

A word of three syllables is called a Trisxyllable. 

A word of many syllables is called a Polysyllable. 

10. — In a word of many syllables, the last i- called the final 
syllable; the one next the last is called the penult, and the sylla- 
ble preceding that, is called the antepenult. 

To syllables belong certain marks and characters : these are — 

1. ACCENTS. 

11. — The accents in Greek are three; viz., the 
acute ('), the grave ( x ), and the circumflex (*). 

12 — Accents are supposed to have been used to indicate the tone of 
the accented syllable — the acute being used to mark an (/nation of 
tone, the grave a depression, and the circumflex, the union of both. 

GENERAL RULES. 

13. — In diphthongs the accent stands always on the subjunctive 
vowel; as, ja'i^w, tovto; but on the prepositive of the diph- 
thongs ■> : as, jjMtqg = flh/g, 

14. — The acute accent may stand on any one of the thre 
syllables of a word ; but on the antepenult, only when the final 
syllable is short. 

15. — The grave is understood on all syllables not accented with 
an acute or eiivumtlex. The grave accent is used on the final 



6 SYLLABLES. § 5. 

syllable of a word when followed by another word with which it 
stands in connection ; as, avzbg eXeye ; but when the word stands 
alone, or not connected with words following it, the acute is used ; 
as, avzog, — xbv avzov. 

16. — The circumflex can stand only on a long syllable, and 
that must be one of the two last ; and it can stand on the penult, 
only when the final syllable is short. 

17. — An accented penult, if long, and followed by a short sylla- 
ble, must have the circumflex ; but if the final syllable be long, 
the accent on the penult must be acute ; as, xovzo, rovzcp, ovrog, 
avzrj. 

18.—]Vote. The diphthongs at, and o* final, syllables long only by 
position, and the Attic wc; instead of oc;, are considered short in accen- 
tuation ; but the optative terminations ou and cu, and o& in the adverb 
ol'xot, are long. 

19 — In words declined by cases, except participles, the accentua- 
tion of the nominative can be ascertained only by consulting a good 
lexicon. That being ascertained, the accentuation of the oblique cases 
may be found by the rules of accent under each declension. These 
rules apply generally to adjectives and participles of the same declen- 
sion. 

ENCLITICS. 

20. — Certain words of one or two syllables, when used in dis- 
course, throw back their accent on the preceding word, if in con- 
nection with it, and stand themselves without an accent. Such 
words are called enclitics. 

21. — The enclitics commonly in use are the following ; viz., 
1. The present indicative of the verbs sipi and cpqfii in all the 
numbers and persons except the second person singular. 2. 
The indefinite rig, ti, in all its cases and numbers. 3. The pro- 
nouns [iov, [iol, [ii — gov, goi, as — ov, oi, s — \xiv, viv, and most 
of those beginning with 6<$. 4. The adverbs ncog, tii], noi, nov, 
nofti, TTO&tv, Tiors, not interrogative, and, 5. The particles, 
Ttco, rt, rot, &fjv ye, xlv or yJ, vvv or vv, mo, od, and ds insep- 
arable, as in ode. 

22. — When a word with an acute accent on the antepenult, or 
a circumflex on the penult, is followed by an enclitic, it takes an 
acute on the final syllable, as the accent of the enclitic ; as, eltys 
[loi,, dooQOv iaziv, aco[id [iov. 

23. — But if the preceding word have an acute accent on the 
penult, the enclitic of one syllable loses its accent, while the en- 
clitic of two syllables retains it ; as, loyog [iov, — Xoyog rwog, — 
Xoyog egtiv. 



§5. VLLABLi: 7 

-When tli.« preceding word has anj accent on the final 
syllable, the enclitic following, whether 

fog ,'/-(-; <i; , /'</••' .toj 'c<-,Tii y - 

-When several enclii rion, the first 

having Lost, or thrown back its accent on the preceding word, 
tin- second throws its accent always as an acute on the first, and 
the third on the Becond, A-*-., till tin* last only is without an 
cent ; as, utig runt tpt/ci u& noQUPOL 

-The enclitic retains its accent when it stands alone, • 
the beginning of a dan-'' or Bentena — when the final vowel erf 
the preceding word has been cut off by apostrophe — or when the 
encbtic word is emphatic 

ACCENTS IN CONTRACTIO 

27. — In a concourse of vowels, if two syllables are conw 
into one, it is called a contraction. 

28.--— If the first concurrent vowel has the acute accent, it is 
changed into a circumflex on the contracted syllable; as, qi/Jco, 

29. — If the first concurrent vowel has not the acute accent, 
the contracted sjdlable has not the circumflex ; as, ytfBog, ffrovg. 

2. SPIRITUS OR BREATHINGS. 

30. — The Spiritus, or breathings, are two ; the spirit"* asjxr, 
or rough breathing, marked ( c ) ; and the spiritus lads, or 
breathing, marked ('). 

31. — The spiritus asper has the force of the Latin II; thus, 
una is pronounced llama. 

Note. Anciently H was the mark for the aspirate, in Greek, as il is 
in Latin ; thus, t/.urov was written HEKATON. 

32. — The spiritus lenis only indicates that the spiritus < 
is not to be used. These marks are used as follows: 

1st. A vowel or diphthong, beginning a word, has alwaya a 
spiritus. fn the diphthong, it is placed over the second <•<>,< 
as, aua, eyci, hW, ovrog ; but over the first in the diphtl 
ft ':>• 

2d. Initial v has always the spiritus asper; as, irro, pronounced 
h upo. 

Initial n has always the spiritus asper; as, 

nounced rhetor ; o not initial, if single, has no spiritus; if double, 



8 SYLLABLES. § 5. 

the first has the spiritus lenis, and the second has the spiritus 
asper ; as, ttoqcq, pronounced poro ; tzoqqgo, pronounced porrlio. 

3. THE JEOLIC DIGAMMA. 

33. — The JEolic dialect, the most ancient form of the Greek 
language, had no spiritus asper, and it is seldom used in the 
Ionic. The want of it, in the former, was compensated, in all 
words beginning with a vowel, by a species of aspirate, now 

Called THE ^EOLIC DIGAMMA. , 

34. — This was originally a full and strong consonant having 
the sound of the Latin F or V. It was called digamma, because 
its form (f) was that of a double f. It is thought to have been 
used by the ancients before words beginning with a vowel, and 
between two vowels, which, by its disuse at a later period, came 
together without forming a diphthong ; thus, ohog, eao, i'g, org, 
atoov, aoQvog, coov, and the like, were written or pronounced as 
if written, Foivog, Fmo, Fig, oFig, cuFcov, aFoovog, caFov, &c, 
from which the Latin vinum, ver, vis, ovis, cevum, avernus, ovum, 
&c, were evidently derived before the digamma disappeared. 
Between two vowels, it was at length softened down, and even 
with the JEolians passed into v. Thus we have avf;o, avcog, for 
the common aqo, ?)cog. This accounts for the form of some 
words in the Attic and common dialects, in which the digamma, 
softened into v, still remains, especially where followed by a con- 
sonant. Thus the ancient %irw passed into /£^co, and lastly into 
%e'(x), which still retains in the future xevaca, the softened form 
of the ancient ^sraco. So y.Xcaco, Attic xlaco, has in the future 
xhawco. In like manner vdeg, the plural of vavg, still retains in 
the dative vavai, the softened form of the ancient vafau 

35. — 4. The Apostrophe (') is written over the place of a short 
vowel which has been cut off from the end of a word ; as, akV 
iyco, for akla iyoo. This is done when the following word begins 
with a vowel, and in compounds, when the first part ends, and 
the last begins, with a vowel; 43-3, 1st. Sometimes the diph- 
thongs are elided by the poets ; as, fiovlop' iyco for ^ovXofxai 
iyco ; and sometimes, after a long syllable, the jnitial vow r el is cut 
off from the following word ; as, co 'ya&t for co aya&L 

36. — Exc, Instead of the apostrophe, or cutting off the final 
vowel, the concurring vowels are sometimes contracted ; as, 
nqovoyov, for nqo sgyov ; xax, for xcu va. 

37 — Note. The union, or contraction of such words, is indicated by 
the spiritus being placed over the vowel, at the place of junction, as in 
the preceding examples. 



§6. SYLLABUB. 9 

of a compound word, to distinguish it from another 

ing : as, ro,r, ■ , and this, to d 

row, th \ to distinguish it from me- 

times they are written apart, without th<* comma; thus.co zt> 

77. 

<;. The | is placed over a rowel, to show 

that it does nol form a diphthong with the rowel which ; 

tild, prou 

40. — 7. The figures affecting syllables 

is the prefixing of one or more letfc 

: a word ; as, (JfUXQOg, for (WtQOg] ttr/.oci 

tc/.oai. 
2d. Paragogt is the adding of one or i to the end 

of a word; as, ijo&a, for /]>* ; toigi, for rofc 
3d. Epenthesis is the insertion of one or more letters in the 

body of a word; as, &la(k 7 for SUk^i ; onnote^og s for 

4th. Syncope, is the taking away of one or more letters from 

the body of a word ; as, tjX&or, for ip.vOoy ; tvnuu/j: for 

tvo/ { Guu- t r. 
5 tli. Aphceresis is the cutting off of one or more letters 

the beginning of a word ; as, or toon i r for aaztoont] ; 

6(>z7y for iooT/' r 
6 th. Apocope is the cutting off of one or more letters from 

the end of a word ; as, £a3, for 8c5/^a ; TIoGtidu), for //o- 

Gudcjra. 
7th. Tmesis is a separating of the parts, in a compound word. 

by an intervening term ; as, iwr*^ ni <i */ t/r > for WW£- 

egct* rtro. 
8th. Metathesis is the transposition of letters and sylla 

as, MQa&oVy for txuoOvv; sdQaxor, for tduoxor; xagTog t 

for xQorog. 
41. — Ofo. The Tonians, by a s] sis, change the 

athing in a word; as, x/t>cor, for yiTcor: ir&ctvia, for inotvOvu 



§6. EUPHONY. 

—In combining letters int s, the Greeks paid the 

attention to Euphony, or agreeableness of sound. This 
principle, indeed, pervades the whole structure of the langun 
From a regard to this, they carefully avoided every ooncum 

1* 



1 ) EUPHONY. § 6. 

of consonants not easily pronounced together. The means by 
which this is effected may be summed up in the following — 

43. — RULES OF EUPHONY. 

(It is of great importance for the student to be very familiar with 
the following rules, and expert in applying them, before he enters on 
the 3d declension, as they are then required in almost every step. To 
aid him in this, a table of exercises is subjoined, in which he should 
practise, till he can correct the orthography, and give the rule with the 
greatest ease and readiness.) 

1. Words ending in ol, and verbs of the third 
person in t and c y add v to the termination before 
a vowel, or before a pause ; as, 

nd(7iv etrtev iy.aTroig, for nasi tins iy.etvoig; also the word 
er/.oai (twenty), and the adverbs 718qvgi> narrdnaoi, roacfi, 
TtQoa&a, omofts, y.s and vv. This was called by grammarians v 
icptXy.v6Tiy.6v, because, by preventing the hiatus between two 
vowels, it, as it were, drew the second vowel to the first. Among 
the poets, it is sometimes added to these terminations before a 
consonant, when it is necessary to render a final syllable long ; 
and sometimes, by the Attic prose writers, to give energy to the 
tone. 

Sometimes g is added, on the same principle ; thus, ovico be- 
comes ovzcog. Also the particle ov is changed into ovx before a 
vowel, and into ov% before an aspirated vowel. 

2. When two mutes of a different sound come 
together, they must be of the same strength* i. e. 
they must be both smooth, or both middle, or both 
aspirate / as, t7ira, afidtkov, a/doz. 

If, by derivation or declension, two mutes of different strength 
would come together, the former must take the class of the latter ; 
thus, the terminations rog, d)-r, fteig, with yodqco, the co being 
omitted, form yganzog, yQafidip, yoaqdttg; and of two mutes 
already combined, one cannot be changed without a correspond- 
ing change in the other. Thus in snzd and oxrco, if the r be 
changed into d, the n must be changed into ^, and the y. into y ; 
as, snru, tfidopog ; oxzco, oydoog. 

3. A smooth mute in the end of a word is 
changed into its own aspirate before an aspirated 
vowel. This is done, — 



§6. K( I'HoXY. 11 

1st. In the composition of words; thus, from hi (for inl) and 
fjuiqa t comes ityi'in&Qi from tfira, by apostrophe, 

^tt-', and ijfiega, comes kf0^iuqog\ from xf.m and irdw, 
xa&evdco, <\ 

2d. When words stand together in a sentence: thus, 
rW>, xorfP /]/««>, Ap 1 ov, <ka, for itt} ! t uir, xara 9/taft 

or. 
3d. When words arc united by contraction ; thus, to luunov 
united become (hxuuTtor; to moor, Ihtrtnor, &c. 

Obs. 1. The middle nmtc 9 is never changed before an aspi- 
rated vowel ; as, o'c/.ab" Ixtad'ui ; and and y, only before <<:, and 
tiv in forming the perfect and the pluperfect active, 218, Ob.-. 2. 
— The x in ex is never aspirated. 

4. When two successive syllables would begin 
with an aspirate, the first is changed into its own 
smooth; and the spirit u-s asper, into the spiritus 
lends ; thus, 

Tlecfilijy.a, not cpecpihjxa ; #(>/£, Gen. ?Qr/6g, not ftQr/og ; so 
from the root #(?£/, the verb is TQr/w, not i^Qtjco ; from #o£<r, 
TQt'opco, not flQt'qpco ; from qj, f/co, not ^oo. (See below, O&s. 
3.) In like manner from {racp, the root of &u7Ztco (R. 2.), is de- 
rived Tctyog, &c. 

Exceptions. To this rule there are five excep- 
tions; viz., 

Exc. 1. Compound words generally; as, OQVi&odJjQag, Hpvqrij. 

Exc. 2. f/> or % before i) ; as, quOi, yvd^nu. 

Exc. 3. When one of the aspirates is joined with another 
consonant; as, OiccfOtu, UTTtcfOiOov, TtvdlG'&cu. But the rule 
holds when q follows the first aspirate, as above in TQbyto, not 

\TQ8)[C0. 

Exc. 4. If the second aspirate has been occasioned by a spiri- 
tus asper following it ; as, tOij" 6 urdoco7roj, for t{rt;x\ by apo- 
cope for l&rjxs; ntcpzv/a for mcftvy-u; and so of oth< 

Exc. 5. When the second aspirate belongs to the adverbial 
terminations Oti> or 0i ; as, TrarTic/o&zr, KoQivftofti. 

Obs. 2. Of three aspirates beginning successive syllables, it is 
usual to change only the first ; as. red'dqiatou for fttiruyuTcu. 
In sonic cases, however, the second also is changed ; as, rt'ru- 
qu, T8TQ0<pa, for ftt'Oacfa, OtOoocfu. 

Obs. 3. When the first of two aspirates is the spiritus a 



12 EUPHONY. §6. 

it is changed only before % ; thus, 6&ev, o&i, ^cpa, &c., preserve 
the spiritus asper before the aspirates # and cp ; but 8%co must be 
changed into iyco. 

Obs. 4. When the second aspirate is lost by inflection or 
otherwise, the first is resumed ; thus, ayco, fut. Sco ; tQ8'/co, 
&q8£cq ; TQttyG), -&Q8\pco ; and the derivatives ^Qmiog, &Q87Z- 
twog, &c. 

Obs. 5. The second of two aspirates is seldom changed. It 
is always done, however, in imperatives in &i ; as, Ti&ari, ivy- 
&}]ri ; for ri&ed'i, tvcpd'rjd^i. 

Obs. 6. A mute may be doubled, but if it be an aspirate, the 
first is changed into its own smooth ; as, Jixftig, not Aft&ig ; 
Baxyog, not Bayyog ; Mat&cuog, not Ma&ftalog ; Zanyco, not 
2Jaq)Cpc6. 

5. Initial q is doubled when a short vowel is 
prefixed ; as, 

e Pi7trco, 'iq^inrov ; aQQSTt/jg, from a and qs7T(o ; TTSQioooog, 
from TteQi and qsco. 

4:4:. 1. THE MUTES BEFORE 2. 

6. A ;r-inute before a> unites with, it and forms 
yj ; as, Xt'inco, XziTiaco, written Xeiifjco. 

7. A #-mute before a, unites with it and forms 
£ ; as, t)xg), rjxaco, written rjgoy. 

Exc. But i x never changes x before a ; as IxaraXXco. 

8. A r-mute before a, is rejected ; thus, 

ccofiutGi, adacoy oQn&Gi 
written Goo^aGi ccgco oqtigi. 

45. II. THE MUTES BEFORE ?J. 

9. A ,T-mute before /u, is changed into ju ; thus, 

tSTVTZflCK, T8TQlfi[.lCU, y^'QaCfj-lCUy 

written retv^iMu, rt'iQififiai, ysyQccfipca. 
Exc. But after a liquid, a ;r-mute before \i is rejected ; as, 
7Z87T8{i[iai, for n87t8\mpai : — ri&aXficu, for raW.rr^ca. 

10. A #-mute before ft is changed into y ; thus, 

TtSTtXsXfMUi ^8^Q8yjlCil, 

written 7zm%Ey[ica, fitpQsyfiou. 
Hence y before p, remains unchanged ; as, faleyftca. 



§6. EUPHONY. 13 

11. A r-mute before u, is changed into a; thus, 

i^vtiuu, hQ&dficUf TTiTrei&ficu, 
written ijpvancu, 7 t oHGitut, nin&a\uxjL 
Obs. 7. To these rules, there are some exceptions in substan- 
tive tonus, as, dxfi/j, not dynq ; notfiog, not noapog. 

4G. III. CHANCKS OF THE LETTER ]\ r . 

12. N, before a ;r-mute, or ifj, is changed into 
ju ; thus, 

hvndvco, Xavfiavco, ivcpvg, tvipvyog, 
written Xijindvco, Xapfidvco, ipyvg, Sfxxpvyog. 

13. iV, before a ar- urate, or £ is changed into 7 ; 
thus, 

evxeificu, qivvydvco, zvvydvco, TtldrlEcQ, 
written tyxeificu, qivyydvco, tvyydvco, nldy^co. 

14. N, before a r- urate, remains unaltered ; as, 

iviog, Gvvdeco. 

15. N, before another liquid, is changed into 
the same ; thus, 

h>{itv(a, cvvXafifidvco, avrod7tT03, 
written ^fxevco, avlXajj^dvco, ovooaTirco. 

16. N, before o or £ is usually rejected ; thus, 

daifjtovciy avvQvhg, — written datixoot, ov£ev£ig. 
Obs. 8. TV is retained before g only in a few words ; as, 
TiQvrg, tXptvg, ntcpavGcu. Before g followed by a vowel, r in gvv 
is changed into a ; thus, gvgg8vco, gigguiu, for gvvgevgj, gvioizuc. 
*Ev retains v before q, g, £. 

47. IV. OF THE LETTER 2. 

17. 4 n the inflection of the passive voice, when 
a would stand between two consonants, it is re- 
jected; thus, 

).t).£l7T-G&m', ZSTQlB-G&CU, )^).y/-Gi>COGl(y. 

without g, ).t?M7t-0cov f T8TQiB-&cu, hh'y-Ocoaav. 
by rule 2, XeXuqy&ow, itTQiyd-cu, Xth'/lnoGcv. 
And so from ?)yy?).G&ca, Ijytl&ai ; from nikpavG&ov, rtdq 
&ov, or TitcpUGQuv. 



14 



PUNCTUATION. 



§7. 



Obs. 9. But when the first consonant is a r-mute, it is re- 
jected, and a remains (Rule 8), thus : 

8GX8vad-G&8 f 7T87i8i&-G&s. 
become iaxevaa&s, 7i87i8iG\r8. 

18. When both v and a r-mute together, are 
cast out before a, 8 preceding it is changed into 
siy o into ov, and a doubtful vowel is lengthened ; 
but 7] and co remain unchanged ; thus, 

Tvyfts'vTGi becomes rvcp&8iGi ; rv\pavtGi becomes rvxpdGi ; 
GTT&pdGco G7Z8igco ; ylyavtGi yiydGi ; 

X80VTGI X80VGI ; dsiXVVVTGl 0817.VVGU 

Obs. 10. In some instances, and perhaps always in the nomi- 
native, this alteration takes place when v only has been rejected ; 
thus, from evg, raldvg, [isldvg, come eig, vaXdg, pUdg. 

19. When two consonants meet, which are not 
easily pronounced together, the pronunciation is 
sometimes relieved by transposing them, or by in- 
serting a third consonant between them ; thus, 

87iaQ&ov by metathesis (40-8th) 'inQct&ov. 
av8Qog y by syncope dvQog, by inserting d (40-3d) dvdQog. 

48. — Table of words to be corrected according 
to the foregoing rules : 

(Let the pupil always give the rule for the correction.) 



ekme ov 

OpCiGl 8X 

sXeys ovg 

81718 
TtCUGL 
tlGL 
TOGtyl 

rvndco 
&dq)TCQ 



<$8tyaxa 
&8&eixa 

ayG8i 

TzkeXGOD 

aqiGcu 

7t8ldGCO 
aVVTGOV 



GVV7T)Jx0d 

ivfiairco 
Gvvq)8Q(a 
8v\pv%og 

h%8ig 
Mftig 



1817TGCO 

Gvvyovog 

iv%8(A) 

GVV&'CO 

8vX8l7lCO 

GVVfA.8V(x) 

GWQ8CO 

Gvvhjxptg 

t8TV7lG&CU 



h'jfiGCQ 
i7TQCiy&)]V 

ipBdlXa 

TV7Z70V7GI 

rvnftivxGi 
rnvxTGOticu 
Xtortai 

IGiaVTGl 

y.Qvfirco 



§ 7. PUNCTUATION. 

49. — The marks of punctuation in Greek are, the 
comma (,) ; the colon and semi-colon (•) ; the pe- 
riod (.) ; and mark of interrogation (;). 



§ 8. WORDS. 15 



PAET II. 



ETYMOLOGY. 

50. — Etymology treats of the different sorts of 
words, their various modifications, and their deri- 
vations. 

§ 8. WORDS. 

51. — Wokds are certain articulate sounds used 
by common consent as signs of our ideas. 

1. In respect of Formation, words are either 
Primitive or Derivative / Simple or Compound. 

A Primitive word is one that comes from no other ; as, ncug y 
dyaxrog. 

A Derivative word is one that is derived from another word ; 
as, ncudeia, dya&ozng ; from ncug t dya&og. 

A Simple word is one that is not combined with any other 
word ; as, ftdD.co. 

A Compound word is one that is made up of two or more 
simple words ; as, ixfidlXco, from ix and fidV.co. 

2. In respect of Form, words are either De- 
clinable or Indeclinable. 

A Declinable word is one which undergoes certain changes of 
form or termination, to express the different relations of gender, 
number, case, person, &c, — in grammar, usually termed Acci- 
dents. 

Obs. 1. In every declinable word, there are at least two parts, 
the root or stem, and the termination. The root remains un- 
changed, except by euphony, in all the different forms which the 
word assumes. The termination is added to the root, and is 
varied, to produce these different forms. 

Obs. 2. The variation of nouns, adjectives, pronouns, and par- 
ticiples, is called Declension ; that of verbs, Conjugation or Inflec- 
tion. 

An Indeclinable word is one that undergoes no change oi' ter- 
mination. 



16 PARTS OF SPEECH. — THE NOUN. § 9, 10. 

3. In respect of Signification and Use, words 
are divided into different classes, called Parts of 
Speech. 



§ 9. PARTS OF SPEECH. 

52. — The Parts of Speech in the Greek lan- 
guage are eight ; viz., 

1, Noun or Substantive, Article, Adjective, 
Pronoun, Verb, declined. 

2. Adverb, Preposition, Conjunction, unde- 
clined. 

Note. Any part of speech used simply as a word, and spoken of, is 
regarded as a noun ; thus, *Eyw is a dissyllable ; ttok; is an adverb ; i. e. 
the word iyii), the word 7rok, written in Greek to £yo'), to Tzwq. — Thus 
used it is indeclinable. 

Obs. 1. The participle, regarded by some as a distinct part of 
speech, properly belongs to, and forms a part of, the verb. 

Obs. 2. In Greek, the interjections are considered, by most 
Grammarians, as adverbs. 



§ 10. THE NOUN. 

53. — A Nouk is the name of any person, place, 
or thing. 

Nouns are of two kinds, Proper and Common. 

1. A Proper Noun is the name applied to an 
individual only; as, c O/nrjQog, Id&ijvai] Homer, 
Athens. 

Among these may be included, 

1st. Patronymics, or those which express one's parentage, or 
family; as, FlQMZfudqg. the son of Priam. 

2d. Gentile, or Patrial, which denote one's country ; as, 
*A&qvcu6g f an Athenian. 

2. A Common Noun is a name applied to all 
things of the same sort ; as, avt'iq, a man ; oixoz, 
a house ; fiifiXog, a book. 



§11. ACCIDENTS OF THE NOUN. 17 

54. — ruder this class may be ranged, 
l>t. Colleetiv . or nouns <>f multitude, whid 

many in the singular number; as, ilaeff, people. 

2d, Abstract noune, or the names of dualities; i '"^vs 

r/oor/// 

3d. Diminutives^ or nouns which express a diminution in the 
signification of the nouns from which they are formed; as, nai- 
di'uy, a little bot/j from 71CUQ. 

4th. Amplified'' re nouns, or those which denote an inci 
in the signification of the nouns from which they are formed ; 

y.tqi'dcor, a person who has a large head ; from xecpaXr/. 

. A proper noun is the name of an individual only, and is used 
to distinguish that individual from all others of the same class. A 
common noun is the name of a class of objects, and is equally applicable 
to all the individuals contained in that class. 



§11. ACCIDENTS OF THE NOUX. 

55. — To Greek nouns belong Person, Gender, 
Number, and Case. 

1. PERSON. 

56. — Person, in grammar, is the distinction of 
nouns as used in discourse, to denote the speaker, 
the person or thing addressed, or the person or 
thing spoken of. Hence, 

57. — There are three persons, called the First, 
Second, and Third. 

A noun is in the first person, when it denotes the speaker or 
writer; as, Iy/oj UctvXoQ tyouii'a, " I Paul have written it." 

A noun is in the second person, when it denotes the person or 
tiling addressed ; as, Maivn, llicv/.e, " Paul, thou art beside thv- 
seir 

A noun is in the third person, when it denotes the person or 
thing spoken of; as, '0 TlavXog §qnj s "Paul said." 

lias nothing to do either with the form of a noun, or 
with its meaning; but simply with the manner in which it is oc 
Hence, the same noun may at one time he in the first person; at 
another, in the second; and at another, in the third, as in the preced- 
ing ezamp 



18 ACCIDENTS OF THE NOUN". §11. 

2. GENDER. 

58. — Gender means the distinction of nouns 
with regard to sex. There are three genders, 
Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter. 

Of some nouns, the gender is determined by their significa- 
tion ; — of others, by their termination. 

The Masculine gender belongs to all nouns which denote the 
male sex. 

The Feminine gender belongs to all nouns which denote the 
female sex. 

The Neuter gender belongs to all nouns which are neither 
masculine nor feminine. Also to any term used simply as a 
word ; as, to nag, 52, Note. 

Nouns which denote both males and females are said to be 
of the Common gender, i. e. they are both masculine and femi- 
nine. 

The gender of nouns not determined by their signification, is 
usually to be ascertained by their termination, as will be noticed 
under each declension. 

Obs. 1. In Greek lexicons and grammars, the gender is indi- 
cated by the article ; viz., 6 indicates the masculine, //, the femi- 
nine, and to, the neuter ; as, 6 avijQ, the man ; ?} yvv)), the wo- 
man ; to £ooov, the animal. 

3. NUMBER. 

59. — Number is that property of a noun by 
which it expresses one or more than one. 

Greek nouns have three numbers, the Singular, 
Dual, and Plural. The Singular denotes one; 
the Plural more than one. 

The Dual denotes two, and is most commonly used in speak- 
ing of those things which are produced, or are usually spoken of, 
in pairs. 

Obs. 2. In the oldest state of the Greek language, the dual is 
not used. It is not found in the iEolie dialect — in the New 
Testament — in the Septuagint, — nor in the Fathers. It is most 
common in the Attic dialect, in which, however, the plural is 
often used instead of it. 



§ 12. DECLENSION. 19 

4. CASE. 

(')(). — Case La the state or condition of a noun 
with respect to the other words in a sentence. 

61. — Greek nouns have five cases; viz., the 
Nominative^ Genitive, Dative, Acoasatwe, and 

Vocative. 

1st. The Nominative case, for the most part, denotes the 
name of an object simply, or as that of which something is 
affirmed. 

2<L The Genitive connects with the name of an object, the 
idea of separation, origin, possession. 

3d. The Dative represents the thing named as that to which 
something is added, or to or for which something is said or done. 

4th. The Accusative represents the thing named, as aff- 
or acted upon by something else, and also, as the object to which 
something tends or relates. 

5th. The Vocative is used when persons or things are ad- 
dressed. 

Obs. 3. There is no Ablative case in Greek, as in Latin. Its 
place is supplied by the genitive and dative. 

Obs. 4. All the cases except the nominative, are called ob- 
lique cases. 

§12. DECLENSION. 

62. — Declension is the mode of changing the 
terminations of nouns, adjectives, <fcc. 

63. — Words declined by cases, consist of two parts, — the Boot 
and the Termination. 

64. — The Root is that part which remains unchanged by in- 
flection, except as required by the rules of euphony. It 
of all that precedes the termination in the genitive singular; thup, 
Gen. rtti-tjg, loy-ov, Xd[i7zad~og. Roots, rip, loy, laanad. 

65. — The Termination is that part which, by its eha: 
indicates the different cases and numbers. 

^^ — Nouns, — and also adjectives, pronouns, and participles, 
— are declined by annexing the terminations, or case-endings, 
the root. Except the accusative in r, of the third declension, 
102. 



20 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 



§13. 



67. — Jhi Greek, there are three declensions, cor- 
responding to the first, second, and third, in Latin. 
They are distinguished as follows : 

The first declension has the genitive in ag, or ijg, from feminine 
nominatives ; or in ov from masculine nominatives in ag or qg. 

The second has the genitive in ov, from og or ov. 

The third has the genitive in og whatever be the nominative. 
The difference between these declensions will be seen at one 

view in the following : 

68. — Table of Terminations. 



First Declension. 


Second. 


Third. 


ISTom. a, 
Gen. ag, 
Dat. a, 
Ace. av, 
Voc. a, 


yes 

nv, 


ag, rjg, 
ov, ov, 

«> Vi 

av, ijv, 
a, rj. 


og, neut. ov, 
ov, 

ov, 

e, neut. ov. 


a, i, v, co, v, £, q, g, y, 

og, 

i, 

a, Exc. as 102, & 69-2 

like nom. Exc. as 104. 


N. A. V. 
G. D. 


a, 
atv. 




Dual. 

(O, 

oiv. 

Plural. 


oiv. 


Nom. a*, 
Gen. wv, 
Dat. aig 
Ace. ag, 
Voc. ai. 


> 




ot, neut. a, 

(OV, 

oig, 

ovg, neut. a, 


eg, neut. a, 

(OV, 

<ji, 

ag, neut. a, 

eg, neut. a. 


oi, a. 






§ 13. DI 


:clension 01 


? isrouisrs. 






69. 


— GENERAL R 


ULES. 



1. The vocative for the most part in the singu r 
lar, and always in the plural, is like the nomina- 
tive. 

2. ISTouns of the neuter gender have the nomi- 
native, accusative, and vocative alike ; and these 
cases in the plural end always in a. 



§ 14. FIRST Dl 103T. 21 

3. Tli<* dative singular ends always in i, either 
annexed <>r written under. 

4. The nominative, accusative, and vocative 
dual are alike; so also the genitive and datn 



§ 14. FIRST DECLEN8J 

TO. — The First Declension has four termina- 
tions of the nominative singular ; two feminine, 
tj, a ; and two masculine, fjg > ccg. Of these, the 
principal termination is /]. 

ACCENTS. 

71. — -Words in the first declension are accented 
according to the following — 

72. — SPECIAL RULES. 

1. The genitive plural, for the most part, has 
the circumflex on the final syllable. 

Exc. The exceptions are the feminine of adjectives and parti- 
ciples in 0£, not accented on the last syllable; and the words 
XQ%G*iiQi izeaiaty and acpvrj, which have zqi';<jt(qi', ntatcoi', ucfvcor. 

2. In the other cases, so far as the general rules 
permit, the accent always remains on the same 
syllable as in the nominative. 

3. When the accent in the nominative singular 
is on the termination, all genitives and dative- 
have the circumflex on the final syllable. 

QUANTITY. 

73. — Nouns in a with the genitive in t;g have a short, except 
in the nominative dual and accusative plural, which are alw 
long. Nouns which have the genitive in ag f have a long. To 
this there are a few exceptions. 



22 



FIRST DECLENSION. 



§15,16. 



74. — Paradigm of Nouns in r\ : Tip?}, honour. 



Sing. 
N. rifjt-fj, 
G. zift-tjg, 

D. Tffl-V, 

A. TlfJi-JjV, 



Dual. 

N. A. V. r^-a, 
G. D. Tiji-alv. 



Plural. 
N. zifi-ai, 

G. Tlfl-GJV, 

D. Tiji-aig, 
A. riji-dg, 
V. tifi-aL 



75.— §15. SPECIAL RULES FOR FEMININE NOUNS. 

1. Nouns in « have the accusative singular in 

2. Nouns in # pure (4-4), and qu, retain a in 
all the cases of the singular. 

Obs. To these may be added a few words ending in da, &a, 
and a, circumflex, contracted for da ; and a very few in Xa and 
\ia. Such words have a always long ; as, &ilopijla, Gen. (iJiXofiij- 
Xag, &c. 

76. — EXAMPLES. 



1. 

N. MovG-a, a muse. 
G. MovG-ng, 
D. MovG-r h 
A. Mova-ar, 
V. Mow- a. 



2. 



N. CfiXf-a, friendship. 
G. cfih'-ag, 
D. Cfih'-a, 
A. qili-ar, 
V. yiXi'-a. 



N. ))u8Q-a, a day. 
G. rjuiQ-oQj 

D. ijiitQ-cc, 
A. i t iito-ar, 
V. ijUtQ-a. 



Note. In the dual and plural, all nouns of this declension are de- 
clined like T*/ii}. 



77.— §16. SPECIAL RULES FOR MASCULINE NOUNS. 

1. Nouns in 77c and «^ have the genitive in ozy; 
and lose g in the vocative. 

05s. 1. Some nouns in ag have the genitive in ov or a; as, 
TzaToanlolag, gen. TiarqanXoiov, or naToanXoia, a parricide. 
Some have a only ; as, Ocopag, gen. Ocofia, Thomas. 

2. Nouns in r>^ have « in the vocative ; those 
in 6t*is have either ?] or « ; as, 

IIouTTtjg, voc. Tioujrd ; Xt;Gif;g, voc. Sbjprrij or Xr^rd, 



§17. 



FIRST DECLENSION. 



23 



Obs. 2. Nouns denoting a people or nation; as, Th'na^ 
Persian; compounds in n^g ; derivatives from [nzool, noXci, 
and toffa ; also h&yvqg, Mepcuxjiqg, and llvoalyiu^, have the 
vocative in a. 

3. In the other cases, masculine nouns are de- 
clined like the feminine, to wliich their termina- 
tions correspond. 

78. — EXAMPLES. 

Singular. 
1. 2. 

At rides. 

N. ^TQ8ld-7]g, 

G. J(tqh8-ov, 
D. JftQeid-ri, 
A. JliQtid-iiv, 

V. AzQtlS-)]. 

The dual and plural of masculine nouns are the same as the 
dual and plural of ri\ii\. 

Obs. Since the termination qg, belongs also to the third de- 
clension, it may be observed, that to the first pertain the nouns 
in idrjg or udijg ; as, Oovxididyg, AXxifiiadng ; — the names of na- 
tions ; as, ^r/.eluQzng ; — nouns in zrjg, derived from verbs ; as, 
fiouftrjg from Ttoitco ; — compounds from ovovfiat, I buy ; perooj, 
I measure ; roipco, I rub, wear, train ; 7tcoXco, I sell ; and from 
words of this declension ; e. g. 'OXviimorixqg, from vi/.tj ; uo%e- 
Sixqg, from dixrj. 



2. 


3. 


4. 


Citizen. 


Youth. 


Pythagoras. 


Tzoh'z-qg, 


veavi-ag, 


TJv\ray6o-ag, 


7zoh'z-ov, 


veun'-ov, 


TIv&ayoQ-ov, 


7io)Jz-7], 


veavi-a, 


llvxtayoQ-a, 


7Z0llT-TjV, 


veavi-uv, 


TIvxrayoQ-av, 


7zollz-a. 


veavi-a. 


TIvftuyoQ-a. 



§ 17. DIALECTS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION. 

79. — Besides the regular terminations exhibited in the para- 
digms, many words are found in different cases declined accord- 
ing to some of the peculiar dialects. In the tables of termina- 
tions, A. denotes Attic, I. Ionic, D. Doric, JE. JEolic : but the 
distinctions are not strictly observed in every instance, — the same 
peculiarities sometimes occurring in two, and sometimes in three 
dialects. The following words are exhibited as examples, but it 
is not to be inferred that each part of them will actually be found 
in thf Greek authors. 



24 



FIRST DECLENSION. 



§18. 



Singular. 



Noni. 
Tiu-i'l D. d, 
fiora-a ) -r 
tpvlia ) ' '' 
JIvGayoo-aq, I. rjq. 
« , i D. ac. 



-ac,-, 

-01', 



Gen. 

D. a?. 

D. ac. 

I. Tjq. 

I. fft). 

D. a, 

^E. ao. 



Dat. 




-ft 


I). 


6c. 


-fr 


D. 


a. 


-£> 


I. 


??• 


-?> 


I. 


u- 


ii» 


D. 


a. 



Ace. 
-?/?>, D. ay. 

• -av, I. 7]v. 

-av, I. 



-f]V, 



1]V. 

fa. 
av. 



Yoc. 
-?), D. a. 

a, I. ij. 
A. ag. 

i ,. 

A. iji;. 



-rt. K 



Norn. 



n\i-ai 



-CUV -< 



Gen. 

/" T ' 

D. av, & 
acov. 



Plural. 
Dat. 

-aTg, I. ?/£, & 

rjcji. 
D. & A. cuai. 



Ace. 






£#£. 
aTg. 



Yoc. 



-eu. 



Thus, /^rffn^, JE. iirjrifoa, a wise person ; TIt]Xsldov, I. 77)/- 
leidzco, of P elides ; Alvuov, M. Alveiao, of Apneas ; OtjfiaTg, 
I. OqfiifiQ, or OqfirJGi, in Thebes ; 6Xod, I. bXoij, pernicious ; %qv- 
ata, I. XQ V(JS} ]y golden. For the 'genitive and dative in epi or qpw, 

see § 31. 



§18. CONTRACTIONS. 

80. — In a concourse of vowels, if two syllables 
are converted into one, it is called a Confraction. 
Of contractions there are two kinds : 

1. A contraction loitiioat a change of vowels is 
called Synmresis ; as, T£i% 8 h ^7 synseresis, r?i%8i. 

2. A contraction tvith a change of vowels is 

called Crasis / as, yta, yrj ; — (piles, cpUsc ; — voov> 

vovv ; — oOreov, oOrovv. 

Obs. If the first of the concurrent vowels has an acute accent, 
it is changed into a circumflex on the contracted syllable. If 
the first concurrent vowel has not an accent, the contracted sylla- 
ble has not the circumflex, 28, 29. 

3. In the rules for contractions generally, let it be remembered 
that 

the two short vowels, e, o, 

have their own long vowels, n, go, 
and their own diphthongs, si, ov. 
Note. A contraction is often made, but not always. 



^ 19, 20. 



SECOND DECLENSION. 



25 



§19. CONTRACTIONS OF THB FI1:>T DECLKNSIO . 

81. — In the first declension, no contraction takes place m 
be first of the concurrent wow and the nomi- 

native contracted is then declined regularly. 

RUI 

1. Ea not after n i- changed into ti ; 

pa, earth, ; /, fcc. lik.- tuh]. 

vgwsioL, golden, %q\ ijg, D. rgi 

j i&f, Mercury, 'EQpijg, G. EQfiov, 1 >. /.'j'"\ <fcc. 

2. In pa* and other concurrent vowels, strike 
3ut the first ; as, 

noQCfvnhu, purple, nOQtpVQO, G, 7roocfvna b ', I). Ttoncfvoa, <fec. 
anXorj, simple, aaXtj, G. ux)Jjg, &c. 

h^fao, Minerva, Ji&i;rd, G. Jlih t nu, D. Jithju, &c., 75. 
Obs. j 

JinOlti^, Apt I Its, J/m}./J 4 g, G. Jinulov, I >. Jlnt/li d > ko,. 



82.- 

r 5h7J i rr l1 the m<> 
PoqMTTqg, a sophist. 
TTt/.tia, a (lore. 
/fining, ^Eneas. 
yicpvQa, a bridge, 

,, frenzy. 
m&ctQtOZijg, a harper. 



-EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 



yAo5o"o"«, £Ae tongue, 
ayooa, the forum. 
t tyring, an artist. 
Ijdort'i, pleasure. 
ycoriUy an angle. 
ftta, force, 
uvnu, a breeze, 
alia, 



EiQtjrt], peace, 
aoqi'u, wisdom. 
uO.uiru, black. 
T(Uiara y miserable, 
biz^, justice. 

ftOVhfa CO"; 

nay (ana, a sword, 
qnoi t t uuTiu^ y high- 
aymvunyg, a wrestler. minded. 

. The learner should decline some of the word-* in this table ac- 
BOrding to the different dialects: and, in like manner, in the second and 
third declensions, according to their dial 



§20. SECOND DECLENSION. 

83. — The second declension has two termina- 
tions of the nominative singular; ogandov] ov 

is always neuter, og never. 



26 



SECOND DECLENSION. 



§20. 



ACCENTS. 

84. — Words in the second declension are ac- 
cented according to the following — 



SPECIAL RULES. 



1. As far as the general rules permit (19, &c.) 
the accent remains on the same syllable in the ob- 
lique cases, as in the nominative. To this rule the 
genitive plural is not an exception, as in the first 
declension. 

Exc. 1. The Attic forms in cog and cov are accented as in the 
common form : i. e. the final long syllable permits the accent to 
remain on the antepenult. See 88, clvcoyecov. 

2. When the accent, in the nominative singular, 
is on the final syllable, all genitives and datives 
have the circumflex on the final syllable. 

Exc. 2. Except the genitive singular of nouns in cog ; as, recog, 
gen. reco. 



-EXAMPLES. 



1. Paradigm of the Masculine and Feminine Nouns in og; 
6 loyog, the speech. 
Dual. 



Singular. 
X. loy-og y 
G. Xoy-oVj 
D. loy-cp, 
A. 16y-ov, 
V. X6y-8. 



K A. V. loy-co, 
G. D. ).6y-otr. 



Plural. 
X. ).6y-oi, 
G. loy-cor, 
D. loy-oig, 
A. ).6y-ovg, 
V. \6y-oi. 



In the same manner also are declined nouns in or, observing 
the second general rule (69-2) ; thus, 

2. Paradigm of Neuter Nouns in ov\ hezqop, a measure. 



Singular. 


Dual. 


Plural. 


X. jjiezo-or, 
G. fxtzo-ov, 


N. A. V. fi£zQ-CQ, 


X. fiEZQ-a, 

G. [18ZQ-CQI\ 


D. fiezQ-cp, 

A. ll£ZQ-OV, 


G. D. {.itzQ-oiv. 


D. fiezo-oig, 
A. [leio-a, 


V. U8ZO-OJ'. 




V. fiezQ-a. 



}21. 



SECOND DECLEN? 



<2i. DIALECTS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION. 

%gular< 

Ace. Voc. 

-or, A. cor, & 09. -/, A. 6$ & 



Noni. 

A. 09?. 



!1. 

. \. 09, 

LA 1 >. oib. 



Norn. 



1 ii. 
I. iV I I 



Plural 

Voc. 
. A. ofc. -o/, 

I), n 

87. — Neuter nouns in the Attic dialect have the same termi- 
ations irith nouns in o>\ except that p is substituted fiw 

Thus it will appear that the Attic form, in which o^ b chai 
V, ov into cor, and Of into <p, is the principal variation in 
lis declension. Let it be observed, however, that a long, and i t , 
og t are changed into s before c«v; as, Jlaoff, Attic Isefc. a 
hart remains unchanged ; as, rct-o?, r«-oj^, or it is contra 
ith the o into ov ; as, ayfeaog, dyl^cog. For the genitive and 
atiw in Cfi or gn 1 , see §-U. 



38. EXAMPLES OF THE 


ATTIC DECLENSION 


OF NOUNS IN 0£. 






Singular* 




).ayco^ for htyog. 
a hare. 


redg for poo?. «j 

a temple. 


•o);'fcoj' for ccrsoysor. 

a build in<j. 


N. 


htywg, 


pecig, 


drcoytcor, 


G. 
D. 


/jcyco, 
htyco, 


rtco, 


drcoytco, 
dro)- 


A. 


hcyco, or cor, 


rsoo, or reoSr, 


drcoyto n 


V. 


>$, or 6 b \ 


rsefc, or ra4?. 

Dual. 


dicoytcor. 


X. 


A. V. ?.rt;'co, 
1 >. h'.ycor. 


rtcor. 
Plural. 


drcoyeco, 
art 


N. 

a 

i). 

A. 


V. /.< 


peep, 

rtcor, 

m* • -. 

rSflfc. 


drc6] 

drcoyto . 
diojytf - 
drco- 



Ohs. Tin- Attics < 1 1 < 1 not decline all nouns in og in this man- 
BT, hut only a wry few. The Bame forms occur also in the Ionic 



23 



SECOND DECLENSION. 



§22. 



and Doric writers. After this form, the Attics often declined 
nouns which otherwise belong to the third declension ; as, Mi'vco, 
Ace. for Mt'vcoa, from Mi'vcog, G. Mivcoog ; yslcov, Ace. for yeXca- 
ra, from yeXcog, yzXcozog. 



§ 22. CONTRACTIONS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION. 

89. — In the second declension contractions are 
seldom used, and never, unless the first of the con- 
current vowels is short. 



concurring 



are 



RULES. 

Rule I. Two short vowels 
changed into ov. 

Except 88 in the vocative singular, never contracted. 

Rule II. A short vowel before a diphthong, 
or before a vowel not short, is rejected. 

90. EXAMPLES. 

6 voog, contracted vovg, the mind. 

Singular. 
N. Rule 1 vo-og 
2 vo-ov 



G, 
D 
A 
V 



2 vo-cp 
1 vo-ov 

1 VO-8 



vovg 

vov 

vco 

vovv 

vov 



Dual. 
N. A. V. 
2 vo-co vot 

G. D. 
2 vo-oiv volv 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



Plural. 
2 vb-oi 
2 vo-cov 
2 vo-oig 
2 vb-ovg 
2 vd-oi 



VOL 
V03V 

volg 
vovg 
vol 



to oartov, contracted oarovv, the bone. 



Singular. 

N. bari-ov oarovv 
G. bari-ov barov 

D. OGT8-Cp OOrq) 

A. bari-ov oarovv 

V. OGT8-OV OGXOVV 



Dual. 
N. A. Y. 
bari-co bar (a 

, G ' D ; 

0G78-01V barolv. 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



Plural. 
bar 8- a 
bcrt'-cov 

06T8-0ig 

bar 8- a 
bar 8- a 



oara 

bazcov 

barolg 

oara 

oara 



Decline and contract in the same manner, nlbog, navigation ; 
QOog 9 a stream ; yybog> down ; adslyidzog, a nephew. 



THIRD 29 



91.— 



. 



r, an ajq 
naudiop, a child. 



rose 
6g t paid. 



§2:i. THIRD DECLENSION. 

92. — The third declension has seven termina- 
tions of the nominative singular, a> i, v, co, — v y (?, 
g: it lias all genders, and increases the noun by 

one syllable in the oblique cast 

Note. Nouns in £ and \p are considered as ending in g (8-G). 

93. — The root, seldom unchanged in the nomi- 
native, is always found in the genitive singular by 
omitting o; (64). 

The oblique cases, for the most part, are formed 
by adding the terminations (68) to the root. 

ACCENTS. 

94. — Words in the third declension are accent- 
ed according to the following — 

SPECIAL KILES. 

1. The accent, in the oblique cases, remains on 
the accented syllable of the nominative, as far as 
the general rules permit, 13 — 17. 

\ 1. lint (ai t n y Sai'jQ, naxi'iQy and aco7t' { n, in the vocative, 
throw the accent back on the penult : See 

Exc. 
. 2. When the genitive singular ends in mg in>T«-;i<l i 
(98-4), there is no change M" accent, ami the genitive plural is 
B Qgular : a-, nn'/.U', I tor. 

2, Words of one syllable in the nominative sin- 
gular, accent the final syllable of the genitive and 



30 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



§23. 



dative in all numbers ; and in these, the final sylla- 
ble long lias the circumflex. So also yvvrj, xvcov, 
and syncopated substantives in tjq, 99-4. 

Exc. 3. Except dag, a torch ; Sficog, a slave ; {rcog, a jackal ; 
xodg, xoatog, the head; ovg, the ear; nalg, a child; 6r t g, a 
moth ; Toojg, a Trojan ; cpcpg, a burning ; cpoog, light ; which in 
the genitive plural, and in the genitive and dative dual, have the 
acute accent on the first syllable. 

Except also participles of one syllable; as, 8 ovg, dovrog, &c. ; 
and the dual and plural of nag, viz. : ndvzoiv, navzcov, Ttdoi. 

3. The vocative of nouns in ccvg, tvg, ovg, co, 
and cog, has the circumflex on the final syllable ; 
as, yqav, /3a6iXbu, &c. 

95. — Nouns in the third declension are declined 
as follows : 

1. Paradigm of Masculine and Feminine Nouns ; 6 &ijo, the 
wild beast. 
Dual. 



Singular. 
N. x%jQ, r 
G. ftijQ-6g, 

D. xT/jQH, 

A. &7jQ-a, 
V. Ofo 



N. A. V. <%-«, 

G. D. ftno-oh. 



Plural. 
]S T . &7jQ-eg, 
G. (hjQ-wv, 

D. &>jQ-Ol, 

A. fttjQ-ag, 



Neuter nouns are declined in the same manner, 
observing the 2d general rule, 69-2. 

2. Paradigm of Neuter Nouns ; ^ta, a tribunal. 



Singular. 
N. $ma, 
G. fi/tfia-rog, 
D. fti'nia-zi, 
A. /%«, 
V. fapa. 



Dual. 
K A. V. Pr'; t ua-T8, 
G. D. ftiftia-roiv. 



Plural. 
N". fitjfia-Ta, 
G. finpa-TGW, 

D. jifyia-cn, 44-8. 
A. {t/jUa-za, 
V. fit]pa-ta* 



Note. In the declension of nouns which take roc, doc, or Soz, in the 
genitive, the Rule 44-8 must be particularly attended to in the dative 
plural. 



rants mioy. 31 

i. FORMING THE GENITIVE. 

96. 

1. It* the cloud dors not end in z% *dd °?> or 
S to the nominate i 



ucr, 


a p<> 




mu&v-og 


Root 


natav 


////./, 






tOQ 






u/r, 






ui t i 




//,; 


7T/J, 






ni -n- 






o 1 


i>hon, 








: 


to (iconic, 






00)U c. 




dOjn 



2, It' the noun ends in r \ reject g 3 and add o^, 

raff, 8og 3 or l^o^ ; 

N. o G. (oco-oj R 

lejffy?, a caldron, f-rog Iff 

/' }.au7iiu\ a torch, htuna /.(cumc-dog 
o, /■ a bird, oon-vhv ogi 

6 £ra$, a rtt&r, arax aiay.-rog v.t 

j /.ai'/.i'Ai', a storm, hcu.ax hci/.ax~o^ XaiXaM 

Whether oft Wfc £0**, or #o£, is to be added, can W learned 
only by practice and consulting the dictionary. 

( J7. — Exception. But if the noun ends in oft 
rt 6 before it. All these are neuter; i a, 

\. Tc?/nc, a watt) G. Ttfy-e-o*; Root tmgjk 

too?, a mountain, on-; one 



§25. THE PENULT. 

j. — If the final syllable of the nominative con- 
tain a long vowel or diphthong, it is commonly 
shortened in the root by the following — 

1. A diphthong casta away its subjunctive vo 
el ; i 



32 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



§25. 



N. 6 fiacjtltvg, the king, 
6 fiovg, the ox, 

?] vavg, the ship, 

2. A long vowel is changed into its own short ; 

as, 



G. Baa lis- cog, 
po-og, 
Doric, va-dg, 



Root facile, 
va. 



N. 6 TTOtfi/jV, 

Ar[Tco, 
6 xavcov, 
6 dodxcov, 
7] aiocog, 
Tsrvcpc6<g, 



the shepherd, 
Latona, 
the rule, 
the dragon, 
modesty, 
having struck, 



G. 7T0lfL8V-0g, 

ylijzo-og, 

navov-og, 

doaxov-rog, 

aldo-og, 

rervcpo-zog, 



Root, noijiev. 
Aqzo. 

Y.OLV0V. 

doaxovr. 
aldo. 

TtTVCpOT. 



?) nohg, 
o nll]ivg, 



Root, VOflE. 

nole. 



3. i and v, whether long or short, are changed 
into s ; as, 

N. /} dvvcifiig, the power, G. Swaps- cog, Root, Swaps. 

TO 71COV, the flock, 7lCOE-0q, tzcoe. 

THE GENITIVE IN Cog. 

4. Nouns in ig and vg, when they change l and 
v into s, and likewise nouns in svg, take the Attic 
cog instead of og in the genitive ; as, 

N. 6 vopsvg, the shepherd, G. vops-cog, 

the city, n 61s- cog, 

the elbow, niiys-cog, 

99. — OBSERVATIONS. 

1. Neuters in i and v have the genitive in sog; as, aarv, G. 
darsog. The Ionic and Doric writers retain i in the oblique 
cases of nouns in ig and i ; as, nokig, G. TTohog, D. nolu. But 
even in these, the dative is usually contracted into s i ; as, n6Xu y 
nolsi. Also nouns in ig sometimes have the Attic scov instead 
of sow, in the genitive and dative dual. 

2. All Greek words ending in g, which take v in the genitive, 
appear to have originally ended in vg, and the v at length was 
dropped for the sake of euphony; 46-16. But to maintain the 
former quantity of the nominative, the doubtful vowel was made 
long, and the short vowels were changed into their own diph- 
thongs ; thus, the original terminations avg, trg, wg, erg, org, 

were changed into ag, ig, vg, sig, org. 
But the oblique cases, regularly formed from the original nomi- 
native, remain unchanged ; as in the following examples : 



THIRD 'V. 33 



• 111. 


illy. 


• ii. 


R(» 






tog, 


] '•' T - 


I i >*» 




. 


dt/.j ii. 


, 


if on: 


i 


q nny.n 


XTfilV, 


■ 




y.r 




odor*;, 


- 


6doi T. 



3. Instead of rejecting p before g in the nominative, someti 
the s* was dropped and the p retained; and hence the doable 
forma of the nominative which Bometimea occur: aa, ddbtpig or 
; ; q>0Qxve or tpoQxvw, 

i. I lertain nouns in 7/,o, having re^oc ra the genitive, are con- 
tracted by Byncope in the genitive and dative singular, and in the 
dative plural (100-K. 2), and throw the accent in the genitive 

and dative singular on the final syllable (04-2) ; 

ttut^u, a father, nurtnog, nurnog. 

mirtni, Tiainl. 

(itjTtjQ, a mother, (MfttQOg, pqtQog. 

So also, un' t o y a man, avegog, uidnog. (47-19.) 

Note. The nouns thus contracted are nart'jQ, a father ; p^rm, a mo- 
ih< r ; frvydtrjo, a daughter; yewrojp, the belly; dij/tfjnjQ, i "> res ; and 

arqo, a man. This last rejects t in all the cases and numbers except 
the vocative singular. 



§26. THE GENITIVE OF ADJECTIVES. 

100. — Adjectives of the third declension form the genitive by 
the same rules as substantives; but some form it from the mas- 
euline, and others from the neuter gender; and the genitive 
formed from either gender, is also the genitive of the other. The 
ler from which the genitive is formed may be ascertained by 
the following — 

SPECIAL RULES. 

1. Adjectives in ig and oi/?, form the genitive 
from the nominative masculine: as, 

^' * , / { ' f " ' l Gen. of both, (filnTTicrnido^, Root, (f).07TaTQid. 

|£j; | » « mm**, « d,* 8. 

2. Adjectives uot in tg or ovg, form the genitive 
from the nominative neuter; as, 

2* 



31 THIRD DECLENSION. §27. 

Mase. Neut. Gen. of both. Root, 

TBQtjv, tfQST, tender, rsozr-og, zeoav. 

aXq&qg, ahjih'g, true, ahj&t'-og, uhj&s. 

fit/.ug, fxtlar. black, fisXav-og, utha\ 

yaoltig, %ctQUr 9 graceful, yaoltr-zog, yaoieiz. 

Obs. 1. This rule applies universally to participles of the third 
declension, and these have their genitive always in tog ; as, 

ST. Masc. N. Neut. Gen. of both. Root. 

azdg, azdv, oral-tog, aravz. 

didovg, didov, didor-zog, didorz. 

rvTzcor, zvnov, zvxor-zog, tvttovt. 

Tvcp&Eig, Tvyd'sr, zvcfOtr-zog, rvq&erz. 

For the declension of adjectives and participles, see §§ 46, 47. 



§27. THE ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR. 

101. — The Accusative singular of masculine and 
feminine nouns commonly ends in a. But, 

102. — SPECIAL RULES. 

Rule 1. The genitive in og pure, from ig, vg y 
avg, and ovg, changes g of the nominative into v ; 
thus, 

Nom. Gen. Ace. Root. 

oyig, a serpent, oyi-og, ocfir, oqt. 

fiorovg, a bunch of grapes, fiozov-og, fiozovr, fiozov. 

ravg, a ship, Doric, ra-6g, ruvr, ru. 

fiovg, an ox, fio-og, fiovr, $o. 

Likewise Xccccg and /agig have v ; as, 
Noru. Gen. Ace. Root 

laccg, a stone, Idu-og, Xaar, laa. 

ZBQ*G, favour, ydoi-zog, ydoir, yuQir. 

Exc. But dig, Ai-og, Jupiter, has Ala : and Xdoig, the name 

of one of the Graces, has Xdotza', and XQ°vg, the skin, has /£>o«, 

seldom yoovr. 

Rule 2. Words in vg, -tog, and compounds of 
ivovg, afoot, have a ov v\ as, 



§28. THIRD or. 35 

>m. 
d);-:/ -Oft 

Sine >8og, A/v (\xod. 

Rule 3. Worda id t£ and //• Dot accented on 
the last syllable, with the genitive in o$ not pu 

have r^ or r; I 

•m. G< ]; 

xmir;, y.nnv-ih)^-, y.w>v-l)(f. y QT JCOptrf, KO£1 

So also, xA^/V, y.ht-fii)*;, y.hi-du, or y./.ta, x/.. 

. Bach words, in prose, have almost always r, seldom a; 
but in poetry, commonly a, Beldom r. 



§28. TKE VOCATIVE SINGULAR 

103. — The vocative singular is for the most part 
like the nominative. But, 

104. — SPECIAL RULES. 

Rule 1. A short vowel in the genitive, from a 
long vowel of the nominative, remains short in the 
vocative ; as, 

Nom. Gen. Root 

prjTtjQj a mother, ^fjTtn-o^, /</~r ! U J £ Q- 

jExtO /fetor, | KTOQ-OG) T0 Qt TOQ. 

. But nouns accented on the last syllable, hare the i 
tiw long; as, aoquj*, Gen. noi^tr-og, Voc. notu! t r\ 
7-mj, oiftjQi and SoutjQ, which have the vocative n * . and 

b\un, with the accent thrown back. 

/inolXxovy lioGttdojVy and a*mJQ t with the long vowel in the 
. have the final vowel short in the vocative, and the ae- 

: !ir<>wn hack; thus /KflKftUor, llmn^or, ff«h 

Rule 2, Nouns in gg, r T \ i\\\d «/?, reject J in the 
vocative 

brovQy Y. { ]nrnv\ — {UtoiX8&g } V @o6 
[it -rids'y YQavGi mm! (J<w; Voc. noij nft 



36 THIKD DECLENSION. §29. 

Rule 3. Feminities in cog and co make the voca- 
tive in ol ; as, 

aldcog, V. aldot; 2Ja7T(poo 9 V. ^ancpoL 

Rule 4. Nouns in ag, -avrog (99-2), have the 
vocative in av ; those in ug, -tvrog have the voca- 
tive in ev ; as, 

Nom. Gen. Voc. Root. 

Aiag, Ajax, Aiav-rog, Aiav, Aiavr. 

£i[A,6eig, Simois, sZiftoev-rog, £ip6ev, ^ijioevr. 

Note. In proper names, however, the poets often reject v; as, AXot 
for AXav. 

Obs. yvv?j has yvvai in the vocative ; and ava £, in addressing 
the deity, has ava ; otherwise ava%. 

Rule 5. In adjectives, the vocative masculine 
is like the nominative neuter ; as, 

N. Masc. K JSTeut. V. Masc. 

akrj&ijg, dX7]d-sg 9 alrj&eg. 

ilefycov, ilsrjfzov, iXtrj^ov. 

dlTlOVg, dlTZOVV, diTiovv. 

[isXag, fielav, fis'Xav. 

%aQi£ig 9 X a Qi 8V > X a Q l£V > a ^ so X a Q l ' H ^' 

Note. This rule does not apply to participles. These follow the gen 
eral rule; as, N. & V. tvttcow, tvnxQvaa, rvnrov. 



I 29. THE DATIVE PLURAL. 



105. — The dative plural is formed by adding ac 
to the root. Besides the changes required by the 
rules of Euphony (44-8), other changes are to be 
noticed under the following — 

106. — special eules. 

Rule 1. Nouns in tvg, avg, and oug, insert v 
before ai in the dative plural ; as, 



§29. 



THIKI) DJ 






N. o BcunXevg t thr ting, I 

tin shift, j, I ►..lie. I C,i. 

tin i i -r;/. 

A'./v. lint m bo<, ,7o-i baa ir€Nf£ 

Rule 2, Noons in n/n, -reqoe, after a syncope, 
have atfi (99-4) ; i . 

nariJQi G. mcrqp-of, (huzi-'qgi) by syncop . xq&gu 

ri t n, &94Q-0$i ((Ut'pGl) fOOL 

K.r<\ But yaazi'iQy G. yaazin-o^, has sometimes yuGz7 t nGt. 

107. — Example* of the preceding Rid 

In the following examples, note the difference between them and 
the example &t' t o, (hftoq, 95-1, and give the rule for the difference. 

Singular. 



6, jxisturer. 


r p cow. 


o, a divinity. 


o, lion. 


6, shspherd. 


"N. 


vofitvg 


(lovg 


duifjim' 

dut)wv-og 

daifioi-i 


Itcov 


noiul^v 


G. 


vo fie- cog 


frhOQ 


JJort-og 


noiutv-ng 


D. 


ro^it-i 


po-i 


XtOVZ-l 


TZOIUtV-l 


A. 


vo\ii-a 


fiovv 


dat{iop-u 


ldorr-a 


noiutv-a 


V. 


t'OfJltV 


ftov 


daifiov 
Dual. 


).tov 


7Z0i[ii' t v 


N.A.V. 


volt's 


§6-8 


dafitor-e 


)Jorz-£ 


Tzotptr-e 


G.D. 


VOflt-OlP 


§o-o7v 


dui[i6v-oiv 
Plural. 


Xtovz-oiv 


7l0lUhV-0lV 


N. 


vopt-tg 


free 


duiuor-tg 


h'orz-eg 


noiun-eg 


G. 


rofu-mf 


^io-cov 


daifioy-cop 


IbOl'Z-tOV 


notiihv-tov 


D. 


rotiti-oi 


fU>v-ai 


diu'uo-Gi 


h'nv-Gi 


.Toitlh-Gl 


A. 


ropu-ag 


P&-OQ 


8cuuo9-ag 


Morr-ag 


ftoifiiv-ag 


V. 


vofii-eg 


fJo-eg 


dcupor-sg 

Singular. 


leorr-sg 


notutr-tg 


hi 


city. 


?}, sow. 


6, swift. 


! r strife. 


other. 


N. 


nohg 


avg 


dxvg 


iqig 


necrtJQ 


<;. 


noke-iog 


GV-Og 


coxt'-og 


tqid-og 


natQ-og 


D. 


fioXe-i 


ov-i 


(O'At-'l 


toid-i 


fzaxo-i 


A. 


TTohl' 


GVV 


(o'At-a -vy 


ton y t>i$a 


mcr 


V. 


noXi 


GV 


oSxtl 


HH 


■ ■ 



38 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



§30. 









Dual. 






X. A.V. 


TO/.f-f 


GV-8 


co/J-8 


80l8-S 


7Tat8Q-S 


G.D. 


JO/./-0/i' 


GV-019 


iO'At-oiy 
Plural. 


8Qld-0U' 


7TUTKQ-QIV 


N. 


.7 ()/.,- -l IQ 


GV-8Q 


dxt'-zg 


8Qid-8g 


7iai8Q-8^ 


0. 


TloXt-COi' 


OV'OOP 


(0X8-0) V 


8Qld-0)P 


7iaT8Q-0)V 


D. 


7To).8-Gl 


gv-gi 


00X8-GI 


tQl-Gl 


7ZCITQ-U-GI 


A. 


note-ag 


Gv-ag 


o)X8-ag 


8Qtd-ag 


71CIT8Q-Ug 


V. 


716X8- 8g 


Gv-8g 


0)X8-8g 


8Qtd-8g 


7iaT8Q-8g 



§ 30. DIALECTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 

108. — From the variety of terminations in nouns of this de- 
clension, it is impossible to exhibit them in one concise table. 
But the general principles are — The nominative and vocative At- 
tic are alike, — The Attic genitive is in so)g, instead of sog and 
tog, — The Ionic has n in the penult, through the oblique cases, 
instead of e and a ; and with the poets makes egi or eggi instead 
of Gi, in the dative plural. 



ISTom. 




fia<rv?.-ri'q. ) 


-Z02y ■ 


flaO-vq. ) 

oq-iq. 


-VOCj, 


fats". 


-aoc, 


ald-o')q. 


-6oq, 


Xom. and 
[iaGvl-uq. < 
v-aiq, 


Voc. 
A r f q. 
or r t q. 
1 r^q. 
L fjiq. 



Gen. 
I. yoq.) 
D. & [u 

A. io)q. 
I. f}6q & . 

M. OJq. 



Singular. 

Dat. 



. eu)q. 



0)q. 



-i'i, I. ij'i. 



-VI. 

-at I. 



?JL 



Acc. 



-ea. ) 

■ ■ f 1 

-vv, la. ) 

-IV. 

-avv, I 
-6a, | 



-vv. 

-avv, Lrjvv, 7j a. 
I. ovv 

j3E. WV. 



Voc. 

-£V, A. f~iQ. 

-v, A. vq. 

-v, A. vq. 
-av, A avq. 

-ov, A. d>q. 



Plural. 



rev/ -fa. 



Gen. 
-ewv, I. yo)V. 
-aoiVy I. ^wi>. 



-H'<Xi<, 



-EO"t, 



Dat. 

j I. TJGV. 

\ P. ?jfGcrv. 
I. //{'(J - /. 

P. TJtGGv. 
j I. *0"(T<<. 
j P. fc*<7(Tt. 



* |f 



Acc. 
-ea?, I. iya?. 
-arg, I. rjaq. 



Thus, Gen. y8i).8og, of a Up, Dor. y8ihvg\ Voc. Masc. flwr- 
rvytg, Attic dvGivyrjg ; as, dvGTvyqg yt'oov, unfortunate old 
man ; Dat. pi. g££<Xi, Ion. yeiotGGi., to hands ; Accus. ^///rco. La- 
tona, Ion. ylrjovv, Gen. aGT8og f of a city, Attic acTTfco?; Voc. 
tt/ftot, modesty Attic uldoog. 



§81, 10 

tnging o? or op into og*, e.g. <; : 

cur. 

in the - i 

1 1 1. — 1 



§:;. PHIRD DB 

/ declension, 

A 

1. 

a /XIOTI 

N un^ in 



40 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



ag, -adog 
1*1$) -Tijrog 
avg 

CO 

ig, verbal 



\a\inag y t] 
xaxotrjg, rj 
vavg, i) 

h 



cpeidco, n 
cpvaig, i) 

3. Nouns in a, t, v, a 
always neuter. 

ffipa, to 



a torch 
wickedness 
a ship 
parsimony 
nature 



§33. 

Gen. XafXTTciSog 
xaxoTtjiog 
vaog 
cpzifioog 
(pvctcog 



-ccrog, og y and oq, are 



a ptll*tt, to a tribunal Gen. ^fiarog 

i fieXt, ro honey [lehzog 

v ttco'v, to a flock Tzco'iog 

ag -arog y.oe'ag, to flesh xotarog 

og rsiyog, to a wall rsr/eog 

oq ccoq, to a sword aooog 

Obs. 1. Nouns of other terminations are so varied in gender, 
that no general rule can be given respecting them. 

Obs. 2. Dialect frequently varies the gender in all the declen- 
sions. Thus, fiazog is masculine in Attic, otherwise feminine ; 
and so of others. 



114.— §33. WORDS FOR PRACTICE ON THE PRECED- 
ING RULES, FROM §§20-27. 

Decline the words in the following list ; accent them ; give the rule 
for the genitive and the accent, and for the other cases when they vary 
from the example &fj(). 



o yeocor (opt) the old man. 
ij arficov (o) the nightingale. 

the elbow. 

the air (104-1). 

the hope. 

the strife. 

the helmet. 

the wave. 

the month. 

the flower. 

the race. 

the ray. 

the poor man. 






ay y* cor 





di;o 




iMiig 

toig 


><\ 


y.oovg 


?c 


• v.v\ia 


6 pip 

to avxrog 


TC 


» yevog 


h 


clxTig 





nivng 



to 

(*) 
(5) 

(*) 
w 



TO OQOg 

o ogsvg 

? «* 

n nqa^ig 

\ &h 

ftlCOV 

ifiag 
nvzvg 

Lidnig 
aig 

fafiTjV 



the mountain. 

the mule, 
(y) the flame. 

the goose. 

the action. 
(/) the cough, 
(y.) the flesh. 
(o) the snow, 
(rz) the thong. 

the pine. 

the seer, 
(y) the goat, 
(e) the haven. 



§3-4, 35. thii:i> \siox. -11 

►NTRACnONS OF THE THIRD DECLE 

1 15. — In the oblique cases in the third declen- 
31 m, there is no contraction, unless the firsi of I 

concurrent vowels i> either short, or a donbtftil 

taken as short. 

In verba and in some other contractions, the first of the 
current vowels is sometimes lonir. 



§85. GENERAL RULES 

110. — ThefoDowing Rules are universal, being applicable, not 
only to contractions of the third declension, but also to thoe* 
verbs, and of all eases in which concurrent vowels admit of con- 
traction, except such as fall under tin.' rules for contractions in the 
1st and 2d declensions, 81 and 89. Concurrent vowels are con- 
tracted as follow- : 

1. A short vowel with the same, is contracted 

into its own diphthong ; as, ta into tc ; oo into ov. 

Exc. 1. In the third declension, ee of the dual is contra 
into /;. 

II. A short vowel with the other short, is con- 
tracted into ov ; as, ot or to into ov. 

III. A short vowel witli a, is contracted into 
its own long vowel ; as, sa into // ; oa into co. 

Exc. -J. But ta pure into a. 

IV. A short vowel with t, is contracted by Sy- 
nwresis y as, t* into ±c, of into oc. 

V. E before a long vowel or a diphthong, is re- 
jected. 

Exc. 3. But in verbs, ecu is contracted into #. 

VI. 1. O with a long vowel, is contracted into 
co ; as, o/] into co ; oco into co. 

2. O with a diphthong, the prepositive vowel 
being rejected, is contracted by oynoBr< sis : as, ooc 
into at, &c. 



42 THIRD DECLENSION. §36. 

Exc. 4. But osig and osiv, i being rejected, are contracted by 
Crasis into ovg and ovv. 

YIL 1. A with o, or cu, is contracted into co ; 
as, «o or cao y into a?. 

2. A with a vowel, not o or ^ is contracted int< 
a ; as, «£ into a, &c. 

<9os. 1. A before a diphthong is contracted with the preposi- 
tive vowel only, the subjunctive being rejected. 

Obs. 2. In contraction by crasis, i is never rejected, but is writ- 
ten under: except in osvv and osig y 119, Exc. 3. 

Obs. 3. Neuters in ag pure and Qag, reject r in the oblique 
cases, and then contract the concurrent vowels. 

VIII. If the former of two vowels is c or v, or 
a long vowel, the latter is rejected; as, ce contract- 
ed i ; z/6, v ; 7]8, T]. 

Note. 2doq and o~6oq, safe, when a contraction occurs, are contracted 
by the foregoing rules; thus, adoq, crwc, VII. 1. ; adov, aoiv, VII. 1. ; ada, 
ad j Vn. 2. ; adorn;, aox;, VII. 1. ; aoac, aojq, III. 



§36. EXERCISES ON THE PRECEDING RULES FOR 
CONTRACTIONS. 

117. — The following list comprises all the concurrent vowels 
that usually admit of contraction. Contract them and give the 
rules. 

1 aa 12 aoi 23 soi 34 oco 

2 88 13 aov 24 80v 35 08i 

3 ft 14 set 25 ?]8 36 or] 

4 oo 15 fa, pure 26 jyi 37 ooi 

5 as 16 8i 27 >;a 38 oov 

6 at] 11 80 28 ijca 39 va 

7 «7 18 sco 29 is 40 vc 

8 ao 19 scp SO oa 41 tr^, rare 

9 aco 20 £ca 31 os 42 ooa 

10 ast 21 £« 32 o^ 43 oat 

11 q 22 sy 33 oi' 



§37. 



THIRD I -ION. 




















tllr III! 






action, and 




i-.'ii for the 






.//,-/' 




• 1'," 


At[i< 




.//,</< 






1 


- A ■" 


• '-') 




dmuwOii 


n'n 


ii 


q th'co 




mg 


iijjLom 




. l/JKHlth I 




001 


irjjLo 




Tiuaninr 




7U(< 




7ti.' 


TUUUWGl 




TIN' 


I 1 !" 




y.Hn'j 




%tQOg -i'.: 


otfug 




ftoZQVi 




M&ljCU 


Till, 


Xtgi 


•/.bnaoir 




11 tn 




fitQiB 


flSQBOtP 




[Ib'nta 


[annoy 


Woi 


TTO/.ttg 




nog 


qtitioi' 


qtidoa 


xiQaiog, 116. < 


Obs.S 


. y.eoazoip 




qt/.t'oi 


y.b'niCTl 




y.toicza 


Tlin 


TUlUOt 


y.touie 




y.toiczcoy 


9qh 


dqXooi 


(toes 




ijdte 


GOOg 


GO 



§ 37.— CONTRACTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 

119. — N. B. In the inflection of declinable words, ti. 

that concur are the final vowel of the root, and the first vowel or 

diphthong of the termination. In the examples of contracts that 

ill as in the table of contract verba (258), the hyphen 

(-) does not separate the termination from the root, but that part 

be root not affected by contraction, from the rest of the i 
By this means the concurrent vowels are brought together, and 
the change made by contraction, is rendered more obvious. 

120. — Concurrent vowels are not always con- 
tracted in tlie third declension, but only as dhv 
ed by the following — 

SPECIAL RULES. 

1. The accusative plural assumes tlie cont: 
tion of the nominative; thus, 



44 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



§37. 



Exc. But sag pure is contracted into ag (116, Exc. 2); as, 
Xoeag, %oclg. 

2. The genitive in tog, from rjg v tg y og, or in 
oog, not from ovg, and also neuters in ag pure and 
gag, contract the concurrent vowels in all cases. 

121. — Example of the Genitive in tog , from r/g. 

r; TQUjorfg, the trireme. 



Singular. 


Dual. 


Plural. 




N". TQit/Q-yg 


N. A. Y. 


N. tQHjQ-88g 


~sig 


G. TQi/jQ-sog -ovg 


TQUjQ-88 -TJ 


G. rqirjQ-icov 


~cov 


D. TQllfQ-si' -81 


G. D. 


D. TQUjQ-EGl. 




A. TQUjQ'Sa -7] 


7QIYIQ-801V -OlV 


A. TQu';Q'8ug 


-8tg 


V. TQu'jQ-eg 




V. TQUjQ-88g 


-8ig 


122. — Example of the Genitive 


in tog, from 


og. 




to tsi%og, the wall. 






Singular. 


Dual. 


Plural. 




N. rei%-og 


N. A. V. 


N. 7El%-ECt 


'1 


G. T8i%-8og -ovg 


78LX-88 -t] 


G. 7El%-8(nV 


-cov 


D. T8ix-si -81 


G. D. 


D. TSVf-EGl 




A. %8li-og 


TSl%-80lV -OlV 


A. TEl/SCt 


-n 


V. 781%-og 




V. TEl%-Ea 


-n 


123.— The C 


lenitive in oog, n 
h *iX™i the echo. 


ot from ovg. 




Singular. 


Dual. 


Plural. 




N. r^-co 


K A. V. 


K fo-o* 




G. r t X'Oog -ovg 


fa* 


G. ///-cay 




D. iJX'Oi ~oi 


G. D. 


D. fo-o«$ 




A. i)x-6a -co 


ill-olv 


A. fo-ovg 




V. rii'Oi 




V. ijX'Oi 




124.— Obs. 1. Noi 


ms in go and cog have 


the singular only, of 



the third declension. The dual and plural are of the second, 136 
-2 (4). Hence the contraction takes place only in the singular, 
as in the above example. The accusative in oct contracted co, 
from the nominative in cog, has the circumflex according to rule 
(80 Obs.) ; as, atdoa contr. aldco. The same contraction from 
the nominative in co, has the acute; as in the example 123. 



£37. 



THIIM) 1 








tg, (l L6, Ob* 


tb /.<j'< ;-\ 1 




to n£Qag 9 tl> 


Singular. 






_ :!ar. 


X. A. V. x<. 






\. A. V. 


roc 






1 K JCM-orOf -o s * 


1 >. v.n'-it.n 


-4(1 


-cc 


] >. XtQ-CCZl -t'.'t' -<(. 


Dual. 






I Mai. 


N.A.V. XQi-CCti 


-ue 


-«. 


\. LI 


< -. 1 ). zn;-urmv 


-icoir 


-oil 


G.D. Kc^-oroif -aou 


Plural, 






Plural. 


N. A. V. y.nt-uza 


-aa 


-a 


N.A.V. XtQ-CCta -aa -a 


G. XQ8-CCTMP 


•amp 


-cor 


G. y.to-uzo)r -uc»v -ojr 


D. xot'-itGi 






D. y.tn-uoi 



126. — 3. The genitive in ^ or sajj, not from f/g 3 
cS% off; and also the genitive in tog, contract only 
the dative singular and the nominative, accufi 
and vocative plural. Those in tug contract also 
the nominative dual. 

127. — Examples of the Genitive inecog, not from yg s eg, or og. 
6 fiuailtvg, the king. 



S ^ular. 


Dual. 




Plural. 


\. flaGiX-evg 


N. A. V. 


X. 


(taadL-ieg -rig 


Wii-eW, (98-4) 


fiuoil-t'e -S 


a 


{jtoii/.-tcoy 


\aoil-u -tt 


(.. D. 


D. 


ftaGlX- 


(iGil-i-a 


fiuGihtoir 


A. 


(taatl-tag -ug 


V, JlCGt/.-tV 




V. 


fjlCGI/.-t'tJ -flV 



JErc. But Dounfl in «><; after a vowel, contract also the genitive 
and accusative singular, and the genitive plural; thus, 

6 /ou'v, the measure. 





Singular. 




Dual. 




Plural. 


x. 


y.<> ; : 




N. A. V. 


X. 


yo-tt\; -t^ 




X<h*mg 


•wg 


yo-tt -// 


G. 


yo-tcor -cor 


1). 


X*4i 


-H 


a d. 


D. 


yn-i-i . 


A. 


- 


-d 


yo-toir 


A. 


X<H»ae Sg(l 1 


V. 








V. 


^V 



46 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



§37. 



In this way JletQCuevg has genitive IlttQatwg, Acc. IleiQaid ; 
and wyvmtg, in the accusative plural, has ayvitig contracted for 
IleiQimcog, TltiQcuta, ayvdag\ and so of others. 

>} Tzohg, the city. 



Singular. 




Dual. 


Plural. 


N. nok-ig 




f K A. V. 


N". 7io).-eeg -eig 


G. TioX-eojg 




fl6l-£8 


G. Tiol-mv 


D. nok-u -ei 




G. D. 


D. TZoA-fff^) 


A. nok-iv 




noX-(oiv 


A. TzoX-eag -eig 


V. nok-i 






Y. noX-eeg -eig 


The Ionics always 


decline words in ig, genitive iog; as, Tzohg, 


wg, like noqxig ; but 


they make the dative 


in £«'.* 


128. — Example of the Genitive in wg. 




6, ?] TZOQTig, the calf. 




Singular. 


Dual. 


Plural. 


N. TTOQT-ig 




/ n. a. v. 


N. nopr-ieg -ig 


G. TTOQZ-lOg 




TTOQT-IS 


G. 7T0QT-103V 


D. TtOQT-ll -I 




G. D. 


D. TZOQt-lOl 


A. 7Z0QT-IV 




TZOQt-lOlV 


A. TTOQt-iag -ig 


V. 710QT-1 






y. noQT-ieg -ig 



Note. The words declined in this way, besides noonc, are 6 x/c, £Ae 
wood-worm ; 6, ^ Tiyqiq, the tiger ; 6 7i6o~u;, the husband; r\ t-i-qvu;, wrath ; 
tj tqonvq, the keel; and the uncontracted ok, a sheep; — some proper 
names; as, 5 Jq»bq; — and adjectives in tq, v, which have voq in the genitive. 
Other nouns in iq not inserting a consonant are declined like nofoq. 

129. — Exc. Adjectives in vg, neuter v, have the common geni- 
tive (sog)j and do not contract ea in the plural. 152. 

130. — 4. Nouns in vg vog, and ovg oog, contract 
only the nominative, accusative, and vocative plu- 
ral; as, 

6 l%&vg, the fish. 

Dual. 

n. a. y. 

lyft-vs 
ly&-voiv 



Singular. 

N. lyft-vg 
G. iyft-vog 
D. iyft-vi 
A. iyfr-vv 
V. lyft-v 

So 6 fiovg, the ox, 





Plural. 




N. 


yft-veg 


-vg 


G. 


iyft-vcov 




D. 


lyft-vGi 




A. 


r/Jt-vag 


-vg 


V. 


ix&'vsg 


-vg 



G. fioog, N. y. Plural, |3o£^, contr. ^oi^, 
A. " /3o«£, " fiovg. 



§37. 



'JIIIKD 1 



, 



LSI, — 5, Comparatives in tav rej r in the 
cusative singular, and in the nominative, accusal i 
and vocative plural, and then contract tfa cur- 
rent vowels : 

pt).Ti(ov 9 bet' 



Singular. 

M. A r. 

N. faltl-cov 

I >. B&zi-on 

A. (teXti-ora, -oa, -co 

V. feln'-ov 



Dual 

M. A P. 

N. A. V. 
(teXti-op* 

fiblzi-oion' 



Plural. 

M. A r. 

1 K { h'/.ri-> 

5 



N. A. V. riural, Neuter, fkXtl-ora, -oa, -co. 

132. — 6. The nominative contracted, is then 
clined regularly; as, 

tan, spring, by contraction ijq, 0. fjQOQ, D. nQh 



laag, a stone, 



Xug, G. Xaog, D. /.<a". Ac 



133. — Obs. 2. When vowels concur in the oblique cases after 
the contraction of the nominative, they are moreover contract 
in the usual way ; thus, 'JfQaxh'rjg, Hercules, is contracted into 
'Hna/U^, and then declined and contracted as follows : 
X. 'HQaxX-Zg, 

G. [flnay.X-tog, contr. 'FTnayl-ovg, 

D. 'Una/l-tY, 'llna/l-tT, 

A. ' f/nay.l-ta, HoaxX~ij. 

V. 'iJnuY.Ug. 

134. — 7. In adjectives, the masculine and/' 
nine, in the oblique cases, assume the contraction 
of the neuter ; thus, 

/Ltthrott;, made of honey. 

Nom. iithr-oeig fithz-otcjcjcc fithz-otv 

contr. [ithz-ovg fithz-ovoaa fithz-oir 

Gen. psXtt-ovpTog peXiT-ovoGTjg fuhz-(wrzog f <fcc. 

rifijjsig, honoured. 

Nom, zut->' ( tig rtu-fccjoa ziu-^tr 

COntr, r//' nii-i^nu r///-/~r 

I i. cjp-qrro? riprtjGOijg ttpHpti 



48 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



§ 38, 39. 



135.— §38. WORDS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION TO 
BE DECLINED AND CONTRACTED. 

(K B. The following method of practising on these exercises will 
direct the student in his preparation. E. g. evert ft fa — Form the genitive ; 
— give the rule ; — decline ; — what cases contract the concurrent vowels? — 
give the rule ; — decline and contract, giving the rule for each contraction. 
This exercise should be continued till the student is perfectly ready and 
at ease in the whole process.) 



Evaspyg, pious, 
dfieivwv, better, 
ozdyvg, a spike of corn, 
aoticov, more excellent. 
vopevg, a shepherd. 
q)8idc6, parsimony. 
ytjQCtg, old age. 
JiyiXkevg, Achilles. 
v7zeoq)vi]g, excellent, 
clhjdeg, true. 
fivg, a mouse, 
peoog, a part. 
7ikelov, more. 



yQayevg, a painter. 
IJeQixXsrjg, Pericles. 
i%{rvg, a fish. 
tzXelcov, more, 
aazv, a city. 
tjcog, the morning, 
fiaxrvg, deep, 
jitlziow, better. 
Tzuirco, persuasion. 
?jdv, sweet. 
7i6(Jig, a husband, 
rftog, custom, 
xt'oag, a horn. 



aidoog, modesty. 

ntoag, a limit. 

zeryog, a wall. 

dovg, an oak. 

qiorevg, a murderer. 

dvaidqg, impudent. 

ooog, a 'mountain. 

cpodaig, diction. 

TiQtaBvg, old. 

ivde/jg, indigent. 

/tioxXsng, Diodes. 
I inog, a word. 
Idoofuvg, a runner. 



136.— §39. IRREGULAR NOUNS. 

1. Some nouns have one gender in the singular, and another 
in the plural ; as, 

(1.) dicpQog, the chariot-seat; 6 fioylog, the lever; 6 xal 
t] Tdozaoog, Tartarus; 6 ZQcc/ijlog, the neck; 6 dta^og, the 
decree ; 6 vcozog, the back ; 6 eoezfiog, the oar ; 6 &yog, the 
yoke, are neuter in the plural; as, zd di'cfoa, &c. The three 
last have also neuter forms in the singular, as, zb razor, &c, but 
with a variation of meaning. 

(2.) '0 deafiog, the bond ; 6 Iv/vog, the lamp ; 6 y.vxXog, the 
circle; 6 pnoog, the thigh; b aaog, com; b czaftpog, the sta- 
tion; have both a masculine and neuter form m the plural ; as, 
ol deapoi, and zd deapd, &c. 

(3.) H xtlev&og, the way, has at yJlev&oi and zd xslisv&CL. 

(4.) To azddiov, the stadium, has ol ozddtoi, and zd czddia. 

(5.) rwt], a woman; odog, a way ; nbhg, a city ; %eTg, a 
hand, feminines, have zoo yvvar/.e, zoo bdeo, zoo Ttofos, and too 
XEiqs, in the nominative and accusative dual. 



§39. tiiiki) 49 

. >re than one declension : thus, 

(l.) Some are of the id and 2 r4po- 

ro,-, a cr >me, of the 1st and ' and 

fflmaevg, -eooft M I and 3d, as, r) Sdxfwwf -or, and ri 

ffoX£V, -VO£; tiunTvixw, -or, and UOQTVQi -n> 

(2.) Some have more than o insion, in the obliqne 

one form of the nominative; thus, QoAj??, 

. an<l -/,nv 3d, 7%oi ' \ and -ro^' and -frog 

o and ro (iy.nr<w, darkness ; orog s a cha 
taQijpg, pick -<>r the 2d, and 

g the 3d ; used mostly in the dual, 1 and 

(«. and I>. plural ooaaw, oaaotg, 2<L 

(:}.) Some have the forms of different dec] 
s, though not regularly declined through all the 'jus, 

an«l 3d in the ace. Bing. drjuoa&ertjg, ace -/,/• and -a*, -De- 
v; £&XQarij$, Socrates, ace JEmxoaTip and -«a; wbcff, 
fortitude, gen. ->,y (1st), dat. -( (3d); vGfUPtj, (f battle, dat Sffut- 
rg and vaidn (1st and 3d) ; apdoaxrodor, a slave, 2d, dat pL 
dnun'6o y tac>i, 3d, Horn.; y&Uog 6, laughter, <•. yihxnog, aco *&U>- 
t<£ and ythor, after the Attic form of the 2d declension (88). 

(4.) Feminine nouns in co, and ov, of the third d 
have generally the form of the second as if from o 5 *, in the dual 
and plural, when their meaning is such as to admit of their b 
used in these numb 

3. Some, from one form of the nominative, have different 
forms in- the oblique cases, in the same rion; thus, ttfQig, 
a tiger, has -iog and -tdog ; Qspig, Justice, has -tdog, -/ro.', and 
-icrog: Xuocor, Charon, has -corog and orroc ; ;o;r, a knee, and 
8o£v, a spear, have -vo$ anil -urn*;: /oois', ynoirr,^, and /o< - 
/^ods, tfo $£//*, have two forms of the nominal: 

the oblique cases, both of the 3d. 

4. Sunn.' appear to form the oblique loini- 
nath r/flW(>) (r liver j tj/MtQ, a day ; bSSoq, food ; tpoi 

. GTHU), fat; xaoqaQ, a head; aLeupoQ, iV- 

Xboq, a bait ; on It ; ov&OQ, fa 

gx(6q, dirt ; yow, tfo haw- the genitive in 

-«nk-, as if from nominatives in </e; thus, Jqnatog, i ora- 

rog. Ovg, an ear, rnzog ; yah 

ov. 
indeclina have no chai 

in th 

(1.) Names of I (2.) The 

linal numbers from nint to sxarov, (•:.) Poetic nouns which 

8 



50 THIKD DECLENSION. § 40, 41. 

have lost the last syllable by apocope ; as, to da, for dapa. (4.) 
Foreign names which are not susceptible of Greek inflexions ; as, 
6 A$Qud\i, rov A^oadfi, &c. 



137.— §40. DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 

1. Some nouns have no plural; as, d//g,air ; tivq, fire ; elcuov, 
oil; yij, earth ; aldcog, shame ; akg, salt. 

2. Some have no singular; as, akcpira, victuals; A&ijvcu, 
Athens; bvdoura, dreams ; and the names of festivals; as, 77a- 
va&fjvaia, Panathenma. 

3. Some occur in one case only, and are called monoptots ; 
as, co idv, friend, co tzottoi, gods ; to ocp&og, the advan- 
tage. 

4. Some have only two cases (diptots ) ; as, nom. Xig, ace. liv, 
a lion; nom. Zevg, voc. Zev, Jupiter ; id ovag, the vision; nom. 
and ace. 

5. Some have only three (triptots) ; as, nom. [idorvg, a wit- 
ness, ace. {a&qtvv, dat. plur. \idoTVGi. 

6. The Poets sometimes by apocope (40-6th) cut off the final 
letter or syllable from a word ; as, xdon for xdonvov, a head. 
Such words are then indeclinable (136-5). 



§41. NOUNS OF PECULIAR SIGNIFICATION. 

138. — Some nouns have peculiar significations, according to 
their terminations ; as, 

1. Masculine Patronymics* (53-1, 1st) commonly in drjg or 
cov ; as, TlnXevg, Peleus, Tleludijg, Pelides, or the son of Pele- 
us ; Kgorog, Saturn, Kqovicov or Koovidrjg, the son of Saturn. 

2. Feminine Patronymics, commonly in tag and ig, irrj and 
icovrj ; as, Anrmdg and Atjzcotg, from Arjrco, Latona ; Adgrjazivn 
from ASoijazog ; Nriglvij from NtjQtvg ; Axoimcovt] from Axoi- 
ciog, &c. 

3. Gentile Nouns, (53-1, 2d) commonly in tjg, og, or evg, 
masculine ; and a, ag, or ig, feminine ; as, jLTzdozrj, Sparta, 
^Inaqzidzr^g, a Spartan; Zaiidoeia, Samaria, Zaiiaoung, a 
woman of Samaria. But many of these are declined as regular 
adjectives. 



§42. 



THE ARTICLE. 



51 



4. Dimi I) commonly in mc, 4©r f ftncof 

TaT)\iK a father^ nrorf&ior, a little father (a term of end 
ment) ; naig % a toy oi ;/'>/, v/, jhe*- 

( . r/ young daught a UtiU lover. 

. 4tli) commonly in //<*, or aw 
oJxog txrjfiOj a large building; fr( row, 

a built/. 

Verbal tfoune* From the first root <»f the verb (209-4), 
are formed three nouns of different terminations and signification, 
indicating respectively the thing done i the doing t and the <l< 



as foil 










Verb. 


1 Root 


Ter. 


1 Privative. 




nouco 


710(8 
71018 


-pa 

-6tg 


ftoujfia 
noirjaiQ 


/Ae a/-£ of poetry 




71018 


- T, <> 


7ioaj! i g 


a poet 


7100.66(0 


7TQay 
7i q ay 


-ft a 
-cig 


Ttoayua 
TTna'jig, 44-7 


a deed 

action or cfom^ 




no ay 


or -r^g 


rrnuy.ii t o ) 43 _ 
tiihcat!^ j 


-2 a cfoer 



§42. THE ARTICLE. 

139. — The article is an adjective word of three 
genders, and irregular in the nominative singular. 
In the oblique cases, the masculine and the neuter 
gender are of the second declension ; the feminine 
is of the first. It wants the vocative, and is thus 
declined : 





gular. 


Dual. 






Plural. 




N. 


6 ?J TO 


N. A. 




N. 


< < 
oi at 


TCC 


G. 


tov rJjg tov 


TO) TO. 


TCD 


G. 


Tcor Tcor 


TCQV 


D. 


TO) 77/ TO) 
701' Tip TO 


G. D. 




D. 


TOig 7(dg 


Totg 


A. 


toTv Talv 


Tolv 


A. 


Tovg Tag 


f 
TO. 



140.— OBSERVATIONS. 

1. The Greeks spoke definitely, by placing the article b 
the substantive; indefinitely, by omitting it or prefixing the pro- 
noun r [fyflMroff, the m ItnojTiog, a ma 
vi Oncoxog, any num. 



52 



THE ADJECTIVE. 



§43,44. 



2. In grammar and lexicography, the article is used techni- 
cally, to distinguish the gender of nouns (58, Obs. 1). 

3. The enclitic de annexed to the article through all its cases, 
gives it the force of the pronoun " this ; " as, ode, tfie , rode, this, 
lie, she, it ; Gen. rovde, rrjads, rovde, &c. In Homer and the 
other old Epic writers, the article itself is, with few exceptions, 
used in this sense. 

4. The article 6, //, to, is sometimes used as a relative. (See 
186-2.) 

141. — Note. The article b, rj, to, being commonly placed before a 
noun, is by some grammarians called the prepositive article, to distin- 
guish it from the relative pronoun oc, i'j, o, which, from being generally 
placed after the noun to which it refers, they call the postpositive arti- 
cle. 



142.— §43. DIALECTS OF THE ARTICLE. 

Singular. 



M. and N. 






Fem. 


N. TO 






?/ D. a 


G. rov A. I. P. toio 


D. TCOjTfy 


P. T8CQ 


T^g D. rag 


D. T(p I. T8Cp 






rtj D. to, 


A. top to 






rip D. xdv 



Plural. 



M. and N. 
N. ol D. roc neut. ra 
G. tcov I. rkov 
D. rolg D. & I. toigi I. 
P. toidiai and toiSsooi 
A. rovg D. tog rcog 



teoiai 



Fem. 
at D. rat 
tooi' D. rav JE>. Tacov 
raig D. &; I. raid, ty^i 

rag 



§ 44. THE ADJECTIVE. 

143. — An adjective is a word used to qualify a 
substantive; as, dya&bg ccvrjQ, a good man; 
/iiia fj/LisQcc, one day. 

A noun is " qualified" by an adjective, when the object named 
is thereby described, limited, or distinguished from other things 
of the same name. 









53 



1. I 

and in most a<lj. ■■ 

well a> Latin, in 
number, and case, bj mination . 

fein.. ; 

3. Participles have the fotm andd a hilo 

in tin 'it hm, they b 

Some adjectives denote nder by adiflerent tern 

tion in the nominative, *nd consequently have three termi 

ne form common to the masculine and feminine, and 
an adjective* of two term ; and Borne 

w bich is common to the mascuKi 

such want 1 1 i • 

5, In adjectives of three terminations^ the feminine is ali 
of the Bret declension. In all adjectives, die masculine is ahi 

icond or third; and the declension of the neuter, is alv. 
ame with that of the masculine. 



§45. REGULAR ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND 
SECOND DECLENSIONS. 

144. — 1. Adjectives of the first and second de- 
clensions have the masculine always in o^, the 
feminine always in ?j or a, and the neuter alw;. 
in ov\ thus, 

KCtloQ) beautiful. 



- rular. 

N. xaX-6g -/■ -or 

(i. xalrov 4JQ -OV 

D. xaX-m -/~ -co 

A. xal-OP -/'r -Of 



V. xaX-i 



-tj -ov 



Dual. 
N. A. V. 
xaX-co -a -co 

G. D. 
xaX-ofr -ail -oh' 



Plural. 

N. y.aX-oi -at -u 

( -. y.aX-cov -coy -coy 

D. werfb-WQ -<^V -o/V 

A. Kttin - -a 

V. Kal-oi -ui -a 



Thus decline uyuO(K\ ffOod ; XOXO£, /></(/; (T/'a 

. /.axoV, white; tiffae* manifest; anaX<> r . 

r^o.7; ant 

146. — 2. But o$ pare, and (>o ? % have a in the 
feminine; as, 



54 



FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 



§45. 





Singular. 




N. 


Qadi-og -a 


-OV 


G. 


Qadi-ov -ag 


-ov 


D. 


Qa8i-cp -a 


<p 


A. 


Q(idi-ov -av 


-ov 


V. 


pddi-e -a 


-ov 





Sin 


gular. 




N. 


qaveo-og 


r 

a 


ov 


G. 


cpaveQ-ov 


ag 


ov 


D. 


CpGCVEQ-Cp 


a 


op 


A. 


cpaveQ-ov 


dv 


ov 


V. 


cpaveo-e 


d 


ov 



The dual and plural terminations are the same as in xaXog. 
But the rules for the accents in the masculine and neuter (84), 
and in the feminine (72), must be carefully observed. 

146. — Exc. The terminations oog, and sometimes eog, espe- 
cially in adjectives denoting matter and colour, retain n ; as, 
oydoog, the eighth, oyboij ; oloog, pernicious, blot) ; xovaeog, gold- 
en, XQvas'q ; cpomxsog, purple, cpoivtyJt]. Except where q stands 
before the vowel; as, d&ooog, frequent, d&ooa] doyvoeog, silver, 
aoyvoea. 

147. — 3. The Attics often decline adjectives in 
og, especially derivatives and compounds, by the 
common gender, without the feminine termina- 
tion ; thus, 

d&dvarog, d&dvarog, d&dvazov, immortal. 
Singular. Dual. Plural. 



N". d&dvar-og -og -ov 
G. dOavdr-ov -ov -ov 
D. ddavdz-co -cp -cp 
A. addvar-ov -ov -ov 
V. d&dvaz-s -s -ov 



k a. v. 

d&avdz-co -co -c 

G. D. 
d&avdt-oiv -oiv -oiv 



N. d&drat-oi -oi -a 
G. d&avdr-cov -cov -cov 
D. dfrardr-oig -oig -oig 
A. dftavc'tT-ovg -ovg -a 
V. d&dvar-oi -oi -a 



Adjectives of the common gender are often expressed thus : 

6, // dxrdvarog, to d&dvazov. 
lov, rTjg, xov a&avdzov, &c. 

In the same manner decline — 
M. & F. N. 

7i an epilog nduccilov 

adixog aoixov 

oioaviog ovoaviov 

0[A,0Q0g OflOQOV 



from nav and cp&og 
from dfxrj 
from ovoarog 
from ofiog and ooog 



Note. Though this form of declension is most used by the Attic 
writers, it is not confined to them. Instances of it occur in Homer. 



§46. 



r AND THIRD DECL] 






§46. ADJIj OF Til' I AND THIRD 

DECLEN8K i 

148. — The masculine and neuter of all adjec- 
tives not ending in og, are of the third declension. 
The regular terminations of these are — 



M. 


V. 


K 


1. ag 


aeva 


av 


2. teg 


tooa 


tv 


3. vg 


tea 


V 


Adjectives, so far as they are of the third declension, are ac- 


me as nouns, according to the 


rules, 94. 


149. — 1. Example 


of an Adjective in ag, aiva, 


ccv 


/ /utXag, black 

Singular. 




N. [ie).-oc$ 


fitl-cura 


fxt).-av 


G. fuk-mrog 


fit).-aivrjg 


txu.-aiog 


D. fidX-an 


litl-amj 


fuiran 


A. \ii\-avu. 


[itl-anap 


Htl-av 


V. fu'/.-av 


fit'l-ana 
Dual. 


fit),- UP 


N. A. V. [u'l-ave 


fiul-cupa 


IAt).-are 


G. D. iitX-uvoiv 


HtX-aivcuv 
Plural. 


fie).-droir 


N. V. f&rOMe 


{It'l-atVUl 


fit).-ara 


G. titX-uvcov 


(suX-ainSf 


{tt/.-iUGiy 


D. [liX-aci 


(uX-curcug 


tAthaou 46-16. 


A. [isl-ccrag 


pel-afro? 


fit'/.-ava 


150. — 2. Example 


of an Adjective in teg, tooa, 


tv ; 


yanitig, comely. 




jular. 




N. yctQi-aig 


yaol-taaa 


ye.nt'-er 


G. yun! trios 


yu.nt NHnjg 


yunl-tvios, 100-2. 


1 >. ■/(<<>!, in 


yy^i-tGdu 


yiujl-trii 


\ /uni-tiia 


yaui-tGGay 


yuni-tv 


V. ye.ni 


yan!-E66(C 


yeni'-tv 



56 



FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSION'S. 
Dual. 



§46. 



N. A. V. yaol-em 
G. D. yaoi-t'rTOir 

N. V. yaQi-erreg 
G. yaoi-tvTcov 
D. yuol-tiai 
A. yaoi-errug 



XccQi-taaa 
XaQi-saaaiv 

Plural. 
yciQi-taacu 
yaQi-UGGwv 
yaoi-taoaig 
yuQi-iocag 



yaqi-evrs 
%aQi-tvzoiv 



yaoi-tvra 
yaQi-tvTCQv 
yaQi-eiGi, 47-18. 
yaQi-erra 



151. — Ofo. According to Buttmann, adjectives in «£ (but not 
participles) have eai and not eun, in the dative plural. Prof. An- 
thon adopts the same termination. When so used it must be re- 
garded as an exception to the general rule, §6, 18. 

152. — 3. Example of an Adjective in vg, tea, v ; 
f/dug, sweet. 









Singular. 






K 


yd-vg 


r)d-8ia 


t)8-v 




G. 


fjfi-tOQ 


7)8-81 ug 


ifi-iog 




D. 


rfi-ti', contr. - 


81 ?)8-8tCC 


7)0-8% contr. ei 




A. 


?id-vi', or -t'a, 


102-2. i)8-8lav 


7]0-V 




V. 


7fi-V 


7)8-810, 
Dual. 


7]d-V 


N. A. 


y. 


7)8-88 


ijd-eTa 


t)d-88 


G. 


D. 


rfi-ioiv 


7f8-8i(Ul' 

Plural. 


tjd-eow 


N. 


y. 


ijd-eeg, contr. 


eig ?;8-8iai 


fjd-ea, not contr. 129. 




G. 


'fjd-t(OV 


?)d-8idov 


?)d-8COV 




D. 


7]d-8Gl 


i)8-eiaig 


j)d-8Gl 




A. 


rfi-eag, contr 


eig 7)8-81 ag 


fjd-8a, not contr. 


After the same manner decline — 








1. 




ykvYr 

7JUIG- 


3. 
vg -8ia -v 


rul-ag 


-aiva 


-av 


vg -8ia -v 






2. 




fiao- 


vg -eia -v 


fithro-eig -eaaa 


-8V 




vg -eia -v 


rifitj-eig 


-£GGCt 


-sv 


og-vg 


-eia -v 



§47. 






LI 



§47. Dl 

s of thr«M- t« 

the 

bwi : 





M. 


i . 


\ 


1. 
























i. 








5. 





















M. 










■ 






■ 



























unpkt; • 

L — 1. ri>.-T(.'ji\ lairing *tr<i<L\ (2 A«n\ 
Singular. 







7V.7 


71 7 


mi 






JTs 1 


/ (9 * 






D. 


rr.7 <>) 7i 


71 .7 






A. 


1 Til 


rot 


rwi 




V. 




Dual. 


71 1 


X. A. 






fl | 






D. 


i rot* 


inL 


1 o«r 




X. 




n I 








I 70)1 








K 




r < 1 


n 























1 all pari 
I 

I ..ii tin- penult, it : 

.,— in). 



58 ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIONS. { 

2. Tvipag, having struck. (1 Aor. Act.) 

Singular. 



■ 47. 



1ST. 


rvxpag 


tvWao-a 


xvxpav 


G. 


rvxpavr-og 


xvxpda-rjg 


xvxpavx-og 


D. 


xvxpavi-i 


xvxpda-rj 


xvxpavx-i 


A. 


rvxpavx-a 


xvxpaa-av 


xvxpav 


Y. 


rvxpag 


xvxpaa-a 
Dual. 


xvxpav 


N. A. V. 


xvipavr-e 


xvxpm-a 


xvxpavx-e 


G. D. 


xvxpdvx-oiv 


xvxpda-atv 
Plural. 


xvxpdvx-oiv 


1ST. 


xvxpavx-eg 


xvxpao-ai 


xvxpavx-a 


G. 


xvipdvx-cov 


xvxpa<5-cov 


xvxpdvx-cov 


D. 


xvxpa-oi 


xvxpda-aig 


xvxpa-oi 


A. 


xvxpavx-ag 


xvxpdo-ag 


XVXpaiX-a 


V. 


xvxpavx-eg 


xvxpao-ai 


xvxpavx-a 



In like manner decline the adjective nag, naca, 7iar, all. 

155. — 3. rervcp-atg, having stmwlc. (Perf. Act.) 

Singular. 



K. 



K Y. 


XeXVQp-COg 


-via 


-6g 


G. 


TETVty-OZOg 


-vlag 


-orog 


D. 


XetVty-OXl 


-via 


-or i 


A. 


xexvcp-oxa 


-vlav 
Dual. 


-og 


A. Y. 


xexvop-oxe 


-via 


-oxe 


G. D. 


XeXVty-OZOlV 


-viaiv 

Plural. 


-OTOIV 


N. Y. 


xexvcp- or eg 


-viai 


-oxa 


G. 


xexvcp-ozcov 


-vicov 


-OTCOV 


D. 


xexvq)-6o~i 


-viaig 


-oai, 44-8. 


A. 


xexvop-ozag 


-viag 


-oza 



156. — The participle in cog, after a Syncope (267), has the 
nominative and vocative cog, cooa y cog ; G. cozog, coaijg, coxog, &c. 



§48. ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATION . 59 

§48. ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIO] 

,. — Many adjectives of the third declension have but 
form for the masculine and feminine, and are th< rid to be 

declined according to the common gender. r I * declined 

throughout like nouns of the third declension, of the same termi- 
nation. The regular terminations of these are aw, /;•, jf, /;, vg, 
and ovg (viz. compounds of f*oig)\ and they form tl i ac- 

cording to the following — 

158. — RULES. 

1. Adjectives of the common gender in ov, rjv, 
r]g, form the neuter by changing the long vowel 
into its own short one ; thus, 

M. and F. K 

N. acocpocop Gcjqnov prudent, G. (jcoyoov-og 

N. uun^v aooev male, G. aooev -og 

N. ulrftt'ig aXq&dg true, G. akqfri -og 

So also some in coq ; as, 
N. neyah'jzcoQ fieydhjroQ ; G. fieyahjoQ-og 

Note. But reQTjv, tender, usually has the feminine Teoeiva. 
neuter reqev. 

2. Adjectives of the common gender in eg and 
vg$ form the neuter by rejecting g ; as, 

M. and F. N. 

N. evyagig £v%aoi G. evydoi-rog 

N. dtiaxpvg ciduxov G. addxov-og 

3. Compounds of novg, a foot, have the neuter 
in ovv\ others in ovg have the neuter in or; as, 

M. and F. N. 

N. dinovg, 8171011', G. dinob-og, 100-1. 

fAOV&dwg, [toiodor, [wrod-oi I 

la probable that noix; was originally .too.-; when 
"N. dinooy, contracted diitovs, ilnoi r; and that the declension was after- 
wards changed from the 2d t<> the 8d, as was done also In yiXu^ and 
l<p«Kj from the ancient yilaw;, and tyoto?. 



60 



IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 



§48. 



-COV 


-ov 


-ovog 


-ovog 


-ovi 


-OVl 


-ova 


-ov 


-ov 


-ov 



-OV8 



-OVOIV 



-eg 
-s'og 
-ei' 
•eg 

r 

-eg 



-88 



159. — Examples of adjectives of the common 
gender. 

2. o, tj dXrj&riQ, true. 

Singular. 

N. dXi]d--7jg -7jg 

G. alrjd-e'og -eog 

D. dhjd-e'i -ei 

A. aXrjd'-ia -ea 

V. aXtj&s'g -eg 

Dual. 

N. A. V. 

dhjd-ee -ee 

G. D. 

dlqd'-e'oiv -eoiv -eoiv 
Plural. 

N". alfj&-e'eg -eeg -ea 

G. dlijd-ecov -ecov -e'cov 

D. akrid'-eai -eat -eai 

A. dlrjft-eag -eag -ea 

V. d\ij&-eeg -eeg -ea 

4. adaxQvg, tearless. 

Singular. 

N. ddaxQ-vg -vg -v 

G. dddxQ-vog -vog -vog 

D. a#ax()-w , -vi -vi 

A. ddaxg-vv -vv -v 

V. adaxo-v -v -v 



1. 6, i) o cocpQcov, prudent. 

Singular. 
N. acocpQ-cov 
G. GcoyQ-ovog 
D. G(6cpQ-ovi 
A. GwcpQ-ova 
V. Gwyo-ov 

Dual. 
N. A. V. 
GoyyQ-ove -ove 

G. D. 

Gcoq)Q-6voiv -OVOIV 
Plural. 
N. GcocpQ-oveg -oveg -ova 

G. GWtyQ-OVCQV -OV03V -OVCOV 
D. GOOCpQ-OGl -OGl -OGl 

A. GwqiQ-ovag -ovag -ova 
V. GwcpQ-oveg -oveg -ova 

3. sv%aQtQ, acceptable. 

Singular. 
evyaq-ig -ig 
evydq-irog -irog 
evydq-in -in 
j evydq-ira -ira 
/ evyaq-iv -iv 
evyaq-i -i 
Dual. 
N. A. V. 
evy/iQ-ire -its 

G. D. 
evyag-iroiv -[row -itoiv 
Plural. 
N. evydq-vceg -ireg -ira 
G. eiyaq-ircov -ircov -ircov 

D. evjdqiGl -IGl -IGl 

A. evydq-irag -irag -ira 
V. evydq-ireg -ireg -ira 



K 
G. 
D. 

A. 

V. 



-irog 
-in 
-i, or 
-e 



-tT£ 



Dual. 
K A. V. 

dddxQ-vs -V8 -V8 

G. D. 

ddaxQ-voiv -voiv -voiv 

Plural. 

N. dddxQ-veg -veg -va 

G. ddaxQ-voov -vcov -vcov 

D. dddxQ-VGi -vgi -vgi 

A. dddxQ-vag -vag -va 

V, dddxQ-veg -veg -va 



accctiU 



§4i». IBBEOl LAB A|..ii> Tl\ I 

ding in some of 
thf regular terminal 

clined like a nonn of the third d lion; tfa 

6, 

rij vc. 

Obs. 1. 

• - . 

; i. 

it 







M. 


1\ 










i 



















62 



NUMERALS. 



§50,51. 



Obs. 2. Some substantives in ag and vg, inflected in the first 
declension, are called by grammarians, adjectives; as, v^Qiar/jg, 
an insolent man ; Toavfiariag, a wounded man; but they are 
really independent of any other substantives in construction. The 
same observation may be applied to several other words, called 
adjectives of one termination. 



i 50. ADJECTIVES TO BE DECLINED. 



xax-6g, -rj, -ov, bad. 
Tuk-ag, -cava, -av, miserable. 



fiao-vg, -eia, -v, 
TeQ-tjv, -rjv, -ev, 
evaeft-ijg, -i;g, -eg, 
fielzi-cov, -cor, ov, 
Tiiitj-eig, -eaaa, -ev, honoured, 
adix-og, -og, -or, unjust, 
dh-og, -a, -or, worthy. 

cpikonarQ-ig, -ig, -i, patriotic. 
7iolv7i-ovg,-ovg,-ovv ,many '-footed. 
6, fj fidxao, happy, 

fiab-vg, -eia, -v, deep. 
[leiQ-cov, -cor, -ov, greater. 



heavy, 
tender, 
pious, 
better. 



cpofieQ-6g, -a, -ov, 
dya&-6g, -i\, -ov, 
6, ?] faxoox&Q, 
ia%-vg, -eia, -v, 
xaXXi-cov, -cor, -ov, 

cpik-og, -v, -ov, 
\lV}]\l-COV, -cov, -ov, 
ad[i-?;g, -i]g, -t'g, 
6, y cpvyag, 
ylvx-vg, -eia, -v 
Qccdi-og, -a, -ov, 
ococpQ-cov, -cov, ov, 



sonorous, 
formidable, 
good. 

long-handed, 
swift, 
more beauti- 

ful. 
friendly, 
mindful, 
unconquered 
an exile, 
sweet, 
easy, 
wise. 



§51. NUMEKALS. 

161. — Numeral adjectives are those which sig- 
nify number. In Greek they are divided into 
two classes, Cardinal and Ordinal. 

1. The Cardinal express numbers simply, or 
how many ; as, one, two, three, &c. 

2. The Ordinal denote which one of a number ; 
as, first, second, third, &c. 

Distributives have no separate form in Greek. The meaning 
of these is expressed by the cardinal numbers, sometimes com- 
pounded with ovv ; as, ovvdvo, avvrqeig, <fec. ; bini, terni ; — and 
sometimes preceded by natd, civet, &c. 



§51. M 

'. I. 1111 

1. / \r nun. 

A. kt 

In 1 nda, 

0/>*. l.i 1 the a 

01U\ 

■ 

I 

. is properly dual ; . all 

..1 La d< in the plural ; 

ud. Phml 

I >. ] 1 k Smn 

Obs i all 

gen Srtt, in I 

dual. 

plural 

only, and art* thus declined : 

Cardinal numbers &od 

{ are indeclinable. 



1 K Ti 

A. r, 



61 



GREEK NOTATION OF NUMBERS. 



§52. 



5. After txarov, the larger numbers are regu- 
lar plural adjectives of the first and second declen- 



sions; as, 

M. 
diaxoGtm 

TQICC/.OGIOI 

yihoi 
diGylhoi 

fiVQLOl 
dlGflVQlOl 



F. 
diaxoGiou 

TQUXXOGICU 

yjhm 
diGylliai 
fivQiai 
dujfivQiai 



N. 




diaxoGia 


two hundred 


TQICLXOGLOL 


three hundred 


yiXia 


a thousand 


diGyiXicc 


two thousand 


jjivQia 


ten thousand 


diGfivQia 


twenty thousand 



Obs. 4. In the composition of numbers, either the smaller pre- 
cedes, and the two are joined by Hud\ or the greater precedes, in 
which case the xal is generally omitted; thus, tievte xcd eixogi, 
or ei'y.oGi tievte, twenty-five ; m'pTZTog xcu EixoGzog, or elxoGiog 
7iSfi7i7og 9 twenty-fifth. When three numbers are reckoned to- 
gether, the greatest comes first, and so on in succession, with the 
conjunction xtti; as, v^Eg ixarbv xcu eixogi xcti mzd, a hundred 
and twenty-seven ships. 

Obs. 5. Instead of the numbers compounded with eight or 
nine, more frequent use is made of the circumlocution svog (or 
fuag) deovrog, &c. ; thus, vtjeg fuag Se'ovgcu eixogi, twenty ships 
wanting one, i. e. nineteen ships ; exec*, dvcov dsov-za ei'xoGi, twenty 
years wanting two, i. e. eighteen years. 



163. §52. II. ORDINAL NUMBERS. 

The ordinal numbers are formed from the cardinal. All un- 
der twenty, except second, seventh, and eighth, end in tog ; from 
twenty upwards, all end in oGtog, and, in their inflection, are re- 
gular adjectives of the first and second declensions ; thus, 

TZQwzog 7t q corn 7ZQ<xt70v first 

(npoTHQOg TtQOZizoa 71qoteqov first of the two) 

dtvrsQog dtvieoa, Sevteqov second 

tQirog roiTn tqizov, &c. third 

Obs. 1. In order to express half, or fractional numbers in 
money, measures, and weights, the Greeks used words compound- 
ed of yfii, half, and the name of the weight, &c. (fiva, ofioXog, 
rdlavrov), having the adjective termination ov, tor, aiov, append- 
ed to it, and placed before the ordinal number, of which the half 



01 

il. preoed 
Ob> linal number* an 



§53. THE GREEK NOTATION OP MM].! 

• 1 the I- • 

l. 'I 

the book 

J this kin 

equal parts, 13 frill be the : 

scroll. 1 ! 

fourth, or L9. 

ies of 
numbers, thus; /, 1. // . 1 <>.//•// - 

of these 

■ 

<>0. 

the alphal 

5 

. tin- in- 

///'; thai is, / . It 

>, thai all the numbers und 

an<l r mark placed r#i that it 

sento so many th< 



GREEK NOTATION OF NUMBERS. 



§53. 



105. — TABLE OF NUMERALS. 





Cardinal. 


Ordinal. 


1 


a 


r 
eiq 


TTQOYTOq 


2 


P 


Svo 


SivrtQoq 


3 


Y 


TQnq 


TQiroq 


4 


6 


reo (Tag eq 


TETOlQTOq 


5 


£ 


nivii 


TiijitTiroq 


6 


s 


*S 


ixroq 


7 


r 


knid 


Efido/Lioq 


8 


V 


OXTOJ 


oydooq 


9 


&' 


ivvia 


Evvaroq 


10 


if 


dixa 


dixaroq 


11 


i>a 


IV&xcc 


EVOEXCLTOq 


12 


# 


dwdixa 


dwdixaroq 


13 


fry' 


TQiGxaidtxa 


rqvGxcudExaroq 


14 


rf 


TtGGaQtGxaidtxa 


TtGGaQaxcadixaToq 


15 


1,1 


7tfVT*xaLdixa 


nivrtxaidExaroq 


16 


*>S 


Exxaidtxa m 


ExxairOExaroq 


17 


frC 


Enraxaldexa 


kwraxcudixaToq 


18 


iri 


bxroyxaidtxa 


6xT0)xcud£xaToq 


19 


*&' 


Evviaxaidzxa 


EvveaxcuOExaToq 


20 


x' 


UXOGV 


tlxoGToq 


21 


xa 


my.ogv eiq 


elxoGrbq TtQonoq 


30 


X' 


TQLa/.ovTa 


TQMXXOGTOq 


40 


(*' 


reGGaQaxovra 


TtGGaQaxoGtoq 


50 


V 


TZtVTTjXOVTCL 


7lfVTfJXOGT6q 


60 
70 


I' 
o' 


££ljY.OVTCt 

ipdo.u-rjxovra 


EtrjxoGroq 
Efido/LifjxoGTOq 


80 


7l' 


bydorjxovra 


bydoTjxoGToq 


90 


5; 


Evvtvrjxovra 


ivvfvqxoGToq 


100 


e 


exarov 


ExaroGroq 


200 


G 


dvaxoGioi 


8vax.oGiOGToq 


300 


T 


TQvaxoavov 


TQvaxoGvoGToq 


400 


V 


TlGGaQaxOGlOl 


TiGGaQaxQGltOGTOq 


500 


9 


7TtVTaY.0GiQl 


TtevraxoGtoGroq 


600 


X 


k^axoGioi 


Et,axOGVOGTOq 


700 


*! 


inraxoGiov 


ETITaxOGlOGTOq 


800 


»' 


oxraxoGwi 


oxraxoGLOGToq 


900 


Oh 


ivvtaxQGLOi 


EVVtaXQGbOGTOq 


1,000 


a , 


yilvov 


yvhoGroq 


2,000 


ft 


6t,GyL).ioi 


disG/vhoGToq 


3,000 


ft 


TQvGylhov 


IQiGyiXlQGTOq 


4,000 


d\ 


TiiqaxiG'/lXlOl 


TtTQaxiGytshoGTOq 


5,000 


t t 


ntvTaxiGyihoi 


TtevTaxiGyithoGToq 


6,000 


c 


EtaxiG/Lfoott 


EtaxiGyukvoGToq 


7,000 


L, 


ETTraxiG/lXvot, 


EnraxiGyihoGtoq 


8,000 


*7, 


6yt)oxiG/lhoo 


bydoxiGXiliOGToq 


9,000 


#, 


ivvtaxi,G%L).ioi 


Evvta/.iGyiXioGTQq 


10,000 


t / 


(AV()lOl 


jUVQLOGTOq 


20,000 


x t 


dltGfJLVQvQV 


diGflVQlOGTOq 


50,000 


v t 


7ihVxaxvGfxvqiov 


TltVTaXLGjLlVQLOGTOq 


100,000 


Q, 


dtxctxi>Gfji,v()i>ov 


dtxaxi.GtAVQi'OG'ZQq 


Thust 


he num 


>er 1853 is a 4 co v /. 





§64. COV fSB. 

Multipli 

i as 

■ 

larger, are 

. i ; ..- D 

. /u\ IS, 

wilh 

Obs. When 

■ four MBome the foUon 

tV, I 

mo, ^/</-' 



§54. COMPARISON OF ADJBCm 

1 67- A.dj< 1 1 ;i ^* * three de >mpari- 

son, the /' 

16v presses a quality timpi 

tive asserts it in a 

. 

i 

wbotfl rigniiiraliun admits tin- ili>tin« lion of more 01 leM. 



68 



COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 



§55. 



The superlative in Greek, as in Latin and English, often ex- 
presses only a very high degree of the quality, without implying 
comparison, and may be called the superlative of eminence. 



%dd. GENERAL RULE. 

169. — The comparative degree is formed by 
adding regog to the positive ; and the superlative, 
by adding rarog ; thus, 

Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 



evvovg 

y.cvAovovg 
anXoog-anlovg 



170, 



[laxaQ-TEQog 
evvova-TtQog 
'AaxorovG-zeoog 
anlova-zEQog 

—SPECIAL KULES. 



paxao-zazog 
evvovG-zazog 
xaxovovG-zazog 
anlovG-zazog 



1. Adjectives in teg reject t\ as, 

yaomg yaQi£G-z£Qog yaQitG-razog 

2. Adjectives in og reject g; and also, after a 
short syllable, change o into co ; thus, 



bg&og 
Sixaiog 


oofto-zeoog 

dlXCUO-ZEQOg 


oodo-razog 
dixcuo-zazog 


novriQog 

•fravpaGzog 

dJp.og 


TTOVrjQO-ZEQOg 

ftavpccGzo-TEoog 
dqXo-zEQog 


novriQO-zazog 

ftav[xaGzo-zazog 

df]X6'Zazog 


3r a short 


syllable : 




Gocpog 


GOCpOO-tEQOg 


Gocpco-zazog 


xevog 


XEVCO-ZEQOg 


X£VGO-TUTOg 


cpofooog 


CpO@£QCO-ZEQOg 


cpofcoco-zazog 


cpavtQog 
yaXtnog 


q)av£Qc6-z£Qog 
%aX£7tc6-z£Dog 


cpavEQCQ-zazog 
%uX£7T(6~razog 



Obs. The change of o into co is made, to prevent the concur- 
rence of four short syllables. Hence o, after a doubtful vowel 
considered long, remains unchanged ; but if considered short, the o 
is changed into co ; thus, '(vzl\iog has ivzi\ibz£oog, and iGyyobg has 
iGyvqbz£oog ; because i and v are considered long ; but ayoiog has 
dyoicozeoog, and ixavog, ixavcozEoog, &c, because the i and a are 
considered short 



IP 

I. Ad 



\ i;v fop AND t'Tog. 
171.— Some adj cure com] 

and $6TOQ ; \ : . 

l. Some in poft derived from substantives. 
These form the comparative and raperlati 
from the adjective, but from the subetanti 

till! 

7/, ft; 

i us are compared both 

and 

In I 

has fyaUoVy §a\ with / 

Bub 

arc oeea- 

i 



70 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE COMPARISON. § 57, 58. 



172.— §5 7. IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 

The following adjectives are irregular in their 
comparison; viz., 

'afteivodv aya&oorzarog 
ageicov aoiGxog from Jtgtjg, Mars 

fieXzioov fitlTiGTos from fiovlofjiat, I wish 
xobiggcov ygaxiGxog from Koarvg, brave 

IcpGtog from Xcj, for «#■&(», I wish 



aya&og, good 



Xcota. 



( cpeotarog 

J rr\ur\i/r>Tf\r* 



cpeoreoog < optQiatog 
( i 



from cp8Q(Q 9 I bear 



xaxog, 



bad 



cpzQTiatog ) 
xaxiwv xdxiGtog 

\ %Sl'gCOV %8lQL6T0g 

psyag, great [iei^cqv [xe'yiGtog 

TTolvg, many nlzmv nleiGtog 

ila%vg, small ilaGGcov lla^iarog 

fiMQog, little jjaawvy or peicov, or tiMooreoog ; [uxoorarog 



§ 58. DEFECTIVE COMPARISON. 

173. — Some adjectives in the comparative and superlative de- 
grees, have no positive, but are formed from — 



1. nouns; as, 

fiaciXevteoog 
xeodicov 

&§(QT£QO£ 



pctGilevg a king 

yJodog gain 

Geog God 

yXinrrig a thief 

xvdog glory xvdicov 

xvcov a dog xvvteoog 

TtX/jKTTjg a striker 

noTrjg a drinker 

Qiyog cold, rigor Qiyioov 

(poctQ a thief 

2. pronoun ; as, 

avtog self 

3. participle; as, 

EQQCOfisrog strong EOQoofiEvtGTSoog 



fiaGilevTarog 
yJodiGtog 

yXenriGrarog 
xvdiGtog 

7lh]Y.TlGT0LT0g 
TTOTlGTUTOg 

QiyiGzog 
Qpoyoraxog 

avtozarog 



iQQCOflEVEGTCttOg 



59. 



DIALECTS OF COMIV. 



71 







4. a ; as, 




• 1 




up 




-nu< 


1 , 




U dmUhj 












< j *m \ 


Ti'.T 

-irtzog 






out 


i$<D-JtQOQ 


-roro$ 


Xt'tTCO 




down 


y.ur 


-re.Tog 








kao^ttQog 


•tatog 


oniata 




bach 


ontaoa r. 


-T(U< | 


nnuti' 




md 


IEBQi 


-razng 


TTUijnO) 




foot 


.Tnnn(>) -r. 


-TC7* 


nn(Ol 




carl// 


nQoouu-veQog 


-JUT' 


vipi 




highly 




tog 






5. PREPOSITIONS j 




7TQO 


before 


HQo-rtQog 


nQo^tatog wh< 


fffArog 


VftBQ 


over 


vntn-ztnog 


VTZtn-zazog wh< 


vnazog 


174 


. — Some comparatives 


and Buperlativ< 


pared ; 












Xcoioor 


better 


Xcotzeoog 






jtieUDT, 


less 


fitioztoog 






(xccor, 


easier 


70 nuoztnov 






y.ulticor, more beautiful 


to y.u).hcQ7£oov 




***** \ worse 


j Z() ytOtlOTtnnv 

\ and ytinortnoy 




XttQOJi 






ytfuKJing, worst 


h X&Qtowtii 




xvdujrog, most glorious 


wioiotcetog 






(kajfctogt Ua*t 


t/AiytOTOTtQO 


g 




nowzog, first 


nQanfotog 





175. — Some words ending in r^g, of the first declension, are 
compared; thus (see 160, O&s. 2), 

JTi' t g, an insolent man vfioiozo-TEoog v^oiazo-razog 
7T/.torty.z/^\ an avaricious man nXtorfAziG-zazog 



170.— §59. DIALECTS OF COMPARISON, 
1. Tin* Att'u-s compare many adjectives is ~ Mid ?, by 

•tGTtnog -ir>zuTog, -ca'ztnog -uizuzog, and ~tGzei>o> rof ; as, 



72 


THE PRONOUN. 


§60. 


XdXog, loquacious 
qiiXog, friendly 
by Syncope, 
GTTovdatog, diligent 


XaXiG-rsQog 
qjilat-regog 
cpiX-teoog 
GTzovdaitG-reoog 


-rarog 

-rarog 

-tarog and opiXiarog 

-rarog 


aq&ovog, not envying 
TiaXaiog, old 


acp&ovic-teQog 
naXai-reoog 


-tarog 
-tarog 


yeocuog, an old man 
aQTTai, rapacious 
TiXeovsxtng, avaricious 
ipBvtirjg, false 


ysoai-TEoog 
UQ7iayi6-T£Qog 

7zXe0V8XTlG-78Q o g 

ipevdiG-reoog 


-rarog 
-tarog 
-rarog 
-"tarog 



2. Dialects of particular comparatives and superlatives, are, 
for xqsigocov, I. and J), xos'o-gcqv, better ; %8iqcov, P. %8Q8iMVi I. 
dat. %iqr[h ace. %8qria, nom. plur. xegifsg ; — fi8%cov, I. psZcov, D. 
fiaGGwr, greater ; with others which may be learned by practice 
in reading. 



§ 60. THE PRONOUN. 
-A Pronoun is a word used instead of a 



m.- 

noun. 

178. — Pronouns may be divided into Personal, 
Possessive, Definite, Reflexive, Reciprocal, De- 
monstrative, Relative, Interrogative, and Indefinite. 
Of these the Personal only are substantives ; the 
rest are adjectives. 

I. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

179. — The Substantive or Personal Pronouns 
are tyco, I, of the first person ; ov, thou, of the sec- 
ond ; and ov, of himself, of herself of itself, of the 
third (56) ; they have the same accidents as nouns 
(55); are of all genders; and, in construction, 
take the gender and number of the noun for 
which they stand. They are thus declined : 



§60. 


THE PBON01 


73 


/co, I. First Person, Bl or F. 


ilar. 

N. r 

UOV OTfAOV 

1 uoioTftoi 

A. tfuot (it 


Dual. 

\. A. ; Si or Wtt 

( .. I ). i«Vi'r or up* 


Plural. 

1 >. R 

A. /,/«**' 


av,ihau. Second Person, MLorR 


rular. DuaL Plural. 


X. V. cri 

1 >. no/ 
A. 0"£ 


\. A. V. fftyxoi or o-i/(') 
1 -. 1 >. tjcpwiv or aqxpp 


now 
D. r 

A. v/iag 


o*/, of 7//. of herself] of itself* Third Person, 
M., R, or N. * 


Singular. 
N. — 
G.ov 
D.ol 

A. 8 


Dual. 

X. A. (7(]pco/, u-qrw 
G. D. (rqpoo/V 


Plural. 
X. aqtu\ Neat aqt'a 

G. GCfO>l> 
D. (Tf/ IGl 

A. (Kjc^j, Xeut. cr^ta 




180. — OBSERVATION 


s. 



1. The monosyllable forms fiou, poi, fu f are always enclitic, 
21-23, ami have their accent thrown back on the preceding word. 
They are n iver governed by a preposition. 

2. In the dual, the forms rco and aj oj are sometimes written 
pep and GqHp. 

3. The third personal pronoun, like *ut in Latin, wants the 
nominative singular, and is commonly used by the Attic prose 
writers in a reflexive sense; i. e. it refers to the subject of the pro- 

Ltioii in which it stands; or of the fo j, it" the second be 

sufficiently connected with it. Tims used, it is translated of him- 

. of herself of itself d£c. In Homer and Herodotus, and the 

Attic poets, it is more Frequently used as the pronoun of the third 

on, for the nominative of which they use the relative 

he said. This pronoun, however, is but little in use. the 

6g, 1S2, and the reflexive savrov, 183, being used in- 

it. The nominative (not now in use) appears to have 

been anciently i, from which was derived the Latin is. A neu- 

form of the nominative and accusative plural, aqt'u, occurs in 

lie rode t 



74 POSSESSIVE AND DEFINITE PKONOUNS. § 61, 62. 

§61. II. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

181. — The Possessive Pronouns denote pos- 
session, and are derived from the substantive pro- 
nouns. 

1. In signification, they correspond to the genitive of their 
primitives, for which they may be considered as a substitute ; 
thus, 6 adeXybg ipov, the brother of me, and 6 ipbg ddelcpog, my 
brother, are synonymous expressions. 

2. In form, they are regular adjectives of the first and second 
declensions, and are declined like y.alog, 144. They are derived 
as follows : 



8jX8 


comes 


Bfxog 


'I 


-OP 


my 


68 




cog 


6 ii 


OOP 


thy 


8 




og 


-n 


-6v 


his 


vm 




vcoireo-og 


-a 


-OV 


our, i. e. of us two 


aqiou 




Gq)Coiz8Q-og 


-a 


-OP 


your, i.e. of you two 


?jfji8ig 
vfjteig 




7Jfl8Z£Q-0g 

vfiheg-og 


-a 
-a 


-OV 
-OV 


our 

your 


aq)8ig 


Doric 


6Cf8T6Q'0g 

6Qp-6g 


-a 


-OV 
-OP 


their 



Obs. To this class also belong ijftsdanog, one of our country ; 
vpedanog, one of your country. But nodunog; of what coun- 
try? more properly belongs to the interrogative, — and d)Xodu- 
nog, one of another country, to the indefinite pronouns. 



§62. III. THE DEFINITE PRONOUN. 

182. — The Definite Pkonoun aurog is used to 
give a closer or more definite signification of a per- 
son or thing. 

This pronoun has three different significations. 

1. In the nominative it adds the force of the English self to 
the word to which it belongs ; as, tya avzog, I myself ; o~v av- 
zog, thou thyself; avzog, he himself: so also, in the oblique 
cases, when it begins a clause ; as, avzbv ioboaxa, I have seen the 
person himself 

2. In the oblique cases, after another word in the same clause, 



§63. 



LEXIVB PRONOUNS. 



75 



it is used for the third personal pronoun, and signifies him. for, 
it, th< m ; BWQctxag avior, thou host not seen him, 

:* With the article before it, it signifies the son o uv- 

to*: txpd'QOMtog, the tame man, 

Obs. In the last Bense when the article ends with a rowel, it 
often combines with the pronoun, forming one word; thus, r 
rov, for aw <tvzov\ ruui{ h for rjj uvz7 t ; ravra, for z-</ owra, 
When thus combined, the neuter ends in o* as well as o. The 
combined ravrjj and waizd must be carefully distinguished from 
iavz\ and rot/m, parts of ot/ro?, 185. The former has the fl[p 

A//.'\ (') over the *», the latter has not 

4. The definite pronoun avzog is thus declined. 





Singular. 




Dual. 




Plural. 




N. 


avz-6^ -i; 


-0 


N. A. 


N. 


uvz-oi -cu 


-a 


0. 


uvz-ov -yg 


-Of} 


i f r / 

avr-co -a -co 


G. 


avx-cop -cop 


-cop 


D. 


air -co -\\ 
civ z- op -ijv 


-0) 


G. D. 


D. 


ait'Oig -aft 


•otg 


A. 


-0 


avz-olp -cup -oiv 


A. 


ain-ovg -u<£ 


-a 




In the same 


manner are declined : 










oAAo? 


cc/ln ciXlo 




another 








r/ cr 

1] 




who, which 






ixeivog 


I 


•y.eivtj execpo 




that 





§ 63. IV. REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. 

183. — Reflexive Pronouns are such as relate 

to the subject of the proposition in which they 

stand. 

1. The Reflexive pronouns are formed from the accusative 
^ular of the personal pronouns, with the oblique cases of avz6*\ 

They an 1 tfiuvzov, of myself; otavzov, of thyself ; savzov, of 

himself; and are thus declined. 



Singular. 

I ■. tUVZ-OV •?{$ -ov 

D, Bavr-qi -jjj -co 

A. tuvz-or -iv -6 



Plural. 

G. savz-ojp -cop -cop 

D. savx-olg -oft ~otg 

A. iccvt'Ovg -dg -a 



2. Tn the Bame manner arc declined tuuvzov and crtarzov, 
without the neuter gender, but, ill the singular number only. In 



76 



DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 



64, 65. 



the dual and plural, the parts of the compound are used sepa- 
rately; as, jjpwv avzcov, of ourselves. 

3. Homer never uses the compound form even in the singu- 
lar ; but, ifis avzov ; at avzov, &c. 

4. The contracted forms aavtov and avzov, &c, are often 
used for oeavzov and iavzov. 

5. Sometimes in the singular, and often in the plural, iavrov 
is used by the Attics in the first and second, as well as in the 
third person. They are all sometimes used as reciprocals, 184 ; 
and, in some grammars, they are so denominated. 

6. In these compounds, instead of av, the Ionics have cov, and 
retain e before it ; thus, ifiecovzov, otcovzov, &c., for i\iavxov> &c. 



2! 



§ 64. V. RECIPROCAL PRONOUN. 

184. — The Reciprocal Pronoun indicates a mu- 
tual relation between different persons, expressed 
in English by the phrase one another. 

This pronoun is formed from aXXog, wants the singular, and 
is thus declined : 



Dual. 

G. atHj.-oiv -aiv -oiv 

D. akh]X-oiv -aiv -oiv 

A. aXh'jX-co -a -co 

The Dual is seldom used. 



Plural. 

G. aXh]k~(op -cov -cov 

D. dVJ/.-oig -aig -oig 

A. dlh'jl-ovg -ag -a 



§65. VI. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

185. — The Demonstrative Pronouns are such 
as point out with precision a person or thing al- 
ready known. They are, 

<•/* </* ' r* I this, the latter, the one. 

ode yds rode j 

ixsivog ixeivrj ixtivo that, the former, the other. 

1. "Ode, ?jdt, rode, this, is simply the article 6, r}, to, rendered 
emphatic b} 7 the enclitic de annexed through all its cases, 140-3. 
'Exeivog is declined like avzog, 182-4. 



§66. 



RELATIVE PBONi 



77 



OJf the initial r id the oblique cases, 

and is thus declined : 

pilar. 
N. V. ovtog ' ri { tolto 

G. Toemv taiiqg wovtim 

1 >. TOl'T<i) i<U TOLT(f) 

A. toutov xavzrp rovzo 

Dual. 

N. A. V. T('i'TO) tufa rovrco 

G. D. TOVZOIV TUVIUIV TOVZOiV 

Plural. 

N. V. ourot «i;r«f ruvza 

G. ZOVZC0V ZOVZCOV TOVTOJy 

D. rovzoig ruvruig rovzoig 

A. rovzovg ravzag ruvza 

Obs. The correlatives roGovzog, roiovzog, and r^hy.ovzog, 
have either oj> or o in the nominative and accusative singular 
neuter; thus, 

N. roGovzog roGavzt] roGovzov, or roGovzo 

G. roGovzov, <tc. 

2. Among the Attics, the demonstratives were rendered em- 
phatic by adding * to the termination ; as, ovzog!, rovzovi, rov- 
rcoi, etc. But when the final vowel is a, or o, or *, it is dropped, 
and / put in its place; thus, ode, rovzo, ravzu, with the emphatic 
i are written 6Si'> rovz!, ravzi. When ye or de follows the de- 
monstrative, the i is placed after it, e. g. rovzo ye with i becomes 
rovzoyi. This suffix always draws the accent to itself. A sim- 
ilar emp] expressed in Latin by annexing the syllables met, 
te, ptt\ re; as, egomct, tute, meapte, kicce (Lat. Gr. 118-4; 121, 
Obs. 4 ; 123-3). The i added by the Attic and Ionian writers to 
the Dative Plural, however, is not emphatic but merely euphonic. 

3. The emphatic i is annexed also to the compounds of ovzog, 
and a few of the correlatives ; such as roGovzog, roiovrog, rtjXi- 
xovzog, roGog, <fcc, making roGovzoGi, <fcc. 



§ 66. VII. RELATIVE PRONOUN. 

18G. — The Relative Pronoun is one that re- 
lates to, and connects its clause with, a noun or 
pronoun going before it, called the antecedent 



78 



INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN. 



§67. 



1. The relative og, //, o, who, which, that, is declined like av- 
tog (182-4). It is rendered emphatic by adding the enclitic 
syllable neq ; as, ocneq, ijneQ, oneo, 403-20. 

2. The Ionic and Doric writers, and the Attic tragedians, in- 
stead of og, use the article 6, ?), to, as a relative. 

3. Instead of og, the compound pronoun oang is used as a 
relative after nag, or any word in the singular expressing an 
indefinite number ; and oaoi, after the same words in the plural ; 
as, nag oazig, every one who ; navreg oaoi, all who. 



§67. VIII. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN. 

187. — The Interrogative Proxoux is used in 
asking a question ; as, rig sTioitjOt ; Who did it ? 

1. The interrogative rig, ri; who? which? what? has the 
acute accent on the first syllable, and is thus declined : 



Singular. 

ii'vog, Tivog, Tivog, 
Tin, Tin, Tin, 
xiva, Tiva, xL 



Plural. 
N. Ting, tires, Tiva, 
G. Timor, Tir<or, ti'vcov, 
D. tioi, Ttai, Tiai? 
A. Tirag, rivag, xiva. 



Dual. 
N. A. 
rire, rive, tin, 
G. D. 

TIVOIV, TIVOIV, TIVOIV. 

In the same manner decline ong, ovng, and fUftig. 

Obs. Instead of the genitive and dative Tivog, tivi, we often 
find a secondary form, tov, rep ; 

2. The interrogative rig has its responsive oang, which is thus 
used : tig inoinae ; who did it ? ovx oida oang enoinae, I know 
not who did it. The responsive Sang is declined as follows, and, 
as will be perceived, disregards the usual rules of accentuation : 

Singular. 



N. 


oang 


yng 


0,TI 


G. 


ovnvog 


ifiTirog 


ovnvog 


D. 
A. 


o)zivi 
ovnva 


\\Ttn 
i;vnva 

Dual. 


cot in 

0,TI 


N. A. 


GdTIVS 


ax ire 


ante 


G.D. 


oivnvoiv 


aivTivoiv 


OIVTIVOIV 



§68. 



[NDEFINITB PROXOi 



79 



N. 

I). 
A. 



(HTirtg 

0)1 TlKOl' 



PluraL 

aizing 

t 



UZiie. 
(orzurar 

71(11. 

dura 

otig, declined lik«' 



ti*; as 



urzinor 

oiatun rial 

otHTTwae dazing 

3. Instead of Sari?, Bomer i 
above, and instead of the genitive and dative nvzuog, ffftm%% we 
find tin* secondary forma otov and orqp (Ofo. above). 

•1. There appears to have been, among the ancient < keeks, an- 
other interrogative pronoun, nog, tt! p no, and its responsive bnog, 
bnq, mo, which have become obsolete, except in two now 

used adverbially ; viz. nob, where i n\ { , in what way t and hence 
(Ik- responsives ottov and im\\. From these are formed the inter- 
rogative noTEQoe, -a, -op, which of the two? and its responsive 
oTrozaoog, -a, -or j which of the two ; with several other adverbs 
and adjectives still in use ; each interrogative having always its 
own responsive, — the one being the correlative of the other ; as, 



INTERROGATIVES. 



RESPONSIVES. 



Adj. noiog, of what kind? bnotog, of what kind. 

TTOGog, of what number ? bnoaog, of what number. 

mXtxog, of what age ? bnr^lv.og, of what age. 

noztnog, which of the two ? o7z6zeQog, which of the two. 

A(\v.7iMg f how? onoig, how,&c; thus, 

IJnXixog iozi ; of what age is he ? ovx oida bnip.r/.og, I know 

not of what age. In the same manner the responsives are used 

without an interrogation preceding ; as, InO.dOezo bnoiog ? t r, 

forgets of what kind he ivas" To these also may be added 

>7odu7z6g, of what country ? 



§68. IX. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

188. The Indefinite Pronouns are such as de- 
note persons or things indefinitely. They are, 



rig 


rtg 


Tl 


some one. 


Seiva 


dura 


dura 


so?ne one, such a one. 


d/log 


d).hj 


I'jlo 


another. 


Stbqoq 


i'ztnu 

s 


tztnoi 


other, a different one, another. 



80 



COREELATIVE PRONOUNS. 



§69 



To which may be added the following negatives ; viz., 



■ no one. 



ovrig ovrig ovn 

ovdeig ovdtpia ovdt'v 

ptftig [Ju'jTig [u\ti 

[irfieig ^defiia [irfitv 

1. The indefinite rig has the grave accent on the last syllable, 
to distinguish it from rig interrogative, which has the acute ac- 
cent on the first ; the former is enclitic (21), the latter is not. 

2. The indefinite deiva, some one, of all genders, and always 
with the article prefixed, is declined like a noun of the third de- 
clension ; thus, 

Singular. Dual. 

N. deiva K A. 

G. dswog dtive 

D. dam G. D. 

A. deiva deivoiv 



Plural. 
N. dtiveg 
G. deircov 
D. - 
A, 



dtivag 

rov Sena, D. rco 
treoog, like cftoe- 



Auvol is sometimes indeclinable ; as, G. 
deiva. JtlXog is declined like avzog, 182-4 
Qog, 145. 

Obs. 1. All words used interrogatively are also used indefi- 
nitely, but generally with the accent changed ; thus, 

INTERROGATIVES. INDEFINITES. 

noaog ; how great? how many? 7ioaog y of a certain size or num- 

> her, 

nolog ; of what kind? noiog, of a certain kind, such, 

nnh'xog ; how old ? how large ? Tzntixog, of a certain size or age. 



189.— §69. CORRELATIVE PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 

1. Besides the interrogatives and responsives (187-4), the 
Greek language has likewise special correlative pronouns, each 
pair of which has a mutual relation. The latter of the two is 
expressed in English by as. 

roaog ooog (Lat. tantus y quantus), so great, as. 

rotog oiog (Lat. talis, qualis), such, as. 

rqXixog ijlixog of the same age, as ; of the same size, as. 

2. When the correlation is more expressly designated, express- 
ing just as great as, exactly as great as, the former pronoun 



§70. 



DIALECTS OF Til 



81 



-1 to it, and the 
7/j prefix* 

- one - tmoiQQ ' 7/j.i/jj 

5 * j Towvzog ) rt/Mxovtog ) ' 



xog 



190.— §7o. DIALECTS OF THE PBONOUNa 







1 y '.!, /. 








Ionic. 


Doric. ^Eolic. 


Poetic. 


a 


X. 


fyttfj lyohrtj. 

ya, iyun'ya. 


ty«), tyiov. 
B. to, i'toya. 


'yo'). 




G. tmtOy tuio. 


tutv. 


B. ifiiocq. 


ini&tv. 




iHlfrtV. 










D. 


tiny. 


tuot, B. i 5 




D. 


X. A. 


did, aini?. 






P. 


itq. 


., d/t/ifq. 




<"ui„ f^;. 




' it» v. 


duo)i' f didotv. 


uu u(>)V, an /'ton'. 


r t uch<)V. 
rniv. 




D. 


duiv, d/dr. 


dtiin, dinnv, 








duucGiV. 






A. f t idaq. 






V 




- . aid, aunt. 


amuc- 


ruuaq, a^p 






Zv, Thou. 




S. 


X.V. 


tv, tit/;, rrya. 


roi'vrj. 






G. GtlO, GtO, Gi&tv. 


Ttr, Til*?, Ttorq. 


GH 1 , Gt&iV 


Gtio&tv 




D. 


roi, riv, rtir. 


Ttvr r 






A. 


r<\ TV. 


TIV, Ttiv. 




D. 


x. a. y. 


r,d, IWf, 






P. 


X Y. iidtq. 


Vfttq, 3/ 




h'Hf, T'PPK. 




< Im v. 


fiihtv. 


rumor, ii'Ktov. 


i'iuio)V. 




P. 


lit IV, IjUV. 


runt, <>'.'">*', 
I'UfttGiV. 






A. i/daq. 


. rut, r/'ite. 


vpfiaq, ruuku. 


Vftuaq. 




( 


lv, of Himself, d'c. 






G. no, oto, kno, 
i Otv. 


,5. 


i'frtv, yifrtv. 


tot. 




flip. 


I'iv. 


/iiy, riv. 


Mj (Tift. 


I). 


rrtpif. 


Gqtuit, Gifio. 






P. 








Giftuq. 
GtJtllOV. 




1>. tr% ir, o-<fi. 




aG(\t. 


(/!)'. 




A. Gift a*;. 


Gift, r}'£. 


ffqpifc aGqf. 
fiiv, vir. 


Giftiaq. 



4* 



82 THE VERB. §71. 

Ob$. 1. fiiv and rtv are used for the accusative in all genders 
and numbers ; so also is ccps, among the poets, i. e. for avz-ov, 
-?J*, -o, and ecvi-ovg, -eig, -a. 

Obs. 2. The adjective pronouns are inflected in the different 
dialects according to the models of the first and second declen- 
sions. Other peculiarities may be learned by practice ; as, for 
ijfttztnng, -a, -or, our ; D. a^iog, -a, -or ; for vfAsreoog, D. vpog ; 
for GytitQog, D. aepog ; for ovztvog, A. ozov, D. ozev, I. ozso, P. 
ozzeco ; for cpzcn, A. ozoj, I. ore'ep ; for anvei, A. arret, D. aaoa ; 
for rivog and tt?o£, A. to£>, I. rso, D. T£t> ; for tin and tmv, A. 
ro), I. Tf ro ; for tivojv, I. t^W ; for xlai, I. tsWa ; for rivd, A. 
arr«, D. ao~o"« ; for oog, oi;, gov, thy, D. reog, tea, reov ; for og, 
?j, 6v, I. sog, e/J, 6'0^, Azs, &c. : this form occurs only in the singu- 
lar number. 



§71. THE VERB. 

191. — A Verb is a word used to express the 
act, being, or state of its subject. 

1. Verbs are of two kinds, Transitive and In- 
transitive* 

2. A Transitive verb expresses an act done by 
one person or thing to another. In Greek, it has 
three forms, Active, Middle, and Passive, 195. 

* These two classes comprehend all the verbs in any language. 
According to this division, Transitive verbs include those only which 
denote transitive action ; i. e. action done by one person or thing to 
another, or which passes over, as the word signifies, from the actor to 
an object acted upon; as, "Csesar conquered Gaul," or "Gaul was con- 
quered by Caesar." Intransitive verbs, on the other hand, include all 
those which have nothing transitive in their meaning — nothing passing 
over from one person or thing to another, and consequently no relation 
to any thing beyond their subject which they represent in a certain 
state or condition, and nothing more. — Instead of the terms active and 
neuter formerly used to denote these two classes of verbs, the terms 
Transitive and Intransitive are here preferred, as being more expressive 
and appropriate, and in order to relieve the term "active" from the 
ambiguity created by using it, both as the designation of a class of 
verbs, and also, as the name of a particular form of the verb called the 
active voice. To the latter of these only, it is now applied in this work. 



'ill Bfl 

I 
fa oomm< 'iii\ w ithoul tl. 

i. i 

ihed thus ni- 

nplete * it hoiit rack in . as, 

\M ; 

i 

i an inti ■■ I 

Lilly intra 

. with tli- ob- 

an 



84 DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERBS. §72. 

intransitive sense : still an object is implied. But when we say, "The 
boy reads Homer," the attention is directed to the object "Homer," as 
well as to the act, and the verb has its proper transitive sense. 






§ 72. DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERBS. 

193. Though the division of verbs into Transitive and In- 
transitive, comprehends all the verbs in any language, yet, from 
something peculiar in their form or signification, they are charac- 
terized by different names expressive of this peculiarity. The 
most common of these are the following, viz. : Regular, Irregu- 
lar, Deponent, Defective, Redundant, Impersonal, Desiderative, 
Frequentative, and Inceptive. 

1. Regular Verbs are those in which all the 
parts are formed from the Hoot or stem, accord- 
ing to certain rules. §§ 93-97, and 106, 107. 

2. Irregular, or Anomalous Verbs, differ in 
some of their parts from the regular forms. §§112, 
116, 117. 

3. Deponent Verbs under a middle and pas- 
sive form, have either an active or middle si^nifi 
cation. §113. 

4. Defective Verbs are those in which some 
of the parts are wanting. 

5. Redundant Verbs have more than one 
form of the same part. 

6. Impersonal Verbs are used only in the 
third person singular. § 111. 

7. Desideratives denote desire, or intention 
of doing. §115, 1. 

8. Frequentatives express repeated action. 

9. Inceptives mark the beginning or continued 
increase of an action. § 115, 3. 



§73, 74. in bs. — V0I< 85 

[NFLD II' »\ OF REGULAR VEB 

194 -To the inflection of verbs belong Voi 
Moods, Tt . Vurribers, end Persoti , 

1. The Voices in Greek are three, Active, Mid- 
. and Passive* 

2. The Moods are live; the Indicative^ Suhjuno 
, Optative, Imperative, sxl& Injmit/i 

w. The Ti . or distinctions of time in Greek, 
are seven, the Present, the Imperfect, the Futwre^ 
the . to?*ist, the Perfect, the Pvuperfect, and, in the 
passive voice, the Paido-post-fature, or Y*V/// 

•i. The Numbees are three; Singular, Dual. 
and Plural. 

5, The Persons are three; First, Second, and 

G. The Conjugations, or forms of inflection, 
are two; viz., the First, of verbs in o; and the 
Second, of verbs in ^ 

Ota. Some verbs appear in both forms ; as, dtr/.ivco and dtiy.rv- 
/(/, I show. Some verbs are partly of the first conjugation, and 

ly of the Becond; thus, p\/«Yco, / <w, of the first ; 2d A. »i i-r, 
e^jf?, I went, from jS^jwi of t! !; ytyrcoaxco, I know ; 2d 

.-.•ly, I knew, from propi of the second. Such verb* 
these, however, th j alar in each form, are generally reckon- 

ed among the irregular verl 



74. VOICE. 



195. — Voice is a particular form of the verb 
which shows the relation of the subject, or thing 
ken of, to the action expressed by the verb. 

The transitive verb, in Greek, has three voi 
Active. Middle, and Pat 



86 voice. § 74. 

Obs. 1. In all voices the act expressed by the transitive verb is 
the same, and in all, except sometimes the middle, is equally tran- 
sitive; but in each, the act is differently related to the subject of 
the verb, as follows : 

1. The Active Voice represents the subject of 
the verb as acting on some object ; as, tvtcvco at, 
I strike you. 

2. The Middle Voice represents the subject of 
the verb as acting on itself, or in some way for it- 
self; as, TVTtTO/Liai, I strike myself '/ e/3Xaipa/Lcrjv 
rbv Ttodcc, I hurt my foot * covr/adjur/v ititzov, I 
bought me a horse, 

3. The Passive Voice represents the subject of 
the verb as acted upon ; as, tvxto/uou, I am 
struck / 6 Tiovg e/3Xdcp{hj, the foot — his foot — my 
foot — was hurt. 

Obs. 2. Intransitive verbs, from their nature, do not admit a 
distinction of voice. They are generally in the form of the ac- 
tive voice, frequently in that of the middle or passive ; but, what- 
ever be their form, their signification is always the same ; as, 
ft)'f}(jy.cx) or &vt]GxoficUj I die. 

Obs. 3. The Middle voice, in Greek, is so called, because it 
has a middle signification between the active and the passive, im- 
plying neither action nor passion simply, but a union, in some 
degree, of both. Middle verbs may be divided into Five Classes, 
as follows : 

1st. In middle verbs of theirs* class, the action of the verb is 
reflected immediately back upon the agent ; and hence verbs of 
this class are exactly equivalent to the active voice joined with the 
accusative of the reflexive pronoun; as, ).ovco, I wash another; 
Xovouca, I wash myself ; the same as ).ovco tiiavzor. 

2d. In middle verbs of the second class, the agent is also the 
remote object of the verb, or he with respect to whom the act 
takes place ; so that middle verbs of this class are equivalent to 
the active voice with the dative of the reflexive pronoun (Juuvrcp, 
aeavzcp, savrco); as, aiQm', to take up (any thing), sc. for another, 
in order to transfer it to another ; aigeidxraj, to take up. sc. in 
order to keep it for one's self to transfer it to one's self Hence 
verbs of this class carry with them the idea of a thing's being 
done for one's self. 



J 71. voi- 87 

Middle verba of the thi rned 

1 1 1 1 1 1 <• 1 1 1 • 1 of, or with regard to, the subject, and 
in English bj , this class may be said to 

sign king to I • ■>, / iwiA 

. or Bimplj , / 
4th. The fourth class of middle verba, include* those which 
den ttual aeti to, to m 

libations along with i lual libations, Le. Co 

;/?(/,; />,//, to d\ long with an 

' nt. To this claa 
fying u to contract" M to quarrel? u to c frc. 

5th. The /J/M cZom comprehends middle verbs, of the first 
doss, when followed by an accusative, or some other case; in 
other words, it embraces all those middle verbs which denote an 
action reflected back on the agent himself) and which are, at the 
same time, followed by an accusative, or other ease, which that 
action farther regards ; as, arappaa&ai zi, to recall any thing to 
ones own recollection. 

Note. From the reflected nature of this voice, many verb?, which 
ire transitive in the active voice, may be rendered by an intransitive 
verb in the middle voice; a*, ot&Um, / send (viz. another); trriXXo/tcu, 
1 * nd myself^ i. e, I go ; oqyiuo), I provoke another ; ooy&Ofiicu, I pr< 
V, i- e. 1 am angry; ntidw, I persuade another; niifrouou, I 
8 lf f i.e. I yield, or obey, in many instances, however, th< 
lation to self is not so clearly distinguishable. This is particularly the 
with the later wriU atarch, Herodian, Ac In the writings 

. Herodotus, Xenophon, and others, the distinction between 
the middle much more strictly observed. 

Obs. 4. The future middle has often an active, and sometimes, 

ially aim jno- the poets, a passive sense. 
06*. 5. The present, the imperfect, the perfect, the pluperfect, 
and the future-perfect middle, are the same as in the passive, or, 
m<>re strictly, they are the passive forms in a middle sense. When 
the middle aorists are unusual or wanting, their place is supplied 
by the passive aorists in a middle sense. Sometimes, when the 
middle aorist is used in the ordinary sense, the passive also is us 
B middle, but in a peculiar as, middle GTti/.ucjOca, to 

ive araXijpat, to travel, 
i he 2 Perfect, and 2 Pluperfect Active (called by the 
ancient grammarians the perfect and pluperfect middle) are ot' rare 
and, when used, are completely of an active significa- 
tion. In a few instances, it is true, they incline to an intransitive 



88 moods. § 75. 

and reflexive sense ; as, mnoifta, I have persuaded myself, i. e. 
/ am confident But still it is certain that, in all cases in which 
a verb can have a middle sense, that sense is expressed, in these 
tenses, only by the perfect and pluperfect passive in their middle 
sense. 



§ 15. MOODS. 

196. — Mood is the mode or manner of express- 
ing the signification of the verb. 

1 97. The moods, in Greek, are five, namely ; 
the Indicative, Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, 
and Infinitive. 

1. The Indicative Mood asserts the action or 
state expressed by the verb simply as a fact ; as, 
(piXbCQ, I love ; ygdcpu, lie writes. 

Obs. 1. The indicative, in Greek, being used in dependent, as 
well as in independent clauses, resembles the English indicative, 
and is often nsed where the subjunctive would be used in Latin ; 
as, yiyvcoaxE %g rig lazi ; do you know who he is ? Latin, An sets 
qui sit ? 

2. The Subjunctive and Optative Moods re- 
present the action or state expressed by the verb, 
not as a fact, but only as a conception of the mind 
still contingent and dependent: that is, they do 
not represent a thing as what does, or did, or cer- 
tainly wiU exist, but as what may, or can, or 
might exist. 

The Subjunctive represents this contingency 
and dependence as present* — the Optative, as 
past. 

Obs. 2. The subjunctive and optative moods involve a com- 
plex idea including — 1st and chiefly, the general idea of liberty 
or power, expressed by the English words, may, can, might, &c., 
from which the secondary ideas of contingency and futurity are 
derived; and 2d, the modification of this idea by the meaning of 



§75. moo 89 

;i!l the i thus, I!<- way, or am, er- 

ased in Greek by the subjunctive form^ repr< 

//r in possession of the general attribute of lib >m- 

bine with thia the meaning of tin* verb, and then we b 

era! attribute expressed by the subjunctive form, i to 

the particular action or si Bsed by 

writs; he can walk; he may be loved. 

Obs. n. The future indicative is often used in a subjunc 

and also in an imperative ad hence, in the futur 

is neither subjunctive nor imperative mood Jyntax, 699-5 

and 705. 

Obs. 4. The contingency of an action conceived of i 

not absolute, but relative to the knowledge of the speaker; thus, 

in the expression, yeyQCUpQ, he may have written, the act, if d< 

is past, hut of the fact, the speaker is uncertain. 

3. The Imperative Mood commands, exhorts, 
entreats, or permits; as, yQacft, write thou,} irco y 
let him go. 

Obs. 5. In the past tenses the Imperative expresses urgency 
of command, expedition, or completion of action ; as, tzoitjGO*, 
have done. In the perfect, moreover, the idea of permanent and 
completed action is implied ; as. ififkptijG&G>, let him hare been 
cast, i.e. let him be cast speedily, and effectually, and continue so ; 
i t frvQCt y.ax).8io{rco, let the door be shut, and kept so. 

Rem. The future indicative, the subjunctive, and the infinitive, 
arc sometimes used imperatively. See Syntax of these mo 

4. The Infinitive Mood expresses the meaning 
of the verb in a general manner, without any dis- 
tinction of person or number; as, ygcicftiv, to 
write y ytyQucptvaiy to have written ; yqacfbodai^ 
to he written. 

Obs. 6. Besides the common use of the infinitive, as in Latin, 
it is completely a verbal noun, of the neuter gender, 714. 
Obs. 7. Hence the Greek infinitive supplies the place of ; 

tl nouns called gerunds and supines, in Latin, 717, 718. 
Obs. 8. The infinitive, with a subject, is usually translated as 
the indicative. ^ I 75. 

Obs. 9. The imperfect and pluperfect exist only in the iiuliea- 



90 THE TENSES. §76. 

§ 16. THE TENSES. 

198. — Tenses are certain forms of the Verb 
which serve to point out the distinctions of time. 

The Tenses in Greek are seven, — the Present, 
the Imperfect, the Future, the Aorist, the Per- 
fect, the Pluperfect, and, in the Passive, the Fu- 
ture-perfect or Paulo-postfuture. 

Rem. In some verbs, the perfect and pluperfect active, the aorists in 
all the voices, and the future in the passive voice, have two different 
forms, usually distinguished as first and second, but of the same signifi- 
cation. The second future has no existence in the active and middle 
voices ; that which was so called by the ancient grammarians, is only 
an Attic form of the first§101, 4 (1). 

I. The Present tense expresses what is going 

on at the present time; as, yqacfco, I ivrite, I am 

writing. 

Obs. 1. The present tense is used, to express general truths ; 
as, fooa TQ8%ei, animals run. In historical narration it is used 
with great effect for a preterite tense. 

II. The Imperfect tense represents an action or 
event as passing, and still unfinished, at a certain 
past time ; as, tygacpov, I loas ivriting (when he 
came). 

Rem. This tense corresponds in meaning and use to the past 
progressive in English, and the imperfect in Latin. 

Obs. 2. From its expressing the continuance of an action, this 
tense is frequently used to express what was customary, or con- 
tinued from time to time; as, 6 inTtoxouog rov innov eTQi^e, 
xai ixrtvi^e Tiaoag r^Qug, the groom kept rubbing and cur- 
rying the horse every day. 

Obs. 3. For the same reason it is used instead of the aorisf, 
to express a past action, without reference to any specified time. 
When the action is continued, and not momentary, and when 
actions of both kinds are mingled in a narration, the continued 
action is often expressed by the imperfect, and the momentary by 
the aorist; as, i^sdQafie xai xa&vXaxxei, He ran forth 
(the aorist,) and continued barking at them (the imperfect). 
Tobg pev ovv mXraaxag idttavTO oi fidofiaooi, xai i^id/ov- 



Til 3Ea 91 

• , oi tmlXtak i t q a n o r to, koj oi m ! 
Tor ro. Th i\ j:d (aorist) 

i. in (imperf.) with tL<m. Bui when 
sol*! r, //<» y 11 bned (a 

diatel d them (imperfc). 

. 4. When the action represented by tin* in: - be- 

gun and continuing in past time, does not succeed, oi tails t<> be 
completed, i< exp nly the banning of an action, or the 

accomplish it; a-, KMoqxoq di rove (TTQOJuoras 
to mtUy upted ro force th 

III. The Future tense expr what will take 
place in future time ; as, yQcupco, I 6-ltall or v 
write. 

Rem. The future tense corresponds to the simple future in 
Latin and English ; and, in the passive voice, has two forms called 
the first and second. 

Obs. 5. Other varieties of future time are expressed by means 
of auxiliary verbs. See 199-1. 

IV. The AoFwiST represents an action or event 
simply as past; as, tyQccifja, Iivrote. 

i. This tense, in all the voices, has two forms, called the 
first and Et corresponds in meaning to the past tense in 

English, and the perfect indefinite in Latin. When the time to 
which the imperfect and pluperfect refer, is manifest from the 
context, the aorist is often used instead of them. 

Obs. 6. From the indefinite nature of this tense, it is used by 
the <»iv.-ks to express what is usually or always true ; and is ren- 
d by the English expressions, i usually] 'to be wont] i to 
a, r«g rcor cfai'/.cof Gwrffruag ohyo*; fgavog dieXvae, A 
OlfMONLT dissolves the confederacies of the wu 
£faxQarrjg idida^e robg uaO/ju^ auuj&t, Socrates was wont 
to teach his disci pics ivithout any charge. In this signification, 
however, it differs from the imperfect [Obs, 2), inasmuch as the 
hat is always customary; the imperfect, what 
omary during a specified period of time. 
T. As the aorist does not, like the imp 
Hnuance, it is often used to express momentary action, and that 
in th" Bame construction in which the imperi" 
continued action (Obs. 3), 



92 THE TENSES. § 76. 

K B. Though in the paradigm of the verb the full form of both the 
first and second aorist is usually given, it must be observed that when 
the first aor ; st is in use, the second is usually wanting, and vice versa. 
In a very few words only, are both forms to be found, and even in these, 
the two forms for the most part belong to different dialects, ages, or 
styles. 

V. The Perfect tense represents an action or 
event as completed at the present time, or in a 
period of time of which the present forms a part ; 
as, ytygacpa, Iliave written. 

Rem. In some verbs, this tense, in the active voice, has two 
forms called the Perfect and Second-perfect. It corresponds in 
meaning and use to the present-perfect in English, and the per- 
fect definite in Latin. 

Obs. 8. This tense implies that at or in the present time, the 
act expressed by the verb is completed, but does not indicate at 
what point or period of time prior to the present it was completed. 
Thus, ysygacpa z);v imazoh'jv, /have written the letter, does not 
say when the letter was written, but only that it is now written. 
Hence it is, that this tense connects the action, either in its com- 
pletion, or, in its continuance as a completed act, with the present 
time; thus, ytydfirjxa, in Greek, means not only, / have been 
married (without saying when the event took place), but that the 
married state still continues, i.e. I am married. Hence the per- 
fect is generally used to denote a lasting or permanent state or an 
action finished in itself, and therefore often occurs in Greek, 
where, in English, we use the present; as, apyipsfiijxag, thou 
protectest (i. e. thou hast protected and still continuest to protect}. 
The continued force of the perfect accompanies it through all the 
moods; as, tlnov t)jv ftvQav xey.Xeio&ai , they gave directions 
for the door to be shut, and to be kept so; 6 [itv igGTyg obzog eg 
xov nvQicpXeys&ovTa iftfiefiltjGxrco, Let this robber be cast into 
the Pyriphlegethon, and continue there. 

Obs. 9. In several verbs, the perfect tense is always used to 
denote only the finished action, whose effect is permanent, and 
therefore, in English, is translated by the present of some other 
verb, which expresses the consequence of the action expressed by 
the Greek verb. Thus, xaXsca, I name, perfect passive xexXij* 
fiai, I have been named, and continue to be so, but commonly 
rendered, I am named, or my name is. So also, from xrdoficu, 
I acquire for myself, xixrqftai, /possess (i. e. I have acquired, 
and the acquisition continues mine) ; \ivdo[iai, I call to my re- 
collection ; [ASfivvfiai, I remember. 



§77. u ii 93 

VI. The Plupeb >ntfl an action as 
completed "a1 or before tain past time; as, 

yqatpuv) I had writt ae time 

. [ike the perfect, in th 
forma called the Pluj 
meaning is the same, and nds to the pluperfect in Latin 

and English. 

. 10. The pin 
. thai the imp 

adered by the present (06*. 0), tin* plupei 
will rendered aa the imp uc/.a, Ij 

idtdotxeir, I feared, 

VII. Tii. Future-Perfect, or Paulo-post-Fui it is 

tiled by grammarians, is, both in form and si 
lion, compounded of tl and future, and deno 

1. The continuance of an action, or state, in \i 
quen >\ noXneia reXsayg xsxoGfiijaeraij 7 

q a ipi i at , He shall < 
tinu 7 . In thus <•• 'nuance, it agrees in • 

nification with th . and hence, 

2. I r is the natural future of those perfects which hav< 
quir irate meaning of the nature of the present (Obs. 9); 
as /.t/.tixre.i, he has tes left, Le. h rn 
Paulo-p st-R XtXeixperai, he will remain; x&cTTjpai, I A 

. i. e. I possess j Paulo-post-future 

y.t/.r t'jGOfA at y I shall 

.;. [1 is frequently used to intimate that a thing will be done 
q niut y.iu ,t t n q d^eraij Bpeak and it shall be done 



190. — §77. GENERAL OBSERVATIONS ON THE 
TENSES 

1. Time is naturally divided into the Present, Past, and Fn- 
; i of these divisions an action may h 
either as incomplete and continuing ompleted at the time 

f; thus, 



94 THE TENSES. §77. 

p (Action continuing; as, yoayco, I ivrite or am writing. 

' ( Action completed; as, yfygaqta, I have written. 

p _ I Action continuing; as, Zyoayov, I was writing. 

\ Action completed ; as, iytyoatyMv, I had written. 

! Action continuing ; as, youipco, I shall write. 

Action completed ; as, yeyodcpcog eaofxcu, I shall 
have written. 

Of these six divisions of time, it will be observed, tbat all ex- 
cept the last are expressed by distinct forms or tenses of the verb ; 
and this last is also expressed by a distinct form in the passive 
voice, called the Paulo-post-future. It may also be noticed that 
in each of these three divisions of time, by means of an auxiliary 
verb and the infinitive, an action may be represented as on the 
point of beginning ; thus, 

Present. fxtUco ygaqiew, I am about to write. 

Past. i^ieklov yodcpsiv, I was about to ivrite. 

Future. [AaXX/j6<x> yodqieiv, I shall be about to write. 

2. Besides these, the Greek has the advantage of a separate 
tense under the division of past time, to intimate simply that the 
action is past without reference to any particular point of time at 
which it took place, and hence is denominated the Aorist, i. e. inde- 
finite. This tense is rendered into English by the past tense, and 
into Latin, by the imperfect and perfect tenses in an indefinite 
sense. 

3. The tenses, divided as above into three classes, in respect 
of time, are farther, with regard to their termination and use, 
divided into two classes or series, which may be denominated the 
Chief or Primary, and Secondary tenses ; thus, 

Chief or Primary. Secondary. 

Present. Imperfect. 

Perfect. Pluperfect. 

Future. 1 Aorist. 

Future-passive. 2 Aorist. 

The chief tenses are employed in the direct address, to express 
actions as present or future. The secondary are used in the reci- 
tal of these actions as past ; and hence are sometimes denomi- 
nated the Historical Tenses. 

4. In the English expression of the moods and tenses, <fcc, great 
precision cannot be expected. Their signification often varies accord- 
ing to the conjunctions and particles with which they are joined, and 
hence, a corresponding variety of translation becomes necessary. In 
consequence, also, of the number of independent forms being greater in 



$78. 






i iik..- 

■ 



14 Well UA 



I" 



. ai'XII.i \i:v VEB 

i 
i 

-, with more ininul 
l. The Bubjai 

to the 



96 PARTICIPLES. § 79. 

participle; as, ela&ov rwh SmacravT*? ayysXAovq, some persons enter- 
tained angels unawares. 

7. A variety of other circumstances are expressed by joining appro- 
priate adjectives and participles, with djul; as, qavtobq r t v &vo)v, he 
sacrificed openly. 

8. Strong and earnest desire is expressed by the imperfect or second 
aorist of ogra'/w, agreeing with its subject, and commonly followed by 
the infinitive; the particle the is sometimes joined with it, and some- 
times not ; as, Mr; bytlov wxav, I wish that I had not conquered Ai$ 
oqjtlov /Ativan,, Would to God I had stayed. 

9. Imperious duty or necessity is expressed by verbal adjectives in 
rioq (202), either agreeing with their substantives, or, what is more 
usual, having their agents in the dative, and governing their objects as 
the verbs do from which they are derived ; as, 6 ayado^ uovoq xiu >;- 
teoc;, the good man alone must be honoured. 

10. In some cases, there appears to be a pleonasm in the use of cer- 
tain auxiliaries, where there is really none ; for by analyzing the 
expressions, _we shall find every word having its own distinct force ; 
thus, i/.u)v dvav iTti/.aOouevoq, is incorrectly translated, forgetting will- 
ingly. The full force of the words may be expressed in English thus : 
willing to be after forgetting — according to the ancient Celtic idiom. 
(See No. 4; also Construction of the Participle, § 177-IV.) 



§ 79. PARTICIPLES. 

201. — Participles are parts of the verb, and, 
without affirmation, express its meaning considered 
as a quality or condition of an object ; as, 

iyAi>£ ft Xin cor, he came seeing. 

otccg 'Auzcodtr ss?qv& avzor, standing below he praised him. 

Participles are varied like adjectives, by gender, number, and 
case, to agree with substantives in these accidents. If the idea 
of time be separated from the participle, it becomes an adjective. 

Every tense in Greek, except the imperfect and pluperfect, has 
its participle, — a circumstance which gives the language a decid- 
ed advantage over the Latin, which has no present participle pas- 
sive, nor past participle active. 



§ 80. VERBAL OR PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES IX tog 
AND teog. 

202. — The Greeks have verbal adjectives, which, both in signi- 
fication and use, resemble participles. They are formed by adding 
the syllables tog and tiog to the first root of the verb ; thus, 



§80. PABTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES. 97 

Re. Verbal Adj. 

h)< fay tog fay.Tog, mid, 

gpdiw, lie (///.£ riog (pdrp 

Th< 1 from liquid verba add tog and riog to Qm 

ond i 

2d K. ror- «0£, rurtog, to be extended. 
"in pure ■ 

mm , • ; thus, from yilfcjj the 

l^riot; fc>ut from cuqka, cuqrn 

Obs. l. The verbal adjectives in to*- have commonly a pas- 

QificatioD, and either correspond to the Latin perfect jxir- 

; as, noitjog, /actus, made ; yvrog, aygestus ; gtqe~ 

moQi ; or, they convey the idea of ability and capacity, 

expressed by the Latin adjectives in His ; thus, oQarog, visibilis, 

dxovGTog, audible, (fee. Frequently, however, they have 

an active signification; as, xcclvmog, concealing ; ^LianTog, blam- 

Obs. 2. Those in rtog correspond to the Latin future partici- 
• the idea of duty, necessity, or obligation ; 
fi/jjtog, amandus, ivho ought to be loved ; Tzoztog, bibendus, 
"which ought to be drunk." 

Obs. 3. The verbal rt'ov, in the neuter (among the Attics 
more commonly tea in the plural), corresponds to the Latin ge- 
rund ; thus, TioTtov (Attic nortec) iart, bibendum est ; nofafirfzea 
lum est. 

r the construction of these adjectives, see syntax, §147, 
Rules I. and IL 

203. — ACCENTS OF THE VERB. 

Iii verbs, the accent is placed as far from the 
end of the word as the quantity of the final sylla- 
ble will permit (22 & 24). 

204. — EXCEPTIONS AND VARIETIES. 

1. Monosyllables, if long, are circumflected ; as, co, eJg, , 
:' it Ifa. 

liable after the characteristic, unless followed by a 
ia circumflected — 
. hi the active , and the middle voice in the future of liquid 
Verl .7«wk.n GTtEQMg, <7mnth\ (jxtnnrtna, &a, be- 

can tcted for tsmqi 



98 CONJUGATION. § 81. 

2d. In the passive voice, in the subjunctive of the aorists ; and 
in the subjunctive present of verbs in [u ; as, wcptf-co, 
-fig, % — xvnco, zv7if[g, <fce. — zt#co, Tiftcopai. 

3. The third person of the optative in ot and ai has the acute 
accent on the penult; as, tszvcpoi, aosoai, except in the ftitures, 
No. 2— 1st. 

4. The imperatives, £k&i f sins, svqs, iSs', hafts, have the accent 
on the final syllable ; but the imperative, 2 aor. middle, 2d person 
singular, circumflects the final syllable ; as, tvtiov — except ysvov, 
rqanov, svsyxov. » 

5. The infinitive of the 2 aorist active circumflects the final 
syllable ; as, ivnsiv. 

The infinitive of the 1st aorist active, 2d aorist middle, both 
aorists passive, all the perfects, and the infinitives of the active 
voice in the 2d conjugation, have the circumflex on the long pe- 
nult, and the acute on the short. 

6. The participles of the 2d aorist active, of the present active 
of verbs in \ii, and all ending in cog or sig, have the acute accent 
on the final syllable ; as, tvttcov, iorag, didovg, isrvcfcog, zwp&eig. 

The participles of the perfect passive, have the acute accent on 
the penult ; as, rsrvfxfisrog. 

V. Elfii and cpqiAi have the acute accent on the final syllable 
in the indicative (except the 2d sing.) ; thus, soil, Cft^t, &c. 



§81. CONJUGATION. 

205. — The Conjugation of a verb is the regular 
combination and arrangement of its several voices, 
moods, tenses, numbers, and persons, according to 
a certain order. 

206. — Of regular verbs, in Greek, there are two 
conjugations ; viz., the first, of verbs in co ; and the 
second, of verbs in jut. 

207. — Verbs of the first conjugation, in the ac- 
tive voice, end in co, and in the middle and pas- 
sive, in ofcui. 



Tin 99 

a:. OP 7BBB8 IX &. 

>8.— Verbs of the first conjugation consist of 
the following parts ; viz., 

1. The root or stem } which is unchang cept 
as modified by the rules of euphony ; and, 

2. Those parts which, by their changes, distin- 
guish the voices, moods, tenses, numbers, and per- 
sons, These parts are the tmse-xign^ the augment^ 
and the terminations. 



§ 82. THE ROOT. 

209. — 1- The Root is tliat part of the verb 
which remains unchanged throughout, except as 
required by the rules of euphony, and serves as 
the basis of all the other parts. 

2. The final letter of the root marks the char- 
acter of the verb, and is therefore called the char- 

-tic ; it is either a voiced or a mute, or a 
liquid. 

When the characteristic is a vowel the verb is 
called ]>tir< ; — when a mute, the verb is called 
m tit, : — and when a liquid, the verb is called 
liquid. 

3. In regular verbs, the characteristic is the 
letter next the termination in the present indica- 
tive ; as, y y in /J-yco ; % % in tq^co ; t, in (ptkkco. 

Exa But if of two consonants the last is r or 
a liquid, the first is the characteristic; as, *, in 
Tvrcjco and uuoi:tco] /u, in rtuvco. 

FINDING THE ROOT. 

4. Rule. Strike oft" from the present indicative 
all that follows the characteristic ; what remains 



100 THE ROOT. § 82. 

is the root / thus, Xey-co, tsqti-cq, /LiaQTv-roo, ra/n- 
vco ; roots Xty, tzqtc, [acjcqtz, rt/u. 



OBSERVATIONS. 

210. — Obs. 1. The letter r is frequently added to the root be- 
fore the termination in the present and imperfect, apparently to 
strengthen the sound, as in Tvnrco. The characteristic, if a mid- 
dle or aspirate mute, coming before this r, is of course changed 
into its own smooth (43-2) ; thus, pay before rco becomes pan, 
and the verb, flamco. Hence, in order to find the root, the char- 
acteristic changed by euphony must be restored as in the follow- 
ing words : 



fiXaTTtCQ 

hqvvztco 
Kalv7trco 


by 


euphony for 
u 

u 


p.dfirco 

XQvfitCO 

xaXvfirco 


§ 

1 


pM$ 
XQV(1 

xakvfi 


anrco 

ftaTZTCQ 
ftdjlTCx) 




u 

u 
it 


dqzco 

fidcpzco 

{rdcpzco 


9 


dq) 

pay 
&acp 


GHOLTttO) 

dQVTZton 




u 

u 


oxdcpzco 
dgvcpzco 




6xaq) 

doi'ty 


QL7ITCQ 




u 


Qi'cpzw 


9 


ptqp 


qdnzco 




u 


QUtyZCO 


<P 


Qdy 


Also Gpvxco 


and 


tyv%co have their roots opvy and %pvy. 


Note. The preceding list contains all the wor< 
;ion is applicable. 


is to which this obser 






SECONDARY FORMS. 







211. — Obs. 2. Many verbs have a Secondary form in the pre- 
sent and imperfect, which has come into general use, while the 
original form or theme, has become obsolete, § 116. The root 
of the theme nevertheless remains the proper root of the verb 
in the other tenses, and will be found in the future by striking off 
ceo. If the letter next preceding be a consonant, it is the charac- 
teristic of the verb. If it be a long vowel, either that or its cor- 
responding short vowel is the characteristic. But if it be a short 
or doubtful vowel, the characteristic is either that vowel itself, or 
a r-mute, which has been rejected before crco for the sake of sound, 
44-8. This observation applies in the following cases ; viz., 

1st. Verbs in aaco (rrco) or £go, are secondary forms, derived 
from primary, whose characteristic is a x-mute (commonly y) 



§82. THE HOOT. 101 

when th ends in £w; orar-mute (commonly 8) when 

tli«- future enda in gm. The chara , fur 

the supposed primary form. Thus, 

iid.irv form. Future. Char. Primary form, ft 

TTnuaao) (mo) ff£a£<0 r HQttfm finuy 

xod£ y.nu^co y xqayca HQW i 

;oj (ttco) x'/.ugco d rr/.utico TT/.ad 

^oj ataCUNO d cfoddco >u8 

ioaatu \ *Q*<% m 7 aoirayco dnrruy 

s ' b ( UOTZUGCO d UOTTado) UhHub 

Exa The following arc the verbs of thi whieh have not y or 

J for their ch \ iz., fi/;GG(o, qoiggio, qyiGGo), y.oqvggo, ami 

licaopcu, which have their roots respectively (tyx* °( J, 7» <f(> L *f *Q0V& 9 
/at, making the primary forms /?/,'/o>, ooi'/o), (f(ji/.(t), y.ooiOo), and '/.Ltoucu. 

2d. Most verbs in g/.co are secondary forms from pure verbs 
in oo (§ 116, I and II). The primary forms will appear by drop- 
ping u/.\ thus, y^nday.coy primary form yt t nuco, Root, yrjQCL 

3d. Many verbs, irregular in the present and imperfect, are 
secondary forms from obsolete verbs which furnish the roots for 
the other tenses. See §§ 116 and 117. In nearly all snch verbs, 
the first root will be found by taking gco or aofxui from the future 
as found in the Lexicons; thus, 



Secondary form. 


Future. 


1 Root. 


Primary form. 


).uu3ui'co 


)j' t \louai 


hfi 




h\$(o 


/AiiOtaco 


MfiCD 


lrj& 




h' t <r(0 


BW&aVOflCU 


mycotica 


nev& 




7T£v(rco 


iiOJ 


@i]GO[UZI 


(la 




{idco 



. In redaoing secondary into primary forms in this manner, the 

vowel before (Tot and gouco, in the future, made long by §96, K. 1, must 

icd ; and the r-mute, rejected by g 04, K. 2, must be i 

\e the proper form of the root ; as, ftodvm and ).av&avu), above. In 

all mute verbs, the proper characteristics concealed by combining with 

go, Ac, will always be seen in the 2 aorist, or % 1 perfect. Thus in ).av- 

r. 18 t).af>ov, showing the characteristic to be &, and 1 root, 

[Uciitly, bid-. Hence 

TO FIND THE ROOT IN SECONDARY FORMS. 

212. — Rule. From the future indicative active 
or middle as found in the Lexicons, strike off aco 
or ao/uai] what remains is the root, cither in its 
simple form, or modified by the rules of euphony; 
thus, 



102 



THE SECOND EOOT. 



■ 83. 



Secondary form. 


Future. 




Root. 


TIQCLGGCO 

Xod^eo 

TlXciGGeO 


nqd^eo elide 

y.od<zeo 

nXdaco 


aco leaves 

GCO 

Geo 


no ay, 44-7 
xgay, 44-7 
TzXad, 44-8 


yod^eo 


cpoaGeo 


Geo 


cpQud, 44-8 


ynoaGxeo 
Xa\i$dveo 
Xavddveo 


yrjodacQ 

Xt/ipGOfxai 

Xrjaco 


Geo 

GOflCU 

Geo 


ynga 

Xr$, 44-6 
Xrj&, 44-8 


TZVV&dvOfjlCU 

fiaiveo 


7ZEVGO[lCU 


GO\iai 
GO\nai 


7TEV&, 44-8 

(5a 



213. — 3. Many verbs change the form of the root in the se- 
cond tense*, i. e. in the second future passive, and second aorist ; 
and in the second perfect, and second pluperfect active. These 
forms, for the sake of distinction, are called the second and the 
third root — the root of the present being the first root. 



§ 83. THE SECOND ROOT. 

214. — The second root is always formed from 
tkejirst, according to the following 

RULES. 

1. A long vowel in the first root is changed in- 
to a in the second ; thus, 

Verb. 1st R. 2d R. 

G}j7TeO, Gt]7Z GOLTt 

roeoyeo, iqeoy zqay 

2. In diphthongs, a is retained and e is reject- 
ed; as, 

Verb. IstR. 2d R. Verb. 1st R. 2d R, 

epaiveo, epcuv cpar XeiTteo, lew hx 

xcueo, xai xcc ytvyeo, cpzvy qvy 

JExc. But liquid syllables change si into a, poly- 
syllables into € ; as, 

Verb. 1st R. 2d R. 

Diss. THveo, re iv rav 

Polysyl. dysLQeo, dyeio dy£Q 



§84. TIIK THIRD ROOT. 103 

3. Tn dissyllables not pure, s before or after a 
liquid, is changed into a\ as, 

Verb. • R. 2d K. Verb. IstR. 2d R. 



tiuvtOj t tu rate 

8t'nXG), dtnx Soqx 



ordXXcj, aztX oral 

7i).ty.co, nltx n).ax 



Exc. But t remains unchanged after I, in )Jyco, filtncoj q/Jyo. 

4. Pure verbs in exco and to reject the a and s 
(216, Exc. 1) ; as, 

Verb. 1st R. 2d R. 

fivxao) fivxa [ivx 

Gzvytco czvye orvy 



§84. THE THIRD ROOT. 

215. — The third root is always formed from the 
second, according to the following 

RULES. 

1. e 9 of the second root, is changed into o in 
the third ; as, 

Verb. IstR. 2d R. 3d R, 

fa'yco, ley ley Xoy 

ayeiQCO, dyeto dysQ ot/oq 

2. a> of the second root, from t or sc in the 
first, is changed into o in the third ; as, 

Verb. IstR. 2d R. 3d R. 

tz/Jxgj, nlex n7.ax nXox 

Gnei'QCo, GTiei-Q Gnaq gtioq 

Ttiroo, thv rav tov 

ttfivoo, rep ra\i ro\i 

3. i, of the second root, from ti of the first, is 
changed into 01 ; as, 

Verb. 1st R. 2d R. 3d R. 

Xeinco, XtiTT Xin lout 



104 THE THIRD ROOT. §85. 

4. a, of the second root, from tj or at of the 
first, is changed into r\ in the third ; as, 

Verb. IstR. 2d R. 3d R. 



61J7TCO, 


<51]Tt 


can 


Gr\7t 


cpaivcQ, 


yaw 


cpav 


(p?]V 


ikewise &dllco, 


&al 


#al 


dril 


xld^otj 


vXay 


yXay 


*My 



§ 85. VERBS WHICH WANT THE SECOND AND THIRD 

ROOTS. 

216. — Many verbs want the second tenses, and consequently 
the second and third roots. (198, Obs. 7, N. B.) These are as 
follows : 

Rule 1. Pure verbs want the second root. 

Exc. 1. The following primitives are excepted : yodco, anda), 
fivxaofiai, yrj&lco, dovTZsco, xzvTteoj, Qtyeco, mrvm, ozvysoo, toqzco, 
Xrjxsco, &OQ8co 9 <jtbq£G), o"//co, daioo, %aico y and a few others. 
Axovco has the third root dxo, but no second. 

Exc. 2. A few dissyllables in ico and vco have the second and 
the third root the same as the first. 

Note 1. Several of these are reckoned with anomalous verbs, § 117. 
Some verbs derive their second and third roots from obsolete presents ; 
such as, alqm and many verbs in dvo) and dvojucu, for which see the 
same section. 

Rule 2. Derivatives in zvco, a£co, iC,co y aivco, 
vvcjy want the second root. 

Note 2. Primitives, in these terminations, usually have the second 
root. 

Obs. 1. Several verbs which have no second root, and conse- 
quently no second aorist in the first conjugation, derive the sec- 
ond aorist active and middle from forms in the second conjuga- 
tion ; thus, dvco, 2 a. edvv, from ATMl\ fiuivco, 2 a. e[3t]v, from 
BHMI\ yiyvcooxco, 2 a. eyvcov, from riVUMI, derived from 
yvoco. 

Obs. 2. Many verbs not included under the above rules never 
use the second tenses ; others have them only in the passive 
voice ; others again are used in these tenses only by certain writ- 



f 86. <yt. L06 



§8«;. mi. 

2] 7. -TI which 

mail ;n all p; It 

all thai | 

i!i the 
Befl which h:r- 
, : l- 1 the ' 

1. / 

-G- -G- 

-G- -G- 

— — 

• -x- 

— — 

— — 

— — 

ii <j ur x* 
5* 



106 



THE AUGMENT. 



87. 



Obs. 3. If the characteristic is a vowel, or a r-mute, or a li- 
quid, the sign of the perfect and pluperfect active is x. 

Obs. 4. In all the tenses, except those in the preceding table, 
i. e. in the second aorist through all the voices, — the second per- 
fect and second pluperfect active, and the perfect and pluperfect 
passive, — and also, in liquid verbs, the first aorist active and mid- 
dle, the tense-root and the verb-root are always the same. So 
also in the present and imperfect in all voices. 

Exc. But irregular verbs, and those which fall under the Ex- 
ceptions and Observations, § 82, have the tense-root in the present 
and imperfect different from the verb-root ; though, like other 
verbs, it consists of all that precedes the termination in the present 
indicative. Thus, for example, in Tzodaoco, the tense-root in the 
present and imperfect is nodaa, while the verb -root is nody. In 
laii^dvco, the tense-root of the present and imperfect is laiiftdv, 
while the verb-root is h'$ ; and so of others. 

219. WORDS FOR PRACTICE ON THE PRECEDING RULES. 

[In the following list of verbs, tell the characteristic, the root, and 
the kind of verbs — form the second and the third root (if in use), and 
give the rule for each.] 



tv mx co, I strike. 
Xtyco, I say. 
%aiQtt), 1 rejoice, 

G7T81QCQ, I SOW. 

TQt'cpco, I nourish, 
ayco, I lead. 
xod£co, I cry aloud, 
ftdllco, I cast. 
Tiuftco, I persuade, 
aivsco, I praise. 
clfiZiftcQ, I change, 
aooco, I plow. 
ptentQ, I see. 



leiTHD, I leave. 
TQCoyco, I eat. 
Tzltxco, I fold. 
dtyti'Xco, I owe. 
LidoTZzco, I seize. 
nodaow, I do. 
qod^co, I say. 
(paivco, I show. 
doTzdLco, I plunder. 
fyeiQW, I awake. 
&vco, I sacrifice. 
y,a)Jco, I call. 
xttQco, I shave. 



deidco, I fear. 
d(dday.co, I learn. 
TQtTzco, I turn. 
Luaivco, I pollute. 
7T8L17TCO, I send, 
vt'bico, I assign. 
Lie'vco, I remain. 
TTOitco, I make. 
cjtMxo, I send. 
fieigoj, I divide, 
mnodtto, I try. 
Qaivco, I sprinkle, 
nofftto, I burn. 



220.- 



-§ 87. II. THE AUGMENT. 



1. The augment is a prefix joined to the root in 
the preterite tenses. 

2. There are two kinds of augments, the temporal and sylla- 
bic. 



§88. mi: ai 107 

augment . when the to with 

a rowel or diphthong, and lengthens t!i«- initial roweL 
rhe syllabic augment i^ used when the \ 

The imperfect and aorista have the augment 
in the indicative only. The perfect, pluperfi 
and paulo-post-future, retain it through all the 
moods. 

0. The present and future have no augment 



221.— §88. RULES FOR THE AUGMENT. 

1. If the verb begins with a consonant, the aug- 
ment ^ is prefixed; as, rv^rcoy trv^vov ; qixtcd, 
$qqmtov 9 43-5. 

2. The perfect reduplicates the initial consonant 
before e ; as, tv^tco, perfect rervcpcc. 

Ere. 1. The aspirate reduplicates its own 
smooth; as, &ov/liu£& 3 perf. Ttfrau/Ltaxcc ; cfaivco, 
perf. nkcpayxciy 43—4. 

Efcc. 2. Verbs beginning with q, yv 3 (fO, or a 
before or after a consonant, do not reduplicate: 
thus 



8g £uco t&pta 

67i oTTtvdco tanevxa 



at GTQtffCO tGTQOCfU 



Q ntXTCO BQQUpa 

yy yn'xo r/rcoxa 

q P «) frun Hj ihxa 

no v/.a 

1. Son i th at, and ftt t do 

as, 

XTp/foa y/.a y.Tt'^co txrrxa 

nr Tizotco intoqxa 

And sometimes, though rarely, those beginning with y)., $h 



108 



THE AUGMENT. 



§38. 



3. When the perfect reduplicates the initial 
consonant, the pluperfect receives a new augment ; 

TVTTTco rszvcpa STszvqsiv 

Otherwise not ; as, qittzco sooicpa SQQicfsiv 

4. If the verb begins with a, s 3 o ; or with av, 
cu, oi, the initial vowel is changed into its own 
long, and c of the diphthong is subscribed ; as, 



chv co 
fItti^co 


fjwov 

i'jlmtov 


avSdvco 
air too 


I'v'Savov 
r { zsov 


bnd^co 


tona^ov 


oixCQco 


CpXl^OV 



Exc. 1. E is often changed into its own diph- 
thong; as, 

s%co I have sVfor 

The verbs which change s into si are the following: sdco, 
s^ofica, i&iXco, sh'oaco, slxw, sXxsm, shewn, slsco, D.co, sno\iai, 
sneo (this verb retains the augment through all the moods), eodo), 
sqs'co, sqtzco, so7zvLco, sqvcq, SGZtjMO, sazidco, syco, and SCO, 20. 

Exc. 2. If the verb begins with eo, the s is un- 
changed and the o augmented ; as, togrdCco, 
ecoQra^ov. 

So also some 2d pluperf. active ; viz., from the 2d perf. so7.7ia, 
pluperf. fcoXttsiv ; — soma, scpxsiv ; — sooya, scooystv. 

Exc. 3. J^co, I blow; dtco, I hear ; chjMaaco, I am unused ; 
drjdi^Ofiat? I loathe ; retain the initial vowel unchanged ; as also 
some verbs derived from olxog, ofoog, oleovog, and ota£ ; as, olvlCco, 
I smell of wine, oivJQw ; and also the 2d perfect active when the 
root begins with 01 ; as, old a, plup. oidsiv. 

5. If the initial vowel is not a, s, o ; or av, cu, 



oi, it is not augmented: 
made long ; as, 



but i and v short are 



c 


V/.o\iai 


ixofinv 


SI 


sixaQco 


tixa^ov 


V 


^v^oiQco 


c vftoi£ov 


sv 


svoicjy.co 


SVQIGV.OV 


n 


?)y/co 


IflSOV 


ov 


OVTCUCO 


ovza^ov 


CO 


co&co 


co&ov 


See Ex 


ceptions, 22' 


i-4, 5. 



§89,90. 109 

1. Wi. 

a with i 

. II. 

■ 

i 

. / 
Aw, 



1. I 






110 THE AUGMENT. §90. 

ried out ; elufts and laps, he took ; yyev and dyev, he brought ; 
idt'dexro, dt'dexro, and de'x-TO, he had received, 

Obs. 1. From the antiquity of the Ionic, this has been usually 
considered a peculiarity of that dialect ; but it occurs frequently 
in the Attic writers, particularly in choruses ; as, ov&t] for iov&t], 
he was driven ; yeyerqxo for iyeyevijzo, it had been ; drdlcoxa for 
arftcoxa, I have spent. 

2. In Homer and Hesiod, aorists often receive the reduplica- 
tion, which remains through all the moods ; thus, xexdiico for 
xdfxco, I shall have laboured ; leldfiecj&cu for Xdfieo&ai, to have 
received. 

3. In all dialects, verbs beginning with X and \i frequently 
take el or si as the augment of the perf. ; as, eilycpa for )Jlj](pa } I 
have taken ; electoral for [Aepaozai, it has been decreed. 

4. The Attics often change the simple augment e into i], and 
augment the initial vowels of verbs beginning with el and ev ; as, 
tidvvdfiqv for idwdpyv, I was able; rpiciQov for erxa^ov, I assimi- 
lated ; r[v*fOiii]v for ev%6[j,nv, I prayed ; ijdeiv for eideiv, I Jcneiv. 

5. In verbs beginning with a, e, o, or with av, at, oi, the At- 
tics sometimes prefix £ instead of the usual augment ; i. e. they 
use the syllabic instead of the temporal augment ; as, eaia for 
?j$a ; idXooy.a for ip.coxa. Sometimes they use both ; as, oodco, 
I see, ecooaov, scooaxa. 

ATTIC KEDTJPLICATION. 

6. "When the verb begins with a, e, or o, followed by a con- 
sonant, the first two letters are sometimes repeated before the or- 
dinary augment. This is called the Attic Reduplication ; thus, 

dyei'oco I assemble rfyeoxa Attice, dy-rjyeqxa 

r^exa e\i-i]\iexcL 

coda od-coda 

coov%a 6(j-c6ov%a 

Obs. 2. The pluperfect sometimes takes anew augment on the 
initial vowel of the reduplication ; thus, dx-r^oa, ^x-ijxoeiv. 

Obs. 3. This form of the verb fiequently changes a long vowel 
or diphthong into a short or doubtful vowel in the third syllable; 
thus, aXijhxpa for ty.eiopa, and dXfjhfLfiai for qkeififjuu, from dXeiqjco ; 
dx/jxoa for r(xoa y from dxovco. 

7. Mule. The simple augment is confined to the indicative 
mood ; the reduplication remains in all the moods. 



ifieco 


I vomit 


oL,co 


I smell 


oQvaaco 


I dig 



Ill 



1. I 

. 
numbers, and | 

I 
the ii r doubtf i 

2d pi which lias always ti — in tin- subjunctn 

long— in the optative, always a diphthoi 

>[ in the indicatw 

. an. I the latter, in the 

iinal letfc I in the BubjlUlOti :, and 

226. TABLE OF FINAL L! 

AC'iivi: VOU 

Prim ry. 



1. J. 3. 

o /*• i 

Dual — rof rot 



1. 3. 

J, /</,—, >• — 

Dual. — rot iff 
ral /4«r 



MIDDLE and 

B 
l. 



i rai 



1. 3. 

///,/• (TO rQ 

Dual. 

Plural /<- N ; ra 

final l<-t;. 
; the indi< 



112 



TERMINATIONS. 



§91. 



227. ACTIVE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Primary. 

Present and Future. 
Mood-vowels and final letters separate. The same combined. 



Sing. 


0-0 


s-ig 8-i 


CO 


8ig 


81 


Dual. 


— 


8-rov 8-rov 


— 


8TOV 


8rov 


Plural. 


0-J18V 


8-T8 o-vrai 


0\JL8V 


8rs 


ovai{v) 






First and Second Perfect. 






Sing. 


a- 


a-g 8- 


a 


ag 


s 


Dual. 


— 


a-rov a-rov 


— 


arov 


arov 


Plural. 


a-fi8v 


a-rs U-VTGl 


a\JL8V 


ars 


aai 






Secondary. 










Imperfect and Second Aorist. 






Sing. 


o-v 


8-g 8- 


OV 


8g 


ejv) 


Dual. 


— 


8-rov s-rr<v 


— 


8T0V 


szyv 


Plural. 


0-\l8V 


8-T8 O-V 


0\18V 


8r8 


ov 






First Aorist. 






Sing. 


«- 


a-g e- 


a 


ag 


8 


Dual. 





a-rov a-r^v 


— 


arov 


azqv 


Plural. 


a-fi8v 


a-r8 a-v 


a\i8v 


ars 


av 






First and Second Pluperfect. 






Sing. 


81-V 


8i- g 8i- 


81 V 


8ig 


81 


Dual. 


— 


8i-rov 81-rjjv 





sirov 


8izrjv 


Plural. 


8l-\JL8V 


8i-r8 8i-aav 


81118V 


8U8 


siaav 






SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 










All the Tenses. 






Sing. 


(0-0 


tj-ig 7]-i 


CO 


$S 


V 


Dual. 





q-rov rj-rov 





r\rov 


ijrov 


Plural. 


C0-[18V 


r\-r8 CO-VZCJl 


C0fX8V 


ijr8 


coai 






OPTATIVE MOOD. 










All the Tenses except the First Aorist. 




Sing. 


Ol-fll 


oi-g oi- 


Oljll 


oig 


01 


Dual. 





oi-rov oi-rrp? 





oirov 


oirrp 


Plural. 


Ol-[JL8V 


Ol-r8 01-8V 


Olfl8V 


oirs 


OI8V 



The First Aorist Optative has at, instead of ov for its mood-vowels. 

6. In this table the indicative mood-vowel o, and the subjunc- 
tive o), combining with the final letter -o makes co ; and with 
-vice they make ovai and coot ; § 6, Rules 8, 16, and 18. 



|9L 












M!M»i SIVE. 



I li MOM '••rnl»in.-.l. 



Mood- to well at. 



l'lnr-il 












i 



Plural. 






. 






. 



UGH 






wtm 












»OD. 

(7) ( 
In tin* leoond \k-t- 

(lid, 
S 

. li. Nil. . 

8. In the Dtumn 

in this case are 



114 



TABLES OF TERMINATIONS. 



92. 



§ 92. TABLES OF TERMINATIONS. 
229. — I. ACTIVE VOICE. 



Pres. and Fut. 
S. -co -Eig -si 
D. -erov -ezov 

P. -oiiav -eze -ovai 



Imperf. and 2d Aor. 
S. -ov -eg -e 
D. -ezov -e'zrjv 

P. -OjJLEV -ete -ov 



S. 
D. 
P. 



CO^EV 



-tjzov 

-7]ZS 



'V 

-TjTOV 
-COCJl 



S. -oijii -oig 
D. -oizov 

P. -OljlEV -OWE 



s. 

D. 

p. 



•01 

■oizqv 

•OlEV 



INDICATIVE. 

Primary Tenses. 
1st and 2d Perfect. 
-a -ag -s 

-azov -arov 
-a\iEv -azE -aoi 

Secondary Tenses. 
1st and 2d Pluperfect. 

-ElV -Eig -El 

-EVtOV -ElTTjV 
-ElflEV -EITE -ElOaV 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

The same as first 
column. 

OPTATIVE. 

The same as first 
column. 

IMPERATIVE. 



1st Aor. 
-a -ag -e 

-arov -dzqv 
-apsv -azs -av 



The same as first 
column. 



-aijii -aig -ai 

-avzov -aizijv 
-aijiEv -avtE -aiEv 



■E -EZCO 




-ov -azco 


■EZOV -EZCOV 


The same as first 


-azov -dzcov 


■ete -szcoaav 


column. 


-azs -dzcoaav, 


or -ovzcov 




or -dvzcov 



-ElV 



INFINITIVE. 

| -tvai 

PARTICIPLES. 



-ai 



N. -cov -ovaa -ov I -cog -via -og I -ag -aaa -av 

Gr. -ovzog -ovGijg, &c. I -ozog -viag -dzog \ -avzog -daqg -avzog 

Obs. In this table, the terminations in the first column belong to the 
present, imperfect indicative, future, and 2d aorist ; all those in the 
2d, to the first and second perfect and pluperfect ; and all those in the 
3d, to the 1st aorist. 












. 









. 



'. -*<J#fi 












fist 



I 



. 



. TH 






a 

r. 



-ov 






-aaOe 



-tr.lhu 












Oh 

m Ihoaa of the perfect and pluperfect passive on the next page. 



116 



TABLES OF TERMINATIONS. 



§92. 



231.— III. PASSIVE VOICE. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 









Primary Tens 








-1YE 


\ND MIDDLE. 










Perfect 










B. 


■fUU 


-gcu 


-rai 








D. 


-//£i>OJ> 


-a&ov 


-OxJov 








P. 


-fie&a 


-G&8 


-rzca 














Secondary Tenses. 








Pluperfect. 




1st and 2d Aorists. 


S. 


-m* 


-GO 


-TO 


■v 


->,v 


"1 


D. 


-{it&or 


-G&OV 


•6{rijV 




-IjZOV 


-fjTTJV 


r. 


-IU&CC 


-oOe 


-VTO 


-r^iev 


-qze 


-l\GOLV 








SUBJUNCTIVE. 






s. 


-fierog co 


h 


7 

V 


-co 


•vs 


-v 


D. 
P. 


-flH'CO 
-jXtVOl (Of/tl 


i]zov 

1\ZZ 


7;tov 
wgi 


-OJUtl' 


-i\zov 


-IjZOV 
-COGl 








OPTATIVE. 






S. 


-utrog eirp 


Btijg 


ft 


-w\v 


-si'qg 


-eiy 


D. 
P. 


-Lltl'CO tUjZOV 

-\xtvoi tttjiitv eujzs 


tUjGUP 


siqgiSP 


-eitjzov 
-ti/-ze 


-eujGuv 








IMPERATIVE. 






S. 




-GO 


-(7i>C0 




-rfti 


-?;zcq 


D. 




-G&OV 


-G&COP 




-1]ZOV 


-fjZMV 


P. 




-o&e 


-G&CD6UP 




-?jZS 


-ZjZOOGCtV 








INFINITIVE. 










-g&cu 


1 

PARTICIPLES. 


-7 t rou 






M. 


F. 


N. 


M. 


F. 


N. 


X. 


- 
-lA.tr ov 


-pert} 


-utrov 

[LtVOV 


-tvzog 


-tiGa 
-tiG^g 


-tv 
-tvzog 



For the terminations of the present, imperfect, 1st, 2d, and 3d 
futures of the j ice, Bee the terminations in the first column 

of the table on the preceding page. 



117 



\ N 

1. Kacli I 

u ith I 
in tl 

/ 

i 

ose-eiidii 

1 V-iw. 

I 



i (Uq. -a) 

KB. 

Ri i . I ":. • imperf m the | 

im- 

• 'iises, a> follov 



118 



FORMATION OF TENSES. 



§94. 



234. — SPECIAL RULES FOR EACH TENSE. 

1. Active Voice. 
Future. Add aco to the 1st root. 

1 Aorist. Prefix the augment, and add -act to the 1st root. 

2 Aorist. Prefix the augment, and add -ov to the 2d root. 
Perfect. Augment, reduplicate, and add -xa or -a to the 1st root, 

235, R. 1. 
Pluperf. Augment, reduplicate, repeat the augment, and add 

-khv or -eiv to the 1st root. 
2 Perf. Augment, reduplicate, and add -a to the 3d root. 
2 Pluperf. Augment, reduplicate, repeat the augment, and add 
-aw to the 3d root. 

2. Middle Voice. 
Future. Add -go^ou to the 1st root. 

1 Aorist. Prefix the augment, and add -adpTjv to the 1st root. 

2 Aorist. Prefix the augment, and add -b\Lr\v to the 2d root. 
The Perfect and Pluperfect are the same as in the Passive Voice. 
Fut. Perf. Augment, reduplicate, and add -copai to the 1st root. 

3. Passive Voice. 
Add -&r]60[j,ca to the 1st root. 
Add -?;6opcu to the 2d, root. 
Prefix the augment, and add Srjv to the 1st root. 
Prefix the augment, and add -?jv to the 2d root. 
Augment, reduplicate, and add -\iai to the 1st root. 
Augment, reduplicate, repeat the augment, and add 

-\ir[v to the 1st root. 
Fut. Perf. Augment, reduplicate, and add -copai to the 1st root. 



1 Future. 

2 Future. 

1 Aorist. 

2 Aorist. 
Perfect. 
Pluperf. 



235.— § 94. SPECIAL RULES FOR MUTES. 

Rule 1. When the characteristic is a ^-mnte or 
a #-nmte, the perfect active is formed by adding 
- c -«, and the pluperfect by adding ~-tiv\ all 
others add -xa, -xsiv (218, Obs. 2, 3) ; thus, 

XeiTTca Root Xsltz- perf. It-lei7i--a combined h'leicpa 

pluperf. il8-Xet7t- -eiv ilelzicfeir 

perf. ni-Tikzv.- -a n&tXera 



TtXexoo Root nXex- 



pluperf. ?7ze-7ilt'x- -eiv 



inenkfyeiv 



BMATIO] 119 

Rule 2, WTien the characteristic is a r-mute, 
it is rejected before a consonant in the active and 
the middle voice, and changed into in the j 
ave : thus, 

Activi ,t.'.7 

Middle, Put. nu-aofuu l A 

sive, 1 tut. nws-ft!f5Q\ux\ 1 /lot. 

. The r-mute 1 in th< when it < 

>re a (44—8); as, mneusou for ninu&aati 
HtnO-co, 1 future passive neQ-ftfjaopcu, vol 

Also, a ir-mute, after a liquid, is rejected before pai; 7-«, 

perfect passive ri'-Ttn-uai. 

Obs. lltvfrco, atvcoy Tbv/co, and ytco (239-. 
of ev before a consonant in the passive ; as, xvn-th'^ouui, 
0[MU (240, li. 2) 9 Are. ; qtvyco has either v or 8V | *ua, 

or ntqtvy-uui. 



236.— §95. METHOD OF FORMING THE TENS 
1. 7Yco, I honour. 

This verb, requiring no insertion or change of letters for tli 1 

sake of euphony, affords the simplest example for showing the 
formation of A second and third root («), and th - 

tenses formed from them, are here assumed, though thej 
exist in the verb, to show the manner in which th- - a are 

formed 

Active. Middle. «ive. 



Pies. 


Tl-CO 


71-0 1 1 ai 


Tl-OUl'.t 


Imp. 


:' -71-01' 


t-7i-oin { y 


t-7i-6ut t y 


Put 


Ti-a-co 


71-G-oiiai 


77-i>/J(7- OUUl 


2 Fur. 






71-^(7-0 11 (Ct 


1 Aor. 


t-Ti-a-a 


i-7i-(7-iqu t y 


i-rt-&-ip 


2 A<»r. 


t-Ti-oy 


t-71-nu^y 


t-Ti 




7t-Ti-y.-a 


te-ri-ftcu 


t&n-fiuu 


Pluperf 


t-n-Ti-y.-tfy 


t-7t-7t-t(f t y 


8-7t-7t : 


2 Perf 


Tb-Tl-U 






2 PluperC 


Tl-tlV 






i\ p. Km. 




Tc -7l-(J-OUia 


JE-7L-6 -< 



120 



FORMATION OF TENSES. 



§95. 



The following examples fall under 235, Rule 1. They are 
exhibited with the parts divided, and then combined, to show the 
effect of the rules of euphony, § 6, in combining the parts. It 
will be a profitable exercise for the pupil to apply these rules for 
every change. 

2. Tlie characteristic a Tr-mute. 

laiTiod, I leave. 
Roots, 1. lain-, 2. Iitt-, 3. Ioitz-. 

ACTIVE VOICE. 





Parts divided. 


Parts combined 


Pres. 


Iei'tz-co 


Xshtm 


Imperf. 


8-)M7l-0V 


D.£(7TOl> 


Fut. 


/,£177-G-CQ 


XeiU'co 


1 Aor. 


8-).£l7t-G-a 


tie ill' a 


2 Aor. 


i-hn-ov 


D.17TOI' 


Perf. 


)J-)M7T--a 


W.tlCfCi 


Pluperf. 


i-).s lei7T--tiv 


ilt/.tiqeiv 


2 Perf. 


Xt-loiTr-a 


h'/.oirra 


2 Pluperf. 


i-).8-Xoi7T-eu> 

MIDDLE VOICE. 


IW.017ZHV 


Pres. 


Xtin-ofKM 


Ittrrouca 


Imperf. 


i-liBUt-Ofitp 


tXtuzofJup 


Fut. 


ltt7i-a-0[(ca 


Xeixpofua 


1 Aor. 


i-).£lX-G-UUI t V 


SL&xpapqp 


2 Aor. 


i-h7T-6u) t r 


(kuEOfup 


Perf. 


)J-lei7T-ftCU 


Xtk&fMjJUU 


Pluperf. 


i-le-fatTr-in;} 1 


tibUtuiu^ 


P. P. Fut. 


).£-),tl ' Ti-o-o u at 
PASSIVE VOICE. 


).£/.£( U'ouca 


Pres. 


felTT-OtlCU 


/.eiTToiaa 


Imperf. 


i-Xun-ouy 


efclTTOUtjl' 


Fut. 


l8l7T-i>{;6-0UCU 


hio;&> t Gouca 


2 Fut. 


ha-tjG-OfiCU 


hrr) t aouca 


1 Aor. 


£-).eh-\}-} l r 


ilti'a&rr 


2 Aor. 


i-Xin-ip 


hkuitp 


Perf. 


)J-).£l7T-{iai 


)J).€tuiiai 


Pluperf. 


i-Xs-letrr-^r 


ifaXeippqp 


P. P. Fut. 


Xe-lEiTZ-aofica 


te/MlL'OflCU 



§95. 



UIATION OF TENSES. 



121 



3. The characteristic a *-mute. 

rrJUxoi, 1 foil. 

Roots, 1. rr/.r/.-, 2. nhc/.- y 8. .tP.ox-. 





ACTIVE VOICE. 






Parts divided 


Pai 




n'/.r/.-co 


nX&m 


Irape 


i-ftlex-op 


XOP 


Put 


jnl&Hj-w 


a ! 


1 Aor. 


l'-7TU'/.-6-a 


Int. 


U>r. 


t-7T/.(C/.-0V 


SnXcacop 


Perf 


Ttt-Tihy.- -a 


n&nXeja 


Pluperf. 


i-7[£-7l).h'/.--UV 


inenkBjm 


2 Perf. 


ni-nXoxra 


mnlma 


2 Pluperf 


i-7Tt-7l).0X-8lV 


£7TtM/.6'/.tlV 


• 


MIDDLE VOICE. 






TtU/.-OUUL 


nXtxofuu 


Imperf 


i-aXex-Ofi 


inXexopup 


Fut 


nX&t-a-ofun 


nXe^ofuu 


1 Aor. 


l-TiXt'/.-a-diu^ 


inXe^dutp 


2 Aor. 


B-nXax-ofup 


inXoMopxp 


Perf 


7Tt'-7ihy.-uej 


■i at 


Pluperf 


1-718-1 UV.-lU k V 


irTtrr).rt(i;r 


P. P. Fut. 


7TE-7l).b'A-<j-0H(U 

VOICE. 


TreniJ^OfUU 


Pres. 


n\&MHiai 


.-7/.y/.nti<a 


Imperf 


i-nkex-Ofiqp 


inXtxofwp 


Put 


nXex-Sip-opm 


77/.r/{h' l <it)uai 


2 Fut. 


rr/.<c/.- }[<!-() iiiu 


>!(Ul 


1 Aor. 


i-rr/.y/.-0-t t i' 


inlaxtp 


2 Aor. 


l)jr/.-) t V 




fTt-rr/.c/.-tua 


UlCt 


Plll]> 


i-fte-nXtx-fitp 


u^v 


P. P. Fut. 


: -tj-nuai 

6 


KM 



122 



FORMATION OF TENSES. 



96. 



•i. The characteristic a r-raute. 

;{ho, I persuade. 

This verb has the first root 7iti&, the second stt#, the third 
^o/O", and its characteristic being a r-mute, it conies under 235, 
Rule 2. 





Active. 


Middle. 


Passive. 


Pres. 


7T8l&-(d 


zd&-ofuu 


778L&-OUai 


Lnp. 


£-7Tcl&-0V 


i-xtixt-ourj 


-d&-6urr 


Fut. 


rtet-G-co 


7ltl-G-0i: 


^eic-i+rn-ouca 


2 Fut. 






7Tt&-i t o-ouai 


1 Aor. 


t-^ei-G-a 


i-aet-G-d 


- 


2 Aor. 


£-7It&-OP 


e-m&-o 


i-T i '{t-f-y 


Perf. 


Tih-nti-v.-a 


-i-rtcis-uai 


TTc-TThlO-UCfA 


Pluperf. 


i-n-t-TTti-y.-eu 


i-7Tt-n r ci<5-urr 


---ciG-u^y 


2 Perf. 


77t-7I0l\t-a 






2 Pluperf. 


i-x8-7Toi\)-eir 






P. P. Fut. 


• 


7T8-X8l'-<J-0[l(U 


rre-xci-c- 



§96. SPECIAL RULES FOB PURE VERBS. 

237. — X. B. Iu the rules for the Moods an of verbs, 

let it be remembered, that — 

The three short vowels, a e o 
have their own long, ;; co 

and their own diphthongs, at a oi 

238. — Rule 1. Verbs in aco, aco, and 6a, change 
the short vowel into its own long before a conso- 
nant; as, 

guidon, Root qih, rut. qi/.^aa, r- 
). — EXCEPTK 

1. aco after t or i 3 retains a) and Xd& and oaco 
after a vowel ; as, £aa>, eaoco ; xoxicico, y.o^c 
duoD ; ytKaco, yt/.auco. 

Likewise dissyllables iu dec which do not pass into /;//* : as. /."/.dco, 
y.ucaco. But those which pass into r t iu havr pt gr#aa). 



fo 123 

2. ^<w, 

Likewise those which form 

in mo ha 

in t(o have ev ; - 0, / 

ad itco, I 
and ww, / - ' . have /,. 

0(0, 

which 1 1 and 

- ; but those which pass into com/, hare 00 : • 
• >/</, which has in the 1 tut. and 1 
Gouiu, tdo&ipr. 
4. The anomalous n'co and y./.utco change <u into «i» ; as, 

y.e.fo), tut. y.avaco ; x/. 

, and o^ea (for */co), retain £ before # on 

240. — liiLi: 2. Pure verba which have t s or a 
doubtful vowel, or a diphthong before a cona 
it, in the active and the middle voice, insert a 
uant in the as, 

1 kor. I 'ass. 

ma 

ma n7-{>n- ion 

>:« --Oiuoinu MrrT-i>/r /<<</ 

T<u-xa meter OnToiiiu tnaia-ftq* - tcu 

U btlttVG-ihfP y.i'y./Atvo-tita 
in 6/'co, mo, oko, and 

1 . — To this rule t! 

1. Five which i do not ii 

2. / ich have ucu, xo- 



124 



LIQUID VERBS. 



97. 



3. One which has i ; viz. r/oa. 

4. Eleven which have v ; viz. dorico, @qvco, dvco, &vco, idovco, 

XOr/.VCO, XCtilvGd, XvCx), [AtjVVCO, QVCO, TQVOJ. 

5. Seven which have ev ; viz. dsva, vtvco, veco (vevgco), m>i(o 

(ttvevgco), qzcd (qevgcq), Gtvoo, yico (%£vgco). Also many verbs 
in evco, derived from nouns ; as, paaiXsvco. 

6. One which has ov ; viz. lovco, as, XovdijGopai, &c. 

1, Fourteen verbs sometimes insert a before a consonant in the" 
passive voice, and sometimes not; viz. dovco, dodca, £tco, 
iXdco, xcuco, xeodco, y.vdco, xooeco, iivdco, fxrjQva, ovoo), navco, 
yyavto, \pdo3. 

242. — Rule 3. Verbs in 6co, forming verbs in 
fu, insert a before a consonant in the passive voice ; 
as, yvco/Lii, yvcoo&rjOOjLiac^ &c. 

Except GTQCovvvpi from gtqoco, and didco{ii from Sow, which 
have gzqco&i;go{j,cu, dodljao^iai, &c. 

FORMING THE TENSES OF PURE VERBS. 

243. — The following example shows the method of forming 
the tenses in pure verbs. With few exceptions, having no second 
root (216), they have no 2d future, or 2d aorist; and in the ac- 
tive voice, no 2d perfect, or 2d pluperfect. 



Pros. 

Imperf. 
Fut. 
1 Aor. 
Perf. 
Pluperf. 
P. P. Fut. 



Active. 

Tljld-CO 

i-xiyLVL-ov 

8-Zi'fUJ-G-a 

Te-ri(Ai]-yy-a 

i-T8-Tl(A,l]-y.-8lV 



Middle. 
xi\id-o\iai 

Tljllj-G-Oliai 

i^zi[M]-G-d{iqv 

8-Te-7[[A,/{-[A,T]V 

%8-nii)i-G-o\iai 



Passive. 

Tipd-OIJMU 

f-rijta-o jiifj-v 

Tlflt]-d-/jG-0[lCU 
T£-Tl[ll'j-G-OllCU 



§ 97. LIQUID VERBS. 

244. — Liquid verbs differ from mute and pure 
verbs in forming some of the tenses, as will ap- 
pear by the following — 



§97. LIQUID VERBS. 125 

\L RULES. 

1. Thefutwre active and middle shortens the 
>t, if it contains a diphthong, by rejecting tin- 

last of the two vowels; and instead of oeo and 

60/Luu, adds 6w and Loutu, contracted & and ou- 
fiai ; as, 

Verb. R. Fut * Put Mid. 

fitico ii tco contr. fiei-d), pahiofuu eontr. ptp-ovpuu 

rtiKo Ttti' rtr-t(o rtr-co, re* iopcu OVficu 

quit co quiv quv-tco qui-oj, quy-toiuu qui < 

2. The first aorist active and middle lengthens 
the short root of the future by changing t into 

tt, and lengthening the doubtful vowels; and in- 
stead of oa and od/u/ji', adds a and dfiijv ; as, 

Verb. Fut. 1 Aor. A 1 Aor. Mid 

tnrto [lev-tea ti'cir-a i-fitti-uu^r 

Tf/Vco rep-em t-iur-a l-itir-uu^r 

qulvto q)ui-tco tqui-a i-quv-uaij 

Rem. The Attics often change cl into ^ ; as, tqr { ru y tqijuiuj. 

3. The perfect and pluperfect active, and all the 
the passive voice, except the present and imper- 
fect, add the tense-endings to the second root ; i 

Verb. 2. R. Perf Act. 1 Fut. Pass. 1 Aor. P. Pert*. P. 

(ixtfnco, 677uo> 't-G77an-Y.((. y anao-O-^aniKa, i-a^uo-Ot-y, t-anun-uui 
quiioi, qe.r, 7Tb-q.uy-y.u, quy-iri^ouui, t-qui-lh^-, xt-quu-uui 

Kic Verbs in /lmo form the perfect and pluper- 
fect active and the 1 future, 1 aorist, perfect, and 
pluperfect passive, from the first root by interp 
mg /, before the tense-endings; as, 

i R. Perf. A 1 Fut. P l Aor. P 

repay i :iu-r t -y.u refi^&qaofim tvi 

ha and iitrco. 



126 TENSES OF LIQUID VERBS. §97. 

Note. The tenses which interpose ?j are, probably formed regularly 
from obsolete forms in io ; thus, NEMEJL, vtfvJJGta, vtvifjujxa, etc. ; 
but while these tenses, formed in this way, have remained, the others 
have given place to the liquid forms now in use. See 250. 

4. Dissyllables in tivco, ivco, vvco, reject v before 
a consonant ; as, 

zefrco, zav-, ze-za-xa, za^^GOfica, i-zd-d^tji', z£-za-\mi, &c. 
xohco, xqiv-, yJ-y.Qi-y.a, XQi-d/^GOfiaij l-xo/'-ifyT, yJ-xQi-pai. 
&VVQ3, &vv~, zt-ftv-xa, Tv-ft/jGOfiai, i-Tv-ftiji', z&-&v-pca. 

But xzeivco and tzXvvco sometimes retain v, sometimes not. 

245. — Obs. Verbs in aivco and via commonly drop v before 
the termination beginning with ^, and insert o" in its stead ; as, 
cpaivco, 7iXvvcx), perf. pass. Tib'qiaopat, 7T87zXvG(xat. — They are in- 
flected thus : 

Singular, ntcpaG-iiea Tteqav-aai myur-zca 

Dual, 7TtcpaG-fi8&ov ntcpav-ftov (54-17) Tzecpcu-frov 
Plural, 7Z£CpdG-[ta&a Tztyar-fte ntyaG-iitvoi dai{y) 

Note. Liquid verbs want the paulo-post-future tense. 

FORMING THE TENSES OF LIQUID VERBS. 

246. — The following examples show the method of forming the 
tenses of liquid verbs, according to the preceding rules. 

247. — ^zeXXa, I send. 
1 R. gzbI. 2 R. gzciX. 3 R. gzoX. 

Active. Middle. Passive. 

Pres. GzeXX-co GteXX-Oficu GzeXX-o^ca 

Imperf. 'i-GztXX-ov i<jze)l-6[irp> 8-gzeXXoiu-i' 
Fut. GztX-t'-oj, co GztX-e-o^iai, ovfica e-GzuX-xtlfi-ouca 

2 Fut. gzuX-^g oucu 

1 Aor. E-Gitil-a i-Gzai/.-duijr i-Gzcu-{i-t t v 

2 Aor. e-GzaX-ov i-GzaX 6ur t v i-GzdX-r t p 
Perf. t-GzuX-x-a 8-GzaX-^ca t-GzuX uai 
Pluperf. i GzdX-x-eiv i-GzdX-^t t r t-GzdX-pTp 

2 Perf. e-GzoX-a 

2 Pluperf. i-GzdX-uv 



§97. 



KBS. 



127 



Imp 

2 Fut. 

1 \..r. 

2 A 

Pluperf 
2 Perf 
2 Pluperf 



Imperf 
Put 
2 Put 

1 Aor. 

'J Ah!. 

Pluperf 

2 Perf 

2 Pluperf 



1 li. (/<</;. 



2 R. 

Middle, Pas- 



y.-ic 

iy 

249.- 
1 R. rep. 
Active. 

TtlV-(d 

t-Ttu-oy 
Ttr-t'-co, o5 









-Ttuco, I stretch. 
2 EL ret*. 3 R. ror 

Mi.i 

Ttir-nuta 
i-7tiy oit/ t r 
Tti-t'-ouia, ovttca 



t-Jtll ' u 

t-rui-oy 

Tc'-ra y.-a 

t-Tt-ru-y.-ttv 

Tt-TOl-U 

i-TE-Tor-tir 



t-ray oitt { y 

Tt-TiC-iiai 
i-zt-z u-iti;y 



7 ill H 

i-Ttn-ntt^y 

Ttu-in-dutf.i 

t-TU \l 

t-Tai-^y 

Tt-nc itia 

t-Tt-ra-iti^' 



\ », I distribute (244, Xote). 
1 R. ;c//. 'J R. wafL 8 li. rn//. 



[mperf 

Fut. 
•J Fut. 

1 A 
•J A 

Plup 
•j Pert 

2 Pluperf 


fcive. 

IHl-CO 

t-ytit-ny 
it it -t 09, do 


Middle. 

ytit-ottia 
ytn . 


Miai 


e-r&p-a 

y.-tw 













128 CONTRACTED VERBS. §98. 



§98. CONTRACTED VERBS. 

251. — Verbs in -dco, -sco, and -oco, contract the concurrent 
vowels in the present and imperfect in all the voices, according 
to the general rules of contraction, 116. See paradigm, § 100. 

All the concurrences of vowels to be found in these verbs, are 
the following ; viz. 



1. 


Verbs in 


-dco, -aco, 


-as, 


-do, 


•drj, 


-dsi, 


-<*v> 


-dot, 


-dov, = 8. 




contr. 


-co, 


-a, 


-co, 


-a, 


- f )> 


-$> 


-cp, 


-CO: 


2. 


Verbs in 


-SCO, -SCO, 


-ss, 


-so, 


-si], 


-SSI, 


-*% 


-SOI, 


-sov, = 8. 




contr. 


-co, 


-si, 


-ov, 


i' 


-£h 


"!' 


-01, 


-ov. 


3. 


Verbs in 


-oco, -oco, 


-OS, 


-00, 


-or], 


-osi, 


-°n> 


-001, 


-oov, = 8. 




contr. 


-co, 


-ov, 


-ov, 


-co, 


-01, 


-OL, 


-01, 


-ov. 



Obs. 1. Of the above concurrent vowels (No. 2), dissyllables 
in sco contract only ss and ssi ; thus, nlss, Ttlsstv, TtXssrs, &c, are 
usually contracted nisi, Tiksiv, nlslrs, &c, but nlsco, nlso\nsv, 
&c, are never contracted. Exc. Asco, to bind, commonly con- 
tracts all. 

Obs. 2. Four verbs in dco contract as into t], and asi into $. 
These are t,dco, nsivdco, dtxpdco, and %odo[tcu ; thus, 

Indie. £dsig, £dsi, pastor, s^asg, s£as, &c. Inf. I^dsiv. 
contr. jjgs, ly, \i\xov, sfyg, %, " £>, &c. 

And so of the others. 

252. DORIC AND IONIC FORMS. 

Obs. 3. The Dorics, who in other cases use a for rj, in verbs 
make use of r\, without i subscript, instead of all contractions of 
asi and ssi ; as, botjv for boav ; y.oa^iijr for xogusTv. Also, as 
was usually contracted by them into i] ; as, roX\iv{ts for rol^dsrs. 

The Ionic dialect often converts a, in verbs in dco, into s ; as, 

oqsco, bot'opsv, for bodco, bodofxsv ; %ossrai for %Qasrai. 

253. HOMERIC FORM. 

Obs. 4. The Epic writers, on account of the metre, often insert 
the kindred long or short vowel before the contracted vowel ; as, 

bodsiv, contr. boav, Poet, bodctv ; bodco, contr. bgco, Poet, oqoco. 
Participle fern. ?$dovcja, contr. rj^coaa, Poet, yficococja, &c. 

This, from the frequency of its occurrence in Homer, is some- 
times called the Homeric form. 



§98. 



l.AN'ATI' TABLK. 129 



little attention t<» and applying the 

(116) t«» the | 

uni. -till a tab 

6 wo. 



254.— EXPLANATION OF THE FOLLOWING TABLE 

1. The tenee-rool in the subjunctn 

but without the augment! i sns" 

in the i e, infinitive, and partici] 

2. whenever the accent (') falls <m the terminal 
the following table in its proper place. Wnen it d 
termination, its place will be the third syllable from the and of 
word, if the last syllable be short, or th<- diphthong at, which 

■ • 1 Bhort But if the last syllable be long, the accent will be on 
the syllable next the U rif>0| rfri'fWj i ' 

3. In the perfect and p passive, the characteristic n in all 
the moods is put with the termination, to show the changes it uj 

by tl \ euphony, when combined with the initial * of 

the termination. In combining the root in these moods with the termi- 
nation, Rules 2, and 6, and 17 of cf 6, must be observed. 
10. But if the tables of terminations, § 92, and the method oi 
the to memory, and reD 

miliar to the pupil by thorough drilling, it will hardly ever b 
sary to take him into this table at all. 

4. The numbers 1, 2, 3, <fce., to be found in the following table, 
to the same numbers, g 101. 

N. B, T>\ inspection of the table, it will be seen that the termina- 
- of the subjunctive mood are the same in all the tenses, and th< 
of the optative and imperative are nearly the same in all, except in 
1 aorist Attention to this will greatly lessen the labour of committing 
the verb to memory. 



6* 



130 



TABLE OF THE VERB 



.99. 



255. I. TABLE OF THE ACTIVE VOICE. 







INDICATIVE. 








SUBJUNCTIVE. 




Tense 


•root. Terminations 




T-root. 


Terminations. 






1. 


2. 


3. 




1. 2. 


3. 


Pres. 


S. 


TU7TT -CO, 


-eis, 


-ei, 


TVTTT 


-co. -77s, 


"V> 




D. 




-erov, 


-6T0V, 




-7)T0V, 


-7}T0V, 




P. 


-OjJLtV, 


-ere, 


-ovat. 




-COjJLeV, -7)T€, 


-C0(Tl. 


Imp. 


S. 
D. 


e-rvirr -ov, 


-es, 

-€TOV, 


-6, 4 

- €T7JV, 










P. 


-o/aev, 


-ere, 


'OV. 


' 






Fut. 


S. 


TV\]/ -CO, 


-€LS, 


-€ t , 4 


TV\p- 








D. 




-6TOV, 


-€TOV, 




Wanting. 






P. 


-0/j.ev, 


-€Te, 


-OV(Tl 








1 Aor. 


S. 


€-rv\p -a, 


-as, 


-e 4 


TVIp 


-CO, -71S, 


'V* 




D. 




-CLTOV, 


-arrjv, 




-7)T0V, 


-7}T0V, 




P. 


-a/j.€v, 


-are, 


-av. 




-cofiev, -Tjre, 


-coat. 


2 Aor. 


S. 


i-rv-K -ov, 


-€S, 


-e, 


TVW 


-CO, -T}S, 


-??> 




D. 




-€TOV, 


-er^r, 




-7}T0V, 


-7JT0V, 




P. 


-ofizv, 


-ere, 


-ov. 




-C0/J.6V, -T)T€, 


~C0(Tl. 


Perf. 


S. 


T€-TU<£ -a, 


-as, 


-e, 


re-rxxp 


-CO, -7)S, 


~y> 




u. 




-OLTOV, 


-arov, 




-7]T0V, 


-7]TOV, 




p. 


-afx€u, 


-are, 


-aai. 




-cap.ev, -7/re, 


-coat. 


Plup. 


s. 

D. 


i-re-rvcj) -etv, 


-€LS, 
-CITOV, 


-eiTwv, 










P. 


-ei/xev, 


-€tT€, 


-eiaav- 








2 Perf. S. 


T6-TU7T -a, 


-as, 


-e, 


T€-TVTT 


-co, -r,s, 


"V> 




D. 




-arov, 


-arov, 




-rjTov, 


-7JT0P, 




P. 


-afxev, 


-are, 


-acri. 




-CO,U€V, -77T6, 


-coat. 


2 Plup 


. S. 
D. 


4-TC-TVTT -€IV, 


-ets, 

SITOV, 


-eirrjv. 










P. 


-€l/A€V, 


-€IT€, 


-etaav. 









§ 99. 



IV THE ACTIVE V' 



131 



TABLE OF THE ACTIVE TOIOE, I 



OPTATIVE. 

Ttrmintitiaris. 

i. :*. 

-otfit, -ois, 1 -oi 

-OITOV, -OlTTlVy 
-0lf.i€V, -OlT€, -Ol€U- 


IMi : 

3. 

-{tic, 

-€TOV, -€TWV, 

-€Tt, -erwaav.* 


-cii/, 3 


PARTICIPLES. 
i i nation*. 
M. I 
X. -lev, -ovaa, -ov, 

G -UVTOS, -OVO-qS, -OVTOS, 

D. -ovri, -ouar), -ovti,&lc. 






-eiv. 




-Ol/JLt, -OlS, -01, 

-oltov, -oirt)v, 

-Olfl€V, -OlT€, -oiev 


Wanting. 


N. -oiv, -ovaa, ~ov, 

G. -OVTOS, -Ovat]S, -OVTOS, 

D. -ovri, -ovo~n, -OVTl,&LC. 


-aifj.1, -ais, -ai, 

-aiTw, -atTTju, 
-ai/iev, -aire, -ai€v. 


-OV, -O.T03, 
-CLTOV, -OLTUiV, 
-<XT€, -QLTOVGCLV. 


-ai. 


N. -ay, ~ao~a, -av, 
G. -avroy, -aV^y, -avroy, 
D. -ami, -day, -avri,&C. 


-Otfll, -ois, -oi, 

-oirov, -o'lT-nv, 

-OlfJLCV, -0IT6, -oiev. 


-€, -6TC0, 
-€TOV, -€T 03V, 

-ere, -eTwcrav. 


-e7v, 


N. -wv, -ovcra, -6v, 
G. -6vros, -ovarjs, -ovtos, 

D. -6vTl, -OVOTj, -OJ/TI,&C. 


-OlfJLl, -OlS, -01, 

-OITOV, -OIT7JV, 

-oifxev, -oire, -oiev. 


-€, -€TO>, 
-6T0V, -iTU3V, 

-6Te, -4two~clv. 


-evai. 


X. -<£y, -u?a, -6s, 
G. -oroy, -uiay, -^Toy, 
D. -6ti, -via, -6ti,&,C* 










•Olfll, -ois, -oi, 

-OITOV, -OITTJV, 
-Ol/ACV, -0IT6, -Ol€V- 


-€, -€TCO, 
-€TOV, -«TCiT, 
-6T6, -€TW(7aV. 


-eVai. 


N. -wy, -uTa, -<fy, 
G. -<^Toy, -way, -6tos, 
D. -on, -via, -6ti. 











132 



TABLE OF THE VERB 



§99. 



256. II. TABLE OF THE MIDDLE VOICE. 



INDICATIVE. 

Tense-root. Terminations. 

1. 2. 3. 

Pres. S. riirr -ofiai, -r)> 8 -erai, 
D. -Sfie&ov, -eaftov, -ea&ov, 
P. -6fJL€&a, -ec&e, -ovrat. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

T-root. Terminations. 
1. 2. 3. 

TVTTT -afiaty -T7, 8 -7]TCU, 

-4bfJLe&OV, -T](r&OVy -T)G&OV, 

-cvfAe&a, -7}<r&e, -oovrai. 


Imp. S. i-TVTTT -6\Xt\V y -OU, 8 -€TO, 

D. -ofiefroi/, -ec&ov, -eoSf}v, 

P. -6/JLefra, -6(T&€, 'OVTO. 




Fut. S. rjty -OfACLli -J7, 8 -erat, 

D. -6/J.e^OV, -€<T&OV, -€(T&OV, 

P. -^ue&a, -ecr&e, 'ovrai. 


rinp- 

Wanting. 


1 Aor. S. e-rv\f/ -d/jLrjv, -a?, 8 -aro, 

D. -cifA&ov, -acrSov, -aafrnv, 
P. -dfie^a, -a<r&e, -avro. 


rvty -co/nai, -T), S -TJTCLl, 
-do/jLe&ov, -rjo'&oi'r'no'&oj', 
-d>IJ.e&a, -7}0-&€, -cai/rac 


2 Aor. S. i-rvir -6/j.Tjv, -ou, 8 -ero, 

D. -SfJLe&uv, -€(r&ov, -ea&rjv, 
P. -6fie&a, -eo~&e, -oj/to. 


TVTT -(0/JLCU, ~7?, 8 -7]TCll, 

-db/jie&ov, -tjo&ov, -riu^soVi 

-dofXe^a, -7)0~&€, -UVTOLl. 


Perf. S. t4-tv -fifiat, -ipcu, -irrat, 10 
D. -fjL/jie&ov, -<p&ov, -(p&ov, 
P. -fi/iefta, -(p&e, -fi/xevoielai. 

10(5) 


re-rv -fj.fjLevos &, f)s, J, 11 

-/UL/LieVGi) , $\TOV,^\TOV y 

-fi/nevoi Sijxev, %re, &<ri. 


Plup. S. i-re-rv-fjL/JLTjv, -\po, -ttto, 

D. •lXfM&0V,-<p&0V ) -<p&7]V, 

P. -/xjne&a, -(p&e, -jxfxevoL ficrcw. 

10(5) 




P.P.F-S. T€-Tlty -0/J.ai, -77, -eTai, 

D. -oTte&oj/, -eo-doivecrdw, 
P. -Sfie&a, -eo~&e, -ovrai. 


T€-TV\p- 

Wanting. 






1 UK MIDDLE 






TABLE OF THE MIDDLE VO\ 



OPTAi 

minatunu. 

1. 2. 3. 

'oifx-qv, 'Oio? -oito, 
-oi/xtdov, -oiobov,-oladT}v, 

^a, -OlO~&€, -OtVTO- 


1. 2. 

-ov? -eVv>a>, 
-cadov, -tabwv, 
•€0~&€, -to&waav. 


-tabat. 


PAR, 

If. 

N. -4/iCfOff, -7), -OU, 

G. -ofiivov, -rjs,-ov, 
D.-optvy, -77, -(fi. 










"Oi^L-qv, 

-oifx&ov, 

-oi/JLe&a, 


-010,* -OITO, 

-oicrSov, -oio~&T)v, 
-oioSe, -oivro. 


Wanting. 


-tadai 


N.-6/A€VOS,-7), -OV, 

G. -ofxevovy -rjs, -ov, 

D.-OflCVCf), -7], -(f. 


-a(fj.r]v, 

-aifie^ov, 

-aiue&a, 


•cuofi -euro, 
-aia&ov, -aio-frrjv, 
-aiade, -aivro. 


-at, -uo~5u, 
-ao'&ov, -acrbwv, 
-aoSe, -aa&ctxrav. 


-aa&at. 


X. -dfx€uos,-q, -ov, 
G. -ufxevov, -rjs, -ov, 
D. -atxtvct), -T), -y. 


-Ol/JL7]V, 

iov, 
-oi/xeda, 


-010? -oito, 
-oio~&ov, -oioSn]v, 

-010&6, -OIVTO. 


-ou, 8 -4abo), 
-to&oiff-eaSoov, 
-eai&e, -eadcoaav. 


- todai 


N. -6fJ.€VOS, -77, -OV, 

G. -ofi4vov, -rjs,-ov, 

D.-OfjL€V(f>, -77, -(p. 


-HfjLevos di)v t 

'flfl^VW , 

-fijjLevoi tfrjutp 


el-qrov, etrjTT)*'. 
, u-qre, clrjo-av. 


-\f/o, -<p&a>, 
-<pbov, -<p§cov, 
-(pde, -(pdwaav. 


-<pbat. 


S. -nfi€vo$,-ri, -ov, 

G. -fl/JL€VOV,'7]S,-OU, 

D.-npevu, -77, - v . 








-otfxrjv, 

-oi/J-eboy, 

-oifif^a, 


-oio* -olto, 
-oioSov, -oiaSyv, 
-oiai&e, -oivro. 


Wanting. 


-€ff$at 


N.-(J^6VOS, -77, -OV, 

1 rov, -rjs, -ov, 
D.-outyy, -77, -(p. 



134 



TABLE OF THE VERB 



§99 



257. III. TABLE OF THE PASSIVE VOICE. 



INDICATIVE. 

Tense-root. Terminations. 
I. 2. 3. 

Pres. S. TU7TT -0/j.ai, -p 8 -erai, 
D. -ojxeboVy -eoSov,- eo-frof , 
P. -o/xefra, -e<r&e, -ovtcu. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

T-root, Terminations. 
1. 2. 3. 

TU7TT -COjbLCU, -7J , 8 -T)TCU, 

-do/ULG&OV, -TJG&OV, -T]G&OV, 

-ccfie^a, -7]<r&e -avrai. 


Imp. S. i-TVTTT -6fX7]V, -OV,8 -€TO, 

D. -6/jLe&ov,-€oSoi/ > -€(rfrnj', 
P. -6/j.e&a, -eoSe, -ovro. 




1 Fut. S.rv(p&7](T-oiJ.ai, -77 , 8 -erai, 
D. -6/J.6&OP, - ecr&ov, - ecr&o v, 
P. -6fi€&a, -eoSe, -ovrat. 


Tvcpfrncr- 

Wanting. 


2 Fut. S. TVTrrjff -0/j.cu, -?7, 8 -erai, 
D. -o/xe&ov, ~ecr&ov,-€(r&ov, 

P. -6}A€&a, -€(T&£, -OVTCLl. 


TU7T7;(r- 

Wanting. 


1 Aoi". S. i-TV(p&-7]V, 'TIS, -77, 

D. -7)T0U, -7]T7)V, 

P. -U a6I/ > "V"6, -Tjaav. 


TV<p&-(a, -7JS, -t), 

-7]T0V, -tjtov, 
-co/j-ev, -Tjre, -a><n. 


2 Aor. S. e-rwr -771/, -77s, -77, 

D. -7)T0V, -7)T77J/, 

P. -f\V-$v, -7iT6, -rjaav. 


TU7T -a>, -77s, -77, 

-J)TOU, -7JT0V, 


Perf. S. Te-Tu -/*fj.ai, -tyai, -tttcu, 10 

D. -fJifJL€&Ol',-(p&OV,-(p&OU, 

P. 'jjLfAe&a, -(p&e, -jxfxevoielcri. 

10(5) 


T€-TV-IJ. l U€VOS <£, £S, 7/, 11 

-jjLjjL€voi2>/jL€i', r)re, S(n. 


Plup. S.i-re-Tv-/x/JLTfjj/ t -ipai, -ttto, 

P. -jj./xe&a, -fpde, -fitxtvoi r^ffav. 

10(5) 




P.P.F S. Te-Tlty -OfJLdl, -77 8 -6TCU, 

D. -o/ne&oi', -€<t&ov, -zoSov, 
P. -6fxe&a, -ecr&e, -oj/tcu. 


"Wanting. 



§99. 



IN THE PAS <>ICE. 






TABLE OF THE PASSIVE VOICE CONTINUED. 



optativi:. 
Terminations. 
1. 2. 3. 

oifirju, -oto? -ono, 
-oipe&ov, -okt&ov, -oia&rjv, 

~0i/J.€&Cl, -OL(T&€, -ULVTO. 


1 I.RATIVE. 

Ti rminations. 
3. 3. 

-ov, -eaibco, 
-eo&ovreoStov, 
-€o~Se, -ecrdwo-av. 


INF. 

l % ri in. 


PARTICIPLES. 

Term 1 n at . ■ 
M. F. 

N .-6fi€uos, -77, -ov, 
G.-ofX€vov, -r}5, 'OV, 
D.-o/j.€i/(p, -rj, -co. 










•OlfjLTJV, -OIO, 8 -OLTO, 

-oi/j.€dov, -oio&ov, -oioSrjv, 
-oifjLt&a, otoSe, -oivro. 


Wanting. 


-€0~&ai 


N .-6fJL€VOS, 
G.-OfJL€VOV, 

D.-oficvq> } 


-n, -ov, 

~T)S, -OV, 

'V' V- 


•olflTJV, -OIO? -OLTO, 

•oifxt&ov, -oiodov, -oia&rjv, 
-oijueda, -oiade, -olvto. 


Wanting. 


-ecrdai 


aevos, 
G.-o/xevov, 

D.-0/J.€J/(f>, 


-77, -ov, 
-r\s, -ov, 


•eiyv, -€1779, -6177, 

-e'i7)T0V, -ei7)T7]V, 

-ei77,uej/, -ei-qre, -eirjaav. 


7]Tl, -7)TCO, 
TJTOV, -7\T03V, 

-77T6, -Tjrcoo'av. 


-TJVCU. 


N.-eh, 

G.-€VT OS, 
D ~€VTl, 


-e?ca, -€v, 
-eiffrjsrfVTos, 
-eio"n, -i\rri. 


-eirjv, -6177s, -ei'77, 

-eirjrov, -en]T7)v, 
'€L7}fiey, -6177x6, -eir^av. 


-7)&l, -7)TC0, 

-tjtov, -titccv, 
-f)re, -7}Tooo~av. 


-rival. 


N.-cfr. ■ 

G.-CVTOS, • 
D.-6VTI, • 


■€?aa, -€v, 

€io-7)S,-€VT0S, 
ClOT), -CVTl. 


'fAfxtvos sir\v, enjs, e%7) , n 

/JL/jL€VU , €h]T0U,€i7}TT]V, 

•fjLfjLiyoi^-nij.€i/,dT]T€ f elrjaav 


-\pO, -<p&(A), 

-(p&ov, -<p&wv, 

-<p&€, -(pdooOCUS 


-<pbai. 


N.-fXjJ.€VOS, 
G-flUtVOV, 

D.-fjL/xevcv, 


-1), -ov, 

-T\S, -OV, 








* 


■otfiTjy, -oio, -oiro, 
■oi/xf^ov, -oia&ov, -oioS-nv, 
-oifxe&a, -otade, -oivro. 


Wanting. 


-CC&at. 


N.-^jU6voy, 

G.~OjA€VOV, 

D.-o/xevtf), 


-77, -ov, 

-7)S, -0 V , 



136 



CONTRACT VERBS. 



§100. 





258.— § 


100. CONTRACT VERBS.- 


— Active. 




Present. 




Zl\L~ 


Cfll- 


dfi- 




S. 


do) 


-0) 


eo) 


-0) 


do) 


-O) 






aevq 


-aq 


eevq 


-evq 


oevq 


-Oiq 




D. 


aev 


-a 


eev 


-ei 


oev 


-01 


Ind. 




aerov 


-arov 


eerov 


-eirov 


06TOV 


-ovrov 






aerov 


-arov 


Eerov 


-eirov 


oerov 


-ovrov 




P. 


aofiev 


-o)juev 


EOfieV 


-ovfiev 


oofiev 


-ovjuev 






aere 


-are 


eere 


-eire 


OfT£ 


-oire 






aovGv 
do) 


-0)GV 


eovgv 


-OVGV 


OOVGv 


-OVGV 




S. 


-0) 


io) 


-0) 


6w 


-0) 




D. 


affi 
di\ 


-aq 
-a 


ejiq 


-yq 


oyq 

07] 


-oiq 
-ov 


Subj. 


P. 


ar\rov 
dtjrov 

diouev 


-arov 
-arov 

-0)fXeV 


tyrov 
irjrov 

io)fiev 


-inov 
-?jrov 
-o)fiev 


ofjrov 
oinov 
6o>iuev 


-onov 
-onov 
-o)ftev 






atjre 
do) go 


-are 

-0)GV 


eyre 

t<0Gv 


-Tjre 

•0)Gv 


orjre 

O(0GV 


-one 

-0)GV 




S. 


do vf.iv 


-WflV 


iovfiov 


-o If i v 


OOVflV 


-o Tfi v 






dovq 


-(oq 


toiq 


-Oiq 


OOvq 


-Oiq 




D. 


CLOV 


-0) 


EOV 


-Ot, 


OOV 


~Ov 


Opt. 




aovrov 


-onov 


tovrov 


-oirov 


OOLTOV 


-oirov 




P. 


aoirrjv 
dovfiev 


-onrjv 
-oijuev 


eoirrjv 
eovfiev 


-oirtjv 

■OLflcV 


ooir/jv 
oovuev 


-oirtjv 
-oluev 






aovre 


-one 


eovre 


-oire 


oovre 


-oire 






aovev 


-ioev 


eovev 


-oiev 


oovev 


-oiev 




S. 


ae 


-a 


ee 


-ev 


Ge 


-ov 






aero) 


-aro) 


zero) 


-eiro) 


oero) 


-ovro) 


Imp. 


D. 


atrov 


-arov 


Eerov 


-eirov 


oerov 


-ovrov 




airo)v 


-areov 


eerorv 


-eiro)v 


oeriov 


-ovro)v 




P. 


U'cTt 


-are 


itre 


-eire 


oere 


-ovre 






airo^Gav -dro)Gav 


eertoGav -eiroiGav 


oero)Gav 


-ovrtoGav 


Inf. 




d.tw 


-dv 


tew 


-elv 


oew 


-ovv 




M. 


do)V 


-0)V 


EO)V 


-0)V 


O0)V 


•0)V 


Part. 


F. 


aovGa 


-o)Ga 


eoiGa 


-ovGa 


ooi'Ga 


-ovGa 




.N. 


aov 


-0)V 


EOV 


-ovv 


GOV 


-ovv 



Imperf. 


< 


izi\JL- 


HJll- 




idqX- 




S. 


aov 


-0)V 


eov 


•ovv 


OOV 


-ow 






aeq 


-aq 


eeq 


-evq 


oeq 


-ovq 






ae 


-a 


ee 


-ev 


oe 


-ov 




D. 














Ind. 




aerov 


-arov 


Eerov 


-eirov 


oerov 


" ovrov 






aErtyv 


-arr t v 


lErtjv 


-eirt;v 


oerr t v 


-ovrqv 




P. 


aotxev 


-o)fiev 


EOfiev 


-ovfiev 


oouev 


-ovuev 






aere 


-are 


sere 


-eire 


06T£ 


-ovre 






aov 


-0)V 


eov 


-ovv 


OOV 


-ovv 



§100. 









CONTRACT \T!. 



TUl- 


(///.- 


















-a 












-arai 








,«* 


:>oi' 




H)utfroV 








or 


uv 


itafrov 


-tin: 






CUG&OV 


-dafrov 


ita: 


-turl 






.9cu 


-vmtfra 


fret 




!><c 


fret 


dtGfrt 




itafre 






ifrl 




-curat 


r<u 




T'tL 


rat, 


ampcu 


-ion at, 


ttoucti, 




(xouat, 






•a 




■!■ 




-m 


aijcu 


-area 


t/;r ai 


-t t rat 


otjcu 




ao'm tfrov 


-inutdov 


tout tfrov 


-<<>i' t .9-0 r 


.9ov 




at Gfrov 


-dafrov 


t^afrov 


-7 t afrov 


;!>ov 


-0,(7 ' 




-da Our 


U t (Tt>OV 


-Tafrov 


o^aOov 


-wafrov 


cttoutfrct 


-1011 tfru 


to'ifttfra 


ft a 


0(hi(hf)a 


I fret 


dr t Gfrt 


-dafrt 


u t afrt 


•wr&i 


6t;afrt 


r.9* 


CUOVTCtl, 


-«)VTCU 


liOTTCU 


-<OVT 


rat, 


TCU 


ctoif( 13 v 




;oi 




001 • 




aoio 


-<oO 


toio 


-010 


OOlO 


-010 


aotro 


-OTO 


tOLTO 


-OITO 


OOtTO 


-OITO 


aoin tfrov 


-(f'llltfroV 


tot ,u tfrov 


-oiu tfrov 


OO/HfcTOV 


-o'mtfrov 


ciocdOov 


-oiafrov 


tOlGLTOV 


OiafroV 


ooia 


-our: 


vtoUrfhp 


-iogO^v 


toiaO i v 


-OlG' 


OOIO" 


-OIO".' 


ctolfit&a 


-wutfra 


toiutfra 


-oiutfra 


ooi in fret 


-ointfrct 


doiafrt 


-otafrt 


tOiafrt 


-oTafrt 


ooujfrt 


-Otafrt 


) TO 


-(')VTO 


KHVTO 


-OMTO 


OOU'To 


OtVTO 


dor 


-0) 


tor 


-o* 


6ot> 


-ov 


aiffi 


-dcrfra 


tiafrio 


-tin: 


Oiafrd) 


-OlG f>(>) 


'■ov 


-dafrov 


ItafroV 


-tiafrov 


otaOov 


-OIJ0 


atGfrmv 


-dafrov 


tiafrov 


-tiafhov 


OtafrdiV 


-01 (7, 


dtGfrt 


-dafrt 


itafrt 


-tiafrt 


otafrt 


-oraOf 


ai(T. r h<>(jav 


-daOoaar 


ttafrmaav 


-tiafrmaav 


toaCtV 
Ota- 


'«>GCtV 


dtGfrav 


-dafrtu 

-o'tfi; ■-. 


ita Hen 


-tia * c )av 




ao,it; 


toutvo^ 


•ov/itvoq 


oontro*; 


1 ro,' 


CKmtVt] 


-(t)ttl 


tOft i 


-or/-; 






ao«froi' 


-(OUi i 


vov 


tor 


ooutrov 


JOV 



tnu- 



iqnX- 





> t t v 




t V 










till' 














-ttTO 






V 


-«>i<: ; 








frov 












')0* 


aitr&n v 




• r P 








fra 










i i9a 


dtafrt 


-('in 


itafrt 






Tfrt 


aovTo 






-oi • 







AS/,/.- 



138 OBSERVATIONS ON §101. 



§101. OBSERVATIONS ON THE THREE VOICES. 

259. — The following observations are designed to point out 
more particularly, certain changes in the terminations of these 
parts which frequently occur, and which, without explanation, 
might perplex and retard the student in his progress. Further 
information respecting these and other changes will be found in 
the table of dialects which follows. See 274. 

ACTIVE VOICE. 

260. OPTATIVE. 

1. In the optative mood, instead of the usual terminations -oifu, 
-oig, -01, &c. the Attic dialect has the following : 

Singular. Dual. Plural. 

-oirjv, -olqg, -oir\\ -oiqzov, -oi/jr^v] -oirjiiev, -oiqre, -oir^aav. 

This form is also used by Ionic and Doric writers. 
In the optative of the 1 aor. active, instead of the common 
termination -cap., -cug, -a*, &c. the JEolic has as follows: 

Singular. Dual. Plural. 

-eia, -mag, -eie ; -eiarov, -euizqv ; -eia^ev, -date, -star. 

The Attics, as well as the Ionians and Dorians, use this form 
in the 2d and 3d persons singular, and in the 3d person plural. 

261. — IMPERATIVE. 

2. In the 3d person plural of the imperative, in Attic writers, 
the termination 6vr(ov is more common than ezcoGav ; thus, in 
the present, tvtttovtcov for rvTZtszcoGav. For other varieties, see 
Table of Dialects, 274. This form is also met with in Doric 
writers. 

262. — INFINITIVE. 

3. The infinitive, in the ancient dialects, ended in e'jievai. It 
was changed, in the Ionic, into e^iev ; and afterwards, the \i being 
rejected, was contracted by the Attics into eiv. 

263. IMPERFECT AND AORISTS. 

4. The .^EoHans and Dorians use a peculiar form of the im- 
perfect, and first and second aorists, which is made by adding the 
syllable xov, to the usual form of the 2d person singular, and then 
inflecting them like the imperfect ; thus, instead of hvni-ov, -eg, 



§ 101. Tin: THBEi voices. 139 

it makes 
or, I ••-, and in the 2d H 

the Mm in the middle voice, and the imp 

passive, make prwir/krx-ofi^, -ov, -wo, ; ; I plural o/to. 

0/>.s*. 1. I>ut before the endings -xo?, 
tracted verbs, diphthongs reject the subjunctii . and in 

verbs in /<*, the long vowels are changed into their own >li 

as, 2 sing. BBOUfe, t.-Jot'tu/.nr ; hlfrffc 

Obs. 2. This form is used only in the indicative mood; it usu- 
ally rejects the augment, and found, except in 
the singular number and od person plural. It is used only to 
press repeated action. 

204. FUTURE, ACTIVE AND MIDDLE. 

The Future in the dialects has the following varieties: 

(1.) The Attics often reject G from ugoj, taw, igco, o 
tracting the remaining vowels when that can be done; aa, £Uxff<0, 
I will drive, reject g, tldco, contracted tlco ; so iXcusetg, 
contracted iXag, ^c. In like manner we have y.a/.co for 
I ivill call; oixzido for oixtigco, I loill pity ; and in the middle 
voice, OfAOVfMU for q[i6go[iui. 

(2.) Attic Futures in jo5 are inflected like contract verbs in 
too (251, or 258), thus, -/co, -«*<?, -i#; -ithor, Are. 

(3.) -T is sometimes elided from the future active and middle 
of pure verbs, especially among the poets, even when gco is pre- 
•1 by a long vowel or diphthong ; as, present %t'co, future ytv- 
gcq, or %tvco. 

(4.) For gco 9 the Doric termination is £&> ; as, yeXd^m for 
ytluGco. 

(5.) Verbs in //co, rco, have the future Tonic in t'co uncont; 
ed (see 2*73—1 ); as, rtutco for rtuto ; utrt'eo for // 

(6.) Verbs in qco, in Homer, commonly insert g : 
for ooco, / will excite; sometimes also verbs in Xco ; as, t/.crco 
from D.co; y.t/.G oj from xt'llco. 

(7.) The Attic and Ionic termination, particularly of liquid 
verbs, is often /,'rTco ; as, (talX/jaGi for f)u/.oo 9 I will cast ; yuin t ( 
for yuocoy I will re} 

In mutes, Tvnii]Gco is used for rvxpco, I will strike. 

5, — PERFECT I M>1 

5. a. Borne verbs Buffer a in the perfect; th 

xuh'co I call xu/.t' { Gco xexaXqxa xixXipta 

In like manner deddutpta dtdfapta 



140 OBSERVATIONS ON §101. 

b. Some perfects in tjxoc, from verbs in dco, strike out y. before 
a, and (except in the participles) change ij into a ; thus, 

from fidco fie'frjxa fc'fiaa 

from video vttXrjxa T8zXaa, &c. 

c. Of the vowels thus brought together, the latter is sometimes 
rejected; as, 

fiefiijxapev fie @ deeper by syncope fit'fiafiev 

Terh'txevcu tezldevai by syncope zizkavai 

In other verbs, the Attics sometimes change e into o ; thus, 

TQ87ZCO I tum TQ8\pCO TSTQOtya 

d. A similar change has taken place in the Ionic-Doric Xd- 
Xoy%a, from (Xfyco), Xdyyco (Xay%dvco), analogous to X!$co, Xdpfico, 
lappdvco. Thus also ninoaye is found for 7i87za6%8. 

266. PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE, &C. 

6. The subjunctive and optative of the perfect are sometimes 
made by a periphrasis of the perfect participle and the verb elfu, 
I am ; thus, subjunctive rszvcpcog go, yg, q ; rezvepoze iyzov, &c; 
optative rezvepcog afqv, 8ujg, eiq. And sometimes the indicative ; 
as, retvepcog too put, I shall have struck. 

267. PERFECT PARTICIPLE. 

7. The participles sometimes change q into a, and sometimes 
not. 

In either case, by a syncope of the former vowel, ^cog and acog 
are changed into cog, which remains also in the neuter ; and the 
feminine, which otherwise ends in via, becomes cooa, and, in the 
oblique cases of the masculine and neuter, co is retained ; thus, 



Uncontracted. 






Contracted. 




fieftrpcog 


fisfta-cog 


-via 


-6g 


fcft-cog -cog a -cog G. 


-cozog 


Tt\}v/{Xc6g 


zt&vq-dg 


-via 


-6g 


re&v-cog -cocia -cog 


-cozog 


soT/jxcog 


iazij-cog 


-via 


-6g' ( 


1 1 




or, 






, ( 


- to z- cog -coa a -cog 


-cozog 


tozay.cog 


iaza-cog 


-via 


-6g) 


i 





a. The Ionics and Attics insert 8 before cog ; thus, icr-ecog, 
-8coaa, -8cog, G. -ecozog. But in the poets, the ordinary termina- 
tions frequently remain after the contraction; as, eaze-cog, -via, 
-6g, G. iaze-ozog, &c. 

b. The perfects in which these changes most frequently occur 
are rdzXrjxa, T8&v?jy.a, fit^rjxa, eorqy.a ; and in these the regular 



§ 101. TIIK THBE 141 

form is more common in the singular, and the ;ni, 

in the dual and plural. 

MIDDLE AND l' 
268. — 2i> ii 

8. The 2d person singular of the present in 
ended in wcu. In the Eonic dial 

came uu, by diaeresis mi\ and was afterwards i 
(1 16, R. III.) ; Bometdmefl by the Attica into 

manner, in other mooda and tenses. In the 
rain.- yea, and thm J r In the imperative, the 
and l' Axurist, wo became 

middle wso became ao, contracted w. In like manner, in tie 
person singular of the optative, ouso became otn f and. being inca- 
pable of further change by contraction, remains in this form. 

2G9. — IMPERATIVE, 3D PERSON PLURAL. 

9. Iii the 3d person plural of the imperative, the [on 

and especially the Attic writers, use the termination tow insfc 
of coaav; thus, ivTZTtaOcoy for rvBTBG&axjar. Bee Table of Dia- 
274. 

270. — PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT PASSIVE, 

10. The terminations of the perfect and pluperfect pas 
cannot be correctly re] i in any paradigm of a mute verb, 

kuse the termination, combining with the final mute 
. undergoes various chang the laws ^t' eu- 

phony (£ t>), which causes an apparent, but not a real variety in 
the terminations of these tenses. For the terminal! 
231. 

(1.) The terminations preceded by a nr-mute, as in the para- 
ling to the laws which regulate the combination of 
tnants, combine with it as there exhibited; viz. 

rruiiai. I tm inn 

D. TtrriiiitShu- - terwpOop rmKp&opf 43— 2, 47— 17 

P. TcTiuy Ttn , nrvuutrot tid 

(2.) I 1 by a x-mute, they combii 

le/iut&op i&w 

P. /.ca leX 

(:J.) A r-mute b oonaooailt in the pas 



142 OBSERVATIONS ON §101. 

changed into o~, and combines with the terminations of the per- 
fect and pluperfect without change, except where the termination 
begins with a, in which case the r-mute before it is rejected 
(47, 17. Obs. 9) ; thus, asi&ta for example in the perfect indica- 
tive passive is inflected as follows : 

S. 7ze:i£i<)iicu, -40-11 Tzeneiaai, 44-8 Ttenetozat 

D. 7T87Ttl6[l8i>0V 7T87l8t6&0V 7T87Z816&0V, 44-8 

P. xexticji.iefta TteTieiG&e nenetaiievot elm 

(4.) Liquid verbs whose characteristic is X or q, in the perfect 
passive, add the terminations to the root without change, except 
that those beginning with o"i>, drop the o" (47-17). Those whose 
characteristic is p insert tj before the terminations (§ 97, 3, Exc.). 
Of those whose characteristic is v dissyllables in mva>, tvco, vvoj 
reject v (244-4), and then annex the terminations without change. 
But when v is retained it is changed sometimes into \i — more 
commonly into a before the terminations beginning with p, and 
is rejected before those beginning with o0\ Before the other ter- 
minations it remains unchanged ; thus, cpatvco in the perfect indi- 
cative passive is inflected as follows : 

S. Tzecpauuat, or neya<5\iat nicpavaai neopavzat 

D. 7ze^dpue\}ov Tte^aaped'ov neyaa&ov Tte'qaG&ov 
P. 7Taqjdpue0uj 7tecpdap8&a neyaafte Tzecpaapevot elai 

Note. Before the terminations beginning with g&, v sometimes re- 
mains, and a is rejected; as, n&qtav&ov niyavQ-t &c for niqaaOov, ni- 
qaaOc, etc. 

(5.) In all mute and liquid verbs, except some, dissyllables in 
ei'vco, ivco, vvto (244-4), as the terminations vzat in the third per- 
son plural of the perfect, and vzo of the pluperfect, cannot coa- 
lesce with the root, the circumlocution of the perfect participle 
with £wr/ and rjaav„ are substituted; thus, zezvputvoi (at) elai for 
tezvjivrou ; t/yyeXfievoi (ai) eloi, for JjyyeXvrai. — But in pure verbs, 
this circumlocution is unnecessary, as the terminations vzat and 
vzo readily unite with the characteristic vowel of the root preced- 
ing ; as, zeziLtijrzai, from Tipuco ; InecfiX^vzo from cft)Jco. To 
are to be added those liquid verbs which drop v before the 
terminations of the perfect ; as, xezavzca from zehco ; y.e'y.pivzai 
from xqivcOj (fee. (244-4). 

271. SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE OF PERFECT PASSIVE. 

11. The subjunctive and optative being distinguished from the 
indicative only by the mood-vowels, and there being no mood- 
vowels in the termination of the perfect passive, it is necessary, 



Iiibited ii 

ind the I 

the numb 

un<l 1 with i t 

■ 
In a 

l 2. In the [onic ro, in 



144 DIALECTS OF VERBS IN co AND fu. §102. 

Thus, rervfifttroi s«W, is changed into zezvyazcu ; XeXeyfAJroi sloe, 
into le)Jyazca, &c. 

Ofo. 7. If (T (changed from a r-mute, 235, R. 2,) precedes the 
termination, it is changed into d or # before arat and azo ; thus, 
(T^etT^ca, perfect passive ioxevaapcu ; 3d person plural Ionic 
iaxevadazcu ; nh'ftw, perfect passive nmhjoiiai, 3d person plu- 
ral 7re7T8Xtj&azat for 7i87iXt]GfA,8voi dot. 

Obs. 8. In pure verbs, q or ex before [icu is usually changed 
into s before the Ionic arai and aro ; thus, Tzecpil-Tjvrai and -t^to 
are usually changed into Tzecpil-dazai and -£«ro. In like manner, 
a before arai and aro is changed into £, to avoid the duplication 
of the a ; thus, avaniravrai, from avantTaco, becomes avanzri- 
azcu. 

Obs. 9. In like manner, v before the termination zo, seldom 
before rai, in the indicative and optative of the other tenses, but 
never in the subjunctive, is changed into a ; thus, for rvnroivro 
we have zvitroiaro ; for y&voivzo, ysroiazo, &c. So also in verbs 
in [U] as, zideazai for zl&evzai ; lor 8 arai for laravzai. In these 
forms, a and o before v are usually changed into e ; as, ifiovltazo 
for iftovXovzo, &c. 



273.— §102. DIALECTS OF VERBS IN a> and fu. 

1. A principal difficulty in learning Greek, arises from the va- 
riety of terminations in verbs, according to the different dialects. 
These can hardly be reduced to any general principles ; but a 
pretty clear idea of them may be formed from the following table. 
It must be observed, however, that many of the same terminations 
occur in all the dialects, although that one only is mentioned in 
which they are most usual. Besides the final syllables, of which 
this table chiefly consists, the Ionians used to insert a vowel be- 
fore the last syllable, which the poets often changed into a diph- 
thong; as, Subj. 2 aor. active or passive zv7T(a, I. zvTZtco, P. zv~ 
7T8LG3. So cpvy-eiv, I. cpvy-88iv ; fto-coai, I. fto-ocoai ; bo-ag, I. bo- 
dag. But as this does not affect the inflexion of the final sylla- 
ble, it is not noticed in the table. § 98, Obs. 4. 

2. These moods and tenses of the middle and the passive 
voice, which agree in termination with the active, and are not 
here specified, are subject to similar changes, in the different dia- 
lects, with those having the same terminations in the active voice. 
The same is true respecting the terminations of verbs in fU] so 



§102. DIALECTS OF VERBS IN 0) AND fu. 145 

that this t&bl 9ral i applying to the terminations here spe- 

cified, whether they belong to verba in co or tu. The dual is 
omitted in the table, as it hot leldona ocean. For other changes 
by dialect, see § 101 throughout 

A Table exhibiting the most usual Dialects of the terminations 
of Greek Verbs. 

274.— L ACTIVE VOICE. 

FINITE MO< 
SINGULAR. 

1 Pers. -/;/«, M. -£[ifii; D. -tij.it and (if from d<x>) ~a[u ; 

as, Tift-eutM for -f/fU] ict-afii for vax-mu* 
-etr, I. -£«, D. A. -// ; as, ixc/jr-tj for -ep. 

-otjuf, - A. -o^, D. -cptjv ; as, cftk-oujr for -ofjw. 

-quel, A. -(p/;j> ; as, riu-oh t r for -cow. 

-o/'/;j>, A. -fp//i> ; as, did-cp^v for did-oujv ; and so 

on through all the persons. 

2 Pers. -«$, D. -€$, ^E. -qg\ as, uiuly-ej for -etg. 

-«S, -*?£> A. -aa(ra, -t^Oa; as, eqH]G&a for -^^; oiS- 

aa&u, contr. oio&a, for oldag. 
-cug, JE. A. -£/«£ ; as, tvxp-etag for -to?. 

-«$, A. D. -/j^ ; as, cfoir-^^ for -£$. 

3 Pers. -a J ^ m * D ' ~ f ' ^ ~ ? ' ; as ' Pf 7 " 7 / for ■» 

' ( jp/up. A. -?/, I. -ee ; as, irvep-tj for -«. 

-«f, JE. A. -«« ; as, Tvip-eie for -ca. 

-?/, I. -?;<j< ; as, timr-r^i for -?/. 

-«, -£, D. -/;, -/J ; as, 6o-fr for -£. 

-(7/, D. -r/ ; as, ri&tj-Ti for -en. 

PLURAL. 

1 Pers. -jisr, D. -//££ ; as, c&rro-fces for -//tr ; zt>U'-ot/- 

pe$ or -efyieg for -outr: qt).-tviiej for 
-oiuer ; djjk-ovpeg for -ovutr. 
. -//£r ; as, 7icfi>ti-tur for -ttq Oti-) ( i(n: 
. -zt ; as, TvqOti-Ti: for rrr/i^w- 

8 Pen. -a/, D. -;t/: as, (pdipMtrn for -am; y/-oMn 

for -cocrr, h'y-om for h'y-ovat \ Tthlrri 
for -oven; qiX-ovm for -onr/ ; nO-tirt 
OT -^W far -tTrrr ; did-com for -oSoi* 
7 



->;;/£ r, A, 

2 Pers. -/yTf, A 



146 DIALECTS OF VERBS IK co AND [U. § 102. 

3 Pers. B. into v ; as, ttrvcp-av for -cc<ji. 

-uai, -voi, -sTot, I. -maty -vaoi, -eaoi ; as, devAv-vaai for 

-vat ; rift-mat for -eiai. 
-ovai, I. -fvcrt ; -oaai, D. -orcx« ; as, did-oaai for 

-cwctj ; cpils'-oiGi for -ovcre. 
-oy, B. -ocra^ ; as, i6%d£-oaav for -o*>. 

-eaav, -ijcsav, -ogccVj -coaav, P. -ev, -av, -ov, -cov ; as, r/i>- 

€^ for -£cra^ ; ed-ov for -ocrcc^ ; 'iyv-cov 

for -G3GCCV. 

eiaav, A. I. -fierce ; as, EtXfjcp-exjav for -eiaav. 

-jjxaoi, -dxaai, JE. A. -cc<k ; as, Ts&v-mi for -r^aai. 
-cuev, JEi. A. -acw> ; as, rvxp-eiav for -ate?. 

1. 2. 3. 3. 3. 

-arcoaav, -srcoGav, -eircoaav, -orcoaav, -ovrcoaav, A. 

into 

1. 2. 3. 

-dvrcov, -ovrcov, -ovvzcov\ as, rvxp-dvTcov 

for -arcocra? ; Xsy-ovrcov for -s'zcocjav ; 

Xvtz-ovvzcov for -etzcoaav. 

-dov, contr. -co^, ) ^ T 5 - « 

r ~ v JD. 1. -ew ; as, r.yaTt-evv tor -cor. 

-sew, contr. -ot'?, ) ' " 



INFINITIVE. 



-eiv, -evai, I. -Sfiev, A. D. -t'pevai, -evv, M. -er, -r L v ; 

as, ikd-efievcu for -«? ; dfit'ly-ev for -£/>• ; 

ild'-Bfisv and -s'fievcu for -crat. 
-at, A. D. -8fji8vai ; as, zvxp-a'fievcu for -cm. 

-aV, A. D. -dfievcu, -\jv, JE. ->;r, -?;£, -«*£ ; as, 

£>> for £«*. (§ 98. 055. 2.) 
-ow, A. D. -Sfievai, E. -£t#>, -coy, JE. -o^, -olv ; 

as, Qty-cov for -ow. 

PARTICIPLES. 

-ovaa, D. -otcja, -tvcya ; as, ^az-evaa for Lxp-ovGa. 

-ag, -acra, -av, D. -o«£, -okr*, -aw ; as, QtMxag for -«£, 

, &c. 
-tjx-cog, ) -via, -6g, A. -cog, -coca, -cog ; as, ear-cog for 
-ax-coV, f -ijxcog, § 101. 7. I. -fco b \ 

-coV, M. -cov ; as, zezvop-cov, G. -ovzog, for -co^, 

-070^. 



§103. 



D CONJUG 



147 



JI. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 

FINITE MOODS. 
LB, 

1 Pers. -oitaij t D. -(Winn ; r-Ofuu. 

-ovum, 1 >. -tiiK'.t ; as. (ia&-ev(uu for -ovfuu* 

-///,;•, D. -//r<r; as, irvrrrn-uar for -,"/,'• 

2 Pers. -/,, A. -t-/, I. indie -mi, Bubj. -//</ 

for -/,, i 

-oi', I. -6o, I » . tKiy/tv for -ot/. 

-w, I. -ao ; as, iXvc-ao for -w. 

PLURAL. 

1 Pers. -ii)«, D. -£0"i>«; as, ty.ou-eafta for -£■/>«. 

3 Pers. -rrco, -t'pottlai, I. -«T6« or -tana; as, xtarcu for xeirtcu ; 

tiQv-uTui for -^z«/ ; hhy-azui for 

rot aW, (§101. 12.) 
-i>to, -e*oi ytfar, I. -«ro or -earo ; as, mv^oi-azo for 

-ofjro ; iytv-taro for -orro ; £gtuI-uto 

for -ps?oi /Jrr«r, (§ 101. 12.) 
-jy<ra*>, ^E. -«> ; as, dvrq&et-ep for -i^ui", tTvcf0-ev 

for -ifiuv. 
A. I. D. -ew; as, Xe£cuj'&-(x>P for -woar. 



-wear, 



-TjVCU, 



-ovu-trog, 



INFINITIVE. 

D. -Nutria, JE. -ift*8*] as, uiqO-^ucr for 



-t.yai. 



PARTICIPLES. 

D. yE. -evpepog\ as, tptX-evu*rog for -ot>- 



§103. SECOND CONJUGATION. 

275. — Verbs of the second conjugation end in 
juc, and are formed from pure verbs of the first^ 

as follows : 

1. a is changed into /•/, and the short vowel 



148 SECOND CONJUGATION. § 103. 

before it is changed into its own long, or the 
doubtful vowel lengthened ; thus, 

From 6$£(o is formed c^fit I extinguish 

yvoco yvcofit I know 

cpcico cprjfii I say 

vXvco vXvfit I hear 

2. Regular verbs in dco, sco, ogj, reduplicate the 
initial consonant with i in the present and imper- 
fect; thus, 

From deco is formed dt-dqfit I bind 

&tco ti-ftqfit I place 

doco did co fit I give 

But Tikkco makes mfinh]fii I fill, 47-19 

3. Verbs beginning with a vowel, prefix t> 
which is called the improper % ' reduplication ; thus, 

From i co is formed Mjfu I go 
8co i-rjfu I send 

Obs. 1. Also verbs beginning with at or nx prefix t with the 
aspirate; thus, 

From ordco is formed i-aryjut 
nrdco t-mtjfit 

4. The reduplication is not used in verbs in v/ut, 
nor in those whose radical primitive has more 
than two syllables ; thus, 

From yXvco comes vXvfit I hear 

lacico tanfit I know 

bveco o vi] fit I assert 

Likewise some other verbs ; as, 

(pdco cptjfit I say, &c. (No. 1.) 

Obs. 2. Some verbs which begin with a vowel repeat the first 
syllable, after the manner of the Attic reduplication (224-6) ; 
thus, ciXtjfit and akakqfit ; a%rjfii and cly.dyjjfu. 

Obs. 3. Some pure verbs add vvv to the root before fit, and 
some mute and liquid verbs add vv in order to pass into pi ; as, 

GY.zdv.co R. (jxeda cxEdd-rvv-fii 

deixco decs. dtr/.-vv-fit 

aoco cIq JlP-AT-MI, ao-rv-fua 






§104,105. TI1K TKIiMIXATIOX. 149 

5. Verba in ut have only three tenses of that 
form; viz. tin- Present^ the Tmpe, . and the 2 

Aorist. The other tenses are taken from tl 
primitive in co, and are of the first conjugation, 
296, Verbs in v/ui want the second aorist, and 
also the subjunctive and optative. When tli< 
moods are needed, they are borrowed from forms 
of the first conjugation in vco. 

Obs. 4. Several verbs form only the 2d aorist according to this 
conjugation, 216, Obs. 1; in such cases, verbs in vco have the 
2d aorist in vv ; as, 

pair co from fidco Root pa 2d aor. iBt/p 

yr/iojG'ACO yvoco yvo tyrcov 

dvco dv tbvv 

Obs. 5. Many verbs of this conjugation are deponent, having 
only the passive form, while their signification is active ; such are 
dvva t uai, I can ; -/.upou, I lie ; di^put, I seek ; oiO(iaiy I think. 



276.— §104. THE ROOT AND AUGMENT. 

1. The Root of verbs in pi has but one form, and is the same 
with the first root of the verb from which it is derived ; thus, 
IGT7][U from ordco, R. ora ; tUhftU from fttco, R. />£, Ac 

2. In Verbs that reduplicate (275-2), the reduplication is pre- 
fixed to the root in the present and imperfect only. 

3. The imperfect and 2d aorist are augmented in the same 
manner as in verbs of the first conjugation. 



277.— § 105. THE TERMINATION, OR FINAL LETTERS. 

1. In the first conjugation, the terminations consist of two 
parts, the mood-vowels, and final letters, 225-2. In the second, 
the mood-vowels are wanting, and their place supplied by the 
last letter of the root, which sufficiently distinguishes the ma 
bv the changes which it undergoes in combining with the final 
letters. 



150 



FORMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES. 



§106. 



2. The Final letters in all verbs belonging to this conjugation, 
are the same. They are divided into two classes, Primary and 
Secondary, The primary belong to the present indicative only ; 
the secondary to the indicative of the imperfect and 2 aorist, and 
to the optative in all the tenses. They are joined immediately 
to the root, and, so far as they can be separated from it, are as 
follows : 

278. — I. ACTIVE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Primary Tenses. 
Sing, -\ii -g -gi 

Dual. -rov -rov 

Plur. -pep -re -vrai 



Secondary Tenses, 

-v -g 
-rov 

-fXEV -T8 



T7jV 

aav 



Sing. 
Dual. 
Plur. 



Imperative. 



-TOP 

-re 



-too 
-rcov 

-TCOGCiV 



Infinitive. 
-vai 
Participles. 
N. -vrg -vr6a -v G. -prog, <fcc. 



279. — II. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Secondary Tenses, 



Primary Tenses. 
Sing, -fiat -ecu -rai 
Dual, -pe&ov -g&op -g&op 
Plur. -pe&a -G&e -prcu 



-fie&ov 
-{lefta 



-go 

-G&OP 

-G&e 



-TO 

-G&nv 
-pro 



Imperative. 

Sing. ■ -go -g&co 

Dual. . -g&ov -Gxrcov 

Plur. -G&8 -g&cogclv 



Infinitive. 

-G&CU 

Participles. 
N. -pevog -\iepr[ -fisvov 



§ 106. FORMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES IN THE 
ACTIVE VOICE. 

280. — In the present and imperfect, through 
all the moods, prefix the reduplication, in verbs 
that reduplicate, and then — 



§ 106. FORMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES. 151 

1. For tin Indicative. 

281. — Rulk Change tin* short vowel of the root 
into its own long (237) in the singular of the 
present and imperfect, and in all the nurnLers of 
the 2 aorist, and then add the final letters, 277-2 ; 
thus, 





PRESENT. 




IMPERFECT. 


2d aorist. 


s. 


IGT^-fU -g 


-GL 


ir>7/ r r -g — 


kC>T) r V -g 


1). 


to i a — -rov 


-70V 


lota — -rov -zt t v 


tort] — -70 p -T/ t i- 


p. 


l<Jia-{l€V -78 


-01 


(oia-uev -78 -oav 


hG7)]-\L8V -78 -GUV 



Exc. 1 . In the 2 aorist, tidyfu, didcopi, and it] fit, have the long 
vowel in the singular only. 

2. For tlie Subjunctive. 

282. — Rule. Change the final vowel of the 
root into the subjunctive terminations, g5, f$> jj, 
&c, 229 ; thus, 

i'onjfii, R. or a- Subj. Pres. igt-cq, -rjg, -#; -jfzov, -7;tov, &c. 
2 Aor. o~t-co, -fig, -rj; -ijzor, -);ror, &G, 

Obs. Tliese terminations, in the subjunctive, combine with the reg- 
ular subjunctive terminations (229) the final vowel of the root, forming 
a sort of mixed vowel or diphthong, and consequently they alwavs 
have the circumflex accent, as here. 

Exc, 2. But verbs in copi retain co through all the persons and 
numbers; as, 

didcopi from doco, R. do, Subj. Pres. did-co, -cog, -co ; -coror, etc. 

2 Aor. d-co, -cog, -co ; -cotot, &0. 

3. For tlie Optative, 

283. — Rule. Change the final vowel of the 
root into its own diphthong, and add the second- 
ary final letters with // prefixed; thus, 

a. iarai-Tjv -^g -//, &c iiihi-^r -^g -/;, (fee #/tW-/,r, A 
2 Aor. tncu-ijv -t;g ->/, Arc. titi-t^ -i t g -/;, ike. doi 



152 



FORMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES. 



§107. 



4. For the Imperative, 

284. — Rule. In tlie present tense, add the final 
letters to tlie root ; but in the 2 aorist, change the 
short vowel into its own long ; thus, 

Present, lara-fti, -tea, -rov, -rcov, -re, -rcocav. 
2 Aorist, ozij -#x, -rco, -rov, &c. 

Exc. 3. In the 2 aorist, ri&qfu, didcofii, and ir^t, retain the 
short vowel, and add g instead of fti in the 2d person singular ; as, 
fte-g, -rco ; -rov, -rcov, &c. ; do-g, -rco ; -rov, -rcov, &c. So also 
amjfM, cpQ?j[M, and GXWh in the present, have cmeg, cpoeg, ff/€£. 

5. For the Infinitive. 

285. — Rule. In the present tense, add the final 
letters to the root, and in the 2 aorist, change the 
short vowel into its own long ; thus, 
Present, i<jrd-vcu, 2 aor. arij-vai. 

Exc. 4. In the 2 aorist, ti&itfu and hjfii change the short 
vowel of the root into ei, and didcopi changes it into ov ; as, 
fiel-vcti el-vai dov-vcu 

6. For the Fartwiples. 

286. — Rule. Add the final letters to the root, 
and then combine by the rules of euphony, § 6, 
18 ; thus, 



iard-vrg, 


-vzaa, 


-v, 


combined 


tcz-dg, 


-aaa, 


-dv. 


n&wrg, 


-vrcsa, 


-v, 




zi&-eig, 


-U6CI, 


-£V. 


dido-vzg, 


-vtaa. 


-v, 




did-ovg, 


-OVCJCC, 


-ov. 


deixvv-vzg, 


-vtaa, 


-v> 




deixv-vg, 


-ma, 


r 

-vv. 



§ 107. FORMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES IN THE 
MIDDLE AND THE PASSIVE VOICE. 

287. — Prefix the reduplication in the present 
and imperfect in verbs that reduplicate (275-2), as 
in the active voice ; and then, in all the tenses, — 



§107. FORMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES. 153 

1. Far the Indicative, Imperative, Infinitive^ and 
Participles. 

288. — Rule. Annex the final letters (279) to 

the root ; ; . 

Indicative, icjia-uui, -aui, -rat, (fee Imp. ioru-ui^; -co, -to, i 

Imperative, ioru-oco, -afro), -oOor, -o*>o)i , 

Infinitive, laza-aOai. 

Participles, laid {itrog, -/<*V/,, -furor* 

2. For the Subjunctive. 

289. — Rule. Change the last letter of the root 
into the subjunctive terminations, go/lucc, f h ijrcu, 
etc., 230, and 282, Obs. ; as, 

usttftu, R. oza- Subj. Pres. lar-ooiua, -jj f -Jjca, Ac 

2 Aor. oz-co^iai, -|j, -/~r«/, . 

Exc. Verbs in co^t retain co through all the numbers and per- 
sons, as in the active voice, 282, Exc. 2 ; as, 

didcofii, R. do- Subj. Pres. did-ojuai, -co, -cozui, etc. 

2 Aor. 8-co[mu, -co, -cot at, &C 

3. i^ *7^ Optative. 

290. — Rule. Change the last letter of the root 
into its own diphthong, and add the secondary 
final letters ; as, 

ujTTjfu, R. era- Opt. Pres. /o"r«/-///;r, -co, -to, a 

2 Aor. Grcu-fttfP, -oo, -to, i 

06s. 27 is usually rejected in the 2d person singular ; mak- 



inff- 



ioTia-u^v, -o, -to, <fcc. oral-utj, -o, -to, tfcc, 295-8. 

291. — N. B. As the root of verbs in in ends in a, 8, o, 
these vowels, combining with the final letters, cause the 
ance of four different forms of termination, and for this reason 
four paradigms have usually been given, though there is in fact 
only am . The following tables will show, that, in whatever vowel 
the root ends, still there is but one form u^ inflection. 

7* 



154 



PARADIGM OF YERBS IN* iu. 



§108. 



§ 108. PARADIGM OF VERBS IN ML* 

292. — ACTIVE VOICE. 

PRESENT TENSE. 

Indicative Mood, 281. 
Singular. Dual. Plural. 



didco 
deixvv 



1st ) 



larai 

TI&81 

did oi 



-pi -g -ai 

-co -rjg -fj 
-go -cpg -cp 

V -tfV -tjg -7] 



dido C 
eixvv J 



icta 
ri&s 



Tar a -&i 3 \ 

Tlds -Tl A \ (. 

dido -W 
dti'Avv-Q'i 



-rov -tov 
deixvv 

Subjunctive, 282. 
-tjrov -r t Tov 
-cjtov -cotov 

Optative, 283. 

-tjtov -ijztjv 
Imperative, 284. 



-[18V -T8 

(-vzai 1 ) 



laraai 
ri\}8iai 
didovai 
deixvvai 



-CQfA8V -V{Z8 -COai 

-tt\i8v -a>z8 -ovai 
-T]fi8v 2 -i]X8 -vaav 



-TOV 



-7CQV 



Infinitive, 285. 



laza 

Tli>8 



-vai 



d8MVV 



V 




-T8 


■zcoaav 5 


p 

tat- 


articipl 
ig 


es, 286. 
-da a 


-av 


TlV- 

did-i 

dsr/. 


8i g 

wg 

v-vg 


-8iaa 
-ova a 
-vaa 


-8V 

-ov 
-vv 



IMPERFECT TENSE, 294-6 (2). 

Indicative, 281. 
iara 

8 ZlO 8 

idido 
ideixw 

The other moods in the imperfect are wanting. 

Note. The numbers 1, 2, 3, <fcc, refer to the same numbers in 8 109. 



lazrj } 

izi&rj \ 

ididco i 

idtixrv j 



-v -g — 



-tov -zt;v 



-J18V -rs -aav 7 



* For the accents, see 254—2. 



f 43, Obs. 5. 



§108. 



LADI0M OF VERBS IX ^/. 



155 



Singular, 
i'8co ) 



PARADIGM OF VERBS I\ ML 

iVK VOICE. 
SECOND AOUIST. 

Indicative Mood, 281. 

Dual. Plural. 



taxi] J 

tfre > -rov -n i r 

eSo ) 

Subjunctive, 282. 



-fup -re -guv 7 



ar 



# \ - w n$ -u 




-qrop 


-rjov 


-couev -tjre -coGi 


8 -go -<pg -co 




-CJTOV -W70V 


-couev '(are -ojgi 




Optative, 283. 


czui ) 








8oi ) 




-i\zov -*jpp 


-qfUP -rjs -rfittv 




Imperative, 284. 


(7z7 r 0i 3 ) 








86 -g ) 




-top -rcov 


-re -rcoGav 


Infinitive, 285. 


Participles, 286. 


crrq ) 

(hi - 
8ov ) 


-icu 




tftag 
frag 


GTUGCt 67 ( 

{hlaa 

8 ova a 



The numbers 1, 2, 8, i im€ numb 

g 109. 

KoU •_'. i in the tablet of the first 

conji; 1--J. 



156 



PARADIGM OF VERBS IN \li. 



108. 



Singular. 



PARADIGM OF VERBS IN ML 
293. — MIDDLE YOICE. 

PRESENT TENSE. 

Indicative Mood, 288. 
Dual. 



iGta 



-pai -cut, -tai 



daixrv 



Igz ) 



~[ia&ov -G&OV -G&OV 
Subjunctive, 289. 



Plural. 
-fis&a -G&e -vrai 



-<a[icu -cp -cjrat 



-mflE&OV -tjg&ov, &c. 

-COftS&OV -gmj&ov, &c. 

Optative, 290. 



-cofie&a -fJG&s -wvrai 
-cojU£^« -ooG&s -tovrai 



igtcu ) 

ridel > -\irp -0 ((TO 8 ) -to 

didoi ) 



iGta 
ri&s 
dido 
deixvv 



• -GO 9 -G&CO 



-flE&OV -G&OV -Gd-tjV 

Imperative, 288. 

-G&OV -G&00V 



-[I8&a -0"#6 -VTO 



Infinitive, 288. 
• -g&cu 



iGta 

TI&8 



deixvv 



iota 

TI&8 

dido 
daixvv 



-G&S -G&COGUV 

Participles, 288. 

-fierog -{iwrj -\l8vov 



iGta 



iM6 f ' 

idar/.vv 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 

Indicative, 288. 
-ped or -g&ov -G&t;r 



~[A8&a -G&s -no 



The other moods of the imperfect are wanting. 

Note. The numbers 8, 9, refer to the same numbers in § 109. 



§108. 



; LDIGM OF TIBBfl IX pi. 



157 



PARADIGM OF \TEKB8 IX Ml. 
MIDDLE 

SECOND AOKi 

Indicativi Mood, 288. 
Singular. 1 >ual. Plural. 

•f&fra -Gttt -no 



i&i > ~um -go -to 

ido 



GT } 

* r 



-flE&OV -G&0V -G&tjP 

Subjunctive, 289. 



eojuca -co -toiai 



-CQflS&OV -IJG&OV, &c. 

-cofie&ov -6Sg&ov 9 <fce. 



-coped a -7jG&e -6)i t ui 
-cofie&a -cogOu -corrai 







Optative, 290. 




GTUl j 
#£*' ' 

6V 


- -/i^ -0((70 8 )-T0 


'jisOov -( 


Ti>oj> -(7t>;;y 


-(18&* -G&8 -I'TO 






Imperative, 2S8. 


(7f(i ) 
£o ) 


-(70 9 -0"#CO 


-( 


7#0*' -G&CQV 


-G&8 -G&COGCCV 




Infinitive, 28* 


3. 


Participles, 288. 




(7T(i ) 

#£ \-G0ta 
86 




86 ) 


wog flfal -fU 



The PRB€ >1 IMPERFECT PA88IY1 816 like 1 1 1 • * 

and IMP] MIDDLE. Tll< .mt- 

Nbfa Pot the other tenses of verbs i:. }§ 110, 111, and for 

the dialects, § 10* 



158 OBSERVATIONS ON VERBS IN (U. §109. 

§ 109. OBSERVATIONS ON VERBS IN fu. 

294. — ACTIVE VOICE. 

1. The final letters of the 3d person plural are properly vzgi ; 
and these, combining with the preceding vowel according to the 
rules of euphony (47-18), become dai, aiai, ovai, vai, toai. 

2. In the optative, rj is often dropped before the final letters 
of the plural, making — 

-ai\iav, -aire, -aiav ; -ai\iav, -aiza, -aiav ; -oi\iav, -otza, -oiev ; 

instead of — 

-airjfiev, -aujza, -airjaav ; -airjpav, (fee. 

3. iartjiu has sometimes tavq for icjza&i in the imperative ; 
and in compounds, aza is commonly used for Gzrfti ; thus, ava- 
aza for dvaaztjdi ; nag data for TiaQciGzrfti, (fee. 

4. So also ri&q[u 9 di'dco[M, and iijfu, have sometimes zi&ai, 
didov, isi, for zl&azi, dldo&i, h&i ; but these are properly con- 
tracted forms of the primitive verb with the reduplication, used 
in the Ionic and Doric dialects ; thus, rid'sa, imperative zl&aa, 
contracted zi&ai. 

5. As in verbs in go (261), so also in those in fit, ivzcov is used 
for tzooaav in the imperative 3d person plural. 

6. The primitive in go, with the reduplication, is sometimes 
used instead of the form in \ii in the present and imperfect ; thus, 

(1.) Present. 

ziftaco, -ieig, -tat, contr. -co, -aig, -at, for zi&rnii, -qg, -7]6t, (fee. 
iazdeo, -datg, -dai, " -co, -ag, -a, " tarqiu, -qg, -ijai, <fcc. 

through all the moods. 

(2.) Imperfect. 

izi&eov, -sag, -aa, contr. -ovv, -atg, -at, for izt&qv, -Tjg, -r L , (fee. 

7. The terminations -aaav, -aaav, (fee, in the 3d person plu- 
ral, are frequently shortened by syncope ; as, igzclv for lazaaav ; 
azidav for azl&acav ; afiav for epqaav. 

295. — MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 

8. In the 2d person singular of the imperfect indicative, mid- 
dle, and passive, a is often rejected, and the concurring vowels 
contracted ; thus, igzco for hzaao ; zi&ov for zi'&aao, (fee. So in 
the present indicative, sometimes fozri for iczaacu. Also in the 



§110. i'lilMITI'. 

2d person singular of the opl 

being incapable of contra* lain unchanged. 

traction lakes place in the in ; but 

in the 2d aorist frwro is contracted into froi only in 
as, naqdOov, vno6 



§110. TENSES FORMED FROM THE PEDflTTVE 

I.— Verbs in tu have only tin-. of that t 

the present, imperfect, and 2d aorist All the otfo 
formed from the first root of the primitive, as in the first oonj 
tion (232—2), and are inft (he same tenses in rafl 

ri'lhjtt, from (rt'co, has fut. \fi t G0J, •Q-! i cou,ai, &c. 

didcout, from doco, has fut. dcoGco, dcoGotaa, 

hr^tit, from gtugj, has fut. gi^gm, 1 aofr. tGT/^ju, <fcc. 

297. — EXCEPTIONS. 

1. J- Some wrbs occasionally retain the reduplication; 
as, 8i8c6 g co from di'dcofi /; and verbs from derivatives in rveo and 
n'l'w form the future from their primitives; thus, Su'xrvut from 
dttxrvco. has the future fai^GJ from dct'y.co.. 

2. /'Vr.v/ Aorist. Ti&jjfH, (Vtfcow, and f/,/*/, have x^ and xapqp 
instead of rrc. and Gutter in the 1st aorist indicative; as, l 
8&7]xa, tfhjxafirpr \ i'dcoxu, idmxafapr, Are. In thes the 
other moods of this tense are wantii 

3. Perfect and Pluperfect Active. Verbs in pc from /co 
monlv have £/ before x^ of the perfect ; thot 

&; as, tiftnui from i'h-j, pert rtlhr/.u\ uirna from OTOCt), | 
wrjyxa, or BGtaxa. In tli< ny/44 aspirates the augm< 

and. except in the singular of the indicative, has a 
form which resembles the present ; thus, first person plural a 
xafcer, by syncope, wraper, ftc infinite 
tor una ; participle, as 267. 

rfect act; tion; 

thus In the | 

ct, future, l * tive, it 

In the p 
aorist middle is not in 

i. / The short vowel of the root rema 

>naiit in the ; /</, future pan 



160 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. §111.112. 

do-iy^aof^ai, 1 aorist id6-&rjv, perfect dtdo-pou, &c. But ei before 
xa in the perfect active returns before \im in the perfect passive ; 
as, perfect active -ze&ei-xa, future passive t8-&i';go[a,cu (43-4), per- 
fect passive Ttdu-[iai. 

5. Tenses wanting. Verbs in \ii want the second and third 
roots, and consequently the tenses derived from them ; viz. the 
second future passive, the 2d perfect and 2d pluperfect active, 
and the 2d aorist passive. 



298.— gill. TABLE EXHIBITING ALL THE TENSES OF 
VERBS IN ML 



ACTIVE. 

hzrtfu 

IGZtjV 
GZIjGCO 

EGtyGU 

SGzrjv 

eGzaxa or -nxa 

sGzdxsiv or siGzaxeiv 



Present. 
Imperf. 
Fut. 

1 Aor. 

2 Aor. 
Perf. 
Pluperf. 
Fut. perf. 

299. — Verbs in 

irjjju from eoo I send 

V' [ oBt'co I extinguish 

GptVVVfU ) r ^ 

t.evyvv^ii £evyo3, 1 join 

didn[U, de'co I bind 

iTTZijIii nrdco I fly 

iyvijfxi op too I help 

opvviu 6[ioco I swear 



MIDDLE. 

iazafjuu 

IGZCtfAqV 
GTi]GO\iai 

iGzrjGdprjv 
iGzapyv 



PASSIVE. 

LGtafiai 
iGzdfirjv 
GradtjGOfiai 
ZGzd&qv 



SGZCtflOU 

SGzd^v 

SGz/^OfiCU 



MI to be conjugated. 

7i i paly [it., from n)Jco I fill 

hence nXIftco 
6lXv[ii olz'co I destroy 

viy.ri[ii nxdco, I conquer 

cpn[ii cpdco I say 

yXv[ii xlvco I hear 

Qoivvvju qow I strengthen 



§112. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS IN ML 

300. — The irregular and defective verbs in [ii are usually 
reckoned nine ; viz. dpi, I am ; el[ii and fmu, I go ; iij[n, I send ; 
elfioUf I clothe myself; eha, I did set ; i^iai, I sit; xai[i(u,I lie 
down ; (pr^i, I say ; and olda, I know. The parts in use are as 
follows : 



§112. 



IRREGULAR 



161 



s. 


5 / 


p. 


tGflbV 


s. 


T 

CO 


]). 




p. 


cofiev 


s. 
I). 


Eiiyv 


p. 


t(\u£V 



301.— I. Eifii, I <nn. 

ACT I V I 

Indicative. 
hdZOV 

iazt 
Subjunctive. 

V 

r t xov 

7jT8 

Optative. 



Imperative. 
S. wo tarco 

D. tar ay tar coy 

P. tOTS tOrcOOaV 



D. 



5 <n i v 

ue&op 



7jT8 

MIDDLE VOICE. 
IMPERFECT. 

Indicative. 






■ 
iarov 



7 

V 



COOl 





etrjg 

UTjXOP 


eirj 
mpnp 


tU { Tt 


tu;GUV 




Infiniti\ 


Participles 




thai 


If. coy 

F. ova a 
F. oV 


IMPERFECT TENSE. 




Indicative. 






IjTOV 


7 7 

?j or yp 



raay 



i t aOf;y 



Iridic, tao^iatj Opt tam'u^y, 1; u, Part, ;lar. 



162 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 



§112. 



302.— THE CHIEF DIALECTS OF slftL 

ACTIVE VOICE. 
PRESENT. 

Indicative. 



1. 

Sing, ilfily D. ijLijul, 

Plur. icFfitv, zlj.i£q, 

P. ijiievy df,iiv. 



Sing, o), I. so), P. uo). 
Plur. W[a.iv, D. wjiiEQ, 

P. £t(Of4,iV, tX0fA,£V. 



Sing. fwyr, I. EOijLtt,. 
Plur. ztrifitv, I, tijAEV. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



2. 
ftc;, or f*, I. & tg, P. eft, 

laxiy P. ete. 



Subjunctive. 

fa, I. £?]?, P. *I4J<J. 
7/TE. 



Optative. 

I eIV/s, I. eovq. 

Imperative. 

£(70, P. eWo, A. lo-^h. 

£0~T£. 



Infinitive. 



eot/, D. eVt/, ivl. 
da I, D. eVt/, ^E. eVt&, 

ZVVTt, P. £7x0**, ECMSGl. 



^, I. £7], f 14], //O^, e//(T*j 

P. fiW*. 

5 T f v 

OJO"f<, I. £b)(7*. 



I ?My, L got. 

I eujdav, I. A. e*s*. 



E0TOJ. 

ecjTOHTav, A. I'otmv, 

P. EoVrOjy. 



mm, I. f'afv, ft^fv, D. e/Ltevcu, rjjtiev, ijfttq, eljutc, M. sjujuevcu, P. eju t uev. 



M. aw, L £aw, -^E. £<<£. 



Participle. 

Fenx oixra, I. lovaa, D. 
* root, £0 Tea, eaaaa, 
JQ. ela a, zaaoL. 



Neut. or, I. £ 5 oV, JE. 
IV. 



IMPERFECT. 



Indicative. 



Sing. ?jv, I. £ce, iya, P. Iiyv, 
£^r, r///i>, for, r t ov } 

IG/.OV. 

Du. 

Plur. ^£r, D. 7//U?, P. !f/**v. 



^C, I. E*S, EftC, P. -£ f C, 
EO?, fcOV.fC,', ^E. /^O"- 

flce, £/ / (7«9a. 

//TO J', yE. t(JTOV, P. 
_ £TOJ', J^CFTOV. 
//Tc, I. EOfcTE. 



?;, or jr, I D. ff, | 5j 

P. BCFXf. 

?t^v, A. Sjarijv, P. 

tGTTJV. 

?]crar, P. £<rar, sWar, 

£(TXOV. 



§112. 



AND 1)1 






Plur. 



Sing. 



Mil 

I M I 

I 
Indicative. 



UttftO. 



>ing. tcrona:, I), leoufuu, ;"<r> ( . A 

,'TfTCtl. 

Plur. tcronfOa. 

lntin. ujkjUul, P, ujchgQcu. Particip. £ 

303.— II. E1/lu, I go. 

ive voi 



PRESEN 

iilar. Dual. 

Indie e^u tl^urtl tJoi trot ftrof 
Sul.j. mm / nyrof //,ror 



Plural. 



KHfiep 



lOlia lOtg 104 tOttOP IQiltjV 

Imper. i'Oi rVoo fro;> frcw 

Inlin. &aj Part tew /Wo<£ tor, Gen. torro? /on:/.. 



iT£ <oi<>viaoi 

ton* toi 

he no 



- 
Dual. 

Plur. 



>T j}£ 



IMPERFECT. 

Indicative. 

Tror 



. 



]\Iii>DLi-: VorcK. — "Is/leu, to hat 

Indicati 

VUU -tain -trai -*;/. 



nt. 
Imper£ i-ipy* -too 

Ohx. l. The Attics, and b< i 
of tlni, in tli.' indicative, infinitive, and participles, in a ful 

. ■• / will 

ill.' and 

iinj 

th.' Becond a j.t the third 

n t i, and urar, peculiar to epic \s 
found. 



164 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. § 112. 

304. — III. "Irjfii, to send, from a El2. 

ACTIVE VOICE. 
PRESENT. 

Indie, irjpi hjg iijai lerov tezov Ie\iev fere idai, or ieTci 

Subj. too irjg Irj ijjzov lipov loopEV Ijjte looai 

Opt. Wu]v Isijjg, &c. 

Imper. m(it&i) ierooiEtov ttroov Iete iercoaav 

Infin. levcu Participles, ieig leloa lev Gen. Uvrog, &c. 

IMPERFECT. 

Indie, leov leeg lee ) * < / » » * 

r<™+„ « « « Y letov lerriv leuev iete leaav 
Contr. iovv ieig lei j t r 

FUTURE. 

Indie. ?jG-co -eig -ei -erov, &c. 

1 AORIST. 

Indie, yx-a -ag -£ -atov, &c. 

2 AORIST. 

eh or efoijv eljiev ehe elaccp 

elzov eixi]v el\iev ehe elev 

stop 8Z03V ere ercoaav 

Infin. eivai Participles, eig elect sv Gen. evtog, <fcc. 
Perf. eix-a -ag, &c. Pluperf. eix-eiv -eig, &c. 

MIDDLE VOICE. 
PRESENT. 

Indie. lEficu leaai terai lepe&ov, &c. 

Subj. ccio/iat /?] ujtcu ioDfie&ov, &c. 

Opt. loifjojv, &c. Imper. tWo or lotr. Infin. tead-cu. Part, iepevog, &c. 

Indicative. 
Imperf. (VjU^ fccro, &c. Fut. ?j(jo[iai, &c. 1 Aor. ?jxd[i?p>, &e. 

2 AORIST. 

Indie, eljiyv ejao ejro effied-ov elo&ov etadyv efye&a, <fec. 

Subj. ojfjiai ft ijrai, &c. 

Opt. ol\i)]v olo oho, &c. rarely ei[M]v elo, &c. 

Imper. ov tattoo, &c. Infin. taiha. Part, eperog -?/ -oa> 

Perf. Indie. ei[iou eiaat, &c. Infin. elottai 
Pluperf. Indie. elp\v eloo, &c. 



Indie. 7/xa ^x«£ 


rjxe 


Subj. ca f t g 


7], &C. 


r\ i. ^ ' r/ 


f/ 


Opt. a^ a^£ 


eirj 


Imper. ?g 


tr 
EZ03 



§112. [BRBGULAB A". 

frfftoficu, l Am;, [ndic, <<"•'>/, r. Part ftl 

305. — IV. El/ucci, I cloth* i 

Thi from ho, /» go to. — 

Idle, to put one's self into, to <7o///< one's a the 

Baine in the present middle, and present and thus, 

PRB8. MID., AM) PRE8. AM) , 

Indie S. tl-uia, -Guty -rat and -orui. — 8d PL At cu. I 

FlKsr AORIfi 
Indie. £i(7 (eW, mo) -utii^'y -co, -«ro, Arc. Part, tGOt'cutio*;. 

PLUPBR] 
Indie. tui! t r y UGo and Tcjcro, tiro, Hdro, nciro, and tozo. 3d PL 8& 

306. — V. Elect, did set, did pL 

Juaa (from ho, to put), a defective trans, wh, to A/// a foun- 
dation ; to erect (a building), lias the following forms, \i/. : 
\« r. 1 aor. Lion, (fee Mid. eiaafjup, i 
The diphthong h is properly the augmented root e, which, 

ffever, IS retained m all the moods. The future UtFOfUU is sel- 
dom used. The detective parts are supplied from irnvco. 

307.— VI. r Eftai, I •sit. 
x FTuui is properly a perf, passive, with a present intra 

fieation, from the same ho, to put, t<> pi ; thus, I' 

J kaVi h * or H t, and remain BO ; i.e. I sit. It wants the 

Bubjunctive and optathre except in the compound xa&qficui which 

::u\>coit(n f xa&oqttpr, <ka and i^ more common than i t inu. 

PBXfi 

tlt'J -Gat -Tat \-fU&OP -C&OP -O&09 -;<i0a -(7. 

[mper. I — -go -olho -gOov -Gihoy — -otte -<• 

In£ rjO&cu f/*sro£-fj -oy 

IMPKRFJ 

Indie v.'/m- -(70 -to |-//t/>or -0#or -oO^i -tniht -<- 

t iTiu the [onians u i, and the I 

and tor ypfo in like manner tCttO and ttaro. S rai 

and xa&fptO the tonic forms are 'AUTtanu and >:. 



166 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 



§112. 



308.— VII. Ktlftai, Hie down. 

This verb may be regularly derived from xesoo, for eco by pros- 
thesis of xe ; xe&m becomes yJr^i in the 2 conjugation, and in the 
middle, xt'epai, by contraction, xefyuu. It has the Ionic forms, 
y.taxai and ixsazo for xaivzai and exeivzo, 272. 



PRESENT. 

Dual. 
-[asOov -6&0V -6&0V 
-6&0V -6&CQP 



Plural. 
-fxed-a -c&s -vzai 



Singular, 

Indie. y.aT-pai -6ca -zai 
Imp. xei — -go -o&co 
Inf. y.tia&ai 
Part. y.eliiBvog -?] -ov 

IMPERFECT. 

Indie, iy.ei-ptjv -60 -zo \-[ia&ov -ad'OV -o"#^|-^£#« -o&s -vzo 

FUTURE. 

Indie. xeiG-opcu -q -szcu, &c. regular. 

309.— VIII. &m*i, I say. 

(fypt, except cpfig, in the 2d person singular of the present in- 
dicative active, is like igt^ul It appears to have had an ancient 
form ijfii, whence, probably, we have the forms of the imperfect, 
}]}•, yg, i n frequently used in familiar language with £' iyci and 
#' og; as, yv d 1 iyco, "said I;" i) 6" og, "said hey The infini- 
tive cfdvai is always used in the sense of the past time ; as, cpdrcu 
zov 2.coy.ouit], " that Socrates has said." When the present in- 
finitive is required, it is supplied by Isysw. 

310.— IX. Ol8a, I Mow. 

ACTIVE VOICE. 

PRESENT. 

Singular. Dual. 



Ind. olou ola&a* olos (v) 
Subj. a&5 eforjg aidrj, &c. 
Opt. eideiTfP tideirjg eideii], &c. 

Imp. - iGih i'gtco 



IGXOV IGZOV 



(GtOV (6Z0JV 



Plural. 

iGflBV 1678 IGUGI 



Inf. eldtvui 



Part, t-ldcog -via -og 



1618 l6TC06aV 



* Old'av, with the paragogic &a, oidacf&a, by syncope olada. 
Attic form ola&at:. 



Old 



ll. 

/ It 

. and the 

mm 

ii, how- 

■ 



l. i ribs are those which under a 

die ami passive form have either an w 

•ii. 



168 



IMPERSONAL VERBS. 



114, 115. 



ture and first aorist in the passive form, and with a passive 
sense. A few have a second aorist middle. They are usually 
conjugated by giving the present, future middle, and perfect pas- 
sive; thus, dtyoixcuy dd^ofiai, dtdeypcu. 

312. SYNOPSIS OF DEPONENT VERBS. 



I Indicative. Subjunctive. 



Optative. 



Imper. 



Infin. 



Part. 



Pres. 
Imp. 
Perf. 
Plup. 
Fut. M. 
] Aor. M. 
1 Fut. P. 
1 Aor. P. 
IP. P. Fut. 



d£/-o ,uat, 
id z/- 6 jii?l v 
didty-pai, 
i(hdiy-jLi?]V 

de/O-qG-Ojiiai, 



de/-o)jnai, 

dzdzy-fitvoc; o> 
wanting 
wanting 
wanting 



OLJLlfJV 

-fievoq urjv 

OljLlTJV 

oljufjv 
titjv 

OlJLlf]V 



-GO 

wanting 

-ao 

wanting 

-r\n 

wanting 



G&av 

•tG&cu 
olg&cu 
ig&cu 
■tjvai, 

IG&CU 



-OfiiVOq 
-juevoq 

-Ofitvoq 

-d.uevoq 
-O/uevoq 
-elq 

-OlltVOC 



Note. In this table, the imperative and infinitive of the perfect 
didty-ao and didiy-G&ai, are changed by euphony into dide £o and dl&jf- 
&a h § 6. V. 17. 



§114. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

313. — Many verbs are occasionally taken impersonally; as, 

&qeg%£i, it pleases ; aoxei, it suffices ; cvpcpeQet, it is profitable, &c. 

The following are those which are chiefly taken impersonally : 

1. TtQSTzei, it is becoming ; e7TQ87ze, it ivas becoming ; ttqs'tiew, 
to be becoming ; to TtQmov, that which is becoming ; pi. za tiqs- 
novza. 

2. fieXei, it concerns ; fysle, [leXfjcei, fie fishes and fiEfznle. 

3. doxeT, it appears; idoxei (from doxeoj); edo$s (from 
doy.co) ; ra doxovvra. 

4. dec, it behoves ; tdei, deifiei, dew, rb deov, ra de'ovra. 

5. yotj, it is necessary ; ?%Q)jv, X 01 'i a8l > XQ^l va h and XQ*i v: > T0 
%Q8CQr, contracted for yoeaov. Subj. yorj. 



314.— §115. DESIDERATIVE, FREQUENTATIVE, AND 
INCEPTIVE VERBS. 

1. Desiderative Verbs are those which denote a desire or 
intention of doing. They are commonly formed by adding aetco 
to the first root of the primitive ; as, 



16. 169 

; 

I 

beg ; 
::. i which ex] 

man- 



g i; rD DEFECTIVE 

while • 

■ 

rospec- 

will i 



170 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 



116. 



eSvv, from tlie form in f.n. Again, tzolg/o), I suffer, has the future ttcc- 
&tj0o), and perfect ntndfrtj/.a, from the obsolete present, nadiw ; the 
2d aorist £7iadov y 2 perfect nknrfta, from the obsolete ti/j&o); and the 
future middle 7ifiaofiau (§6. 18), and 2 perfect active ninov&a, from 
the obsolete rtiv&o). In this latter example, nda/o), the only present 
in use, with its imperfect Unaa/ov, is a defective verb, having no other 
tenses from tiiat root ; in like manner, the other parts from their re- 
spective themes are so many defective verbs : but, taken together, and 
as attached to naG'/v, a theme from which they are not formed, accord- 
ing to the common analogy of conjugation, they form what is called 
an anomalous or irregular verb. 

In most irregular verbs, the irregularity is caused by the adop- 
tion of a new present and imperfect, formed by certain changes 
on the root of the verb in these tenses, while the other tenses con- 
tinue to be formed regularly from the primitive root or theme. 
Thus from AH'BQ,* is formed the new present lafifidvco, im- 
perfect ildfifiavov, while the future h]\pco, and all the tenses 
following it, are formed regularly from the root AHB. 

316. — In this way new presents are formed from old roots as 
follows : 

I. By the addition of certain letters to the root ; thus, 



TJieme. 


Root. 


let. add. 




JN etc Pres. 


Fut. 


1 doXCQ 


dox 


a 


makes 


d 0X8- CO 


doico 


2 TICO 


ti 


V 


. a 


Til- CO 


TIOCO 


3 dyco 


ay 


rv 


a 


dyiv-co 


duo 


4 8 to 


s 


rvv 


u 


SD'V-CO 


80CO 


5 ildco 


ila 


vv 


u 


ilavr-co 


ildaco 


6 8Q8CO 


ioe 


81V 


a 


£08811' -CO 


io/ t aco 


*1 y^odco 


yr iQ a 


ay 


u 


y^oday-co 


yr^dac 



II. Of roots that end with a vowel, some drop it before the 
added letters ; some change o into co, 8 into ,>;, and others change 
s or o into / ; thus, 



Theme. 


Root. R. 


changed. 


let add 


JVew Pres. 


Put. 


1 afiagraco 

2 8Qld803 

3 toco 

4 did to* 


duaozs 
EQida 

dlda 


exuaoz 

8 Old 

dldi] 


av 
car 
rrv 

6'A 


djxaQzdi'-co 
8Qtdafr-co 
tco;rv-co 
dldfjay-co 


dfiaQTt;aa 
ZQidfjaco 
tcoaco 
dld/ ( aco 


5 8VQ8CO 

6 AdO'S, 

n pioco 


8VQ8 

dlo 

§10 


8VQI 

all 
(km 


ay 
ay 
ay 


8VQiay-co 

dliax-co 

fiicoay-co 


EVQtjGG) 

dlcoaco 
fiicoaco 



* Primitive themes, now obsolete, are printed in capitals. 







7-OJ 






KQi 






/.-CO 


&* 



16. [BREGULAR AND : :BS. 171 

III. 

:. 

fTQ nijiL GG 

3 y.tn y.<j y.ntt 

'/ 'J % 

'/.CO ft*!/* GX 

IV. 

r, which 
thus, 

Fie. 'J j 

1 tifta* lad- lavd av iiUty-co co 

•j ;. /.(0//J Of /.luijio-co lift 

V. P>y Syncope or contraction : 

JSfi m /Yes. 

dtXtco by rhv.o; Fut. 

joti M *ETPQ 2 A-r. M. 

too by double syncope ckjaco Put Ljow 

VI. Bj . of the initial syllable ; — of the ini- 
tial consonant with *; — and of i commonly called the i 

\plication ; 

Tht. X> - Pre*. 

by Red. of initial syll emn 

nth j Mi 

tamo " M M trip r— 19 j/. 

draco by impro] rooo errq 

Vl[. Bj 

Root 
koo by Metathefl /.-co p£a 

VIII. Bj ill.* initial letters; as, 

t&iXco by Aphaere la 

.. 

IX. In several, two or ra< i com- 

• : 1 1 1 the new present ; thus, 

1 By VI and 1 L yroca bee 

2 By VI and 



172 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. § 117. 

3 By VI and III, dd%co becomes diddoxco, rat. di8d$co. 

4 By VI, pivot becomes [Mfzevco, and by V, [xcfxrco, fut. fievito. 

5 By VI, 7£/cco becomes ntixm, by V, ti'txco, and by VII, z/V.tgo, 

fut. retco. 

6 By I, U co becomes ixdvco, by V, mvcq, by I, ixvaco, ixvtopcu, fut. 

i$co. 

7 By VIII, 6%8co becomes /£oo, by VII, l^co, fut. both 12-qj and 

tyz/crai. 



317.— §117. ALPHABETICAL LIST OF IRREGULAR 
AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

EXPLANATION. 

In the following Table, the words in capitals are the roots from which 
certain tenses are formed, but which are themselves either entirely ob- 
solete, or are merely supposed, in order to derive from them by analo- 
gy the forms in use. 

When there is but one root, or one form of the root, the numbers 
1, 2, 3, are omitted, as in ay<o ; — s. s. means same signification. 

The capital R after a tense indicates that the verb is conjugated re- 
gularly from the tense after which it is placed. 



*Ado), to injure ; (R. act.) pres. pass, adrav, 1 a. act. aaaa, contr. acra, 1 
a. pass. adaOrjv, mid. dacrdfitjv. Horn. 

"Ayauat,, to admire; a passive form from dyr\ui, Th. dydco, (R. dya,) ; 
pr. and imp. like tffta/tai ; dyd^o t u cu, s. s. — fut. dyd- 
crouai, R. 

'Ayviw, ayvvfib, to break; from ayo), (R. ay,) f. ato), <fcc, R. 1 a. £ce£«, 2 
a, p. zdyrjv, 2 perf. eaya, with a passive signification. It 
commonly takes the syllabic augment, probably owing to 
its having anciently had the digamnia as the initial letter; 
thus, pres. fdyo), 1 a. eJ-ctia, and then ea^cc ; <fcc. 

Ayo), to lead ; (R. ay,) f aho, cfcc. R. It has a reduplication in the 2 a. 
rjyayov, perf. r\ya, and with the reduplication, dy/;o/a, 
(poetic dyvo), dyivo).) 1 a. t^a, atau, ataa&av. 

"Ad«). See dvddvo). 

^Ac'iou), epic and poetic lengthened for aioo). Regular. 

9 A£^o). ^See ai'tdvo). 

Arjjia, to blow ; (fr. au), R. cc,) retains rj throughout ; as, a~jvai, pass. 
ar\(xai\ except the participle atiq, divro^: the passive form 
has an active sense. 

Atom, to take ; (1 R. aiok, 2. IX, from EAJl,) f. alorjGo), or -£o~«), etc. 
R. Attic fut. iXoi, 2 aor. u'/.ov, mid. ti/Aurjv, Alexandrian 
form for etto.urjv (239-5). Sometimes with an Attic redu- 
plication in the perfect; as, agaiQ/y/.a, dqaigyficu. 



§ 117. 






l:. from in ->/ H il 

with reaup. * 

■ 

froi .11 
r/.ct. Intr. f 1 

.' 1 1 .la. 

in. 

- 

lupL and 

ii \l.ll . 
1 a. p. part (i/.M«)/ frthi ; p. }». part 
am. 
\f/.i(T/.i», to tab ; (R. i . II. from '.LlOJi 

ii'i/.ov, o tAJIMJ. Thi 

d QcatioD in th 

ruil-c), tO I 

'1 a. /'/./ror. 
"AXlopcu, to l* !'. 

/ \ - 
K .' i . 

K. from \7 / 

. ■ ( 1 R. a 

tov, from X ANIAPTE St 

\-hi rri'/io, and OfiTTUTxyio \'y«\. 

. 
1/nu; j'( Wj <iro/; r/ m, Ol 

p (trim/it, 4a ft often with bot ; 
augmeut ; as, imp. 

R. from 

I | . . 

V/.7 

From ■ 

II i< > ) i 

in the sea 



174 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. §117. 

"to rob;" "to plunder;" "to encroach on the limits or 

property of another" 
u47if/fravoi.iav. See i/ddro/icu. 
Altokkvfih, See ok/.vfiv. 
^DOQiaxo), from "Al J Jl 9 to Jit, or adapt; (R. ao,) fut. dow and aoao) 

(§ 101, 4, (6.)), p. \'i()/.a, tfce. R. 2 perf. fyaoa and aqtjya, 

with the Attic reduplication from jjqa. 
Aoicrxo), to please ; (R. aye,) fut. dytCFo), //^*xa, <fcc. R. from a^io). 
Also), and rtu^ctvcu, tr. to increase ; (R. avit.) fut. avttjo'o), &c. R. from 

AYaEJI; likewise, aci:o;, atSz/ow, &c. from *AE£E JL 

Mid. intr. fo increase. 
"Ax&o/iicu,, to be indignant ; (R. a/0-f,) fut. a/d^ero/eat, or -iGo^av, &c. 

R. from ay&iofiai. 
"Ao). This verb has four significations in its different parts ; viz., 1. 

do), fo 6/020; imp. aov, commonly arum. — 2. aw, to sleep ; 

1 aor. ao~a, and a* era. — 3. aw, £o satisfy ; f. ao"o;, 1 aor. 
ao~a, pres. pass, drat, and aarat, inf. act. djutvat,. Horn, 
contr. for ai/Litvat,, for common form duv.— 4. ao;, £o i?i- 
jure ; see aaw. 

B. 

Baivo) t pdaao), pvpdo), to go ; (R. /9a,) fut. pfoofiai,, p. piprjxa, &Q. R. 
from BA'Sl; 2 aor. e/9^, from BHMI ; imperat. ^tf-t, in 
compounds shortened, as, xardpa. ]S T . B. This verb has 
also the causative signification, £o cawse fo </o ; the future 
pqo~o), and 1 aorist active eft yea, have exclusively this sig- 
nification. 

BdXXo), to throw ; (1 R. paX, and pa fa, 2 /?aA, 3 in compounds poX y ) fut. 
paXo> (Poet, paXXfeo)), fttftaZqy.a, <fcc. R. as if from i>.^- 
AEJl; hence, by syncope, BAE SI. Hence the synco- 
pated forms efiXqv, MpXyTO, pXrjGQav, for ipdXrjv, ipdXtjro, 
PtpaXrjGd-ai>, &c. Epic perf. pass. pzp6X>juai, as if from 
BOAESl. 

Baardio), to carry ; (R. paarad, pass, paaray, 211,) f. pacftaffo), 1 a. p. 
ipaGrdx&yv. 

Bvwgy.Mj to live ; [R. pvo,) fut. puma), <fcc. R. from pt,6o) ; 2 aor. tpiow, 
from PLm/ai, (all in use). 

BXao-ravo), to bud; (1 R. pXacrrt ; 2 pXaar,) f. pXaaTyao), as if from 
BAA2TESI, 2 a. epXaarov. 

BXo)0~xo), to go ; (R. ^o^, as if from MO' All,) 2 a. t^oXov, f. m. fioXov- 
fjiav, perf. jue/ApXo)*a (40-3d) for u£jLiXo)xa, as if from ^Aoo) 
(by metath. 40-8th for /uoXo)), whence /?A6w and pXo'wxo). 

Bodo), to cry out ; (R. /?oa,) f. fio^ao), &c. R. The Ionics contract oiy 
into o), making p^ao^av for pov^o^iai ; 1 a. eptaffa for 
ip6r\aa. 1 a p. inserts <r, ipo'mOfjv. 

Bov/.o), tr. to feed ; (11. poa/.i-,) f. ftoo~*qo~o), <fcc. R. from poa/Ao). 

BovXoficu, to will; (1 It. povAf, 2 povX,) f. povXtjcrofiat,, &c. R. from 
BOYAEJL; 1 a. p. ipouXtjQrjv, and with double augment 
tjPovXrj&rjv; hence also 2 perf. piponXa. 

BywG/.o), pupQwGxu), to eat ; (R. /?flo,) fut. Pfjo'wo), &c. R. from /20ow ; 

2 aor. tpqwv, as if from Pqwui. 






I , bmr- 

; 

■' 

'irr. 

I fut 



14 <)<i<Tjtw, and, 



















































. 




1 



















176 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. § 117. 

Ako, to bind ; (R. &,) f. dtjao), &e. R. 3 fut. pass, fedqaofictt, seldom 

defr/jaouav. 
Aitdaavio), to teach ; (R. diday, and di,dao/.z,) f. diddtto (and dbdcurxqaoi), 

didlda/a, &c. R. § 116, IX. 3. 
/ftdodaxo), to escape ; (R. dqa,) fut. doaGo), &e. (R. from dodo), a regular 

verb in use) ; 2 aor. edo^y (from JPHM1), for which also 

ityciv, aq, a, <fcc. Subj. c?ow, ac, a, <fcc, Opt. doaifjv, Imp. 

dodO-i, Inf. Sqwihu, pt. J^aq. N. B. This verb is used in 

composition only. 
Joxeo), to think ; (R. tfoxf, and (5o*,) f. dolw, &c. R. from JO'KSl ; — also 

fut. doxrjGo), <fcc. R. but less in use than the other forms. 
dvvaficu, I can ; (R. dvva,) like tGrajucu, f. dvv/ t GO[iat<, &c. R. from 

AYIVA'OMAI ; 1 aor. pass. iduvdaO^v and Idvvrjdr.v. 
Avar, dvvo), tr. fo enclose, intr. to <7<> info ; (R. tfi/J fut. di'sow, didvxa, <fcc. 

R, ; 2 aor. ttfw, from AY Ml. 



E. 

'Eyeigo), tr. to wake ; (1 R. £j/^, 2 £/££, 3 iyoo,) R. Mid. intr. fo awake ; 
2 a. rjygoutjv, by syncope for r.y^go/.itjv, 2 p. a. iyg?iyoga, 
reduplication anomalous. 

"£Jo), eg&co, and eg&Io), to eat ; (1 R. £(Tf, 2 i#j 3 £$, also 2 R. qay, from 
(fdyo),) fut. e6£go), p. pass. idrjdeGjuab for Yjd.fGiicu ; 1 aor. 
pass. ijdtG&tjv from edtw ; f. m. tdoficu and idovftou : 2 perf. 
t/da, Attice e^da, p. a, //Jo/a (by change of vowel for 
?/c)fxa), Attic idtfdoxa, 2 aor. act. eqayov, from gce^o; ; 
(Mo/licu, is rather the present used in the sense of the fu- 
ture.) 

'E&tXo), -d-ilo), \)e/:£o), I wish ; (R. &Q-z).t 3 and &tkt,) fut. i&eXiJGw, and 
■dzh'jGo), Ttde/.jj/.a, R. 

"E&w, lam wont ; only with Epic writers ; 2 perf. n\<)da, Ionic ¥o)da, 
u in the same signification. Piup. dw&eLV, I was wont. 

El A SI, to see ; (1 R. rid, tide, 2 itf, 3 old,) an old verb, which, in the 
active voice, has only the 2 aor. ti$ov and idov, used as a 
substitute for the aorist of bo do), to see — a verb which 
has only the present ogdo), the imperfect wgaov, Ionic 
o)Qo)r, Attic to')go)v, and the perfect hogd/.a, perf. pass. 
to')Qajiiai,; the other parts being made up from oTzroftcu, 
and eldo), as here. In the middle and passive, el'do) has 
the present tl'do,uab, the imperfect eidof.ip', 1 aor. iladfitjv 
(eturdfiyv), like the Latin videri, meaning to be seen, to 
seem, to appear, to resemble. Eidoftfjv, or ld6ur t v, the 2 aor. 
mid. is also used in an active sense, particularly by the 
Attics, in the imperative idov, XdeaOs, as an interjection, 
see, lo, behold. 

Of this verb the 2d perfect oida, strictly I have seen, 
perceived, or comprehended, is never used as a perfect, but 
only as a present, meaning I knoic, having the pluperfect 
ydew, as an imperfect I knew, and the future m. etGOfxcu, 
rarely tldfjao), I shall know, or experience. The other 
parts, viz. the aorists and perf. are supplied from yiyva- 
gxo). — For the parts of olda, see § 112, IX. 



§117. 



i 



in « 
par 
this 

J-.lllJi, or EJlJl, ii\ in the 

1 aor. m 

all i 

other parte arc supj 
which - 

R, per£ pass. 3 pi. i 
Epic 

in u 

tdj and t/./ 

Et 

chiefly in compoui 

.., an<l aifl 
fil/2 
and 
tm. 

. . . I „ 

onnd •-lii- :' 

' iri - 

I IJi : hi 
ilar. 

of \\ hich I 



178 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. §117. 

and tooE&tjv; from tgio), fut. igzGo), p. HQijy.a, p. pass, u- 
Qr t acti, fat. e^w, 2 a. in. rcjoa^v; and probably from zigto), 
comes the fat. cIq/jgohcu. 

"Ego/nou, in the sense of fo asA:, occurs chief! y as an aorist to tQiordo), 
scil. TjQOfiijv, subj. t^o)fiou y imp. soot, also f. igqaofict*. 

*Eg9-u>), to eat ; used in the pres. and imp. for eV) oj . See e#w. 

E'vdu), to sleep ; (R. a'o%) fut. tvdtjGo), <fec R. from EYJE'Jl, augments 
the initial vowel, thus, ijvdov; so in compounds, Ka&yv- 
dov, <fcc. 

Ei$io-/.o), to find; (1 R. fi/£f, 2 «*£,) f. zvq?;go), &G. R. from EYPE' Sl,hj 
epenth. from EY'PJl; whence a form of the 1 aor. m. 
tvQCLfifjv. This verb has e before -0^r l ao l uav and -&tjv ; as, 
tv(*£&riv\ 239-5. 

^Ey&dvofxav and aTityOdvoiiai, I am hated ; (R. i/fre,) fut. iy&t'jGouai,, 
perf. p. t-y&tjuai, R. from t/Slopcu, from e/0-oi, poetic, 
and used only in the present. 

"E/Wy to have ; (1 R. ky, and <7/£, 2 o~/,) fut. e£m (with the aspirate), or 
GyrjGto, p. tG/ty/.a, die. R. from 2XEJI, also Gyt&io, 2 aor. 
eg'/ov, subj. o-/ro, opt. G/oltjVj imp. tF/sg, inf. o~/*r*\ This 
verb has another form of the present and imperf. Xg'/m 
and fo/ov, in the sense of fo hold, which has the future 
G/tjGo), <fcc. ; so also GyiO-o, tG/tOov. In the compounds 
observe the following varieties; viz. driyo) (for which 
also dvaGyid-(o), in the middle has a double augment in the 
imperf. and 2 aor. tjVtLyo/irjv, r t v^Gy6fn t v\ unTiiyo), to en- 
close, has f. aiicftto), 2 aor. r\u7it&yov\ mid. duTZiyouai or 
auTiiGyvtoiiai, to w^ar ; fut. ctucftiouca, 2 aor. tjii7ivGy6ur t v ; 
vmGyviouat,, to promise, fut. vnoGyi.GQnou, tfcc. R. 

"&pw, to cook ; (R. £>;-,) fut. ityqao}, &c. Reg. fTom y E*P'ltjL 

"EJl, to place ; (R. I,) Defective, 1 a ftcra, f. m. tiaopcu, 1 a. m. tUrdfifjr. 
The derivatives from this root are, 1. ///<ca, I sit (perf. for 
««at), 807 ; 2. tZouai, to set down (whence \^o) and v.a&i- 
&», R.); 3. h'vvui; to clothe; and, 4b. iijfi*, to send, r L GW, 
uy.ci, R. 304. 

Z. 

Zdo), to live; (R. Za,) f. m. LrjGouat,; 2 aor. w/r, as if from ZH3II. 
For the contractions of this verb, see 251, Obs. 2. To 
supply the defective parts of this verb, tenses are bor- 
rowed from (two. 

Ztvyvvo) and ^evyrvuv, to join ; (1 R. ffiiy, 2. £i%) f **r£to, <fcc. R. from 
ZETril, 2 a. p. Jtvyijv. 

Zo)vvvo)j tjarvv/i*, to gird ; (R. Co,) f- Cwcro;, &c. R. from ^6o). perf. pass. 

H. 

cr HSo)j to sweeten, to please ; (R. yd,) f. ?;<7w, <fcc. R. s. s. as dvddvto, 

which see. 
T Hncu, to sit ; see'EJl, and 307. 
'Hfii, by apha3resis for q. r^ii, I say ; likewise yp s ?), for eqr;v, eqrj. See 

309. 



§117. [KB 

aor. 
I 
ana 

a, ri 

1'. III. L/«^ ,;,.. 

7J/M r JV/2, Idovfiky from <<W<.>. INlt. tr. to *<7, and 

i()o/j-,) f. i()oi'(j>o. dec. K. 1 aor. p. i 
i ..), uoj, to let ; (II. «!"«, and 'n\) fu and 

i 

"////;. / - ft /"/ ; (R, i. 

'J/.uyi,), </ bey have 

£ in 
r ]).u<j/.ui' a 

J.ltlMl, intr. eenr 

in Horn 

"IxTctnai. Bee Jt'ro 

^ular nil i 
I Km. 
*7(t/oj. See */w. 



180 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. §117. 

KeodaLvo), to make gain ; (R. xiodaw, and xeoda,) f. xf^cWw and xiq- 

dt'jGO) ; perf. y.ty.iod'tjxa, or -a/.a. 
ICoydvo), to overtake; (1 R. xi>yi, 2 x^/j) £ Ktyqao), (fee. R. from xi,y£o); 2 

aor. "i/.iyov, and from Kl'XHMI, exi/rjv. 
Klyorjim,, t° lend; (R. yga,) fut. ygr\Go), (fee. R. from yodo). 
KLo), to go ; not used in pres. indie, but in the other moods and imper£ 

ind., and is accented like the 2 aor. 
KXaZo), to cry aloud ; (1 R. y.Xayy, 2 y.Xay, 3 xXfjy,) f. x?.dy$o), (fee. R. 

from yJ.dyyo) ; 2 perf. xixXtjya, as if from yjji^o). 2 a. e/.- 

KXvo), to hear ; (R. xAw,) Reg. except the imperative pres. y.Xv&v, as if 
from /C4 YMI, as well as v.).vz, reg. 

Kogevvvo), xooivvvfit,, to satisfy ; (R. x.o^*,) f. xo££(7o;aDd xoqtjgo), (fee. R. 
from xo££a> ; p. p. x* xooia/uai,. Koqm, reg. to sweep, is a 
different verb. 

Kodio), to cry ; (R. x^ccy,) f. y.od$o), (fee. R. except the imperative per- 
fect xexQayOo, 2 a. exgayov. 

KotlLiavvvo), xgejitdvvujui, and xQtjfivtjfi*, to hang ; (R. x^f//a,) f. y.Q?judo~o>> 
<fcc. R. from KPEMA'Jl. Attic f. «£*/*«, a?, a, &c. 264, 
(1). Perf. p. ygifxayiai without the augment. 

KtsIvoj, to kill ; (1 R. y.Xciv, 2 y.rav, 3 xrov,) fut. y.revo), (fee. R. ; 2 aor. 
JsKTavov, and IV.t//v from KTHMI. 

KvXMo), to roll ; (R. xuA*,) fut. xvX'iaox, (fee. R. from xvXto), s. s. 

Kvvio) y to kiss; (R. xi/v*, and *?>,) fut. xvv/jGO), (fee. R. ; also xi'<7«, (fee. R. 
from xi/w. 



Aayydvo), to receive by lot ; (1 R. Xyy, 2 ,?.«/, 3 Xoyy,) f. //;|w, (fee. R. from 
AH'XSL 2 aor. eXayov, perf. XeXoyya. § 101, 5. 

Aaftfidvo), to take ; (1 R. A?//?, 2 Aot/?, 3 1///?,) f. m. Xtjipopcu, p. e\'Xt;qa, 
&c. R. from AH'BJL Ionic perf. XtXdfirjxa,; likewise f. 
Xdfiii'oticio, (fee. R. as if from A A! MB J I. Also of the same 
signification, — 

AdZo/jav, Xd^vfi ai, dep. Ionic and Doric forms for Xa/ufidvo). 

AavQdvo), to be hid; (1 R. />;£•, 2 ;.«#, 3 //;#,) f. Ajyaoi, (fee. R. from 
h'jdor, in the middle voice, — 

AavOdvojLicu, sometimes XtiQofAcu, to forget ; f. Xi t Go/nav y (fee. from the 
same. 

Aovo), to wash ; (R. Xov,) in the Attic dialect generally omits by syn- 
cope the short vowel after ov; thus, eXoi^dXortter, Xovuav, 
Xovg&cu, (fee. for tXove, iXovojuev, Xovo,uau, XovzgQcu,, (fee. 

Aovto), in some of its tenses occurs in Homer. 

A(7), to will ; found only in the sing. aM, Xf^, Xf^ plur. Xifyitq, Xonrtt,, Doric 
as if from A A 11, contracted like Co*), 251, Obs. 2. 

M. 

Mav&dvo), to learn; (1 R. fiaSe, 2 /<<*#•,) fut. fiaftrjGo/ttcu, p. fttpd&ijxa, 

(fee. R. from MAQE'll; 2 aor. eaa&ov. 
Mdyofxai, to fight ; (1 R. ^a/f, 2 /ta/,) fut. (.layJiao^ai and /tiaytcrojuat,, 

&c. R. from MAXEOMAL 



§117. 



[BBEGl LAR AND D 181 



I. P( 

.1/1/1.1, to can fof : (i R 
'i ao 
mostly in the third p< ; 

M r^.atmui, (<> l>l<<it ; (1 EL UtJXOU I'. 

. I 

V.; . EL fron 

r from W/'/ H M I . 
Mn'i'/iT/.o), to remember; (li. pyoO tut. prrjaot, d 

W«m«; ■)•«'■•»», ituoyiTiu, tC W%JH off; (K /'Oo;\ I ! :n WO/'/ /£ 

Muxdopcu, to bellow; II. I >« »iiv forms, /.or, 2 ]>. 

from jn'Vv.'i. 



TV. 
ATafo, intrans. to dwell; (R. r«,) f. rouTo), &c. K. from roU#, I 

tO r/./v7/. 

; ... /(> t9o*A ,• (R. n.-r,) f. r/«/'o, Ac. R. from vim 
Auto, to think; r< atracted and accented by tl. like 

(,->; thus, t. r«)ij(f), 1 a. BraNTO, iviwTQ, I 



(^l'(-), /<> smell; (R, oo*, and it*,) £ oVri*. R. al 

ko, (Jcc K. from "O/.hJi. fa, \\ itfa 

reduplication ooWo, with a 

<<, to op /' ; ( EC •. li. fron 

, ana 810. 

()i()uir«,, oiSdvtfK oiMiT /.(.), / 

and oit'ui, to think ; (R, ofc, i t. oli R. from 

imper£ woVij i li the diphth< 

tained in Borne dial( 

• 

'■ : (I R. o 
K. f] 

'0 / 

..•lily with the : 



182 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. § 117. 

^O/nooyrioi, OftOQyvvfu, to wipe off ; (R. bjuooy,) f. bf(6o^o), <fec. R. s. s. as, 

f<ooyvr«), which see. 
"OiHjfi^ orlrtjfd, to help; {11. ova,) f. ov/jgo), &c. R. from 'OJYA'Jl. 2 a, 

(ovf'juf-r. 
c Oouaivo), to rush; (11. bona,) f. 6oft/;G(o, &c. R. from cQittdo), s. s. 
'O^rt'u), borv/a, to excite ; (R. 6q,) f. o^co, (§ 101. 4. (6.) ) from "OP/2 ; f. 

boo) from o^w, 2 perf. byo^a ; hence a new present, o^ffo), 

s. s. and also 6qo')qo). 
'Oo'(pQalvo[i<X[<, to smell ; (R. oGqQaiv and 6o~yoa,) fut. oGqoavoT^i ai, R. 

and oGqo^Go^a^ <fcc. R. from 'OS&PE'OMAl, by epenth. 

from oaygofiai,, from which oj(rg>£ ourjv; hence also 6o~q>()do), 

and offqodoficuy s. s. 
Ol'tdo), ovrd^u), ovrdaxo), OY'THMI, to hit, to wound ; (R. oi'ra,) fut. 

ovrdffo) and ovrrjGo), tfcc. R. from ohrdo), infin. ohrdf.nvav, 

Horn, for ovrdvau. 
*Oq>dXo), bqXo), bcphay.dvio, to owe ; viz. money, punishment, i. e. to be 

guilty; (1 R. bqeoXe and ogc/f, 2 bqtX,) f. bqtih'jGo) and 

bqiXrjGo), <fcc. R. from bqti<X£o) and bqXko ; 2 aor. w<p* Aov, 

used only in the expression of a wish ; thus, *£'# ? wqitXov, 

that I, i%& tiqeXeq, that thou, &e. 
bq>XiGY.dvo), to forfeit ; (1 R. bqXt, 2 bq>X,) f. bqXriGO), p. faqtXijxa, 2 aor. 
itxpXov. 

11. 

Tlalo), to strike ; (R. 7ra^ and Ttait,) f. Ttaicro) and naii]Go) ; the remain- 
ing tenses are from the root nav. 

ridc/o), to suffer ; (1 R. 7itv&, seldom nade, 2 7T<x&, 8 tcqv&,) fut. m. 
nnGo^cu, % 6, 18 ; 2 perf. nznovfra ; both from JIEJVQJl ; 
2 aor. enaQov, also fut. TiaO/jGo), <fcc. R. from TIAGE'JL 

llartojiiaL, to taste, to eat ; (R. tfcx, from II All,) 1 aor. inaad^riv, p. p. 
ninaG^ai. 

nto~Go), to digest ; (R. 7Tf ^,) f. 7TF.xf.io), &c. R. from nkmoy, s. s. 

rhravvvo), 7terdvvvjui, to expand ; (R. ntta,) f. TTtrdGo), R. from TTtrdo), 
exc. p. p. 7T£7TTa[tcu } which is from the syncopated form 
7tt«w. Other forms are mrvdo) and 71 irvij ft*, s. s. 

IHrofiav, Titration, Tttrdofiav, to fly ; (R. ttftcc.,) f. TZt-njaoficu, <fec. R. 
from ntrdo^ai', 2 aor. ETtrrjv from ittttj^; also p. p. TTt- 
norrjuav from nordoiiav ; by syncope i7ier6fi?]v becomes 
i7tt6fiqv, and so of other tenses. 

niqvov. See q>ivo). 

Jh'iGGo), nrjyvvo), nvyvvfit, to fasten ; (1 R. TT^y, 2 ^roty, 3 tt^j/,) f. nrfem 9 
<fcc. R. from IIH'PJl; 2 perf. nin^ya, 2 a. pass. i7idyrjv. 

lluvdo), niXvr^, to approach ; same signification as ntXd^o), from 
which the other tenses are taken. 

n^uTtXdvo) and niimXr\ni, to fill ; (R. J1AA, whence nlinTzXtj^v,) f. 7r^- 
(Tfo, etc. R. from llAA'Sl = nXrj&w. When, in compose 
tion, ^ comes before the initial tt in this word, it is omit- 
ted before 7rA ; as, EfinlnXfifib ; so also in 

JJi/CTorjuv, to burn ; (R. 7T^a,) f. ngrjGo), tfec. R. from JlPA'Sl = 7T(j^Soj. 

Jllvo), to drink ; (R. tto and tt^,) lut. no'tam, <fcc. R. from IIO'Jl ; 2 aor. 
£;rtoi> from 7rto>, Th. ; imperat. commonly 7rrt>-t, sometimes 
nit ; fut. m. 7tiouav, probably the present used in the fu- 



17. 183 

• i 

hi i 1 1 1 1 > . \ 

i 

P. 

. 

R from I i 

with inti 



H If J. 

- 

; l Ml. 

from 



184 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VElfes. §117. 

2T TQiorn'o), GToo')vrviu, to spread; (R. gtoo,) f. gtqo'jgio, <fco. R. from 
2.' I'l'O'JL, by metathesis and syncope from STOPE1L 

~ytiv. See £/(». 

J&tjttj fo save ; (R. (ToJ or ov->,) f. g(ogo), <fcc R. exc. 1 aor. pass. iawQ-qv 
instead of eowtfiyv and £(jao')Otjv, from the older form 
o~aooj. 

r. 

Talao), to bear ; (R. tAcc,) £ vkytm, <fcc. reg. from the syncopated form 

tAgcm, s. s. ; 2 aor. £T).t]v, from rXfjfib. 
Tiuvo), to cut ; (1 R. T£/<, also r/*a and Tfiqy, 2 raw, 3 to//,) fut. rzuo) } 

reg. also f. tju/jgo) and r^rjho, from rudo) and rjn/jyoj; 2 

aor. trctfiov and trnavov, — sometimes ertftov. 
Teqgouqu, intr. £o (^r^ ; 2 aor. inf. pass. tzqTjvcu and reoG/juevav, as if 

from iri^G^v. 
Ternov and ertTuov, a defective 2 aorist used in Homer, to w<?e£ m7A, 

to ^ndl 
TUro), to bear ; (1 R. t*x, 2 t*x, 3 rox,) f. te^oj, <fcc. R. from TE'KIl; 

2 aor. ertxov, 2 perf. reroxa. 
Tiro), rvvvvo), Tlvvvf.iv, to expiate ; (R. t^) f. tigo), tfce. R. from t/co, £o 

TltooloJj TiTQaivo), TiTQtjut,, to bore ; (R. r^ce,) f. TQtjGO), &e. R. from 

to do). 
Tltqmg /.(>), to wound ; (R. r^o,) f. tqmgo), <fcc. R. from tooo). 
Toiyo), to run ; (1 R. #££/ and doau y 2 d^oc/*,) f. doitu), p. dtdoa/nrjY.a, 

2-14, i£rc. &c. R. from JPAMJl ; 2 aor. Ed'qafwv, f. m. 

dpajHOVftav. 

Tqv/o), to consume ; (R. r^i'/o,) 1 aor. Irov/MGa, <fcc. 

Tvy/dvo)} to be, to obtain ; (1 R. Tt/f and th'/, 2 tc/,) f. Tvy^GM, etc. 
R. from TYXE'Jl; 2 aor. I'tv/ov, fut. m. rivto t uav from 
ttv/o). — iVote. This verb must be carefully distinguished 
from the regular kindred verb tiv%o), to prepare; fut. 
T£i''£a>j <fec R. 



K Y 7i vg y v to uai, to promise ; (from i c >7ro and g/£<o,) f. i>7t0G/r[G0jucu, <fec. R. 
from f 177 02XEOMAI. See £ >j. 



(pdyoucu, pres. m. fo ea£ ; (R. <jr«y,) also the future for qiayovjucu, in the 
X. T. and later writers by the same anomaly as zdouav 
and nioficu,; 2 aor. tqayov. The rest of the tenses are 
formed from itr&ifo. See idto. 

<I>ug/.<». See v ftfii. 

(J'tvo), to kill; (1 R <f*v, (fccv y ) 2 aor. niqvov and tntyvov, by redupl. 
and syncope for I'vavov ; part, nicpvinv, accented on the 
penult, p. p. niif anauy 3 f. p. Ttt(fi l GOf.iav. Hence qiovoq, 
from 3d root yov. 


















O/iCU, 



186 SIGNIFICATION OF ADYERBS. § 118, 119. 

Xovvvo), yiori'vui, to heap, to dam ; (R. /o,) f. /wgo), <fcc. R. from /6w, 
s. s. perf. pass. xe/GHT/iGt*. 



JL 

*Sl&£ti), to push ; (R. o)& and ud?,) has the syllabic augment through- 
out ; thus, imp. e«')Oovv, f. olffw and w&v.go), regular from 
both ; 1 f. p. oxjd-rjcroiLiai,. 



§118. INDECLINABLE WORDS OR PARTICLES. 

318. — The Indeclinable parts of speech, sometimes denominat- 
ed Particles, are those which suffer no change of form by inflec- 
tion. They are the Adverb (which includes the Interjection), 
the Preposition, and the Conjunction. 

THE ADVERB. 

319. — An Adverb is a word joined to a verb, 

an adjective, or another adverb, to modify it, or to 

denote some circumstance respecting it. 

Adverbs may be considered in respect of Signification, Deri- 
vation, and Comparison. 



§119.— THE SIGNIFICATION OF ADVERBS. 

320. — In respect of signification, adverbs may be arranged in 
Greek as they are in Latin and other languages, under the fol- 
lowing heads : 

1. Adverbs of Place ; comprehending those which signify, 

1st. Rest in a place. These generally end in &i, m, ov, ?/, oi, 
%ov, yj] ; as, ayoo&t, in the field. 

2d. Motion from a place. These generally end in &ev or fte 
as. ay o 6 ft av, from the field. 

3d. Motion to a place. These generally end in 8e, ae, £s ; as, 
(lyoovde, to the field. 324-6. 

4th. Motion through or by a place. These are generally femi- 
nine adjectives in the dative singular, having 0803 under- 
stood ; as, alhj, by another way. 












] 
lnnbr; 

■ 

7. Ai 
nominated fa -'.) 

32 L— o 

With : with n, 

with r, e, u foil 



i 



■ 









'fit or j f A M i/ 



rai r» ( . / D Un$ mean*. 

■ 
■ 






1SS FORMATION OF ADVERBS. § 120. 



§120. THE FORMATION AND DERIVATION OF 
ADVERBS. 

322. — A few adverbs in Greek are primitives; as, vvv, now ; 
yanal, on the ground ; %&tg, yesterday. 

But the greater part are derivatives, and are of two classes. 

323. — I. The first class of derivatives consists of such words as 
are not strictly speaking adverbs, but are so denominated from 
being sometimes used in an adverbial sense, either by virtue of 
their signification, or by ellipsis for an adverbial phrase ; of these 
the following are examples : 

1. The accusative of neuter adjectives ; as, ttqcotov, to tiqcq- 

tov ; ttqcotoc, ra TTQwra, first ; tcc (idXiOTa, chiefly ; 6t,v, 
sharply, 

2. The oblique cases of nouns and pronouns; as, 
Gen. Ofiov, together ; from ojiog, united. 

ovdctfiov, never ; from ovdu^og, no one, 
Dat. xvxho, around (i. e. in a circle) ; from xvxlog, a circle, 

Tu/ti, swiftly, with siviftness ; from rdyog, swiftness. 
Ace. ccQxi p anc ^ t*Qxag (sup. xazd), from the beginning ; 
from uoyjj, the beginning. 

dr/.tjv, as, like ; from dr/jj, manner. 

3. Verbs are sometimes used as adverbs ; thus, 
The imperative ; as, ays, fth, tfte, &c. 

The 2d aorist active; as, ocptXov, ojqjtXov ; from dcpsiXco, 
The present optative of £//«'; viz. titv. 

Obs. 1. To these may be added — 

1st. Nouns compounded with prepositions ; as, ly.nodcov, 

out of the way. 
2d. Prepositions united together ; as, naotx, abroad. 
3d. Prepositions joined with adverbs ; as, intna, then. 

324. — II. The second class of derivatives consists of such 
words as have undergone a change of form, and are used only in 
an adverbial sense. These are so numerous and varied in form 
and derivation, that a perfect classification cannot be given. The 
folio being the most important, may be noticed; viz. 

1. Adverbs in tog, express a circumstance of quality or man- 
ner, and are for the most part formed from adjectives by chang- 
ing og of the nominative or genitive into cog; as, yiXcog from epi- 
log ; ocotyoorojg from ocoqnow, gen. ococfyovog. 



thus, 



l 



■ 



190 INSEPARABLE ADVERBIAL PARTICLES. §122. 

urzog, commonly lake the neuter singular of the comparative, 
and the neuter plural of the superlative for their comparative and 
superlative ; thus, 

alaxQwg aia%iov a\ f G%icra from alcypog 

Note 1. This mode of comparison is also used, though more rarely, 
for those derived from adjectives compared by rtqoq and taroq ; as, 

Note 2. The accusative neuter of adjectives, both singular and plu- 
ral, is sometimes used adverbially in all the degrees. To the superla- 
tive degree, the article is frequently prefixed ; as, to nhlarov (sup. 
y.ard). 

3. Adverbs in go, formed from prepositions, are compared by 
adding* zzqco and zdrco ; as, dvco, dvoozepco, owcoTaTCQ. So also 
prepositions in the sense of adverbs ; as, ano, a7ico78Q03. 

Note. Some other adverbs imitate this mode of comparison; as, 
iyyvq, iyyurioo), iyyvrdro); yet as often otherwise; thus, comparative 
iyyvrtoov, and tyyiov, superlative eyyiara. 



§ 122. INSEPARABLE ADVERBIAL PARTICLES. 

327. — Certain particles, never used by themselves, but pre- 
fixed to words by composition, affect the signification of the 
words with which they are compounded, as follows : # 

1. The particle a (which becomes dv before a vowel) has 
three different significations : 

1st. It marks privation (from avev, without) ; as, dvvdpog, 

without water. 
2d. It denotes increase (from ayav, much) ; as, a^vXog, 

much wooded. 
3d. It denotes union (from ctfia, together) ; as, aloyog, a 

consort. 

2. J%qi 9 epi, @ov, [tot, da, £a, Id. )J, and sometimes vi) and vi 9 
increase the signification ; as, 87jkog, manifest ; dpidnlog, very 
manifest. &c. 

3. Ni) and vt generally express privation or negation; as, 
vfjmog, an infant, from vi\ and etico, I speak ; but 

Exc. Nil sometimes increases the signification; as, vijyvrog, 
that flows in a full stream, from vi] and #t>a). 

4. Avg expresses difficulty, trouble, or misfortune ; as, dvo~- 
uwijg, malevolent ; dvatvytw, I am unhappy. 



1 



A Pb -hows 

U!i loll 

2, From their j 

! 

l it 

I 






UiPHABETICAl 

for th* 



192 PREPOSITIONS. § 124. 

With the Dative; round, with the idea of rest and continuance; of 
or concerning, among, after or near, upon, for, i. e. iu defence of; for, i. e. 
on account of; with. 

With the Accusative; round, with the idea of tendency or approxi- 
mation to ; near, of concerning, or belonging to. See also § 134, 13. 
In Composition ; about, round about. 

2. Jlra y the Accusative. In poetry, sometimes the Dative. 

Primary Signification; motion upwards, from below to above, op- 
posed to xccra. 

With the Accusative; over, up along, through, during, among, with, 
in ; in computation, up ; viz. from a point below. 

With the Dative ; upon, on, in, with the idea of elevation and rest. 

In Composition ; motion upwards, repetition, increase, bach again. 

3. JAvxiy the Genitive. 

Primary Meaning; in front of in a state of rest; set over against, 
i. e. by way of exchange, comparison, equivalence, or preference. Hence, 

With the Genitive; for, i.e. equivalent; before, in preference; in- 
stead of , against, equal to, for, in consideration of; upon. 

In Composition; equality, substitution, reciprocity, comparison, op- 



4. Alto, the Genitive. 

Primary Signification ; removal from, viz. from contact with; oppo- 
site of 7tqoq. 

With the Genitive ; from, on, after (from the time of), against, by 
means of, with, upon, of, i. e. proceeding from; on account of for, of 
i. e. belonging to; e. g. ol ano, those belonging to, viz. the Council, Ple- 
beians, Stoics, &q. 

In Composition; departure, separation, negation, privation, augmen- 
tation. 

5. Aid, the Genitive or Accusative. 

Primary Signification ; through, motion through. 

With the Genitive; 1. place, through; 2. time, through, through- 
out, during ; with regard to the space or time passed through, at, in; 
with numerals, every; as, d\d nivre, every five ; 3. cause, by means of, 
with, viz. as an instrument. 

With the Accusative; by, by means of, during ; as the end, occasion, 
or cause ; for, on account of e. g. navrd dC alrov iyivero, all tilings were 
made by him ; navrd dv avtbv tyhtrn, all things were made for him. 

In Composition ; separation, division, arrangement, passage through, 
reciprocation, opposition, or competition, perseverance. 

6. Elg or ig, the Accusative. 

Prtmary Signification ; to, into ; motion from without to within ; the 
opposite of Ix. 

With the Accusative; to, into, toward, against, among, before, con- 
cerning, in respect of, in, till, until, for ; with numerals, about, up to. 



193 

,ra, one by one ; it it u*e<l »'! v «- r L» i r» 1 1 y, 

tiD accusative is un- 

:Yom in'fA 
/<• o/i 

In * 

8. 1 

of rest and being con- 
lain. 

. in the power of, by, 

gh, under, 

the power 
•n to; 

r ap- 

I N ' nceaaion, 

tu, the 6 

w, <&*m a/o«f 
town through (trana- 

ittder, upon, 



:t, Op- 

1 1 . V : cum- 



194 PREPOSITIONS. § 124. 

With the Genitive; with, together with, by mea7is of, viz. as con- 
neeted with and depending upon ; according to, and, i. e. in conjunction 
with, as an agent, or object; with, i. e. against; with, i. e. for, on the side 
of; among. 

With the Accusative; after, i.e. following close or near to, in re- 
spect to space or time; next to, next after, to, towards, for, or after, with 
a view to bring ; between, in, among. 

With the Dative ; by the poets only, in, with, among. 

In Composition ; participation, change, reciprocity. 

12. JJaQa, the Genitive, Dative or Accusative. 

Primary Signification, by the side of; it denotes motion from, close 
to, or towards an object, according to the case with which it is joined. 

With the Genitive ; from, i. e. from beside ; of, proceeding from ; 
by, with, near, from among, above, or in comparison with. 

With the Dative ; at, with, near, among, with the idea of continu- 
ance. 

With the Accusative; to, beyond, beside, towards, i. e. to the side of; 
through along, against, in comparison with. 

In Composition ; it retains its general meaning ; also defect. 

13. IIeqi', the Genitive, Dative or Accusative. 

Primary Signification; round, round about, nearly the same with 
anq.1, but in a sense less close: a^cqii means on both sides; Tie^l, on all 
sides. 

With the Genitive ; round, round about, with the idea of origin 
or cause ; about, i.e. of, or concerning; with, for, viz. in defence of; 
above or before, denoting pre-eminence or superiority. 

Wrra the Dative ; round, round about, with rest or continuance ; 
for, i. e. concerning, on account of; from. 

With the Accusative ; round, or about, with tendency or approach 
to ; concerning or towards, about, i. e. near to, advancing towards ; about, 
i. e. with regard to ; in, of against. 

In Composition ; round about, also denoting increase, abundance. 

14. TIqo, the Genitive. 

Primary Signification ; before, in respect of place or time, but with- 
out the idea of opposition or comparison which belongs to dvrl. 

With the Genitive; before, in the presence of; at the command of, 
through, denoting cause or origin; for, in defence of; for, for the ad- 
vantage of; before, denoting preference. 

In Composition ; before ; with verbs of motion, forth, forward. 

15. IJQog, the Genitive, Dative or Accusative. 

Primary Signification ; transition or passage, the relative direction 
being indicated by the case. 

With the Genitive; from, i. e. transition from ; from, by, denoting 
the agent; belonging to or the property of ; of proceeding from: on 
the side of: by, in oaths and supplications; before, to, so as to be pro- 
tected by. 






»0 Aft 
• •</<«, iritk tkt 

In I 



and 






1. 






196 CONJUNCTIONS. § 125. 

3. The proposition alone, with the accent thrown back to the first 
syllable, is Bometimea used for certain compounds, of which it forms a 
pat ; thus, i'n is used for i'vum, it is lawful; jztqi for 7Tt(jlecFTi,, it is 
superfluous ; ara for avaGTtjdt,, arise; naya for tluqigtv, he is present. 



§125. THE CONJUNCTIONS. 

331. — A Conjunction is a word which con- 
nects words or sentences. 

332. — Conjunctions, according to their different meanings, 
are divided into different classes, of which the following may be 
noticed ; viz. 

1. Connective ; as, xai, te, and ; in poetry, i)ds, 18s, fyer, and ; 

xcu dt f also, &c. 

2. Disjunctive ; as, y, yzoi ; in poetry, ?]8 ; and sometimes iflovv, 

71710V, or. 

3. Concessive; as, xuv, naiTieo, si xcu, although. 

4. Adversative ; as, dlld, dt', cItuq, but ; ye, at least ; fxsv, al- 

ia \iev, but, truli/, indeed ; [xe'vzoi, yet, &c. 

5. Causal, . . . which assign a reason for something previously 

said; as, ydq,for ; Iva, on, oncog, ocpoa, that ; cog, 
coots, that, so that ; ovvsxa (in poetry)? because ; 
sI'tzsq, since indeed ; ensi, since, after that. 

6. Conclusive, or such as are used in drawing a. conclusion, or 

inference from something previously said ; as, 
doa, ovv, therefore ; dio, dionso, ivherefore ; di], 
then, truly ; roivvv, vv or vixv, therefore ; roiya- 
qqvv (emphatic), wherefore ; ovxovv, not there- 
fore. 

h J. Conditional ; as, si, dv, idv, f/p 9 in poetry, xs or xsv, al, alxs, 
if ; ei7ZSQ, if indeed. 

8. Expletive ; as, ys, nsq, rot, ()d, &s'v, vv, nov, nco, do, &c. 

ADVERBIAL AND CONJUNCTIVE PARTICLES. 

The following remarks on the signification and use of certain 
adverbial and conjunctive particles, will be useful for reference. 
For more ample information on this subject, the advanced stu- 
dent is referred to the work of Hoogeveen on the Greek Par- 
ticles, an abridged translation of which has been published by 
the Kev. John Seager, B. A. 






197 

/ / i 



| 
■ 

thing <jtKtr. 

. . i 
q 

■II THIS fJUAOX MOW AT 

I 

/\ KEN). 

1. 1 

- 

l-atin 



198 CONJUNCTIONS. § 125. 

the statement ; as, 6 tie xtv ns/oXoMTtra* ov xev ixo)ficu, and he will per- 
BAP8 b< angry to whom I go. It is but very seldom found with the in- 
dicative present; a few instances, however, have been produced from 
Aristophanes and Plutus. 

With the subjunctive it is never joined, unless accompanied with cer- 
tain other words, such as cfc oao^, oanq, oTToreooq, ov, o7Zov, iva, (fee. 
Ac except when used in the sense of tdv as above, 334-1. 

It is used with the optative of all the tenses except the future, as in 
§ 172, Obs. 6, II. 2d, 3d, 4th, 5th, 6th. 

With the infinitive and participles it gives a contingent significa- 
tion (commonly in the future), which may be resolved by changing the 
verb or participle into the optative with dv ; as, oXovrau dvaudytaQai 
dv, they think that they could retrieve themselves ; rdXXa GvwnS), noXX' dv 
t/iov dntlv, I omit the rest, though I have much to say. 

4. It is used in positive statements with different moods, to give an 
expression of hesitation and modesty to the assertion ; as, o)q dv fio* 
66/.r\, as it seems (would seem) to me ; ova dv olda, I (should) hardly 
know. 

5. \4v is frequently repeated, either on account of its standing at a 
great distance from the verb, or, to give emphasis to the condition sug- 
gested by it; ardq dv Xtyoiyi dv, having stationed myself 

/ would say ; nox; de y dv xaXwq Xiyovq dv ; how can you, how 

can i/ou say, <fcc. ? 

6. It is sometimes used, to intimate that the verb in the preceding 
clause is to be repeated; as, d dij tw Goyii'tTtQoq yaiqv dvai, rovroi dv 
(sc. q>air\v dvai GoyorttQoc;), if I thought to be more wise in any thing, it 

WOULD BE IN THIS. 

335.— Mpa— Upa. 

1. "jIqcl, denoting inference or conclusion, always stands after some 
word in its clause ; its proper signification is " of course" " in the na- 
ture of things" and is commonly rendered therefore, consequently ; it is 
used in the successive steps of a train of reasoning ; as, " If there are 
altars there are also gods;" dXXd urjv tlai fioiyoi dalv d(ja xai &tol, 
But there certainly are altars ; therefore there are gods too. It is used 
in making a transition to what follows in the order of time or events, or 
in the progress of thought. With d or idv it expresses conjecture; as, 
tl doa dvvovrat,, if indeed (i e. in the course of things) they can. Some- 
times it serves for an emphatic asseveration as if founded on an infer- 
ence. 

2. The adverb doa is different from this, and is always placed first 
in a clause or sentence. It is merely an interrogative particle like the 
Latin num or utrum ; as, doa y.aradtjXov o fiovXouou Xlyiw ; Is, then, 
what I wish to say evident t When a negative answer is expected it 

generally the particle ^tj annexed. The Latin nonne is expressed 
by do ov, and sometimes by doa alone. 

336.— rA'p. 

1. Tag, for, always follows other words like the Latin enim, which 
it resembles in signification, and for which at the beginning of a sen- 
tence y.al yaQ, like the Latin etenim, is often used. Its use is to assign 
a reason for what is said. Very often, however, that of which it assigns 






LM 



1, to thow 

I 

; >t(t MttffOft ft Cu 

■ 

I 

timtp, 

I r LEAST a 

338. .//. . 
The part ; j>ose, and 

■r any 
; which tK it may 

I 



200 CONJUNCTIONS. § 125. 

these ; 4. In commencing a subject; as, Jldz drj axonMuev alio, now let 
III conshL r it in this way ; 5. In marking the successive Btages of thought 
as they rise one above another. In each of these, it signifies now truly, 
until at the last it signifies finally. 

340.— KAt and Ttf. 

Kai and rt have the same significations in reference to each other 
as the Latin et and que. Both connect single ideas, and the entire parts 
of a sentence. With the older poets, re is more common than in the 
Attic prose writers, and it is commonly put not merely once between 
the connected parts, but joined to each of them; as, nai^o avdowv n 
■&ioJv re, the father of both gods and men. "When re precedes y.ai in sep- 
arate clauses, the former signifies not only ; the latter, but also ; re y.ai y 
and also, connect more closely than simple xai; y.ai — y.ai, both — and; 
as well — as; a)Moq re y.ai, especially, i. e. (both in other respects) and 
also, particularly also. 

Ml.—Muf and NH\ 

Ma and vr\ are particles of obtestation, and always govern the ac- 
cusative of the object; vr; is always affirmative; fia, when alone, is 
negative, but is nevertheless attached both to affirmative and negative 
obtestations; as, vai /nd Aia, and oi' ud Aia. 

342.— MgN and J£ . 

Miv and 6i are two particles referring to each other ; they are used 
1 to distinguish, and at the same time to connect, the different clauses of 
a sentence together. Thus used, uiv is generally placed in the first 
clause of a sentence, and 6£ in each of the succeeding ones. Hence, 
whenever we find uiv in the first member of a sentence, the thought 
necessaril}' turns to an opposite member with de. Sometimes, however, 
after uiv the expected <)i does not actually follow ; i. e. when the op- 
position is so clear that di is not necessary to point it out, or when 
some other word, such as d/./.d, drd(j, <fcc, supplies its place. In like 
manner de is often used without being preceded by juiv, referring to 
something conceived in the mind but not expressed ; or, without such 
reference, it is used, simply to connect the parts of a sentence less 
closely than by uiv—di, or other conjunctions. In opposition they are 
commonly rendered indeed — but See Si. 

The distributive use of uiv and di with the article, relative pronoun, 
Ac. will be noticed §§ 133, 3, & 134, 19. 

343.— OtN and OTKOTN. 

1. ()t\\ wherefore, is used, 1. In drawing an ultimate conclusion 
in the view of all that has been said before ; in this it differs from doa, 
which is used in successive steps in the process of reasoning. 2. It com- 
mences a chapter or paragraph, with some reference to what has pre- 
ceded. 3. It continues or resumes a subject, after a digression. 4. It 
introduces a transition to some new subject; and lastlv, it has an affirm- 
ative force, particularly in replies; as, yiyvttai ovv ourojq, it is certainly 
90 ; hence the compounds, 







' 








. 













2«! 



nrw»r1r * n*,rml\x 



dorM my; 
just as he mm. 

1 . / 1 
2. wkti 

ural 

■' 
J 

in sow oil 
usage; at, 



202 CONJUNCTIONS. § 125. 

it has the sense of oIWok, thus; as, ioq tlmor, having spoken thus. 5. In 
exclamations it lias the eense of how; as, w; at /uaxaqiuoiitv, how happy 
m you ! hence its use with the optative in the sense of the Latin 
n ; a-, iaq /<' bft'/.' 'Eatiop y.rtlvcu: Would that Hector had slain 
?ne ! literally, koto Hector ouyht to have slain me ! 6. Before superlative 
adjectives and adverbs, like otv y it strengthens the meaning ; as, ok- tcc- 
YiGra, as quickly as possible. Allied to this, is its power as a strength- 
ening particle, with the positive degree, in such expressions ; as, wq 
cLXtjfHf*;, truly, really^ 1. It is used for the purpose of limiting proposi- 
tions with the infinitive ; as, ox; tintlv, so to speak ; ojq tl/.aGai, as far 
as one may conjecture ; and also in the same sense it is used before 
whole clauses and propositions; as, 6)q inl to tioXv, for the 7nost part ; 
toq 7TQoq to uiytftoq rnq noXtmq, in proportion to the size of the city^ 8. 
As a particle of time, it signifies when, sometimes while ; as, ihq dk tjl.fre, 
but when he came. 9. With numerals it signifies about ; as, wq t^/cc // 
TtTTccqa arcana, about three or four stadia. 10. With particles in the 
genitive absolute, and also in the dative or accusative, it is rendered as, 
sine?, because, inasmuch as, as if; and the participle is then rendered by 
the indicative ; as, tag ravr^q rtjq yjhqaq eyrquirdr^q orcrtjq, because this 
place teas the most secure. 11. It is often put by the Attics for the pre- 
position tlq, nooq, or ini\ as, &q ijui, towards me ; wq rbv paGit'/.ia, to 
tlie king. 

^W For the negative particles oh and /<?/, with their combinations 
and compounds, see § 166. 

348. — Obs. Though it is, in many cases, difficult to give a distinct 
translation of some of the Greek particles, or even always to feel their 
force, yet they ought never to be regarded as mere expletives. In all 
languages there are particles which are often employed chiefly for the 
sake of completeness, or in order to produce a well-sounding fulness, 
yet never without their own peculiar sense ; and though it is often dif- 
ficAlt to define what that sense is, yet every one feels that the expres- 
sion is incomplete without them. So it is also in the Greek language. 
The full and original meaning of many of those particles has become 
partially lost, and they now give to the discourse only a slight colour- 
ing which we cannot properly feel except after long acquaintance and 
practice. For a more full elucidation of the force and use of these par- 
ticle-, we refer the reader to the elaborate work of Hoogeveen on the 
Greek Particles. 



vx. 203 



PART III. 



§ I 

pari of grammar w! 
f the prop 
of vrordfl in a 

., r o of words as makes 
and Compound, 
short, should 

og is affirmed. 

D the 

6 subject 

uu rtad> 

thnsfvead 

: 

<• whole is finished, it is called a penoii. 



204 PARTS OF SYNTAX. § 127, 128. 



360.— §127. GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF SYNTAX. 

1. In every sentence there must be a verb and a nominative, 
or subject expressed or understood. 

2. Every article, adjective, adjective pronoun, or participle, 
must have a substantive expressed or understood with which it 
agrees. 

3. Every relative must have an antecedent, or word to which 
it refers, and with which it agrees. 

4. Every subject nominative has its own verb expressed or 
understood. 

5. Every verb (except in the infinitive and participles) has its 
own subject or nominative expressed or understood. 

6. Every oblique case is governed by some word expressed 
or understood in the sentence of which it forms a part ; or it is 
used, without government, to express certain circumstances ; as 
follows : 

1) The genitive is governed by a noun, a verb, a preposition, 
or an adverb ; or it is placed as the case absolute with the parti- 
ciple. 

2) The dative is governed by adjectives, verbs, and preposi- 
tions. It also expresses the cause, manner, or instrument. 

3) The accusative is governed by a transitive active verb or 
preposition. 

4) The vocative either stands alone, or is governed by an 
interjection. 

5) The infinitive mood is governed by a verb, an adjective, or 
adverbial particle. 



§128.— PARTS OF SYNTAX. 

361. — The parts of Syntax are commonly reck- 
oned two, Concord and Government. 

362. — Concord is the agreement of one word 
with another in gender, number, case, or person. 

363. — Government is that power which one 
word has in determining the mood, tense, or case 
of another word. 



I. 

1. I ibstanl h a substantia 

•j. I ctive \\ ith a ratal 

ive with it 
I. < tf with it- Domi 



§129. \ S A! ill \ 

I. Substantia i 

■ 
■ 



206 CONCORD OF THE ADJECTIVE. § 130, 131. 

370. — Obs. 4. Sometimes the latter of two substantives sig- 
nifying- the same thing, is put in the genitive ; as, Ilohg X&i]- 
roor (for Jj&7;rca), The city of Athens, 



§130. AN ADJECTIVE WITH A SUBSTANTIVE. 

371. — Rule II. An adjective agrees with its 
substantive in gender, number, and case / as, 

XQrjGtog av/jQy a good man. 

xalij yvvtj, a beautiful woman. 

aya&ov XQtjpa, a good thing. 

372 — This Rule applies to the article, adjective, adjective pro- 
nouns, and participles. 

373. — Obs. 1. Other words are sometimes used as adjectives, 
and consequently fall under this rule ; viz. 

1st. A substantive which limits the signification of a more 
general term ; as, 'Ellag opcovrj, the Greek language. 

2d. Adverbs placed between the article and its substantive ; 
as, 6 fieza^b xbnog, the intervening space. 

374. — Obs. 2. The place of the adjective is sometimes sup- 
plied by a substantive with a preposition ; as, ijdovt] per a do£ng 
(for trdoiog), exalted pleasure : — sometimes, by a substantive gov- 
erning the other in the genitive ; as, fia&og yqg, depth of earth, 
i. e. deep earth ; ?) neoiGGeia z^g %doiTog, abundance of grace, 
i. e. abundant grace. For the adverbial adjective, see 662. 



§ 131. OBSERVATIONS ON THE CONCORD OF THE 
ADJECTIVE. 

375. — Obs. 1. Two or more substantives singular, unless taken 
separately, have an adjective plural. If all the substantives be 
of the same gender, the adjective will be of that gender. If of 
different genders, the adjective takes the masculine rather than 
the feminine, and the feminine rather than the neuter. But if 
the substantives signify things without life, the adjective is com- 
monly put in the neuter gender. Not unfrequently, however, the 
adjective agrees with one of the substantives and is understood 



I 

1 as a 

i 

; as, 

by tii 

«i as a pi 

// known 

r plural, 

used in the sense 

or nu: 



208 CONCORD OF THE ADJECTIVE. §131. 

3 S3. — lire. 2. A collective noun in the singular may have an 
adjective in the plural, and in the gender of the individuals which 
form the collection; as, fiovli; ! { <jv/iar sl^ev — ovx dyvovvxeg, 
the COUNCIL kept peaceable — not being ignorant. 

So in Latin, maxima pars — in flumen acti sunt. Lat. Gr. 279. 

3S4. — Exc. 3. In the dual number, the Attic writers some- 
times join a masculine adjective with a feminine noun; as, rovzeo 
rco ijutoa, these two days. 

385. — Exc. 4. An adjective masculine, in the superlative de- 
gree, is sometimes joined to a feminine noun, to increase the force 
of the superlative ; as, al xoqcu ^sldvraioi, very black pu- 
pils. Also, a masculine adjective is joined with a feminine noun, 
when the plural is used for the singular, and when a chorus of 
women speak of themselves ; thus, Medea says of herself, xai ydo 
7jdixn[it$>oi GiytjGope&a, xqbiggovcov vixobpevoi, though in- 
jured I will be silent, yielding to superior poivers. 

386. — Exc. 5. An adjective in the masculine gender may be 
joined with a noun denoting a female, if the attention is drawn 
to the idea of a person without regard to the sex. 

387. — Exc. 6. A substantive dual may have an adjective plu- 
ral ; and vice versa, a substantive plural, when two is denoted, 
may have an adjective dual ; as, qitlag ntot %bIqe fidlojfjiev, let 
us embrace ; dvo ictG\iarcc e^ope'reo dlh'jlav, two successive 
chasms ; lit. two chasms adjoining each other. 

388. — Exc. 7. The adjectives txuGzog, dllog, in the singular, 
are put with nouns in the plural, to intimate that the objects ex- 
pressed by them are spoken of individually and distributively ; as, 

oios exciGTog idr/ovro dexa, they each received ten. 
?)qc6jcov ds dllog alio, they asked some one thing 

and some another. 

So in Latin, Quisque pro se queruntur. Li v. Lat. Gr. 281. 

389. — Exc. 8. Plural adjectives sometimes agree with their 
substantives in gender and number, and govern them in the gen- 
itive case ; as, 

ol nuluioL zcov TTottjTQdv, the ancient poets. 

So also among the Attic writers in the singular ; as, 

diarot'ficov rbv noil or rov %qovov , spending much time. 

390. — Exc. 9. Instead of agreeing with its substantive, the 
adjective is sometimes put in the neuter gender, and the substan- 
tive following it in the genitive (461); as, elg togovtov rolfing 



SOI 

unci in t})«« *iniru!ar f are §o 

ii th« 

8 was indeed 

l.ir, ii 

I ; and 

!* de- 

I 



COMPARATIVES AND 

i two are 

o few to 

Nime 
it in 



210 * ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. §133. 

other ; as, avyo cptlorifiorcczog, a very ambitious man ; 7TQ?jyfia 

Jifftatw, a very foolish thing. 168. 

6. The superlative is often strengthened in signification by 
adding certain adverbial words and particles; such as, Trolly, 
paxoqj, noli), fiali'aza, tzIugzov, '6%a, cat,*, o7zcog, on, q, &c. ; as, 
no/./jo ilaO'trtoiazoy, much the weakest ; 6% aoiaxog, eminently 
the best ; cog Tci^ioia^ as quickly as possible ; on nluarov %qo- 
ror, as long time as possible. Also by the numeral tig ; as, tig 
apijQ fiblziazog, a man of all others the best 

For the construction of the comparative and superlative de- 
grees, as it respects government, see 472 and 482. 



§133. ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 

394. — Special Rule. Adjective pronouns agree 
with their substantives in gender, number, and 
case. 

395. — The Definite, cevrog. 

For the import and use of the Definite pronoun avzog, see 
§ 62. In construction it is often similar to the demonstratives, 
396-5. 

1. When used as a personal pronoun, avtog takes the gender 
and number of the noun for which it stands, and the case which 
the noun would have in its place. Sometimes, however, like the 
adjective (382), it takes the gender and number of a synony- 
mous substantive, or of one that expresses the meaning of that for 
which it stands; as, fxaOnrevcjaTS navza ta s&vn ficmTi^ovreg 
avzovg, " teach all nations baptizing them," where avzovg is 
put for dv&QCQ7Tovg, which expresses the meaning of e&vn. 

Note. This observation applies to all adjective pronouns used with- 
out, and instead of, the substantives, to which they refer. 

3 9 6 . — Demonstratives. 

2. The Demonstratives are used without a substantive, only 
when they refer to a noun, or pronoun, or substantive clause in 
the proposition going before, or in that coming immediately after. 

3. When two persons or things are spoken of, ovzog, this, re- 
fers to the latter; ixtivog, tltat, to the former. In the same 



§ 1S3. 

i 

: 

i r 1 1 - > i j 1 \- 10 

: 

I 

Welly that all th 

■ 

I 

and 
that (do I 



212 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. §133. 

ti'rig/.y-ti rowofco, n&pQtxe, if any one mentions the name of a 
woman, although (i.e. and that woman being) dead, he shud- 
ders. 

l>ut when the pronoun is less definite, not referring to any 
particular substantive in the preceding clause, but to something 
expressed in it, it is put in the neuter plural, and may generally 
be rendered u especially" u although," &c ; as, 2.1 6& fioi doxeig 
ov nooGSjew ibr row rovzotg, xai ravia ooybg cor, but you do 
not seem to me to give your attention to these things, although 
being wise. Expressions of this kind are doubtless elliptical, 
noiug or some such word being understood, and may be ren- 
dered k * and these things you do." Indeed, it is sometimes ex- 
pressed ; thus, in Dem. pro Phor., after reproaching Apollodorus 
with his dissolute conduct, he adds, xal xavra yvralxa tycov 
noieig, and these things you do, having a wife ; which, with- 
out Troitig, might be rendered u though having a wife." 

Yet sometimes these words seem to have no dependence on 
any part of the sentence, but are thrown in to call the attention 
to a special circumstance. 

8. The demonstrative pronoun is often joined with adverbs of 
time and place, to define these circumstances with greater empha- 
sis or precision ; as, za vvv iciSe, just now ; tovt ixel, at that 
very time. 

9. The demonstrative pronouns are sometimes used instead of 
the personal pronouns eyco and gv, and, in speaking, when thus 
used, were probably accompanied with action, so as clearly to 
point out the person intended. When used instead of the 2d 
person, they most commonly express contempt. The expression 
ovzog tifit is equivalent to the Latin en adsum i Lo ! here am I. 

397. — The Indefinite rig. 

10. The indefinite rig, 188, added to a substantive, commonly 
answers to the English words a, an, a certain one, any one, &c. ; 
as, x)g arJjQi a man. any man, some man. — Sometimes with a 

noun it is used collectively ; as, ftocooxav rig xazu xviia 

i/Ovg, many a fish bounding through the wave. — Sometimes 

butively ; as, y.ia tig or/.l^v uvutiIugug&co, and let every 
one build his own house. 

11. With adjectives of quality, quantity, and magnitude, es- 
peciallv when they stand without a substantive expressed, or in 
the predicate, it serves to temper the expression by asserting the 
existence of the quality in a less positive and unlimited manner, 



)3. 218 

li tomru 

I 

14. used in Ilk 

1 7. Tin- potteasn 

; agree* ^ ith its i 



21-4 CONSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE. §134. 

ber, and case, yet other words at the same time often regard it as 
the genitive of the personal pronoun. Hence the following modes 
oi' expression, to gov povov dojgtjpa, equivalent to to gov povov, 
Are., the gift of thee alone. Aqvv\A8vog nargog T8 p,8ya xle'og 
>,\V Euof avrovy where ifiov agrees with xXt'og in the accusative, 
and yet, as if it were the genitive of the substantive pronoun, it 
is coupled with nctTQog in the genitive, and followed by avzov. 
So also vcaiTeQOv lLe%o$ avrav, our own bed ; ra vps'ieoa avToop, 
your own property ; t/;v GCpheqav avzav (scil. yojoav), their own 
country. 

The same construction is common in Latin ; as, " mea, ipsius 
culpa." " Cum mea nemo scripta legat, vulgo recitare timentis" 
" Beneficio nxeo et populi Romania Lat. Gr. 256 and 283. 

18. The same observation extends to possessive adjectives ; 
as, 8i 08 fie dei yvt>aix8iag xi aQ8Tt)g ogch rvv iv yj\Q8ia tGov- 
tut, [iVJjG&tjvai, If I must also say something concerning the vir- 
tue of those women, who are from this time to live in widow- 
hood ; where yvraix8iag, is equivalent to the genitive x&v yvvai- 
y.ooi', to which ogcu refers. 

19. The possessive pronouns are employed only when an em- 
phasis is required ; in all other cases the personal pronouns are 
used in their stead ; as, Ttarrjo ijfioov, our father, literally, the 
father of us. But naTqo ijpez8oog means our own father. 

20. The possessive pronoun is sometimes used objectively; 
as, Gog nottog, not " thy regret" but " regret for thee;" xa\ia 
pov&87r/fiaTa, not " the lessons which 1 give" but " the lessons 
tvhich thou givest me. This use of the possessive corresponds to 
the passive sense of the genitive, 452. 

21. The possessive pronoun is sometimes put in the neuter 
gender with the article, for the personal ; as, to vfit'z8oov for 
vutig ; TUfid for iyoi ; to ifiov for ifis. Also without the article 
after a preposition ; as, h yfistSQOv (scil. dob pan), for iv ijpojv, in 
our house. 



§134. CONSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE. 

400. — Special Rule. The article agrees with its 
substantive in gender, number, and case. 

401. — Exc. 1. In gender. The masculine article is often put 
with a feminine noun in the dual number (384) ; as, rco yvvaixi, 
the two women. 



I UK IB 

an, vu 

■ 

I 

l. 

■ 

d :) o 

with tl 

I |>!ir:iv,v 



216 CONSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE. §134. 

noun, and frequently have a participle understood ; as, ?/ Ttobg 
Tahirag iui// ( ; scil. yevopsvi], the battle against the Gauls. 

10. An adverb with the article prefixed is used sometimes as 
a noun, sometimes as an adjective ; as, ol mXag, those near, i. e. 
the neighbours ; // dvco nohg, the upper city, 378. 

11. Adjectives, participles, adverbs, adverbial particles and 
phrases, used in the sense of nouns, have the article prefixed ; as, 
oi On;Toi, mortals ; ol xolaxevovTeg, flatterers ; ij avqiov (scil. 
/;hcW)«), the morrow ; to t(, the substance ; to noibv, the quality ; 
to tzogov, the quantity ; to cog, the manner in which, &c. 

12. The article without a substantive, before apcpi or tzsqi vfith 
their case, denotes something peculiar to, or distinguishing the 
person, place, or thing expressed by the noun ; as, ol tieqI fttjoav, 
those devoted to the chase, i. e. " hunters ; " to ttsqi Act\i\\)ay.ov, 
the affair at Lampsacus ; to. dficpi nole^iov, what belongs to war ; 
sometimes it is a mere circumlocution for the noun itself; as, tc\ 
TitQi ttjV ctfiaQTiav, for ?/ afiaoTta. 

13. Ol neoi, and ol d^icpi, with a proper name, have the fol- 
lowing peculiarities of meaning; viz. 1. the person himself ; as, 
ol dfiqn TLoiayLOV xcu Udvftoov, Priam and Panthous ; 2. the 

followers of the person named ; as. ol neoi Aoyibaiiov, the com- 
panions of Archidamus ; 3. the person named, and his compan- 
ions and followers ; as, ol dpcpl I1eig!x)Tqutov, Pisistratus and 
his troops. 

14. The neuter article in any case prefixed to the infinitive 
mood (§ 173, I.), gives it the sense and construction of the Latin 
gerund, or a verbal noun ; as, tov cpiXoaocpeiv to tyrew, inquir- 
ing is the business of philosophy ; to xalcog )Jyeiv, the speaking 
well. 

15. In the neuter gender, and in any case which the con- 
struction requires, the article is placed, 1. Before entire propo- 
sitions or quotations in a sentence construed as nouns ; as, Eti 
ds tovtcov TQirrj diacpood, to, cog txaoTa tovtcov (Aipfjacuro av 
Tig, Moreover there is in these a third difference, viz. the manner 
in which one should imitate each of these objects ; f'x ds tovtcov 
ooftcog av 'iyoi to u ipyov d' ovotv oveidog," but according to 
these views, the sentiment " labour is no dishonour " would be 
correct. 2. Before single words quoted or designated in a sen- 
tence ; as, to d' vjJLtig bzav tlnco, ztjv nokiv "ktyco, when I say 
you, I mean the state ; to Xe'yco, the word Xt'yco. But in nouns, 
the article is commonly in the gender of the noun ; as, to ovo/acc 
6 'Atdng, the name Hades. 

16. The article is often prefixed to possessive, demonstrative, 





at I 


■ 









§ w 

is my mm 

■ 

all. 

17. Wli oged will pro- 

. 

n thus 

1. In f: 

len liim ; as, 

Oaor, we 
lural, 

. 
, and 

SOSMT 



218 RELATIVE PRONOUN. § 135. 

and Herodotus, the article 6, //, to, is very frequently used as a 
relative, and sometimes as a personal pronoun; as, Jt%tXlia 
qtvyco 7 or idttr lao/vrofica, I fiee from Achilles whom / am 
ashamed to see ; to [th> iieftaTTio, it (the child) was buried. 
186-2. 



§135. THE EELATIVE PRONOUN. 

404. — Rule III. The relative agrees with, its 
antecedent in gender, number, and pe?*son ; as, 

V )' vv h ?* eidoiiav, the woman whom we saw. 

6 drijQ og Tjk&s, the man who came. 

t« %Q/'j[iaza a stye, the things which he had. 

405. — 1. The antecedent is the substantive, or something 
equivalent to a substantive (421), in a preceding clause to which 
the relative refers. Sometimes, however, as in Latin, the relative 
and its clause is placed before the antecedent and its clause. 

406. — 2. Strictly speaking, the relative does not agree with 
the antecedent, but with the same word expressed or understood 
after the relative, and with which, like the adjective, it agrees in 
gender, number, and case, as well as person ; thus, 6 innog ov 
(iriTrov) ti'/e, the horse which (horse) he had. Hence, in connect- 
ing the antecedent and relative clauses, the following variety of 
usage occurs ; viz., 

1st. The word to which the relative refers is commonly ex- 
pressed in the antecedent clause, and not with the rela- 
tive ; as, oviog ian 6 a v // o ov tldeg, this is the man 
whom you saw. 
2d. It is often not expressed in the antecedent clause, and 
expressed with the relative ; as, ovzog ion o v eJdtg av~ 
Squ. 
3d. Sometimes, when greater precision is required, it is ex- 
pressed in both ; as, ovzog ion 6 dvtjQ ov eidtg avoqa. 
4th. When the reference is of a general nature, and there is 
no danger of obscurity, the word to which the relative 
refers is understood in both clauses ; as, ov ?){riXei ixzave, 
ov i]{ri).ti iaaoe, whom he would he slew, whom he would 
he saved alive. All this variety is common in Latin as 
well as in Greek. (Lat. Gr. 286.) 



219 
in Bomeiii D n pr»^. 

i 

1. \\ 

be third ; m, mj 

. \\ hell 
1 1 

ml Dumber, i 

n<»n\ moufl \\ ith it, <>r imj - 

all 

\ 1 1 

D Um >ii 

I to*, all | 

«ad id l 



220 RELATIVE PRONOUN. § 135. 

If a nominative come between the relative and the verb, the 
relative will be of that case which the verb or noun following, 
or the preposition going before, usually governs. But, 

Attraction of the Relative. 

413. — 9. JExc. I. The relative is often attracted 
into the case of its antecedent : as, 

Examples. 1. avv raig vavalv aig (for ag) tl%e, with the 
ships which he had. 2. fiezaayjzco z7jg Ijdovt/g ijg (for jjy) 
tdcoxa vfuv, let him share the pleasure which I gave you. 3. 
fiefwrjfAtvog gov engage (for rav nqay\iazoav a mQa£e, 406-4th), 
being mindful o/ what he did. 4. drzoXavco gov tjco ay ad gov, 
I enjoy what goods I have (406-2d). 

Note 1. The rule of attraction seems to have its foundation alto- 
gether in euphony; and hence, generally, attractions will be found only 
where they improve the euphony of a sentence. 

Note 2. This construction is sometimes, though very seldom, imi- 
tated in Latin; as, CircUer sexcentas ejus generis cujus supra demonstra- 
vimus, naves invenit. (Les. See Lat. Gr. 298. 

414. — 10. JExc. II. The antecedent is sometimes 
attracted into the case of the relative ; as, 

Jlllov 8' ov zsv olda rev av ylvza rtvyta dvoo, I know not 
any other person ivhose renowned armour I could put on. Here 
allov is attracted by the relative rev (for rov, 142, used for ot>, 
186-2), from the accusative into the genitive. Lat. Gr. 299. 

On this principle are to be construed such sentences as the 
following: ovdtva xi'vdvvov ovziv' ov% v7Z8[i8ivav, for ovdtig 
yv xivdvvog ovziva, there ivas no danger which they did not 
undergo ; ovdtva tcpaaav ovriv' ov daxovovza anoazqt- 
qjtaOai, for ovdtig i\v ovnv icpaaav ov daxgvovza, &c. there was 
no one who, they said, did not return weeping ; zlvag zovaS 
oqoj Sivovg, for tiveg tlalv ovzot ol %tvoi ovg 6qgo ; who are 
these strangers whom I see ? 

415. — 11. The relative plural, and in all its cases with iati 
before it, is used for, or rather is the original form of, the adjec- 
tive tvtoi, -at, -a, some (iazi being sometimes written tvt) ; as, 
y.a\ tazi ol (i. e. evioi) £zvy%avov {rconuxoov, and some hit 
breastplates; ano zoov noXtGov iariv gov (i.e. ivicov), from 
some cities. 

In this construction tazi is found with oazig, both singular 
and plural ; as, tan oazig, some one ; tazi oizivtg, some. 



§136. 

ir <u % 

! 



417 i;D8 

1 . 

r<j«ed 

or un 

. 

—Of. 

size — as. 

t ihfl 
in which ii r the 

rest tl 

i 

and 

cfa it >t:ir. i-« * in \\!ii.}. 

i 

in w] s*«d, und 

the same 

ictc-J into the 



222 RELATED ADJECTIVE WORDS. §136. 

same case with it; as, tojp (roiovzcov) oicqvtzeq avrbg ovzcov, 
they being such as he. 

When the substantive to which oiog refers is obvious from 
the connection, it is frequently omitted, as in the preceding ex- 
ample. 

5. Sometimes oiog, with the clause in which it occurs, is ap- 
parently unconnected with the sentence. In such cases the con- 
nection is to be formed by supplying wg or on ; as, ifiaxdoi^ov 
rtjv [At]T8Qa (on) oiG)v Ttxvcov ixvot]G8, they blessed the mother 
{because) she gave birth to (lit. became possessed of) such children. 

Of a similar nature are the Homeric expressions oV dyootveig 
— oV eooyag, i.e. on ol\ &c. because you say — because you 
do such things. 

6. The construction is the same when oiog, or the substantive 
to which it belongs, is in the nominative, or is governed by a 
preposition; as, dlrjx^eg dyovrag nzv&og (on xoiovzog) oiog 
avzovg 6 ftvvvog die'cpvyev, being truly grieved because such a 
thunny fish as this escaped them, Lucian ; iXniQovzzg ndy/y 
dnoXttoO^ai zg oia xaxd ?jxov, i. e. ojg ig zoiavza oia xaxd, 
expecting total destruction since they were come into such cala- 
mities as these. In this way that difficult sentence in Thucy- 
dides is explained, xcu fiov?] (scil. Jtftijvai'ojv Tiohg) ovzs to) tzoXe- 
(ucp mtX&ovzi dyavd'A.Tqoiv f/a, vcp oicov xaxona&ei, i. e. oyg 
imb TOiovT03v oiojv ijpeTg, and ive are now the only state 
which does not excite indignation in an invading enemy, because 
(or since) they suffer from such a brave people as we are. 

In all constructions of this kind, the idea will be readily per- 
ceived by considering oiog as put for on or cog roiovzog. See 
numerous examples in L. Bos. Ellipses, Gr. 271. Vigerus, Ch. 3. 
§8,9. 

7. Second. Before an adjective, it may be resolved by supply- 
ing the infinitive thai ; as, el fiev ydo Tig cwtjQ Iv avzoig iari 
oiog £[A,7T£iQog 7iok8\iov, if any one among them is skilful in 
war, Dem. O. 2. for roiovzog oiog eivai E^neiQog, is such as to be 
skilful, &c. ; oiog doiGzog, the best, for zoiovzog oiog tivai uqig- 
zog, such as to be the best, &c. 

8. Oiog is frequently, however, joined with an adjective in the 
form of an exclamation or interi ogation, apparently without re- 
ference to the usual antecedent ; as, oiog fxtyag, oiog ftalanog, 
how great ! how difficult ! Thus Lysias, oiog fityag xcu dtirbg 
xtvdvvog tffcoviafrt], how great and terrible danger was risked 
(scil. for the liberty of Greece). If this and similar sentences, 
however, are thrown into the assertive form, they readily admit 



§ 127. vsk. 

' It 
i with tin 
«w, • .it 

, aru 

used impost 

11. S 

. rod tm d 
il expresBi 
I 

these wo be 

■ 

strii 

i 

such tin no • 



■ 



22-4 VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE. §138. 

3d. In exclamations ; as, co dvazdXaiva iyc6 ! wretched 



/ 



me . 

4th. Absolutely, or without dependence on any word in the 
sentence (772) ; as, noXXh yao // a-TQariu ovaa, ov 
Baoqg sozia tto/.scoj vTTodtSccG&cu (aiz/ { y).for the army 
being numerous, it will not be in the poioer of the tvhole 
state to accommodate them. Or without a participle, by 
pleonasm before an affirmation; as, 6 Mcovatjg ova of- 
dotfur ti ytyorev avzco, this Moses, ive know not tohat 
has become of him. 



§ 138. A VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE. 

420. — Rule IV. A verb agrees with, its nonii- 
native in number and person ; as, 

iya youqoj, I write. 

vfieig riviere, ye strike. 

oq&a/.ua) Xaiwszov, his eyes shine. 

421 — Rem. The subject of a finite verb, if a noun or pronoun, or 
adjective used as a noun, is put in the nominative. The subject may 
also be an infinitive mood (719), or part of a sentence ; and to all these 
this rule applies. 

422. — Obs. 1. The nominative of the first and of the second 
person is generally omitted, being obvious from the termination 
of the verb ; also of the third person, when it may be readily 
supplied from the context ; as, h'yovci, they say. 

423. — Obs. 2. The subject is also omitted, when the verb ex- 
presses an action usually performed by that subject ; as, aalni- 
yei, the trumpeter sounds; iy.f t ov$e, the herald proclaimed ; or 
when it expresses an operation of nature ; as, ve^ it rains ; fiqov- 
ra. it thunders. 

424. — Obs. 3. Impersonal verbs are usually considered as 
without a nominative ; still they will generally be found to bear 
a relation to some circumstance, sentence, clause of a sentence, 
or infinitive mood, similar to that between a verb and its nomi- 
native ; as, bikoii not umtrui, it is lawful for me to depart, i. e. 
to depart is lawful for me ; ycpi oe noitir, it behoves you to do 
it, i. e. to do it behoves you. Lat. Gr. 307. 

Note. — On the other hand, the subject or nominative is some- 
times expressed, and the verb — usually some part of the verb 
mca — is omitted ; as, °E)Xr { v iyco, I (am) a Greek. 



;9. 

1. RULl 
I. 

I. A neuter plural commonly has 

•rl) in the singular ; as, 

. 

I 

with tl»«- 

in the dual and plural In in tin* 

id r! i 

Ri i i 2. Two or m 
gulai her, ha erb in the plural ; 

taken separately, the verb hum 1m* in tfa 

re IW- 



226 VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE. § 139. 

70 tv KoQvflavrag n&Qmokovmv, Rhea, having taken with her also 
the Cvrybantes, wandered about. So in Latin ; as, J aba cum 
Labieno capti in potestatem Cessans venissent. Lat. Gr. 814. 

431. — Rule 3. A noun of multitude expressing 
many as one whole lias a verb in the singular ; as, 
e£ero laog, the people sat down. 

432. — But when it expresses many as individu- 
als, the verb must be plural ; as, 

ijoodznaav avzov to nlJjdog, the multitude asked him. 

433. — Obs. 5. To both parts of this rule there are also ex- 
ceptions, and in some cases it seems indifferent whether the verb 
be in the singular or plural ; sometimes both are joined with the 
same nominative; as, e^sto labg, 8Qt]tv(r^aav de xadtdQctg, 
the people sat down and kept their seats. 

434. — Rule 4. A dual nominative may have a 
plural verb ; as, 

apcpcD sltyov, both spake ; and a plural nominative, limited to 
two, may have a verb in the dual. 

II. Agreement in Person. 

435. — Kule 5. When two or more nominatives are of differ- 
ent pei'sons, the verb takes the first person rather than the sec- 
ond, and the second rather than the third ; as, iyco xcd ov zlno- 
fjiev, you and I spoke. 

To this rule there are many exceptions. 

III. The Nominative after the Verb. 

436. — Rule 6. Any verb may have the same 

case after it as before it when both words refer to 

the same thing ; as, 

vfitig FGzi to (pojg rov xocfiov, Ye are the light of the world. 

437 — Rem. The nominative before is the subject, the nominative after 
the predicate — the verb is the copula, and is either a substantive or intran- 
sitive verb, or a passive verb of naming — from its use called copulative. 

438. — Obs. 6. This rule applies to the infinitive whatever be 
the case of its subject ; also to participles, 738 and 752. 



10. 



§110. II. < 

1 1 1 

pro- 
wbich . 

any thii 

i any AC - also 

in the aceusa- 
> a r$mott 

I 

itiiout an * after an intransitive verb; *A,aM«; 



228 THE GENITIVE. §141. 

Ttiv Tira vogov, to free one from disease ; didovai ifiavzov zy 
ttoXei, to give myself to the state ; opeidead^ai rwv ZQiycov, to spare 
the kids ; fioijfteiv trj naTQibi, to aid (i.e. to render assistance to) 
my country. 



§141. THE GENITIVE. 

443. — The Genitive is in extensive use in the Greek lan- 
guage, being used in many cases in which the ablative is used 
in Latin. Its primary, as well as its general and leading idea, is 
that of separation or abstraction, going forth from, or out of ori- 
gin, cause. So that the meaning of the words of out of from, 
is implied in the case itself. 

The numerous and diversified uses of this case are reduced by Mat- 
thias to the following heads : 

444 — I. In Greek, words of all kinds may be followed by other 
words in the genitive, when the latter class limits, and shews in what 
respect the meaning of the former is to be taken. When used for this 
purpose, they may usually be rendered by such phrases as " with re- 
spect to" " in respect of ';" thus, 

1. With verbs; as, wq nodoiv ti/ov, as fast as they could run, lit. 
as they had themselves with respect to their feet; y.alwq e/ew /u e qq, 
to have one's self well with respect to intoxication; GyalfcaQai i Ini- 
tio q, to be deceived with respect to hope ; y.ariaycc rtjq xeq>a),?jq, I am 
broken with respect to my head, i. e. I have broken my head. 

2. With adjectives ; avyyvwuow tmv av&Q o)7t Lvtov «/ia^n;/ia- 
twv, forgiving with respect to human errors; eyyvq tTjq noktwq, 
near with respect to the city ; yrj nfoia xay.wv, a land full of (i.e. 
with respect to) evils; ud^wv narqoq, greater than (i. e. with re- 
spect to) his father. 

3. With all words which represent a situation or operation of the 
mind, which is directed to an object, but without affecting it; such as 
verbs signifying £o remember, to forget, to neglect, <fcc. ; and adjectives sig- 
nifying experienced, ignorant, desirous, &q. 

4. With all words which indicate fulness, defect, emptiness, and the 
like. Under this head fall adjectives signifying full, rich, empty, de- 
prived of, <fec. : and adverbs denoting abundance, want, sufficiency, <fcc. 

5. To this principle must be referred the construction of the geni- 
tive with the comparative degree, 482 ; with all words denoting superi- 
ority, inferiority, and where a comparison is made with respect to tne 
value of a thing ; as, ci'Stoq rovrov, worthy of this, i. e. equal in value 
witu respect to this ; or where the idea of difference is involved. 

6. When that with respect to which a thing is done may also be con- 
sidered the cause of its being done, the word expressing it is often put 
in the genitive, and may be rendered "on account of;" as, cfOovuv 
xwi Goqjlctq,to envy one on account of wisdom. Hence it is used with 
verbs signifying to accuse, or criminate, to pray, to begin, <fcc. ; and also, 
without another word, in exclamations. 



§ 142, 229 

put u ith tl»« 

1 1' ». — I i | 
which any tl; 

be mind, v, liieh ure tin* 
the 

M 1 '11 ;i- 

Doting /"- 

1 17 . — ! \ 

• iiat |fl to - 

j»r- : 

ri an- 
onder al. 



g l 12. I. THE GENITIVE GOVERNED BT i A\- 

11\ 

i 19.- V. ( >n<- -ul stantive an- 

r in the genitive, when the tatter substantive 
liinitd the ation of the form< 



230 GENITIVE GOVERNED BY SUBSTANTIVES. § 142. 

— This rule is founded on the genera] principle mentioned 444 

and 446. In the examples above, the genera] term /7«r>/<> is restricted 

by the word 9-tAv governed by it. It is not any father, nor the father 

</, but of oo', h ; bo ava£, not any nine/, but, the king of men. 

When a noun is restricted by another of the same signification, it is 

put in the same cane by Rnle L (366). 

451. — 06.s*. 1. The noun governing- the genitive is frequently 
understood (3G7); viz. 1. after the article such words as vlog, 
(lijTfjQ, (hifdmiQ, etc. ; as, MfXttddng 6 Kijiwvog (sup. v\6g), 
Miltiades, the son of Cimon ; ra r^g rvytjg (sup. dcoQi'ifmra), 
the gifts of fortune. 2. Olxog or doo^a after a preposition ; as, 
ig TiaTQog (sup. dcopa), to the house of her father; elg ctdov 
(dofior), to Hades ; zv adov (dojicp), in Hades. 3. After the 
verbs elf/d, yi'vopai, indo^co, (fee. See 491 and 446. 

452. — Obs. 2. When the noun in the genitive signifies a per- 
son, it may often be taken in an active or passive sense ; thus, /; 
yrooGig tov &tov, the knowledge of God. In this sentence, God 
may be either the subject or the object of the knowledge spoken 
of, i. e. the phrase may denote our knowledge of God, or his 
knowledge of us ; Tzo&og vlov, generally (not the regret of thy 
son, viz. which he has, but) regret for thy son ; dvdgbg svfiereia 
roiovde, good will towards such a man. Lat. Gr. 334. 

453. — This passive sense of the genitive is more common 
when the governing noun is derived from a verb which usually 
governs the dative, and when the one substantive is in one sense 
the cause, and in another the object, of that which is expressed 
by the other substantive; as, veqteqcov doog/jfiara, offerings 
(not of but) to the dead; evypura Tlallddog , prayers to 
Pallas; r\ rav IIlazaiEcov miatgaTEia, the march against 
the Platjsans. 

454. — Nouns thus derived, however, are more frequently fol- 
lowed by the dative ; as, tj Movaecov dootg dvxrgcoTioiai, the 
gift of the Muses to men ; sometimes by the preposition elg with 
the accusative ; as, &eoov elg dv\rQco7Tovg doaig, 518. 

455. — Obs. 3. Many substantives derived from w T ords which 
govern the genitive, are often followed by a genitive governed by 
the force of the primitive contained in the derivative ; thus, iXev- 
ftegog nofov (466), free from labour; hence, D.evOegia novov, 
freedom from labour; XQCcrew Ijdovwv (511), to be superior to 
^rcs ; r/y.gaTtiu ifiov&p, mastery over or moderation in 
pleasures ; dxouztiu T]dopdh>, subjection to or want of moderation 
in pleasures ; ernxovQ^fia tr t g yiovog, protection against the snow. 






I 

If} may bo re- 

I 

A(.K. 



VI. A 

writhou tlu* 

army. 



232 GENITIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. § 143. 

468. — Rule VII. A substantive added to ano- 
ther, to express a quality or circumstance belong- 
ing to it, is put in the genitive ; as, 

avqQ neydhjg OQettjg, a man of great virtue. 

464. — Obs. 10. The substantive in the genitive has commonly 
an adjective with it, as in the example above, but sometimes not ; 
as, noXtiiog ovx onXcov dlla da7idvrjg, a war, hot of wea- 
pons, but OF MONEY. But, 

465. — Obs. 11. The substantive expressing the quality or cir- 
cumstance of another, is more commonly put in the accusative 
governed by xard or did expressed or understood ; as, avi/Q 
cnovdalog xov zdotiov, a man of ingenuous disposition. 



§143. THE GENITIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 

466. — Eule VIII. Verbal adjectives, and such, 
as signify an affection or operation of the mind, 
govern the genitive ; as, 

dv{>Q(07icdv drjlfjfionv, hurtful to men. 

8fi7ztiQog {lOvor/Sjg, skilled in music. 

467 — Rem. The principle on which this rule is founded is con- 
tained in 444-1. 1, 2. But others suppose that the foundation of the 
principle, as well as of the rule, is to be sought in the ellipsis of a pre- 
position, such as 7rt()l, which is sometimes expressed ; as, ntyi rmv 
Tt/vow e7T^ari],no)v, skilled in the arts. However plausible this supposi- 
tion may be, it militates strongly against it that we have the same 
rule in Latin in which there is no preposition that governs the geni- 
tive. The stronger probability is, that the rule in both languages is 
to be referred to the same general principle already mentioned. 

468. — Under this rule are comprehended, 

1. Adjectives denoting action or capacity, which are derived 
from verbs, or corresponding to them, especially those in zog, 
ixog, and rjoiog. 

2. Many adjectives compounded with a privative (327-1, 1st) ; 
as, a&earog xul dvfjxoog undvtcov, without seeing or hearing of 
any thing. 

3. Participles used in an adjective sense, especially among 



via SM 

x. r. L scrvia 



IX. A 

era the Lrrniti 

• want ioi 



ititivt^, and ^ed 

latiws, in* 
idefioites, and the 

MM, 



234 GENITIVE GOVEKNED BY ADJECTIVES. § 143. 

4 / 3. — Rem. For the principle of this rule, see 445. It ha9 alsc 
been supposed that the genitive under this rule is properly governed 
by Ik or ano. The same remark made 467 is also applicable here, and 
for 1 lie same reason; viz. that the same rule holds in Latin, which has 
no preposition governing the genitive. 

474. — Obs. 1. All words are denominated partitives which 
express a part of any number or class of objects, the wdiole being 
expressed by the noun following it in the genitive. 

475. — Obs. 2. The genitive after the partitive is sometimes 
governed by the preposition ix or f£ ; as, f£ aTiaaojp r\ y.alliazt], 
the most beautiful of all : — and sometimes, instead of the geni- 
tive, there is found a preposition with another case ; as, y.cOXioxij 
iv raTg yvrath', fairest among women ; so in Latin, justissimus 
in Teucris. Lat. Gr. 360. 

476. — Obs. 3. Instead of the genitive, the case of the partitive 
is sometimes used ; as, rovg qjilovg rovg fiev a7zsxieire, 

SOME OF HIS FRIENDS lie slew. 

477. — Obs. 4. The partitives Tig and dig are sometimes 
omitted; as, ojsqco aoi Gioltjv twv xa).liorcov (sc. \iiav), I 
bring you a very excellent robe; rft&e twv fievovrtov thai 
(sc. tig), he desired to be one of those who remained. On this 
principle is explained such phrases as toil ztiv ainyQcov (sc. eig), 
for iazi ataygog, he is base (literally u one of the base "). 

478. — Obs. 5. Partitives agree in gender with the substantives 
which follow in the genitive. When two substantives follow in 
the genitive, the partitives, &c. commonly agree with the former, 
but sometimes with the latter. 

479. — Obs. 6. Collective nouns are governed by partitives in 
the genitive singular. 

480. — Obs. 7. Adjectives in the positive form, but conveying 
a superlative sense, on the principle of this rule govern the geni- 
tive plural; as, e^oyog 7rdvz<m>, the most excellent of all; dice 
Otucov, goddess of goddesses (i. e. supreme goddess) ; dia yvvai- 
xwv, most excellent of women, /Jailor it avdoonr, Good sir. Also 
nouns compounded with a in a privative sense ; as, dyah/.og dam- 
don', unarmed with brazen shields. 

481. — Obs. 8. On a similar principle an adjective in the geni- 
tive plural sometimes accompanies substantives of all kinds, in 
order to mark the class to which the person or thing mentioned 
belongs; as, TQoyhg tmv xto apeix cov, a wheel of the class 
of the earthen, i. e. an earthen wheel ; ntXtxvg tgov vavnnyi- 
xav, an axe of those belonging to ship-builders, i. e. a ship- 
builder's axe. 



g 1 18. VE8. 

ith- 

re it 

! 

484, ' 
tally followed bj 

y the 

: infinitive w ith or * ithool 

1 1. 'I'll** 
by the genitive ac 

- 

488. — 

■ 

48'J. 

■ 



236 GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. § 144. 

2d. Multiplicative numbers; as, dtnXdaiog, zQinldaiog ; as, 
dinXdaio* fki dy.ovttr zov Xiyeiv, one should hear 

TWICE AS MUCH AS HE SPEAKS. 

490. — Obs. 15. The superlative is sometimes used for the com- 
parative, and is then subject to the same rules; as, (with the con- 
junction) Xcpoxor }j zb <l>ltyQ(ig ntdior, better than the plain of 
Phhgra ; (without the conjunction) osio d' ovzig dv/;o [xaxdo~ 
zuzog, no man is happier than you. 



§ 144. THE GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 

491. — ErLE XII. The person or thing to which 
any thing belongs, is put in the genitive after tlfu, 
yhouai, vnaQ/co ; as, 

son zov (hxaiXdag, it belongs to the king. 

eJica luvzov, to be his own {master), 

zov xaX&g noltimv zb i&£- alacrity is necessary to fight 
Uir lazi, well ; i. e. belongs to it. 

492. — Rem. For the principle of this rule, see 446. Consistently 
with this, in constructions of this kind, a substantive may be considered 
as understood, which is the governing word. Lat. Gr. 365. 

493. — Obs. 1. Yet here also we have the genitive governed 
directly by a preposition expressed, indicating that from which 
the quality, 6zc. proceeds; as, ovy. tan rrobg no/.tcog, it is not 
proper for the state ; lit. it is not a thing proceeding from the 
state. On this principle are to be explained such sentences as 
the following ; ovy. cc/auca zovz drdobg doiozeog, I do not 
approve this in a prince; i. e. nqbg drdoog, ho,, from a prince ; 
zovzo inatrw Jfyfjot/.dov, I commend this in Agesilaus ; zov- 
zo fUfuporzcu fjutliara tjpdiv, this they blame chiefly in us. 



494. — Rule XIII. Verbs expressing the opera- 
tion of the senses, govern the genitive ; as, 

xlv&i fjev, hear me. 

hi] uov uttzov, touch me not. 

495. — Exc.\. Verbs of seeing govern the accusative; as, 
Qtbv oxpovzcu, they shall see God. 



§ 1-1 1 



XIV. \ 

tinii of the iii'ukI. _ 

1 . 1 

■ 

■ 

lift I 

- 



238 GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. § 144. 

thus used are sometimes denominated causative or incentive verbs, 
and henee the — 

502. — Rule. Causative verbs govern the accu- 
sative of the person with the genitive of the thing. 



503. — Rule XV. Transitive verbs govern the 
genitive when they refer to a part only, and not 
to the whole of the object ; as, 

erne tov vdarog, he drank of the water. 

504 — This construction depends on the principle stated, 445, or we 
may consider the expression elliptical, and supply some such word as 
fityoc, a part, or rl, some, as the direct object of the verb, and that which 
governs the genitive according to Rules V. and VI. 

505. — To this rule belong more especially such verbs as sig- 
nify, 

1. To share, participate, or impart, which, with the genitive 
of the thing, frequently govern the dative of the person to 
whom it is imparted ; as, [iEZctdidGO[M to) ddzl.qjcp rcov 
%Qi](AaTcov, I share the property with my brother, 

2. To receive, obtain, or enjoy ; as, tifjujg &a%8, he gained 
honour ; idv Idfioofiev o%o)Jjg, if we get leisure. 

3. Verbs signifying to take, to seize, and their contraries ; to 
touch, or to carry, especially in the middle voice, with the 
accusative of the whole, govern the genitive of the part af- 
fected ; £)*aftovTO ttjg ^corng xov^Oqdvxr^v, they seized 

Orontes by the girdle. 
506. — Exc. Some verbs, such as la\i$dvo\mi, fxezeyco, xlnoo- 
voptw, Xayydvoj, Tvyydvw, sometimes govern the accusative of 
the thing ; xhjoovoptco with the accusative of the thing, governs 
also the genitive of the person from whom it is received ; as, 
iy.h { oov6firj(j8 tov naroog xd xxijpaxa, he inherited his posses- 
siom from his father ; sometimes it governs the genitive of both. 



507. — Rule XVI. Verbs of plenty or %oant, fitt- 
ing or denriving, separation or distance, govern 
tlie genitive (444-4) ; as, 

ti'7TOQ£T yQrjfxdrcov, he abounds in riches. 

yovfjov ^////o"fio"i>co vija, let him fill his ship with gold, 

dtZo&uL yorjfxdxcov, to be in zvant of money. 



! 1. 289 

w liii-h 

1 . 

I 

:. . 

8. To make wa 

10. 

1 1. 

. ' M 

genitive <>f the 

• ; thus, under 

■ 

be, wheth 



511.— Rule XVI I. Wrl>s <>t' 
. and the conl 

till: 

i 



240 GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. § 144. 

512. — The verbs whicli come under this rule are those which 
signify, 

1. To rule ; as, do%oo, xquivco, deano^co, dvvaatevoo, i%ov- 
oid^co, av&erzeG), xazaxvnrevco. 

2. To reign ; as, rvgarnvo), fiaoilevco, dvdaaco. 

3. To lead ; as, ffft'ofica, *ffE[AOpev<x> 9 azoaznytw. 

4. To preside over ; as, imazaztco. 

5. To siwvive, or to be over ; as, TTeoieifii. 

6. To surpass, or excel ; as, Tzoooztvoo, VTZeofiai'vco, TzeoifidlXco, 
diaytoco, TZEQiyuofxai. 

7. To begin, i. e. to be first, to lead the way ; as, do^o^ou ; so 
dgyco, vnaoyto, xazdoyoj. 

8. The contrary are such as signify to be ruled, led, presided 
over, &c. ; to obey, to be inferior to, to be overcome. 

513. — Obs. 7. Some verbs govern the genitive by the force 
of a noun implied in them ; thus, Tvoavvevaiv is equivalent to 
zvourvog eirca; and hence hvodvvtvE Koolvftov, he was king of 
Corinth, is equivalent to zvgavrog qv Koqlv&ov. 

514. — Obs. 8. Many verbs under this rule sometimes govern 
the dative ; as, drdaaco, Gtjficavco, y.gazeco, ijysopar, yyefzovevoo, 
dgyco : and sometimes the accusative. 



515. — Rule XVIII. Verbs of buying, selling, 
estimating, and the like, govern the genitive of 
tlie^m^ (648) ; as, 

ownGdprjv rovzo tzspte doa%fic6v, I bought this for five 

DRACHMAE. 

xmv tiovwv Ticolovaiv iiixiv Tzdvza rdydd-a ol fteoi, the 
gods sell every good thing to us for labour. 

dhovzui di7iltjg riptjg, he is thought worthy of double 
honour. 

516. — Bern. The genitive in this construction is properly 
governed by dvzl understood, sometimes expressed. The price 
is sometimes put in the dative with the preposition mi, and some- 
times in the accusative with the preposition ngog. 649. 

N. B. — For the construction of the genitive with the accusa- 
tive, see § 151 ; also, for the genitive governed by adverbs, see 
§164, 165; by prepositions, § 168, and as used to express cer- 
tain circumstances, § 156, 157, and from § 160 to § 163. 



1. 1 

< utue wan 

>ot m regard* i 

Tbo 












■ 



B 

l end 
your 

alius : — 
Bad OM <V • >'", f.> ;'.'-.». :i»i ! ,n n/./j 09, gOT6ni 1 1 **- (Utife. 

11 



242 DATIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. §147. 

519. — Obs. 1. The dative often follows a substantive in the 
sense o^ the genitive, for which construction, with examples, see 
533. 

520. — Obs. 2. The dative sometimes depends on an adjective 
and substantive joined together, but chiefly on account of the 
adjective ; as, y.luvov &dlog nazQi, illustrious offspring to the 
father. 

521. — Obs. 3. The dative sometimes follows a substantive, 
not, however, as implying possession, but where the idea of adap- 
tation or design is implied ; as, %zqgIv norog, labour for the 
hands ; i. e. adapted for, designed for, suited to. 

522. — Obs. 4. The dative is also put with substantives to ex- 
press the idea of companionship, being governed probably by 
ovv or 6 pot cog understood ; as, (at/) vnevdvvog el rolg alloig, 
you are responsible, as well as (or equally tvith) the rest. 



§147. THE DATIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 

523. — Rule XX. Adjectives signifying profit 
or disprofit, likeness or unlikeness, govern the da- 
tive ; as, 

oyt'hpog xr { noku, profitable to the state, 

b^iolog too ttcctqi, like his father. 

524. — The dative after such adjectives, expresses the object to 
which the quality expressed by the adjective refers ; and hence, 
all adjectives in which such a reference is involved, are followed 
by the dative of the object to which they relate. In this class, 
besides those mentioned in the rule, may be reckoned, 
1st. Adjectives signifying usefulness, friendliness, equality, suita- 
bleness, resemblance, case, fitness, agreement, and the like, 
with their contraries. Hence, 6 avzog, the same, and some- 
times tig, one, and roiovzog, such, are followed by the da- 
tive ; as, ia avxa (ravzd) tzug^co ooi, I suffer the same 
things with you — (so in Latin, Invitum qui servat, idem 
facit occidenti. Hor. He who preserves a man against his 
will, acts the same part with the man who kills him) ; 
og ifioi piug tytvti in fx/jTtQog, who was of the 
same (of one) mother with me ; loyovg top — Toiovxovg 
Myeiv, to speak such words as he would. 



7. Kg. 

I 

D the <ia- 
ea which 



! 

:' the 

be srrvrti by thee. 

■ 



2^4 DATIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. § 148. 

if I blame my husband. Soph. Trach. ; dxpavarbg zy%ovg, not 

having touched the sword. 202, Obs. 1. 



530. — Special Rule II. The neuter verbal in 
Tsov, in the sense of the Latin gerund, with the 
dative of the doer, governs also the case of the 
verb from which it is derived ; as, 

tavta navTa noirfciov fioi, all these things must I do. 
roig tih v7iaQ%ovci vopoig xonariov, xaivovg d& er/Jj (.uj 

fttTtov, we should use the present laws, and not rashly enact 

new ones. 

531. — Obs. 4. The doer is sometimes put in the accusative, in 
which case the necessity involved in the verbal is much weaker 
than in the ordinary construction ; as, ov dovlevTt'ov rovg vov-v 
e%oviag toig xaxag cpQOvovai, the prudent ought not to obey 
the unwise; imGxmttov za fih avrov, ra dz yvvaixa (for 
avzcp, yvvcuxi), some things are to be looked to by him, some by 
his wife. Both are united by Plato, Rep. 5, ovxovv xcu ijfuv 
vtvcjit'ov — iXniQovzag. 



§148. THE DATIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 

532. — Rule XXL The verbs ei/ui, yivo/ucci, 
and v%aQ%6>, signifying to be, or to belong to, are 
followed by the dative of the possessor ; as, 

hri fxoi yo/jfiara, possessions are {belong) to me, i. e. / have pos- 
sessions. 

Ttlho Tzaldeg ijaav xalot xclya&oi, good children were to Tellus, 
i. e. Tellus had good children. 

533. — Obs. 1. On the principle of this rule may be explained 
the numerous instances, both in Greek and Latin, in which the 
dative signifying possession is used with another substantive appa- 
rently for the genitive. Thus, Ti'lho ol Ttcddeg is equivalent to 
TtXXov ol 7iaideg, the children of Tellus ; but the principle of 
construction is different. In the latter expression, the genitive is 
immediately governed by the other substantive, ol ncudeg, by 
Rule V., and signifies the children proceeding from, and belong- 



18. 

understood ; I 

?» the 

ve U to n< 

; thai, / 

in. In tl 

- 

■ 

■ 
- 

2. When 
proasot a pari <</ % or something belonging t<> % the other, the Later 

— tho 

■ 1 1 i 

So also 



246 DATIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. § 148. 

537. — In the following sentence, instead of the second dative, 
we have the accusative with xazd ; viz., ijds de fioi xatct &v- 
[ibv aoiGrn cpaivero ftovh'j, but this counsel seemed best to me in 
respect of my feelings ; l. e. this counse I pleased me most. 

538 — Rem. 3. The correctness of this view of the construction is 
also rendered more probable from the fact, that the same apparent tau- 
tology is used when the word to be limited or defined is connected with 
words which govern the accusative; as. rl de Gt yoevaq r/.ero 7iiv froc; 
what grief has invaded your mind? Where, instead of saying that <r£ is 
the accusative used for the genitive gov according to one mode of reso- 
lution, or that yoivaq is governed by y.ard understood according to 
another, it appears better to consider gb as the general direct object, 
and yoevaq as in apposition, defining more precisely the part affected 
as in the above examples; thus, "what grief has come upon you: viz. 
your mind." So in other instances ; as, 

T()(t)aq (U To6,uoq V7zq?.v0-t yvva t * a g t o v , trembling came upon 

the Trojans, every one in their limbs. 
rov ye )lri oGxia &vuoq aytjvwo, the noble soul left him; viz. 

his body. 
iowtbv rdnve viovq oq nrj xaq, he cut the wild fig tree, its 

YOUNG BOUGHS. 

539. — Obs. 3. The dative of some participles and adjectives 
is joined with the dative after the third person of el/u or yiroficu, 
for the verb itself ; these are such as (lovXoperog, I t d6fitrog, uy~ 
tfopevog, 7TQ0Gd£%6ii£V0Q, axcov, aGfierog, &c. ; as, g? goi [iovXo- 
fitvcp £Gii, for ei poult], if you are willing ; ov$8 avzcp morn r/f, 
nor was he unwilling; r t do[isvoiGiv ))fuv oi loyoi ytyowGt, we 
were pleased with your discourse. This construction has been 
imitated in Latin; thus, Tacit. Agr. 18, quibus bellum volentibus 
erat. "who were inclined for warJ' So Sallust, Jug. 100, uti 
mililibus labos volentibus esset, " that the labour might be agree- 
able to the soldiers." See Lat. Gr. 396, Note. 

540. — Obs. 4. Somewhat similar to this is the construction of 
the dative with the participle or adjective, expressive of some 
feeling or emotion, after verbs 'signifying to come ; as, 

aafisvn d* sfiol J;l\}e, he came to me delighted (scil. with his 
coming) ; i. e. / am delighted that he is come. 

no&ovvn 7ZQ0vcpdrt]£, thou contest to me earnestly wishing it, 
i. e. / earnestly wished that thou wouldst come. 

541. — Obs. 5. To this rule also belongs the construction of 
such phrases as %i ipoi xai goi (scil. xonov Igti) ; what have 
J to do with thee? (literally, what common thing is there to me 
and you?) xi nXiov egtIv spot ; what advantage have I from 
it ? what good is it to me ? 



§ 148. DATIVE CxOVERXED BY VERBS. 247 

542. — Rule XXII. All verbs govern the dative 

of the object to which their action is directed; as, 

tvyorro d'soiffi they prayed to the gods. 

uvajfldnuv nil, to look up to any 

A&ijvq x&kQag avia%ov % they lifted up their hands to Minerva. 

543. — Rem. \. This rule may be considered as general tpplyii 
all cases in winch a verb expressing action fa followed by trie dati 
the action not being exerted upon, but limply directed to the * ,! 
expressed in the dative. Hence, if the rerb is transitive, it will L r <»- 
also ifcj immediate object in the accusative (584) ; if intransitive, it will 
be followed by the dative only. More particularly to this rule bel 

544. — I. Verbs expressing action, compounded with irzl, 
nob*;, Big, did, <fec These prepositions serve to mark more pre- 
cisely the direction of the action, or state of action, to an obj- 
as, eiaeQX&S'd'ai Tin, to come to one. 

545. — 06.9. 6. These verbs sometimes govern the accusative 
by the force of the preposition with which they are compounded ; 
as, intGTQazEvan nbhv, he waged war against the city, 693. 

546. — Obs. 7. Hence the dative in this construction generally 
is equivalent to the preposition elg, nnog, em, &c. with the accu- 
sative. Further, to this rule belong 

547. — II. Verbs which signify — 

1. To profit or hurt ; to please or displease ; to reverence or 
to yield ; — to shew ; to seem ; to appear. 

2. To favour or assist ; and the contrary, to pray to, or en- 
treat. 

3. To command, exhort, or address ; to obey or disobey ; to 
serve or resist. 

4. To fit or accommodate ; to use and resemble. 

5. To give to, or to trust; to approach, to meet or to follow. 

6. To reproach with, to censure, to reprimand or rebuke, to be 
angry with. 

548. — Exc. dt'co or Ssojicu, I ask. governs the genitive ; J./'d- 
GOficu and hzui'tvoo, always the accusative. 

549. — Obs. 8. Many of these verbs sometimes govern the da- 
tive, and sometimes (lie accusative, according as their •■ 

viewed by tin* writer as directed to, 01 upon^ th 

In the former ease they are viewed as intransitive veil- ; in the 
latter, as transitive. 



248 DATIVE GOVERNED BY IMPERSONAL VERBS. § 149. 

550. — Rule XXIII. Verbs implying connec- 
tion or companionslii/p, govern the dative ; as, 

ofiiXeTv tin, to associate ivith any one, 

551. — In this construction, the dative is considered as corres- 
ponding to the ablative in Latin (517-2). To this rule belong 

1. Verbs compounded with avr 9 bu,ov, fiazd (with) ; as, ov£ijv 
tin, to live with any one. 

2. Verbs after which ovv, opov, fiezd, may be supplied con- 
sistently with the sense, such as those which signify 

(1.) To follow (with), to converse, to mix, to be reconciled, 

to dwell (ivith). 
(2.) To contend, or strive with, or against, &e. 

552.— Obs. 9. Verbs signifying " to contend, 11 &e. in one 
point of view may come under the principle referred to 543, and 
hence are sometimes followed by an accusative with Tioog ; but 
then they signify more properly " to attack" 

553. — Obs. 10. If a dative of the manner or instrument (627) 
follows the verb fifyvv^if, to mix, instead of the dative of the per- 
son associated with, the genitive is used, governed by the word 
in the dative; as, MaTa Aiog iv cpiXotqti [ir/etaa, Maia 

BEING EMBRACED BY JUPITER. 

554. — Note. To the principle of this rule may be referred the con- 
struction of the dative, expressing repetition or succession ; as, &viXXa 
&v£).).yi, storm upon storm ; a/.lov (f av ci/./.o) TrgoGidoiQ, "you might see 
one and then another " (scil. rushing to the regions of Pluto). 

For the dative, construed with the passive voice, see 604. 



§149. THE DATIVE GOVERNED BY IMPERSONAL 
VERBS. 

555. — Rule XXIV. Impersonal verbs govern 
the dative ; as, 

ttsGTi {tot, it is lawful for me. 

edoSs avzcp, it seemed proper to him (i. e. he determined). 

556. — Obs. 1. Special Rule. Atl y hXXdnsi, dict- 
cptgtt, [AtTbOTi, /ueXsiy ivBe^sraiy and TiQootjxei, 



§ 1 fl. 249 

with their compounds, govern the dative of a | 

s >n with I 

nolX&p GOt, >], % 

fitrtari uoi rovrov, I \ 

ti 8i 7TQoaqx8i iuoi Koqw&Ubp ; what an tin C 

For the principle of this rule, 
505-1. 

1. The dative of the person is frequently 

2. The nominative i g with the in 

is frequently used instead of the genitive troi 

tovto, or tovtov ; how does th 

559. — Exc. I. Jti .\\u\ yot) frequently take the 
accusative of the person with the genitive of I 
thing; as, 

ol* yun a cor us deS \}£r>7ri(7uuTon\ for T do I 

obsi zi 68 iQt] zavtng acpQOGwrig, you I 7 v. 

560. — 06*. 2. From analogy, the derivative Mil-tan;; 
yotto), %Qsia\ are often construed with the accusative \ ui- 

tive ; as. Hit 8a yntco yt'ynwa avrijg, I / I ofU ; tw /■ 

o iuov ; what ru \ef 

561. — Eocc. II. j/o/j, itQtmiy and rW, It behov 

govern the accusative with the infinitive : 

yn^ (quag) noiqaaad'cu tip UQifrip% we ought to mat 
(joyansQOvg yaq det ftgozdip unci ih'm-g, It behoves ti are 

/■ than a 

i. — Obs. 3. The dative is used in certain phrase* in which 
it appears to depend on an impersonal or Borne other verb 
stood ; \ 

1st. After co^ to show that a proposition is affirmed, n< 
erally true, but only with respect to a certain 
fiaxgav tog yiqovti KQOVGrdiXqg odor, 
long wag for an old man ; soil, cog qn 
it appears to an old man, 
ineineQ el yevralog tog idom, but si 

; i.e. dg si* i dor?*, 

may sup} 
2d. To express the opinion or jud ; with or 

without oS?; as, a* iyco tifufask toXg tpQoroi 

11* 



250 CONSTRUCTION OF THE ACCUSATIVE. § 150. 

done honour to you according to the judgment of the wise ; 
i. e. cog doxu tolg, &c. as it appears to those who are wise. 
Hence the common phrase, cog ifioi, or cog y ipoi (scil. doxtt), 
according to my judgment. 

For the dative governed by adverbs, see 600 and 664. 



§150. CONSTRUCTION OF THE ACCUSATIVE. 

563. — The accusative in Greek, as in other languages, is used 
to express the immediate object of a transitive active verb, that 
on which its action is exerted, and which is affected by it ; as, 
la^dvco x\v dan Ida, I take the shield. When used to ex- 
press the remote object of a verb, or after verbs properly intran- 
sitive, it is governed by a preposition understood. 

564. — Rule XXV. A transitive verb, in the 
active or middle voice, governs the accusative ; as, 

yvcofti, GsavTov, know thyself, 

ijona^ov rr t v nohv, they plundered the city. 

dya&bv dvdoa Tfftag, thou honourest a good man. 

565. — Obs. 1. Several verbs in Greek are used in a transitive 
sense, and have an accusative as their immediate object, which 
in Latin are considered as intransitive, and followed by some 
other case. They are chiefly the following ; viz., 

1st. Tzei&co ; as, mfxtetv rivd, to persuade any one. 

2d. vfiotXco ; as, vfioi&iv rtvd, to insult any one ; sometimes 
tig riva. 

3d. ddr/Jco ; as, ddixerr xiva, to injure, or do injustice to any one. 

4th. Several verbs which signify to assist, to profit, to injure ; as, 
cocptleco, ovqfju., eveoyszm, p-dnTco, and with these verbs the 
adverbs more, very, are expressed by the accusative neuter 
of the adjectives TiXelcov, [is'yag, viz. nXeov, p/ya. 

5th. The verbs dfiEi'fiopcu, drzafiaifiofiai, niicootoiicu ; as, dfiei- 
fiea&ai tiva, to remunerate any one ; Tificootioftai iiva. 

566 — Note 1. Some of these verbs govern other cases, but then 
they generally convey a different idea ; thus, w q>tii lv rwa, to assist 
any one ; u)qi t Xelv nvv, to be useful to any one. 

567. — Obs. 2. Many verbs are followed by an accusative, not 
of the object on which the action is exerted, but to which it has 



§150. CON - Of THE AOCU8A1 1 k j.M 

an imni- 

. and the I by the I 

in com]' 

such as the following ; vi/., 

1st. ttQO if Til Of 

to ,/■ 

2d. SoQwpoQta) \ w^ doQtKpoQHr ttPOf to be a spearm any 

one. 80 alt 
3d. imrgoner tutor <>r g 

4th. hulh'a, '/><' the /< or to fWM WN fa 

5th. <y frdveir, to conn befc 

6th. tmXtln&r, to be wanting t<>. <>r /o /< 

7th. inodidgdoxar, to run away from. 

8th. anopdrea&aij to ward off; ouivna or tntnny.nv nru, to 
swear by any one. 

9th. To these may be added, intransitive verbs expressing some 
emotion or feeling; as to be ashamed oj\ on afraid 
one ; to compassionate any one, <fcc. Arc, which are followed 
by the accusative of the object : thus, aidovrrat rov* 1 <-(//"*■- 
ta? 9 they respected tin ftijoetor; 

would rejoice (ft these things f — lu.yth ri, to I- | gj 

any thing ; — Ouomiv ti, to tah courage with respect to 1 
thing. The accusative in Buch cases may be governed by a 
preposition understood ; as, tnl, nto!, xaza ; or by the par- 
ticiple of a transitive active verb, to be supplied ; as, oncor, 
axot'eor, etc. seeing, hearing. 

568 — NoU _. Instead of th many of 1 4 are 

often followed by ■ 
cases. 

5G9. — Ohs. 3. Special Bulk The infinitive 
mood or part of a sentence is often used aa the 
object of a transitive verb instead of the acciifi 

tive ; as, 

sltyco aarzag tiacft'peir, I say thai you should all c 

TRIBQ 1 1:. 
bitht7(o Ws' OVX d).t;\>7; Xt'yco, let him .show that I do not 
mi; TRUTH. 

570. — .V infinitive ; 1 instead of the Lenitive and 

dative after \ • ruing 1 1 1 * , 1 i. 

571. — Obs. 4. In constructions of this kind, the I the 

verb is frequently expressed twice. First, in a noun or pronoun 



252 CONSTRUCTION OF THE ACCUSATIVE. § 150. 

in the case required by the verb, and Secondly, in a dependent 
clause ; as, av&ocoTiovg ze oida oia TzeTzop&aai vcp tocozug, 1 
know men what things they have suffered from love ; "lowag (fo- 
ftseou pi; fiezafidlXcoGi, you fear the lonians lest they revolt ; uq 
iiwv [u^ivnad's O7to la mociGGOv ; do you remember me what things 
I did ? This construction is especially common with the demon- 
strative pronoun in a sort of apposition with the clause which is 
the object of the verb, 396-5, 6 : it is also sometimes used in 
Latin (see Lat. Gr. 445, Obs. 2) ; but the English idiom requires 
these and similar sentences to be rendered as follows : " / know 
what things men have suffered from love" — " You fear that the 
lonians will revolt" — " Do you remember what things I did?" 

572. — Obs. 5. The accusative is often governed by a transi- 
tive verb or participle understood ; as, gs 8t; — qtjg dedQaxs'vcu 
zdda (sc. iocoza), but thee, (I ask) dost thou confess thou didst 
these things ? 6 de zip rtoocpvoida (sc. £%wv), the man with (hav- 
ing) the purple robe. 

573. — Obs. 6. In this way, the words ovofia, vxpog, TriTftog, 
evQog, and others, are frequently construed- in the accusative ; as, 
i7Z7i68QO(iog Gzadiov to TtXdzog (sc. */«*>), a race course (hav- 
ing) THE BREADTH of a Stadium. 

574. — Obs. 7. In like manner the accusative, apparently in 
apposition with an entire proposition, or placed in the beginning 
of a sentence, to express the leading idea, may be considered as 
depending on some preposition or verb understood ; as, 'ESJmp 
xzdicofiav MevzXsw limp mxQav, let us slay Helen (sc. hq, in 
order to ; or, Ttoiovvreg, causing) bitter grief to Menelaus ; [Ujzt- 
qu 8s — dip i'zco (i. e. tzeq}, or xazd, pqzsQa), as to your mother — 
let her return. 

575.— Obs. 8. Special Rule. An intransitive 
verb used transitively, governs the accusative ; as, 

no\z\iuv 7io)*E[iov 9 to wage ivar. 

This is done — 
1st. When the accusative is a substantive of a similar si^nifica- 
tion with the word that governs it ; as, c /; fiior ifiiGTor, he 
lives a very agreeable life. 

Note. To this principle of construction may be referred snch phra- 
ses as q)QovtZv /neya (scil. qgov^aa), to be proud ; aOdvara /tier g^dm 
(sc. q^^ov/jjuara), think as becometh an immortal. 

2d. When they only signify to cause that state or feeling which 
they express as intransitives ; as, ij$ev zeiQa, he caused the 



§151. 

Jut! 
mffCLi ' 

and //<>, 

*. A passive verb used in an act 
the accusal and 6 1 2 ; 



§151. VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE AND 

MTIYK. 

~, . — Many transitive active \ r with the 

the of the direct obje notner word to which 

action has an indirect or rem<>: 

or nee . as the nature of that r 

578. — Rule XXVI. Verba of acousin 
' imj, acquitting^ and the like, govern the 
cusative of the person with the genitive of the 
crime ; i 

diaxniiui at detXiag, I accuse you of c 

urr o).voi ot r/;^ £UTiO£, I acquit you of this blot 

579. — The genitive a - of accusing, is of 

by a preposition or Bome other word in! . by which 

: lered more emphi 

eygdxparo (//;-) n rwv 

y.U, 

dicoy.co < or, thee of 

tpevyeip in afoia qporov, to b I ofmurd 

580, — 06*. 1. Verbs of -">//«> 

ynilfcaut, duaxoDf inamaoficu, to 

to ' : . or to d ', to 

K7/. : . ad u* ri/.c.n.jiu otit'.i, to bla 

tftu, caioxpt^pi^ofii it. 

2. V. rl>> of this E 
y.aiii take. ti. N in the genitive, and the crime or pun 



254 ACCUSATIVE AND DATIVE. §152. 

ment in the accusative; as, aarrjyoQOvai gov GtctGiv, they charge 
sedition against you. Sometimes the crime or punishment is 
also in the genitive ; as, xarayivcoGxco gov ftavdxov or ftavdzov : 
but the punishment, seldom, except the word davdzov, and the 
crime, only after xarijyoQtco ; as, Tzaoavofioov avzov xazr^yooelv. 

582. — Obs. 3. Verbs of accusing sometimes govern the dative; 
as, iyxaXw aoi Tzooadooiav, I accuse thee of treason. 



583. — Rule XXVII. Verbs of hearing, enquir- 
ing, learning, &c. govern the genitive of the per- 
son with the accusative of the thing ; as, 

yxovGS rov dyytXov tcwta, he heard these things from the 

messenger, 
Tzvv&dvscxrat, ri nvog, to hear any thing from any one. 

The genitive here is probably governed by dnb or ex. 



§ 152. VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE AND 
DATIVE. 

584. — A transitive active verb governs the accusative and 
dative when, together with the immediate object of the action, it 
is followed by the person or thing in relation to which it was ex- 
erted. The more common constructions of this kind are com- 
prehended under the following rule ; viz., 

585. — Rule XXVIII. Verbs of comparing, 
giving, declaring, promising, and taking away, 
govern the accusative and dative ; as, 

vm<5yv(o\mi goi de'xa rdXavza, I promise you ten talents. 
Xoiybv dpvvcu rolg aXXoig, to avert the plague from others. 

586. — Obs. 1. After verbs of promising, declaring, and the 
like, the promise or declaration, forming part of a sentence, and 
sometimes a number of sentences, often stands as the accusative 
with the dative of the person ; as, 

J^Xttavdoog dniGteiXe roig EXXtjgi -ftebv avzov xprjCpiGccG- 

{rai, Alexander ordered the Greeks to vote him a god. 
elne poi ti avrcp XQi'iGn, tell me what you would do 

WITH HIM. 



§ l.V GOVERNING TWO ACCUSATIVE 

i of the 
tive \\ . ttbout it. 

I;i all i 

a!i.l < .!'•« k. the \ ei b, togei ber w ith I i. 

f m,iii. With i erb* 
cLiti adored bj 

< >n t hi- -.m1 thai 

1 as 

ili • < .1 .« k aii All this perpl< 

Looking the principle of the construction Wh I 

presses that i bom which s thing i 

with no Less elegance, on the genera] principle of tl 

the dative, that i«> which tin- act «'t" takiair awaj 

abo lion, the words / rip 

(lone l mihi) ro ; — 

ADOl , M T0 Tin: OLD MAN, I V, 

breath ; — to rai roone man, I would put out tie 
//KTTt dt/.To ()trza-, ro Tbeh btw, he took away th 

the cup was what lie did To 7'//' 01 

)n took <iii.ii the cup raou T%emi*ti*, [See Hunt & I. 

Chap I. /'/< -. JSnesa Antenoriqoe, etc.] 

589. — 06s. A. Verbs of giving n the genitive and da- 

tive when their direct object is in thegenith 

XV. ; as. luzudidcofii aoi ion' yn^uuTon-, / ihart the j 
with you. 



§153. VERBS GOVERNING TWO AOCUSATn 

». — Many verbs are followed by the « 
the immediate, but also of the n ject ; hei 

591. — Rule XXIX. Verbs oi ashing an 
///;/, clothing^ con ,\ depri or 

cfotn^ ;/v// or /// to, arid some oth< >vern I 

accusatives, the one of a person, the other of a 

thin. 

</'s yni ( H(CTa [ji^ui, >i the 

AfAaoxotNfi Tol\' mudag aojqno- i pro- 

UlllJ, biff/. 

ti BOUjOm arroi ; what xhall I do to hi 



256 VERBS GOVERNING TWO ACCUSATIVES. § 153. 

592. — Obs. 1. The immediate object of verbs which signify 
" to do" or " to speak" is the action done or the word spoken ; 
the remote object is the person or thing to which it is done or 
spoken ; thus, 

Tioiuv dya&d (scil. Eoya) riva, to do good to any one. 

Xt'yerv xaxd (sc. in)]) rwa, to speak evil of any one. 

593. — Instead of these adjectives with verbs of this significa- 
tion, the adverbs ev and xaxatg are frequently joined ; thus, xa- 
xoSg tioieZv nvd, to do a person evil ; ev liyEiv nvd, to speak well 
of a person. Sometimes these words are in composition with the 
verb; as, EvloyEtv, xaxoloyEiv, evzoyereiv, xaxovoyEiv — in which 
the accusative becomes the direct object, and is governed by the 
compound transitive verb ; as, xaxovQyEiv zivd, to maltreat a 
person. This corresponds to the English mode of expression, to 
maltreat a person, to eulogize a person. 

594. — On the same principle several verbs, such as XoiSoqe'o- 
{iai, Xvfiaivopcu, &c. which are usually followed by a dative, fre- 
quently take an accusative; as, ohp xryv ndliv Xvfuuvsa&cu, 
to abuse the whole city. 

595. — Obs. 2. When a verb admits of either of the words 
that follow it, as its immediate object, they are both put in the 
accusative ; thus, ivdvsiv tiva rbv yjzoova, to clothe a person with 
a tunic, and, to put a tunic on a person, convey the same idea. 

596. — Obs. 3. A transitive verb, besides the accusative of the 
immediate object, may be followed by the accusative of a noun 
,of similar signification with itself; as, ov Ztvg yilti navroinv 
qjiloinra, whom Jupiter loves with great affection ; Ivixijge zovg 
fiaofidoovg t^v ev Maqa&wvi fi&fflv, he conquered the barbarians 
in the battle of Marathon ; cooxnaav ndvzag zovg GZQazicozag 
zovg \iEyiGzovg OQxovg, they bound all the soldiers with the 
greatest oaths. 

597. — Obs. 4. When 7toieTg&(u, with a noun derived from a 
transitive verb, is used as a circumlocution for the verb itself, it 
will of course be followed by two accusatives ; thus, TzoitTa&cu 
%\v [xdfttjoiv for \iavftdvEiv ; vtio\ivyigiv noi&faftai for vno\ivav ; 
tzoieIg&cu z)\v donayrp for dqnd%EW : as, gxe vtj xcu dvdodnoda 
agnayrpf Tzou/Gd^Evog, plundering the furniture and slaves ; sc. 
making plunder of &c. 

598. — Obs. 5. Verbs which signify to call, or name, choose, 
reckon, make, constitute, and the like, besides the accusative of the 
object, take also the accusative of the name, office, clmracter, &c. 



§164 D with 

I 

.;.. In i traction I ntly 

interposed ; thus, 
. i, they call >! ■ philo$op} j<J. 

6. I be a ■■ u ative neat 

1 in this 

which govern the genitive or dative, when 
substantive could n.-t be at 

ToTto fU ffltH hi*. 

7i yr>o)inu avz<p ; what may I urn i 

GOO. — Obs. 7. [nstead of the second i 
under this rule frequently take the genitive of dati .on 

the other hand, some verbs which are usually folio* 
cusative with the genitive or dative, sometimes tab 

accusative ; thus, o\- 8q noM.u xdx iwDimxoini (for ar&Qe&iee 
icjyyti, who verily inflicted many evils ma, 

tu /ni^iuzu, and rcur •/ni l uu.zwr, to 

601. — Obs. 8. The Becond accusals 
by a preposition after such verbs as rrooxaJUco, 
yot'iofuu, and verbs which signify to divide, as, (V 
: us, BQOxaXeus&cu twa (eg) onorddg, to h 

a tnaty ; Kvoog to GTouTtvfia xarutiiit (ti\-) Sddexa // 
Cyrus divided the army into tioelvt 

602. — Note, With verbs of dividing, the whole whi 

sometimes put in tin- genitive, and the word plpo?, uot 
to the vorl) ; i i THoGVHf fvXeu forja 

. for, the i 
tribes ; poiooc A» tihv'ii wed Irrrriov ncu o.T/.<r*or, literally, A 

//*'' lMirtl '/ <f"</ infant, ■ 

and Into six parts. This construction is imitated in I. 

(1<- ( >rat. /' v ea 

genera quasi in quetdam msmbrc\ A 



§154. CONSTKrCTIONOF CASES WITH THE PASS 
603. — The passive voire i< usually followed by a genith 

the d< lied by the prepositioi ft and 

ruently, the government <>t' the case falls under th 
prepositions ; as, u[ to 7<:r xcu 

Sometimes, though dom, it follows tli, a the 

dative ; as, V7TO GCLTQUTTUt^ . 



258 CASES CONSTRUCTED WITH PASSIVE VOICE. § 154. 

But instead of this, and equivalent to it, the dative without a pre- 
position is common ; hence the two following rules ; viz., 



604. — Rule XXX. Passive verbs frequently 
govern the dative of the doer ; as, 

zttqcizxexo avxoig xa xljg no- the affairs of the city were con- 

Xtag, ducted by them, 

nmoinxai pot, it has been done by me. 

605. — Note. This construction most commonly takes place with the 
perfect passive, and the dative is equivalent to the genitive with vno, 
which is in common use; as also nooc;, and sometimes Tzaoci, ix or i$, 
and a7i6. On the same principle, the verbal adjectives in roq and tiog, 
having a passive signification, govern the dative of the doer, 528. 



606.— Rule XXXI. When a verb in the active 
voice governs two cases, in the passive it retains 
the latter case ; as, 

xarrfloosofica xlom/g, I am accused of theft 

idoftn [io( naoa Qovaia, all power is given to me. 

(jLOvar/Jjv [it'-v vno Au.\mqov being taught music by Lam- 

Tzaidevxret'g, 2 Drus - 

607. — Obs. 1. Any passive verb may be followed by an ac- 
cusative of similar signification with itself, on the principle laid 
down 596 ; as, xvnztxai nXrjyoLg no71dg, he is struck with many 
blows. 

608. — Obs. 2. When a verb in the active voice governs the 
accusative with the dative of a person, the passive frequently re- 
tains the former case, the latter being used as the subject of the 
verb. Thus, the same idea may be expressed in three different 
ways; viz., 

1st. With the active voice ; as, 6 dljuog iniaxevae Avxovoyco x)\v 
x7\g noXeaog impelaiar, the people committed the care of the 
city to Lycurgus. 
2d. By the passive voice with the latter case ; as, Avxovoycp 
ImGxev&n vno xov df^uov ij x7 t g nolzcog £ni[ie).tia, the man- 
agement of the city ivas entrusted to Lycurgus. 
3d. Bv the passive voice with the former case, according to the 
Obs. ; as, Avxovoyog xi t v x7jg nolaoug imptltiuv vno xov 
d/rfiov iniGxtv&tj, Lycurgus was entrusted with the manage- 
ment of the city by the people. 



§155. OONOTRUCTIOl* Of OIBOUMOTAKOBa 

The follow ing are example 
fitiot wtjp tpvXaxtp, those entrusted with tiu 
Xaxh imtiiQamo \ tm S in / 
for ! t y ix X&Q&i 

G0 ( .>. — EEence, also, such phrases a 
ftafdaltag irnufitroif the Ethiopian 
Xtlnu SAlOi 

bed with writing* ; because in to 
been ircuireif Al&umtai nagdaJJa^ 
tco. The accusative, in almost all such cases, may be explai 
by supplying v.ara. Tins construction is i 

\ in a few instances, which are manifest 
ecripti nomina regwm floret^ "flowers inscribed with the 
of kings." J. at. < «r. 525. 

010 — Note. Thi< construction, osed in Latin only at 
common in English with Buch \ 
pay, telly allow, deny, and the like; as, ll> al 
pasan ely, gn at liberty woe < 
bo, "They were offered (t<>) me,* or, "I a 

lytieal and Practical English Grammar, BIS oolo- 

gy, p. 27(). 

61 1. — Obs. 3. On the same principle the part or" 
is often put in the accusative after the passive 
of to ZQuvfid [wv imdefrcu, my wound I up, the B 

is changed into the nominative to the verb, and the nominal 
or part affected into the accusative; thus, (r/co) 1 ro 

TQUVflU, In, a hound up AS TO MY WOUND; JlnniaJ*. 
Qtio to i t nun, literally, Prometheus was ton 
liver ; Le. Am l\ 

61 - 2. — Obs. 4. When the passive is used in a middle - 
(195, Obs. 5), it becomes deponent, and may \<< 1 by an 

accusative in the same manner 88 the m 
aauerot uarxa iirlsor, having prm 
mn/rtai nootiur, they rtfused a ; 



§i: INSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMS 

613. — Words and phras< i n thrown in d the 

parts of a sentence in an adverbial manner, 

d with the idea of the sinii md 

which do not depend for their case on any word in the - 



260 REMOTE CAUSE OR ORIGIN. § 156. 

to which they belong, but on a preposition, or adverb, or other 
word understood ; as, 

i^eXavvei Gza&fiovg dvo elg 'Iaaovg, y.ai ivrav&a epeivsv y^s- 
oag roetg, he advanced two days' journey to Issus, and 
remained there three days. 

fieyaky GTZovdrj ndvza moarTETo, every thing was done with 

GREAT HASTE. 

Under the general name of circumstances may be included 
words which indicate, 1. The remote cause or origin, § 156 ; 2. 
A particular qualification or direction of a general expression, 
§ 157 ; 3. Cause, manner, or instrument, § 158 ; 4. Place, § 159 ; 
5. Time, § 160 ; 6. Measure, § 161 ; 7. Price, § 162 ; 8. Excla- 
mation, § 163. 



§156. I. THE REMOTE CAUSE OR ORIGIN. 

614. — Ktjle XXXII. The cause, source, or ori- 
gin, and the part affected, are put in the genitive ; 
as, 

paxdotog zfjg Tvyjjg, happy from his fortune. 

cpiXti avzov rijg doezyg, he loves him on account of his virtue. 

Xv'aov XQUTtlv Qjzcov, to take a wolf by the ears. 

615. — Obs. 1. Instead of the genitive, the accusative is often 
used, governed by xard, did, &c. understood. 

616. — Obs. 2. The circumstance of cause expressed by the 
genitive, differs from that expressed by the dative ; the genitive 
expresses the remote or moving cause — the dative, the immediate 
or effective cause. 

617. — Obs. 3. The material of which a thing is made is ex- 
pressed in the genitive ; as, ayedtcu dicp&eowv, rafts made of 
skins. See 456. 

618 — Note. The genitive of the material is considered by some 
grammarians as depending on ix or ano understood ; and an argument 
jn favour of this ellipsis is drawn from the circumstance of iy. or cctto 
being sometimes expressed. In all such passages, the preposition seems 
to contain a more direct reference to the material than could be done 
by the common construction, especially if a passive participle be like- 
wise used; as, tdya f| udd/tavroq TZtTtovyfiip*], a seat made of adamant. 
Sometimes the dative is used for the genitive, when the 'material of 



§ 157. 3 OF L1MITATI' 

whicb i\\\y thi bieh 

■ '. * (J (T i- Tl T T t,, 

made of w 



§157. II. CIRCUMSTAE P L1MH 

619. — A particular qualification of 
in English by the pi 
expressed by the genitive and d; 
lows : 

620. — Rule XXX I H. Respect wh 
pressed in the genitive, sometimes in the dati 

444. 

I. In the Genitive : 

vtcera ovrqi iifu ytt or him in respect of kin. 

Baavg iVuWor, thick with ft 

nkqaloi ('./././/.on', [in respect of) each oi 

621. — The genitive is used : 
1. After r/tt, in the sense of to he (>■ habere), with 
as a-, tag, on&g, ntog^ ovzoog, xu/.ok', dz 
tyi-i, he is 90 ; y.u/.ojg t/in . to be 

\ty drunk ; tpcoa is used in the Bame waj 
Blov ev i/A-.)v, Tt Hue ; 
•j. A:'-' r other \ riih 

to the battle. 

3. After adj &QtriDf ucu6m % >/ t( 'i ( i!css with 

4. With a<i\ 3, 7TQOOCO i 

■tnc. 

5. With substantive! vqg \ 

6. With entire pi 
naXcag n^aaa 

father^ in respect of his appbah 

put m I 
d by Kara understood ; viz., when the i 

jective is to be more aoourmtely d I by an 

additioi ned 



262 CIRCUMSTANCES OF LIMITATION. § 157. 

IN my finger; "/sotujr ov defiug, ovdl cpotrag, inferior nei- 
ther in body nor mind ; nodag (axvg JJyf/J.zvg, Achilles swift 

OF FOOT. 

623. — Note 1. This is the construction so often imitated by the Latin 
poets; thus, Qs humcrosque deo si mil is. Lat. Gr. 538. 

6"24. — Note "2. The accusative in this construction is in signification 
adverbial, and hence is frequently used as an adverb ; thus, ao/t';v y above 
all, originally; t«/(k, quickly ; ri/.oq, finally ; r//r tzqwttiy, at first, &C, 
Y.ard being understood. So also snch expressions as to evavriov, on the 
contrary ; to Xfyofttvov, according to the proverb, <fcc. 

II. In the Dative. 

625. — This case is used in a sense nearly similar, 
to express that with respect to which a tiling is 
affirmed to be or take place. This usage, in Greek, 
may be illustrated by the following examples : 

1. ahag r L v {rardiov rjj tzoXei, he ivas worthy of death, with 
respect to the state ; i. e. he was guilty of a capital crime 
against the state. 

2. -/.at dij fisduv yaXenoto %6loio T^e^d^cp, and vow they 
laid aside their grievous anger against (with respect to) Tele- 
machus ; so tycoye Xiaoofiai AyiWl\'i fit&efjiev %6lor, I will 
pray him to lay aside his anger against Achilles. 

3. to ntv tzcoxTev an to [i s vq> <tgo ( u« owe dyav \)tO[iov tj-v t the 
surface of the body was not very hot when one touched it 
(lit. with respect to one touching it). 

4. 'Em'daurog egti nohg Iv dtziiz ionXsovrt top 'loviov xoX- 
TtoVy Epviamnus is a, city on the right hand as you enter 
(with respect to one entering) the Ionian bay. 

5. dvcodt'/.dzf] dt oi ^cog y.eifis'pco, the twelfth day since he lay 
(to him lying). 

6. ^Hoav.Xu \i\v dtj ooa avro\ Alyvnzioi cprtai erica hea ig 
JJfAaan; the Egyptians themselves tell hovj many years passed 
from Hercules (or since the death of Hercules) to Amasis. 

7. xi\u\v aorviuroi Meveldco, looking for the advantage (or 
pleasure) of Menelaus. 

8. OQ'/rfidutvoi daoiGi, dancing in honour of the gods. 

626. — Rem. Respect wherein is also sometimes expressed in 
the dative governed by iv understood ; as, 

wool ra/yg, swift of foot. 



mi 

ill. TED 

XXXIV, j 

re put in the datn 

e considered a* iw- 

ng fritb- 
$ ; 

l 

in the accusative; aa, •» rn 

the body of 

1. — Obs. I kr is gown 

iL Hence, 

in 

£ , Ac lb f mmiiA oay 



264 CIRCUMSTANCES OF PLACE. § 159. 

632. — Obs. 5. The dative of the instrument or mean may be 
a person ; as. tpig naqovGiv iTei%i£ev, he built the wall by 

MEANS OF THOSE WHO WERE PRESENT. It is also pilt with Sub- 

stantives ; as, mv^aeig top (jojfiazi, motions made with the 

BODY. 

633. — Note. Hence the construction of y^aOav with the dative; 
that which we use being considered as an instrument. On the same 
principle, the dative is put after other verbs which imply the idea of 
using ; TtxjualotG&ai, rolq ttqog&iv w/uoloytj/ulvoiq, to infer from what was 
granted ; i. e. to use as proofs the things formerly granted. 

634. — Obs, 6. Instead of the dative, the prepositions iv, and, 
did, ovv, with their cases, are sometimes used. 



§ 159. IV. CIRCUMSTANCES OF PLACE. 

635. — The oircumstances of place respect motion to, or from, 
or through, a place, and motion or rest in a place ; in all of 
which the Greek writers generally use a proper name with a 
preposition ; thus, ii ^{rfjvcov^from Athens ; eig BoiTavviav, to 
Britain ; iv IIvlcp, in Pylos ; did rqg 7z6leoog, through the city. 
But, 

636.— Rule XXXV. The place wJiere, without 
a preposition, is expressed in the genitive or da- 
tive; as, 

Jloysog, at Argos; Maoad-eovi, at Marathon. 

637. — Obs. 1. Id this construction the genitive may be gov- 
erned by mi or 7i€Qi; and the dative by iv understood. The 
preposition is also often understood before common nouns de- 
noting place ; as, SQ^ead'ov yJjoiqv, they two come to the tent. 

638. — Obs. 2. The genitive after elg, to a place, or iv, in a 
place, is governed by a substantive understood ; as, sig adov (sc. 
do[A.ov), to Hades ; iv J/oyeog (sc. tioXsi), at Argos, 451. 

639. — Obs. 3. The terminations fti and ai, added to a noun, 
denote at a place; as, dyoo&i, in the country; 0///3?jo~f, at 
Thebes ; — 8s and as, to a place ; as, Jt{rf;vaode, to Athens ; xh- 
Ginvde, to the tent ; — &ev and &e, from a place ; as, xXiaiij&ev 
dveiXero iy%og, he took a spear from the text, 324. 



§160,161. ci <:es of measui: 265 

§160. V. CIRCUMSTANCES OF TIMK. 

640. — Rule XXXVI Tin put in the 

dative; time how in the accusative ; thus, 

AVI! 

now loi uJjvag ,t 

thii hs, 

G41. — Obs, 1. When the i 
a thing took place, tin- dative is used a- \i, 
idea of duration is i i n j >) i**« 1, it is put in tl: 
ijiuoag y.ui wag wvxtag, by day and by night ; 

itive : as, r/.uy.coob :lli t HQaxXqetq %6f nooxiqia* *r*W, IL r- 
cules distressed us infi nrs. 

642. — Obs. 2. Time how long y may respect th< 
whic ■>, or after vol 

first is put in the accusath >m- 

monly expressed in the genitive : as, noXXi 

y.u ynovov, I hare not seen than for \ U ; the tl 

rally in the dath <na- 

ny days after. But sometimes in the genitive, when p* 
and indefinite; as, r/.tloe ovx ucrr/.ithui trcor uvQimr, he 
comes not thither in ten thousand years. In this fa 
there is some variety. 



§161. VI. CIRCUMSTANCES OF MEASURE. 

The circumstances of m I magnii 

and the measure of excess, as follow- j 

643. — Rule XXXVII. The measure of 
tu<1r is put in the genitive ; a-, 

(hdoiu^ di'codt'/.ic .t // / mo ;• , i 



644.— Rule XXXVIII. The measure of 
tance \> put in the accusative, sometimes in the 

dative ; as, 

L2 



266 EXCLAMATION. § 162, 163. 

"Eyeaog ankyu tqlcov fyeocov bdov, or bdo), Ephesus is distant 

three days' 9 journey. 
Tzwrexaidexa Titling vxpoi&n rb vdcoo, the water rose fifteen 

CUBITS. 

645. — Obs. When measure of magnitude or distance is found 
in the nominative after a substantive verb, or in the accusative 
after an infinitive, the construction is according to 436. 



646. — Rule XXXIX. The measure of excess is 
put in the dative after the comparative degree ; 



as, 



ivnavtqp 7TQScj^vTEQog, older by a year. 



647. — Obs. Hence the expressions ttoV.o), oliyq), figcc/aT, &c. 
with the comparative. It is, however, sometimes put in the ac- 
cusative ; as, ttoXv [a,6%cqv, much greater ; tzo).Vov dfiEivav, much 
better. 



§162. VII. CIRCUMSTANCE OF PRICE. 

648. — Rule XL. The price of a thing is put in 
the genitive ; as, 

dbg tovto dQay^g, give this for a drachma. 

649. — Obs. The price is put sometimes in the dative, with the 
preposition im expressed or understood ; as, im [xia&cp ptydhp, 
for a great reward. Sometimes in the accusative ; as, m7TQaoy.u 
b 'Aay.bg Tidvra Trobg uoyvQiov, the wicked man sells every thing 
for silver. 



§ 163. VIII. EXCLAMATION. 

650. — Rule XLI. Exclamations of praise, in- 
dignation, compassion, &c, are put in the geni- 
tive, sometimes in the accusative ; as, 

rT;g avaidefag, the impudence ! 

q)tv zov clvdoog, Alas ! the man. 

co ifis detlcuov, wretched me ! 



§164,165. advi 267 

651. — 01$. Sometimes frith th«- genitive, tl 
of the nominative ; b xan&r 9 ah 

i\ oi y and &i the datu 

is ma. 



§164. CONSTRUCTION' OF ADVERBf 

2. — Adverbs are joined to adje< rbs, and other ad- 

verbs, to express Borne circumstance, quality, <>r manner, of t : 
signification. 

653. — Many adverbs in Greek have the i«>rce of pr- 
in Latin and English. These are often joined with Bubetanti 
as will appear in the following rules. They ai nietimes 

used as substantives <>r adjectives ; as, ano rote, from that time ; 
6 t$co arfrotonog, the outward man. 378— 2d. 

654 — Rule XLII. Derivative adverbs com- 
monly govern tlie case of their primitive- ; i 

ai((og tjiicor, in a manner worthy of us. 

pallor a tzujtcoi', most of all. 

Ofioioj^ rofV alXotg, in a manner .similar to the rest. 

TZUQtY. pija, without the shi]). 



§165. ADVERBS AS PREPOSITION-. 

655. — Adverbs having the force of prepositions govern the 
sanu' case with the prepositions which, in meaning, the] 
ble ; thus, o/cot>, «.f*u, together, having the forc< rern 

the dative ; trt'/.u, on account of resembling iW, the 

genitive. This general principle authorizes the two follow] 
rulee 

656. — Rule XLTII. Some adverbs of H 
place, and quantity, likewise of wwmbi r, ordi /\ and 

option, govern the genitive : as, 

o'v yijg tiui ; wh< 

(i/ni tJ^ <jtj[i€QW fjntQag, to this day. 

657. — Obs. 1. To these may be added adv< . com- 



268 ADVERBS AS PREPOSITIONS. § 165. 

parison, distinction, concealment, separation, or exclamation ; and 
also nouns used adverbially, as, ydoir, oYxz/r, ivtomov, &o. ; as, 
dr/.tyr TTOTuucbr, like rivers, 

658. — The adverbs which come under tin's rule are the follow- 
ing : avev, dreg, di'ya, yowij, without; drzr/.ov, anixovg, dnar- 
TrAov, against, opposite ; dyoi, ftryoi, to, even to ; zreza, trtY.tr, 
on account of; tyyvg, nXqaiov, dyyi, decor, near; tY.zog, t^co, 
ty.zooOtr, without ; irzog, taco, ti'oco, ti'zocj&tr, within ; 7ih]r, 
Tiaot'/.TO*:, except, but. ; psra£v, among ; ottioco, oxicjlrtr, be- 
hind ; TTQOG&er, before ; ntgar, ixtY.tiru, beyond, &c. 

659. — Exc. 1. dyyt and dhg sometimes govern the dative. 

660. — Exc. 2. 7rh]r, except, has sometimes the nominative 
after it; as, ttVjv oi zeor ncudap diddoY.a/.oi, except the 
teachers of the boys. 

661 — Note. Adverbs of the final cause are frequently omitted ; as, 
eygaxfa rordi-, I wrote for this reason, sup. eve /.a. 

662. — Obs. 2. Adverbs of time, place, etc. are frequently 
changed by the poets into adjectives; as, oidt Tiaprjfieotoi 
(AoXnrj {rtbv i/.doy.orzo, they propitiated the god with song the 

WHOLE DAY. 381. 

663. — Certain adverbs are joined sometimes with one case, 
and sometimes with another ; as follows ; 



1st. duurya, duuryd^r, tyyvg, fyYv&SP, naqeyyvg^ ovrtyyv, 
iq)E%7]g, oytdor, cytdotrtr, avzoaytdor, are put with tL 



the GEN- 



ITIVE Or DATIVE. 



2d. dyyi, dyyo&i, tY.Tiodcor, nhjciov, tTTtTTooo&tr, oftener with 

the GENITIVE. 

3d. drdnahr, tu^ahr, oftener with the dative. 

4th. tl'aco, {.lecjcftt, Ttd.otY. or xdotz, TTtoiz, with the genitive or 

ACCUSATIVE. 

5th. dei'QO, with the dative or accusative. 
6th. dyoi, dyoi*;, [it'ygi, [ityou, with the genitive, dative, or ac- 
cusative. 



664. — Eule XLIV. Adverbs of accompanying 
govern the dative ; as, 

cifxa rjj i;i(tQct, at day-break. 



§ 166. 269 

\Y. A«I\ 
the accusath i 

. 
joined with pcU\ and nj affirm 

tiw. 

!. A.dv< 

'ALU < 



■ ICC. NEGATIVES. 



-. — The Greet lang two sim] 

from which all the compound negative terras ai 
which, in their use and manner 01 i«»n, thej tilar. 

Betw< en these two negatives and their n 
is a total difference of use, the foundation of which '. 

.». — 1. Ov is the direct and independent n< rhich 

expresses a \ I without referen 

ovx ideloD, I will not , ct&6* tarty if 

du>- naQTjr, no out' uxi8 present. A dii don of this kind 

can never be expressed by ni] or its compoui 

G70. — 2. Mr/, on the other hand, is uniformly a d 
gative. It is therefore used in all propositions in which 
_ itive is represented, not as a fact, l» ; . lent 

on the conception, as a condition, supposition, 
it is used in the manner follow ii 
1st After the conditional conjunctions ti. i 
no*-, av, and those which intimate an < 
tut, (i)s', o&wg t 

tly ; am r. /.., he 

[Solon] "J thai h\ might 

2<L Without any Buch parti- always put with the im- 

perative mood in all the tenses; with the Bubjunctn 
aorbts used imperatively ; and with th< 
presses a wish ; as, /o u 
i(i t ; ti on 

3d. W ( titer relatives, and with i 

6K] iidition or SU] 



270 DOUBLE NEGATIVES. §167. 

it8QCp a [A,?/ avrbg s%si; who can give a thing to another, 
if he has it not himself? a ovx avrbg e%Ei would mean, 
that which he has not himself. So also, o [ajj moztvcor, if a 
person does not believe. But 6 ov mGiavcov> is, one who 
does not believe. 

4th. Mt) is used with infinitives whether they are dependent upon 
another verb, or used with the article as a verbal noun (7 14) ; 
as, dvdyxrj xovxo fii] noielv, it is necessary not to do this ; 
xo ft?/ noieLV, the not doing. 

5th. With verbs which signify to fear, to warn, and the like, \ir\ 
is used, like ne in Latin, where a positive expression is used 
in English ; as, dsdoixco [ii\ ri ysvqrcu, vereor ne quid acci- 
dat, / am afraid that something mag happen. Sometimes 
the preceding verb is understood ; as, fiy tovzo aXkcog fjrn 
(scil. dsdoMo), I fear lest this be otherwise. 

So also, after verbs which signify to forbid, deny, prevent, 
refrain, disbelieve, to be cautious, and the like, it is frequently 
put with the infinitive, where the negative is not used in 
English ; as, anavda xovzbv ft// naqiivai, I forbid this man 
to enter. 

6th. Ml] is sometimes merely an interrogative particle like num 
in Latin, giving, however, greater emphasis to the question ; 
as, ptj avekelv pe ov fttltig ; ivilt thou kill me ? 

671. — 3. A negative placed between the article and its noun, 
converts it into a sort of compound negative term ; as, i) ov dtd- 
Xvoig icqv yeopvoav, the not destroying of the bridges ; ?) py f/x- 
TitiQia, the inexperience. 

672. — Rem. In the same manner, it is used with certain verbs, 
not as a negative, but to reverse their meaning; thus, Cftj^il, I say, 
ov cpn[M, I deny, contradict ; idco, I allow, ova edw, I forbid ; 
vni($yyiiO\iai, I promise, oi)% vmopeofiou, 1 refuse ; thus, owe 
ecpaoav tovto ehou does not signify, they did not say that this 
was, but, they denied that this was, or, they said this was not. 



§ 167. DOUBLE NEGATIVES. 

673. — When to a proposition already negative, and also to 
verbs which signify to deny, to contradict, to hinder or oppose, 
and the like, other qualifications of a general nature are to be 
attached ; such as ever, any body, any where, &c. ; it is usual to 



§167. DOUBLE NEGATIVES. 271 

do this by compound <jw- 

ing rules : 

674. — Rule XLVL Two or mo 
joined to tin* sa/mt rerb, strengtheD the negation ; 

. 

ovx iaotqas tovto ovdapov ov8eig t when did 

5, — Obs. 1. To the the whole, is joi* 

same sentence, the d . as, oi I 

).tyui> ovzt 7roitty y Ik can neiik 

. Consequently, in og such pr< 

only ■•<]. 

676. — Rule XLVIL Two or more nc_ 
joined to different verbs, destroy the negation, 
and are equivalent to an affirmative ; as, 

ov dvvaue&a (ty hu.th', we cannot but s^ak. 
ovdu^ oong ov yu.aatzat, there is nobody who will l* 

ery body will laugh ;" tori being understood with oi 

677. — Obs. 2. Indeed, so common is the ellip- 
this expression, that it is lost sight of, and the a 
which should be its nominative, is often attracted into the i 
of the relative which follow- ; a-, ovd&n orffl < ■ 
is nobody whom it does not please, for oiSt)^ Ot(p t 
ornra ov xuTty./.uvaty, he caused every on* . for oidsig 

icriv ovTira, (fee. there is no one whom he did not cause to 
weep. 

678. — Obs. 3. It is also proper to observe the use of I 
tive iii Bucb - the following: y.iu ov tavxa \ua 

6 fptkurnog to%q If t(fyoi$ ov nom. Phi/ 

tilings and not perform them ; i.e. think n 

these things and does than ; where the 

not affect the verb yni'tqti, but the two It 

denies an assertion which might be thus expn 
ov TTottl 8a, he writes but 

fill' yt(O07t'xt0)l' toll 71 TTi-'ni^' Tt]Q 

Biov OVX tart, u 
bom* of the a, -fist, })>' 

kind, the ' 

are usually 



272 PBEPOSITIONS. § 168. 

680. — Obs. 4. In some phrases ov and fitj are united ; as, ov 
fifj and [iq ov. Ov \it\ is a stronger and more emphatic negation 
than ov, and is used in the same way, 669. Mi] ov, in general, 
is only a stronger expression of fif { , and is used in the same man- 
ner, subject, however, to the following modifications : 

1st. In dependent propositions, when the verb of the principal 
proposition is either accompanied by a negation, or contains 
a negative idea in itself, fzij ov destroy each other, and may 
generally be rendered "that;" as, ovx aovov\iai \jl)\ ov 
yeveo&ai, I do not deny that it has taken place ; nuxfo^iai 
yao ov zoaovTOv ovdh wore pi] ov xaXwg ifavur, for I am 
persuaded that there will nothing happen to me so bad but 
that / shall die nobly. 

2d. Mfj ov, after verbs signifying to fear, to warn, etc., as above, 
670-5th, render the sentence negative, which, with pi] alone, 
would be positive ; as, dtdotxa [iq ov rt yevrjrcu, I am afraid 
lest something may not happen ; cfofioi\uai //;/ ov xalbr i t , 
vereor ne non honestum sit, / fear that this mag not be 
proper. 

3d. In independent propositions with the subjunctive mood, pi] 
joined with ov makes the negative expression less positive ; 
as, alia [aij ovx ?/ didaxzbr ij aQerij, but virtue mag per- 
haps be a thing not to be taught. The sentence may be ex- 
plained by supplying an omitted verb, as ooa, or the like, 
and be rendered literally : but see whether virtue may not 
be, &c. 



§168. PREPOSITIONS. 

681. — Prepositions are used to express the relation in which 
one thing stands to another. For the primary and various de- 
rived meanings of prepositions in different constructions, see § 124. 
The influence they exert over the words with which they are 
joined, as far as it respects their case, is regulated by the follow- 
ing rules : 

682.— Rule XL VIII. *Avri, axo, ix or i£, and 
7iq6, govern the genitive only ; as, 

oqftalubj avzi 6(f&al[iov, an eye for an eye. 



§168. pbbpositions. 273 

3. — Rule XLIX. 7> and 6\ era the da- 

tive. 



684. — Rule L Big (prig) and uvu govern the 
accusative. 

Obs. 1. Ava, among the | 



685. — Rule LI. dice, Kara > fitrdyvneQy l:<>V'Th 
the genitive or accusative. 

>. — Obs. 2. Mezdj among the | -<> governs th< 

tivc of a plural ikjuh, or a noun of multitude : as, ueta tonaxoun 

CU'UGGW. 

687. — Rule LII. l^/r/7, n*Qi> fai y naQa> nq 

and uxo, govern the genitive, dative, or accusa- 
tive. 

— For the meaning of the preposition?, as modified by the ease 

with which they are joined, see £ 124. 

68S. — Obs. 3. Prepositions are often used as adverbs, their 

■ being understood. This is th specially with *Y in 

Ionic and ttoo^ in the Attic. Hence, in the Ionic writers, they 
are often put twice, once adverbially without a case, ;n 
with a ease or in composition with a verb : /.a) ti M 

qt, in Memphis also. 

689. — Obs. 4. Prepositions are sometimes Beparal 
their case : as, if yun al rj iv/.n xain\ aycuQopcu, In A 
this takes place, according to the rule, with the conjunct 
fitr, ot, yen, ovf ; as, tr utr yao EtQijVQ ; — tg fi*9 ovf 7 
vag\ and with nqog with the genitive when it - 

690. — Obs. 5. Preposition! ten put after their 

ticularly by the Ionic and Doric writers, and th< 
rtcor uno y.ut y.houaor. In the Attic prose writers, it tak< 3 ; 
only in ntni with the genitive. When so placed, 
always thrown back to the first syllable ; th 

691. — Obs. 6. When a preposition should stand t* 
two different nouns, it is often put only once by I 
that too with th .1 noun; as, fl aXi Bom. bp 

Sea or hind. 

692. — Obs. 7. A preposition is frequently understood. 



274 THE INDICATIVE MOOD. § 169, 170 



§169. PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 

693. — Rule LIII. A preposition in composition 
sometimes governs the same case as when it stands 
by itself ; as, 

iritis Tqg oixiag, he went out from the house. 

694. — Obs. 1. This is done when the preposition can be sepa- 
rated from the verb, and joined with the substantive, without 
altering the sense. 

695. — Obs 2. In Homer, Herodotus, and other old writers, 
the preposition is frequently found separated by one or more 
words from that with which it may be considered in composition ; 
as, r^ilv ano Xoiybv a\ivvai (II. 1. 67), for r^lv ana\ivvai loiyov ; 
ano \itv oecovzov coXtoag (Herod. 3. 36), for otcovihv [uv antoXe- 
6ag. Hence, when the verb is to be repeated several times, after 
the first time, the proposition only is often used ; as, cmo/.ti no- 
hv, dno de Ttart'oa. Grammarians, however, consider the prepo- 
sition in such cases as used adverbially, and not properly in com- 
position. Instances of the proper tmesis are very rare, especially 
in the Attic prose writers. 



SYNTAX OF THE YEEB. 



§170. THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 

696. — The indicative mood is used, in. Greek, when any thing 
is to be represented as actually existing or happening, and as a 
thing independent of the thought and ideas of the speaker. Hence 
it is often used where the subjunctive, and sometimes the accusa- 
tive with the infinitive, would be used in Latin ; as, 

1. It is used after negative propositions with the relative ; as, 
ovdeig iaxi ogtiq tovto Ttoiei, there is no one who does this. 
Lat. nemo est qui hoc faciat. Lat. Gr. 636. 

2. It is used in indirect interrogations, where the Latin re- 
quires the subjunctive ; as, oouza zi Ttoiovpev, you see what 
we are doing. Lat. vidcs quid faciamus. Lat. Gr. 627. 

3. It is used in quoting the language of another, stating what 
is actual and fact, after on, cog, <fcc., where the Latin uses the 



§ 170. K 1M)I MOOD. 

ith the infinitive, of (he subjun <d ; as, 

YjtXhv on oi nol >ere 

ing. Lat 

THE INDICATIVE IN CONDI . PBOPO 

697. — The indicative, in ( Litional propo- 

sitions in various ways, as follow 

1. When the thing supposed in the oonditi d as 

a fact, and neither contingent nor uncertain, the indi 
tense is used with ti in the condition, followed by tl 
or imperative, and sometimes by the subjunctive used imp 

tivelv (709), without av in the conclusion ; as, ti etc 

XCU fttoi, if there are altars, there are also gods ; ti i^Qorti 

hou 7 t aznaWtv, if it thundered (as it did), it also lightened; tl 

^QorTi\ati, xcu acTTQciipei, if it shall ihx 

This accords with the Latin construction. Lat. Gr. - 

2. When the thing supposed in the condition is not a fa 
when a denial of it is implied, the indicative in the | 

used with tl in the condition, and with av in the conclusion ; 
and here there are three cases ; viz., 

1st. When the reference is to present time, or to past and pi 
ent time, the imperfect tense is used in both pai 
tr/tv, ididov av, if he had any thing (now), he woul> 
Lat. si quid haberet, daret. 

2d. When the reference in both clauses is to past time, tl 
must be used instead of the imperfect in both, or, at 1 
in one of them ; as, tl ti ^'ayov, t'dcov a*, if 1 i 
thing, I would hare given it. Lat. 8% quid hab 
sem ; ovx av Trnot/.tytv, si /<;/ iniGitvatv ak , he 

would not have foretold it, unless he had believed he wuuld 
speak the truth. 

3d. When the condition refers to past time, and the c«>: 

to present, the indicative aorist with ti is used in the former, 
and the imperfect with av in the latter; as, tl ifUti 
yvGxjy.ov av, if 1 had learned (then), / should I 

698. — Obs. The indicative without 
in suppositions, where, in other Ian uld 

be put ; as, rt'V vi t v.a nj ffjj Ov-urn), .. 

that 1 had bia.s slain by thy dauyhUr, and that the had Mi 
an end of me. 



276 SUBJUNCTIVE AKD OPTATIVE MOODS. § 171, 172. 



§171. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

699. — The imperative in Greek is used as in other languages, 
in addresses, entreaties, commands, (fee. The pronouns (being 
the nominative) are omitted, except where emphasis or distinc- 
tion is required. In the use of this mood the following peculi- 
arities of construction may be observed ; viz., 

1. The second person sometimes stands for the third ; as, 

allot qvlazra nag Tig, but let each one watch, 
nt'lug rig i&c, let some neighbour go. 

2. As in English, the plural is sometimes used for the singu- 
lar ; as, 7iQ0G8X\}tT8, go nai TTcczQi, come, my child, to thy fa- 
ther. Also, sometimes the singular, when more than one } 

is mentioned ; as, sins' poi, co jLooxoazsg te xcu iTTTToxnursg. 

3. In prohibitions with fit'j, the present imperative is most 
commonly used. If the aorist is used, fii] must be put with the 
subjunctive. The few exceptions to this rule belong to Homeric 
usage. 

4. The imperative after olotf on, ohtf o, ohtf cog, seems to 
be used elliptically, and to have arisen from a transposition of 
the imperative ; as, ohtf cog tiou\gov ; knowest thou in what 
way thou must act ? (i. e. act, knowest thou in what way?) ohtf 
ovv o dgdoov ; knowest thou what to do ? (i. e. do, knowest thou 
what?) 

5. Sometimes the imperative is used for the future; as. r* 
ovv; X816&03 vofiog; what then? shall a law exist f i.e. What 
then? (do you say,) let a law exist? On the other hand, the 
future is still more frequently used for the imperative ; as, rrco- 
Cbui Jhotidrj J4yuuturora (for yrcofti), recollect Agatnen 
Atreus 1 son. Especially is this the ease with a negative inter- 
rogatively ; as, ovxow fi eccotig ; will you not leave me alone ? 
i. e. leave me alone. 



§172. SUBJUNCTIVE ASD OPTATIVE MOODS. 

700. — The subjunctive and optative moods represent an ac- 
tion, not as actually existing, but rather as dependent upon, and 
connected with, the ideas and feelings of the speaker. The sub- 
junctive represents this dependence as present ; the optative rep- 
resents it as past (197-2). Hence the following general rule : 



§172. BUBJUNOTl I OPTATIVE MOODS. L'77 

I. The Subjunctix 

7<>1. — Rule LIY. In dependent cL the 

subjunctive mood is used in connection with t: 
primary tenses ; the optative 4 , with the second- 
ary (199-3) ; 

TTiinttui wa idco, I a see. 

uaoip wa iooifu% I wa 

On this general principle the whole construction of I 
moods depends, as may be illustrated by the folio* 
tions : 

702. — Obs. 1. These mood 
use is to introduce a subordinate or dependent clause, in which 
actual existence is not definitely expressed : as, wa, 
do g ; thus, i&tXsig o<pQ avtog ?£tf£ y£Q&$» do you hat 

you yourself may have a .' ii/ t \i tytftut, cucor; 

xt tit} at, provoke me not, that you may return tin This 

sentence, which contains the dh •< 88 (orati< 

memnon to Chiysea, has the subjunctive after cog, u 
with the present int&i^e. When this is afterwards rela 
past event, in the style of the indirect address (oratio oblio 
subjunctive is changed into the optative; thus, ilmt'rai ey.t/.tvt 
xai p/j eoedutir, wa ocog oi'xade e).{roi, he commanded hi/, 
depart and not provoke him, that he might b 

703. — In like manner when a person, witho 
red language of another, relates what 

, actual and fact, but as a supposition or the opinion of that per- 
son, as the reference must be to what is past, tb 
used with on or coy prefixed ; as, *jEU|« am, < 
tig x),v nour, &c. ; he told me, that the road would i 'uto 

the city, &c. See also 696-3. 

When on has been already expressed, it is often omitted b 
succeeding clauses in the same construction. 

JYote. "On, tliat, is also used, in Greek, when t; 
are quoted without change in dir It is then equiva 

to quotation marks only, and is to be omitted in translation ; 
xo/raro, otV Baaihiav oh* uv dtzat 

lorn ; " ictaq uv itnou v, a r i • Jl 1 
una. perhaps (Jin/ (the laws) might * 
at the Mayings " (lit., things said). 

701. — Obs. 2. When event is related in the pr 

time (198, Obs. 1), the verb in the dependent clause may still be 



278 SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS. § 172. 

in the optative ; and in like manner, after the historical tenses, 
the subjunctive is used when the event, though past, yet continues 
in its effects and operation, to, and through, the present time. 
Thus, in the address of Minerva to Diomede, U I removed the 
mist from your eyes that you may distinguish (oyoa yuKoaxng) a 
deity from a man in the field of battle." Here, however, there 
may be a change of reference, i. e. the subjunctive yirc6<jx) u g may 
refer, not to the time of the removal, but to the time of the ad- 
dress, as if she had said, " I removed the mist from your eyes 
that you may from this time forward distinguish" <fcc. Such 
changes of reference are not uncommon in all languages. 

705. — Obs. 3. It was noticed, 197, Obs. 3, that the future in- 
dicative is used in a subjunctive sense. Accordingly it is often 
found in a dependent clause, especially after oncog, in the same 
construction as the subjunctive ; as, " Cyrus deliberates (oncog 
\i)]7i0TE hi sarat) how he may no longer be subject to his brother, 
but, if possible, ((taatXtvast) MAY reign in his stead." Zy.8nz80v 
— o7Tcog aocfa)Jazaza umafiev (subj.), xul orroog zee mmfi&a 
ZioftEV (fut.), We ought to consider how we may get away most 
safely, and obtain the necessary supplies. 

706. — Obs. 4. After adverbs of time, when the precise point 
of time is not determined but left indefinite, the subjunctive and 
optative are used. These are 8ni\v, in&8dp s ozar, Oftorav, refer- 
ring indefinitely to the present, and so followed by the subjunc- 
tive — 87i8t, 8778id;'j, oz8, 0710Z8, referring indefinitely to the past, and 
followed by the optative ; as, u Jfenelaus entertained him when 
("from time to time) he came from Crete," ottoze KQrfiff&ep 
Ixoizo. Here ottoze KofjinOEv ixezo would mean, when he actu- 
ally came from Crete. The primary part of the sentence, then, 
may be considered as understood, — when it happened, — that he 
came from Crete. 

707. — Obs. 5. When the relatives og, oazig, olog, ottov, &c. 
refer to definite persons or things, and to what actually took 
place, they are followed by the indicative mood. But if the per- 
son or thing to which they refer is indefinite, and the whole pro- 
position affirms of past time, then the verb is in the optative 
without av ; as, ovziva fisv jiaaiUja xijfe/i?, whatever monarch he 
found; navzag bzcp eviv/oiev — xz8ivov78g, slaying all whom* 
they might meet. On the other hand, if the proposition affirms 
something of present or future time, the verb is in the subjunctive 
with av ; as, iv // d' av tcjv cpvlcov tzXeigtoi coat, &c, in which- 
soever of the tribes there may be the greatest number, &c. ; 87T8G&S 



§ 172. SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS. 279 

oTioi av ri4 tjyTjTcu, follow where (it lb possible that) anyone i 
In such sentences the primary part may b 
a M if is possible that," " it happened that," *\ 

II. The Subjunctive and Optativt 

708. — Obs. 6. Both the subjunctive and i 
without being preceded by another verb, and so apparently in 

independent clauses. In all such instances, however, tie 

ellipsis of the verb on which they depend. 

709. — I. The subjunctive is thus u 
1st. To command in the first person ; as, tcouev, let us go, i 

it is necessary that we go ; and so of others. 
2d. In forbidding, with uij or its compounds in the aorist, not in 

the present ; as, uij ouoong, swear not. 
3d. In deliberating with one's self; as, not TQU7i(ouai. 

shall I turn ; tinwunv /} aiyojuer, shall we speak or be silent* 
710. — II. The optative is thus used, 
1st. To express a wish or prayer ; as, rovzo utj '/hoito, that 

this might not be. In this case ti'Oe, tt\ cog, tt£g av, are 

often used with the optative. 
Rem. A wish relating to what is past, or that cannot be realiz 
expressed by the indicative of the historical tenses, with **7>f, tt& d 
ydf), r> r )c, prefixed; as, tt&f dvvarov rjv, would that it were possible. — Or, 
by the 2 aorist indicative of 6q>*Ut>) (wftlov, -tq, -t f 200-8.) with 
infinitive ; as, jh/Jttot w./f/.or nouTv, would that I had never done it ! ti 
yaQ o')ifit/.t Oavtlv, O that he had died ! 

2d. In connection with civ, to express doubt, conjecture, bare pos- 
sibility ; as, ttvlg av tltr vofiug, they were perhaps («»r, it is 
probable that they were) shepherds ; and in volition* 
press, not a fixed resolution, but only an inclination to a 
thing ; as, tfiimg av O'eaaauajv, I would gladly 

3d. To express a definite assertion with politeness or m 
as, ovy ijxtt ovd' av //Sof tievQO, he has not Co 
will not come back ; i. e. I rather think it was his purpose 
that he would not come back. 

4th. Sometimes it is used for the imperative, to convey a com* 
raand or request in milder terms ; as, jfOQOtQ av tiGco, you 
may go in, i.e. go in. 

5th. It is sometimes used for the indicative. in- 

determinateness to the circumstances of an action whic 
determinate in itself; as. rcov vtcov ag '/.an. 
which they may (or might) have sunk ; i. e. which they J 
sunk. 



280 CONSTRUCTION OF THE INFINITIVE. § 172. 

6th. It is also used in a potential sense, to denote power or vo- 
lition ; as, ovx av $s fislvsiag avzov ; could you not with- 
stand him ? i&sX/jGSiev av ; would he be willing ? 

III. The Subjunctive and Optative in Conditional Propositions. 

711. — Obs. 7. The use of the indicative in conditional propo- 
sitions has been noticed, 697. The subjunctive and optative are 
also used in conditional propositions, as follows : 
1st. Uncertainty in the condition, with an actual result, is ex- 
pressed by sav with the subjunctive in the condition, and 
the indicative future or imperative in the conclusion ; as, 
lav 7i sycopev doocjofiev, if we have any thing we ivill give 
it ; lav n ey n g , dog, if you have any thing, give it. 
2d. A mere hypothetical supposition with a determinate result, 
puts the condition in the optative with si, and the result in 
the indicative ; as, ovg sdsi rtjg vvxibg naQayevt'oftcu nav- 
GTfjana, & it aoa p) n QoycoQOttj zolg EGtlt).v&6oi, who 
were to come in the night with the whole army, if success 
should not attend those who had entered. On the contra- 
ry, an actual case supposed in the condition with a hypo- 
thetical result, would require the first in the indicative with 
si, and the last in the optative ; as, si ydo (Mjds ravra olda, 
xou rodv avdQCModcov cpavXorsQog av si'nv , if I did not know 
these things, I should be more worthless than the slaves. 
3d. When the case is altogether hypothetical, the condition is 
expressed by the optative with si, and the result by the op- 
tative with av ; as, si rig ravia nodzToi, \ihya \i av 
(acpsXijGsiSy if any one should do this he would greatly 
assist me. 

Sometimes the subjunctive with lav or av, instead of the 

optative, is put in the condition. 

712. — Obs. 8. All conditional propositions in Greek may be 

turned into the infinitive or participle with av ; as, oiovzui dva- 

[xdysG\}ai av Gvpftdyovg TioogldpoiTsg, " they think they might 

retrieve their fortune in war if they should obtain allies." 



CONSTRUCTION OF THE INFINITIVE. 

713. — The infinitive mood expresses the meaning of the verb 
in a general -and unlimited manner, without the distinctions of 
number or person, 197-4. In construction it may be considered 



§173,174. IXFIXITIVK WITH 281 

under the four following dh i 
out a subject, as the subject of a 
adjective ; — with a subject : — al 



§173. I. THE IXFIXITIVK A- A VHERBAL NTOUN. 

714. — The infinitive, with the i 

is used as a verbal n<>im, in all th 
and, as such, is Bubject to the same rales of 001 
noun, beiuu* used in the nominative as the subj< 
governed, in the obliqi 

715. — Obs. 1. When the infinitive, with, or without, 
is used as the nominative to a verb, or the 
by it, it is frequently without the arti 

preposition; as, ndoir i t iuv xarfrarsfr ocftiltzui, dyi to 

all of us. 

716. — Obs. 2. Xot only the simple infinitive, hut the infini- 
tive with the whole clause to which it I 
garded as a substantive, and stand in al: 
construction in which a substantive can be placed; to 

tovg arfrodnovg auuoTurtiv ovdtv ftuvfiUGzov (icjzt), ti 
should err is nothing wonderful ; Gen. vnlo i 
xhi^y.tir, that no one might perish; Dat Ira uni 
TetifJUHS'&ou V7ih dutuorcor, that th 

been honoured by the gods ; Ace. exQ&a to ut t rriu.u Slforr, / 
determined not to eome ay 

717. — Obs. 3. With the article alone, the infinitive 
ally equivalent to the Latin gerund; as, trexa tov \ 
dicendi ; e* to) Xey&$ f l dicendo; nobg to leystr, ad d\ 

718. — Obs. 4. Without the article, it b 6 of 

the Latin supine ; as, tjX&t tyjrtjGcu, venii , :ov- 

tiv, Suave audita ; cuojustoq oqt&ijrcu, 



§174. n. THE IXFIXITIVK WITHODT A SUBJECT, 

719. — Rule LV. One verb, being the Bubj 
of another, is put in the infinitive ; 

qtiycii avtoig a nor ^jtu . 



282 INFINITIVE WITHOUT SUBJECT. § 174. 

720. — Rule LVI. One verb governs another 
as its object, in the infinitive ; as, 

tjg<zaTo leyEiv, he began to say. 
Rein. Both these rules apply to the infinitive with a subject, § 175. 

721. — Rule LVII. The infinitive mood is gov- 
erned by adjectives denoting fitness, ability, capa- 
city, and the contrary ; as, 

deivbg )Jyetv, powerful in speaking. 

a$iog ftavpaGcu, worthy to be admired. 

Note. It is also used after substantives ; as, l\ovaiav yivia&ai, 
power to become. 

722. — Obs. 1. The infinitive under these rules is in the same 
clause with, and expresses the cause, end, or object, of the action, 
state, or quality expressed by, the verb or adjective that governs 
it. The verbs that govern the infinitive directly in this way are 
such as denote desire, ability, intention, endeavour, and the like ; 
as, ideXsi yqacpEiv, he wishes to write ; dtofiai gov D.&eiv, I beg 
of you to come. 

723. — Obs. 2. The infinitive is sometimes placed after verbs, 
to express the design or consequence of that which they affirm. 
Thus used it is governed, not by the verb, but by some such word 
as mate understood ; as, Eycov ode navra 7iaQEG%Eiv, i. e. cogte 
navza 7iaQEG%eiv, I am here (so as) to furnish all things ; tjxopEv 
(cogze) [lavirdvEiv, we have come (in order) to learn. 

724. — Obs. 3. After a verb or adjective, a verb denoting an 
incidental object not directly in view, is put in the infinitive 
with cogte ; as, cpikoTijioTaTog i]v cogte Tiavxa vTTOfiEivat, he was 
very ambitious, so as to endure all things, &c. This construction 
takes place especially after such words as toGovzog, toiovzog, ov- 
rcog, and the like. 

725. — Obs. 4. The infinitive is sometimes put after verbs or 
adjectives which indicate some state or quality, in order to ex- 
press the respect in which that state or quality obtains, and would 
be expressed in Latin by the supine, or gerund in do, and in En- 
glish, by the substantive ; as, 

cog Id e iv icpaivETO, as it appeared to the sight. 

&eieiv dvEfjiOUJiv opoioij like the tabids in running. 
ovds TiQOvcpaivET? ide'Gxrai, nor did he appear to the sight. 



§175. INFINITIVE WITH SUBJECT. 283 

5. The infinil k in 

ii-.- of th 

Qoiia 7i oi uiy thin 



§175. III. THE INTIMTIVK WITH A 8UBJB 

727. — 1. A subordinate or depend* 
and its subject, is 1 with the l< 

two ways. First, by a conjunctive particle, 
the like ; as, h'yovai art 6 ercuooQ re&pipUf they pay thai 

pan'*", i is <h ml. Here the verb is finite, 9nd its subject in I 
inative. Second, without a conjunction ; at i tot troi 

raftiurai, they say that our eat is dead. In this 

verb is in the infinitive, and its Bubje< t, usually in tl. 

728. — 2. Sometimes both modes of expression 1 in 

the same sentenc 

t) l v Jlau t v ■ nXcoorra 8i utv it 1 1 u o r 2L z q v u <> i \ 
Sometimes a sentence begins with the one form and ends with 
the other ; as, TJyovGk 8 tj[idg s axipdvpop fiio* £a>p£r, " 
that we lice a life free from danger ; as if it bad been h 
to say, Ityovoi o quag ompSvpop (Mop X!fP\ ?35. 

The construction of the subordinate clans.- connected bj 
first method mentioned above, is subject to the rules Ss 138, 139; 
connected by the second, it comes under the rules that foil 



720. — Rule LVIII. The infinitive mood in a 
dependent clause, lias its subject in the accusal 
as, 

zo iv fteovg nuvTa tldtvui tXeyer, he said that the gods km 
tilings. 

730. — Exc. When the subject of the infinil 
is the same with the subject of the preceding verb, 

it is put by attraction in the same 

tCptj klVUl 0'TOlCTl i) 

731. — 3. In this construction, the buI 
generally omitted, except when emphac s *<pq 

avrbg thai atQOtiffbg 9 aim ixetpc is a gems - 



284 INFINITIVE WITH SUBJECT. §175. 

ral, that they were not generals. This construction has been 
frequently imitated in Latin ; thus, Sensit medios delapsus in 
hostes. Viro. Uxor invicti Jovis esse nescis. Hor. 

732. — Obs. 1. In a few instances, constructions vary both 
from the rule and the exception. Occasionally, the subject of 
the infinitive is in the nominative, when it signifies a different 
thing from the subject of the preceding verb, and in the accusa- 
tive, when it signifies the same. 

733. — Obs. 2. If the subject of the infinitive be the same with 
the object of the preceding verb, it may either be in the accusa- 
tive according to the rule, or stand before the infinitive, in the 
case governed by the preceding verb ; thus, 

xeltvco a oi tovto noielv, or ) T , . , ., . 

t , - ^ y 1 command you to do this. 

XtAtVOJ 68 10VT0 7101UV, ) a 

734. — In either case there is an ellipsis ; — in the first form, of 
68, the immediate subject of the infinitive ; and in the second, of 
6oi, the remote object of the preceding verb. Both these modes 
of construction are common, and sometimes they are intermixed 
in the same sentence ; thus, Lysias, dtofiai v\imv xa di'xcua \pn- 
q)i6a6ltai, ivxrvftovfis'vovg on, a.t.X., I beg of you to deter- 
mine, justly considering that, &c. Here v^icav stands before 
the infinitive governed in the genitive by titofiai, and yet (v&v- 
fjiovfxtvovg follows in the accusative, evidently agreeing with vfiag 
the subject of the infinitive understood. With equal propriety, it 
might have been put in the genitive. 

735 — Rem. Constructions of this kind, in which the end of a sen- 
tence does not grammatically correspond to the beginning, are called 
anacoiutha. For other examples of this, see 535 and 728. The most 
common form of anacoluthon appears to be, when the speaker commen- 
ces a period in the manner required by the preceding discourse, but 
afterwards, especially after a parenthetic clause, passes over into ano- 
ther construction. This method of construction, however, is never 
adopted by Greek writers unless something is thereby gained in con- 
ciseness, perspicuity, smoothness, or emphasis. 

736. — Obs. 3. When used in the passive voice, the subject of 
the infinitive is changed into the subject of the preceding verb, 
or it remains unchanged in the accusative, the passive verb being 
used impersonally ; as, 

Xtyeica Kvpog, ) , ~ ^ D , 

1 / , ~ s }- 7ST£6xTCU KaubV60V. 

Isj'ezcu Avqop, ) ' r r 

Cyrus is said to have been ) ., , „ , 

It is said that Cyrus was \ the son °f Cambynes. 



§ 17 iNiriVK ABS0L1 

737. — Obi, 4. The same i 
thus, I 

i HAT MA N 

with the 
gender \\ ith io npersonals ; thus, i 

*<7Z7, & that ly i 

far the infiniti 
(431 ), must be the same \\ ith tl 

i the Bame thii 
yog, he said that h 

xtri /. n i 1 <T '7 6 i • (.) ;• ehcu> having lear 

i io u ; Dat ^</ ' /, // fa WTI ro 8 n ikiv. ia I 

(UR8ELVE8 rO Bl . Ah-l ll, - 

whether the word before the infinite 
or (that being omitted, 731), the 
erb. 
73 ( J. — 06s. G. What 
by the preceding rules, it continues the same tli 
by co<; or cocrrt, or a preposition, the prep 

not the Bubject of the infinitive, but belongs to the infini;, 
self, or to the whole clause; thus, ovdeig ti) 
villi' cSoti tovg po/wvg naqa^ag ///, < N 
"ou, (Aaf, b 
; ijiauTiuor $ t a to u\ aoq J fl / ; m , (/ I BE- 

CAUSE THEY WEBB Not Wli 



§176. IV. THE IXFIMTlvi; ABSOLUTE. 

740. — Rule TJX. The infinitive is often put 
absolutely with the particles tie, &6t8> nqlv y tixQh 
ut/niy &c^ before it ; as, 

5 idefr Sr&Qomor, when t: 

rrnn aao&dpuv to natllio 

tog ur/.nn. i Eixdaat, to 

741.— Ok. l. 'i-V, with the infinil 
limit a proposition in th 



286 THE PARTICIPLE. §177. 

IA£[iv7jG&cUj as fa)- as 1 recollect distinctly ; oog ye poi doxeiv, as 
it seems to me. But cog is frequently omitted ; hence such ex- 
pressions as, ov Tzollop Xoyop eiTzelv, in few words ; [mxqov delv, 
little is wanting, almost ; nolXov dew, much is wanting. 

742. — Obs. 2. The infinitive is often used for the imperative 
mood, ooa, {filne, Gxonel, &c. being understood; as, ^aioeiv 
fieza %aiQOvzm>, xlaieiv fjiera xlaiovToov, rejoice with them 
that do rejoice, and weep with them that weep. Sometimes, also, 
for the optative, dog, &eloo, or ev K /o\iai, being understood ; as, 
ca Zev ixyeveaxrai fioi Jl&qvaiovQ Tiodo&ai, Jupiter, may 
it, be granted to me to punish the Athenians : — sometimes ex- 
pressed ; as, co Zev, dog [ie Ticacttai \ibqov nazobg. 

743. — Obs. 3. The infinitive eJvai is sometimes absolute and 
redundant, both with and without the article ; viz., 
1st. After adjectives, adverbs, and prepositions ; thus, exoov eh at 
for ixcov, willing ; as, ixoov av elvai tovzo TTou'joaifii, 1 
would willingly do this. So the phrases, to 6v\inav elvai, 
generally ; rye y elvai, with respect to you ; to per Ti'meoov 
thou, to-day at least ; xaza tovzo thai, with respect to this ; 
to vvv elvai, now ; to en txeivoig elvai, as far as depends 
on them. 
2d. After verbs of calling, choosing, making, &e. ; as, aoqiaztjv, 
dvopaLovGi ye tov Suvdqa elvai, they call the man a pshiloso- 
pher ; ol de ov(A[ia%6v \iiv eilovzo elvai, they chose him as 
an ally (598). 



§177. THE PARTICIPLE, 201. 

7 44.— Rule LX. Participles, like adjectives, 
agree with their substantives in gender, number, 
and case, 372. 

745. — Rule LXI. Participles govern the case 
of their own verbs ; as, 

ol TTole'fMOi to loyfov eldozeg, the enemies knowing the oracle. 
tovtoov 8(iov deofxe'vov, I being in want of these things. 

746. — The Greek language, having a participle in every tense 
of every voice, uses it much more extensively than the Latin. 



§177. IB lOlFUL 287 

The principal pui r which 

747.-1, A participle is joined with anott 
with its subject, for the followic 

1st Bimply to conned an accompanying with 

in the same Bubject Thus used, the participle and i 
are to be rendered as two verba with a conjunction ; as, 
naqtk&cw tig fa£ara>, l 

2d. To combine the accompanying with th< 

cat nplishing it : in which 

it is equivalent to the ablative gerund in in the 

following exam}' 

Cause; as, ti rtoitjaag y.urr/rcoO/j &ararop ; for ha vino 

done what (quid Judendo) teas 
Means ; as, e v e o ysj oo v avrovg ixzijadm r, J 

kindness (bene fact end o) ; Xni£o[l8rOl £dxw f thty 

plunder {populando). 
Manner; as, ytvycov txcftvyti, he escapes by flight ( 

do) ; rolfJiijGag eigJjX&e, he went in boldly 

This construction is found also in Latin writers; ti. 

faciens vivam melius, Hor. by doiny this I shall i 

ter ; as if, hoc facie ndo, &c. 

Note. The participle thus used agrees with the agent in any < 
e. g. in the dative ; as, a r o iq a v «*> QtanotQ td'otxav oi &tol u a&o t 
duxxyirtiv, which the god* hare put it in the power of 
study; the accusative; as, a t$toxt# aoi&pyoartaq 
GTt'/TavTctq tldi vai, which we may know by counting, /< t by 

I0< ighing. 

3d. It is used, to limit a general expression, by intimating the 
action in respect of which the assertion is made; as, idau 

TioXt'fiov UQiovrtg, ye do wn 

748. — Obs. 1. In this way, the participle is used with i 

that signify any emotion of the mind, to show the - 
emotion; as, ijdoficu (.it'v a 8 ig id oiv, I at. 
you; ovdt7T07t ooi fitzaaui t <7H 6V ftOltjGCtftl, you will never 
1 OF BAYING DONE A KINDS 

749. — II. The participle is used for the purpose of further 
scribing a person or thing mentioned in a Bentenoe, and may 

rendered by the relative and the verb ; or for (X>nn< h a 

• meat, some relation oi' tim i»ed in 

English by sueh words ; . while, after that ;— 

since, as; — if although, Are.; — the relation intei* of 



288 THE PARTICIPLE. §177. 

course the proper rendering of the participle, will generally have 
to be ascertained from the nature of the sentence itself, or from 
the connection in which it stands ; thus, zmiGxmTb\irp top irai- 
qov vogovvtcc, may signify, according to the context, I visited 
my comrade who was sick ; or when, or because, he was sick ; 
dzvdoa \izv i {ind tvra ra%twg cpveicu, trees, though lopped 

(WHICH HAVE BEEN LOPPED, AFTER THEY HAVE BEEN LOPPED, 

when lopped, as to their branches), quickly grow again. 

750. — Obs. 2. When the article precedes the participle refer- 
ring to a word already expressed or easy to be supplied, the two 
may be rendered by the relative and the indicative ; as, 6 £Q%6- 
jievog, he that cometh, 402-8. 

751. — Note. The participle, with the article before it, is frequently 
equivalent to a noun designating the doer of the action expressed by 
the verb; as, ol yQayaiatvov ^o)y.oarrjv, the accusers of Socrates. There 
is, however, this difference ; the participle expresses the doer in a state 
of action, the subslantive does not; thus, 6 dov/.oc; is a man in the con- 
dition of a slave ; 6 dov).evo)v is one f at the time referred to, performing 
the part of a slave. 

The Participle as the Infinitive. 

752. — III. The participle, in Greek, is often used as the in- 
finitive, and has for its subject, according to the sense, either the 
subject or the object of the preceding verb, with which it always 
agrees in gender, number, and case. 

753. — In the construction of the participle with its subject, 
there occur the following varieties; viz., 

1st. The participle takes as its subject, the subject of the pre- 
ceding verb, and agrees with it in the nominative or accusa- 
tive ; as, Nominative, ov navGOfiai yoaycov, I will not cease 
to write ; olda \tvnzbg cor, / know that I am a mortal. 
Accusative, as hjovGiv avibv jjz'fAvtjo&at ttoujg avra y they 
say that he remembers having done it, or, that lie did it. 

2d. The participle agrees with the immediate object of the pre- 
ceding verb as its subject, in the accusative ; as, Gaywg v.a- 
re'fia&ov cpaofiaxa avzbv vjuv ey^savra, I plainly perceived 
that he had infused poison for you. 

3d. The participle agrees with the remote object of the verb as 
its subject, in the genitive or dative. Genitive, as, >]g&6- 
fit]v career olofjiEVGw elvai Gocpcordrcov, I perceived that they 
fancied themselves to be very wise ; Dative, fiijds7TOTt //£?£- 
[as'Xtjgs poi Giyf/Gctvn, I never repented of having been silent, 
or, that I was silent. 



§ 177. Tin-: PABTIOIPLE. 289 

4th. When the rerb is followed bj i>ar- 

ticiple n her with the pronoun or th< 

: be wrb j OtdrOi n, 

In 

Xoyei Hi on, or, xaxi 

that he hints 

75 1. — Obs. 3. TI. thnfl 

used, are 1st Verl • of m 
noting any act or feeling of the mind ; .*(-, to h 
arn, consider, obst rik . 

nifying to overlook, to permit, to h<//j/< . en- 

dure, to be pleased or contented with, . and to cause to 

755. — It is used, also, with a<lj< i; as, 

d/J.Os tl ovy.ocftiiTOJi', it is clear that you are a syeoph 
times on with the indicative is used : as, erdqXov wf on rfinatjKOj 
bij its bein[/ manifest that he loved, 7 ;7. 

756. — Obs. 4. Instead of the participle with t 1 
tioned above, the infinitive is Bometin* but in t! 

the idea expressed is usually differ . 1. cuajrvroficu m 

Gag, I am ashamed to have done it ; uiayvrouui notfaaii J 
ashamed to do it, and therefore will not. 2. 6 /. aro 

yevofievog, the wi < come on, had actually comm< 

y^iiKor /'iQ'/tTO yi'yria&ai, the winU 

but had not yet arrived. 3. rpcovaa t ro, / 

heard Demosthenes speak; tjxovaa top dqpoc&ii r, / 

heard (i. e. I am told), that Demos 1/ 
y.ha'cor, he evidently wept ; iqtaivero x/.iuiu, 
5. With verbs to declare, to announce, the participl 
the thing announced as a fact, the infinitive, as mat! 
but not asserted as a fact With many verbs, i s in- 

different which construction is used : 

nQU'/Jrljjai, or Taunt zvucfonit ion nnaylh. >ate 

that these things were d 

757. — Obs. 5. After verbs of motion, the future partici] 
used to point out the design or f the motion 

the verb, and is rendered by the English phraa 

jiyt di8d£a>* conu/^tui, I ha 

TO TEACH Til' 

758. — In this construction Ag is often interposed I 
partici}'! -• noXffUjtHHTBQi ' 

to make tear. 

13 



290 THE PARTICIPLE. § 177. 

759. — Sometimes the present participle is used in this way ; 
as, 7i£\i7m fit opzqovza, he sent me to carry. The future partici- 
ple after tQ%oficu is only a circumlocution for the future tense ; 
as, eQXopcu cfodacov, for qodaco, I will speak ; sq^o/icu unod-a- 
voifievog, I shall die, or, / am about to die. 

760. — IV. Joined with lav&dvco, cp&dvco, Tvy%dro3, diare)Jco, 
&c, the participle is used to express the main action or state, and 
rendered in the indicative, while the verj) with which it is joined, 
expressing a subordinate circumstance, is often rendered as an 
adverb ; thus, eXaftev vTZsxqjvycov, he escaped unperceived ; xov 
cpovsa lav&dvei pooxcov, he unconsciously feeds his murderer ; 
ecp&nv dtyslav, I took it away just before ; ezv%ev dmx&v, he went 
away accidentally ; hv%ov naoovrtg, they ivere accidentally pres- 
ent ; diazeXei tzciqcov, he is continually present. 

76 1 — Note. The participle o)v is wanting with adjectives, and some- 
times without them ; as, rvy/dveo v.aXtj (sc. otVcc), she happens to be 
beautiful. With a negative, yOuro) may be rendered scarcely, no soon- 
er ; as, ova ecpfrqaav 7Zv&6juevoi,, they no sooner heard. Sometimes it is 
followed by the infinitive instead of the participle ; as, TzovriQo^ civ 
(pdaGtit Tt£iVT?jO~ai, nqiv, v.. t. A., a wretched man would sooner die than, 
<fec. 

762. — Obs. 6. In the same sense, these verbs stand sometimes 
in the participle with other finite verbs ; as, dnb rmyeog alio 
Xaxroor, he sprung unobserved from the wall ; rpneq ivy/drcov 
V7Z8(j%6{i}iv, which I happened to promise. 

763. — V. A participle with the verbs slfu, ynoitat, vxdo%oo, 
e%od, and tjxco, is often used as a circumlocution for the verb to 
which it belongs, and these verbs take the place of auxiliaries; 
thus, 7TQofiefi)y/.6zeg rfiav for TiQOtpe^iy/.eiaar, they had gone for- 
ward ; yfjpag 8%eig for tyijfiag, you have married ; {tavfidGag 
f/co for tEtravpaxa, 1 have admired, <fcc. 

764. — Obs. H i. Instead of a simple verb signifying "to go 
away," the verb or/o^iai. is frequently joined with a participle ; 
the former, to express the idea of departure ; the latter, to con- 
nect with it the idea of the manner, both of which may generally 
be rendered by a simple verb ; thus, or/ v 8z dnonz dialog, he de- 
parted flying, i. e. he flew away ; q>%ezo Cff.vj'CQr, he departed 
fleeing, he escaped ; cpyorzo dTzoxhorreg^ they ran away ; or/ezai 
xfarcov, he is dead. Homer uses ftaivco in the same manner. 

765. — VI. The participle, in definitions of time, is often joined 
with the adverbs avzixa, sv&vg, f.ieza$v, dace, the last, with the 
dative; as, atg avir/.a y£i'6[i£rog, as soon as he was born ; fitza$v 



§178. TBI ABSOLU 

, on 
the first com\ 

>. — VII The with 

other v< 

to denote a circu which, u 

pressed by an adverl 

My ; 7./ 

IQOtOfy 

rod the J 
flwxs, // —with \ 

qui . : with their 

cum, with* A participle joined to its own i 
ilar signification, app 

ggr For the dative of the participle with i noun 

after the verb iozi, 



§178. T SE ABSOLl] 

707. — Rule LXII. A Bubstantive with a par- 
ticiple \vh Is on no other word, 

put in the 

Qeov dtdovrog, • og f whkm ooi 

tiU nothii 

768 — R 

it ia oeith 
pr< Bsed or un I h which it 

might be I from it 

strict • ith- 

out government, or that tfa 

i has id any other 

Ki'toov ficunk 

ffwcfrcu <■ . Thtmgm the gods 

WILLING IT. 

•. — Obs. l. The participl 
others, arc frequently omitted 

/ / u. — \Ju8, 2. I h<* innnitive i n< >i »« l <>r j 
it were a noun, is i; lately with ti. 



202 CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. § 179. 

nreuf rovg ravQOvg, uvOoloyt^erzog, that bulls breathe fire, being 
circulated as a story. 

771, — Obs.S. The dative absolute is used to express the 
fixed time (see 041); as, xaoiiorn de rep Eviavzep, after the year 
had elapsed ; and also when the subject of the participle may be 
considered as that in reference to which the action of the verb 
takes place. 

772. — Obs. 4. The nominative and accusative are some- 
times used absolutely. These instances, however, probably arise 
from an omission of some words, which, being supplied, complete 
the construction ; as, dvoi^avTsg tov aojuazog Tzooovg, ndhv 
yirtzai ro TTiOy when they have opened the pores of the body, there 
■is again fire ; i. e. cog avofeavreg covi, etc. ; ravza ysvofieva, 
these things being done ; i. e. ^uza zavza, &c 

773. — Obs. 5. The participles of impersonal verbs, and other 
verbs used impersonally, are put absolutely in the nominative or 
accusative neuter ; as, fjo-r, it being permitted ; dtor, it being 
jiecessary ; dozovr, since it seems propter ; thus, dice ti utn-ig, 
i^br (Initial, why dost thou remain, it being in thy power to 
depart ? 

774. — Obs. 6. The construction with the participle is often 
preceded by the particles cog, cogzz, aze, oia, S/y, oior, when a 
reason of something done by another is expressed ; as, eoioj^u 
obg ndrzag tidoiag, or Ttdrzoir etdozcor, he held his peace be- 
cause ALL KNEW. 



§179. CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

775. — Conjunctions serve to connect words or sentences to- 
gether ; this connection is of two kinds : 

776. — I. Of the parts of a sentence which are complete of 
themselves and independent of each other. These are connected 
by conjunctions, simply connective or disjunctive, 332-1, 2 ; and 
the parts thus connected have a similar construction : hence, 

777. — Rule LXIII. Conjunctions couple the 
same moods and tenses of verbs, and cases of nouns 
and pronouns ; as, 

? t ).\}ov y.ui tldor, they came and saw. 

zijia zbv 7zaztQa xai ztjp u^ztoa, honour thy father and thy 
mother. 



79. 293 



< ntence are often 

| 

R LXIV. Codju 

u ith th 



I AW ( lonju which im] 

<loii! u h'k-h J. 

tliin_ -tihLf. a 

e strength 



294 ANALYSIS OF SENTENCES. §179. 



785.— ANALYSIS OF SENTENCES. 

A sentence is such an assemblage of words as makes complete sense ; 
as, 6 avQQwnoq iaxiv &vqr6q, man is mortal. 

All sentences are either simple or compound. 

A simple sentence contains only a single affirmation ; as, 6 pioq fori 
PQct/vc, life is short. 

A compound sentence consists of two or more simple sentences con- 
nected together ; as, &eoq iaxiv oq navra xvfizgva. 

786. — SIMPLE SENTENCES. 

A simple sentence or proposition consists of two parts — the subject 
and the predicate. 

The subject is that of which something is affirmed. 

The predicate is that which is affirmed of the subject. 

The subject is commonly a noun or pronoun, but may be any thing, 
however expressed, about which we can speak or think. 

The predicate properly consists of two parts — the attribute affirmed 
of the subject, and the copula, by which the affirmation is made ; thus, 
in the sentence, 6 Otoq igtuv ayadoq, the subject is Qt 6q ; the predi- 
cate is larlv ayadoq, of which aya&oq is the attribute, and earir the 
copula. In most cases, the attribute and copula are expressed by one 
word ; as, \nnoq ryiyti,, the horse runs. 357. 

The name of a person or thing addressed forms no part of a sen- 
tence. 

The predicate may be a noun, a pronoun, an adjective, a preposi- 
tion with its case, an adverb, a participle, an infinitive mood, or clause 
of a sentence, as an attribute, connected with, and affirmed of, the sub- 
ject by a copulative verb (437) ; or, it may be a verb which ineludes in 
itself both attribute and copula, and is therefore called an attributive 
verb. 

787. — THE SUBJECT. 

The subject of a proposition is either grammatical or logical. 

I. The grammatical subject is the person or thing spoken oi, unlim- 
ited by other words. 

The logical subject is the person or thing spoken of, together with 
all the words or phrases by which it is limited or defined ; thus, in the 
sentence, 6 fielaq olvoq laxv &Qe7TTi,y.o)TaToq, the grammatical subject is 
olvoq ; the logical, 6 fieXaq olvoq. Again : 

II. The subject of a proposition may be either simple or compound. 

A simple subject consists of one subject of thought, either unlimited, 
as the grammatical, or limited, as the logical subject. 

A compound subject consists of two or more simple subjects, to 
which belongs but one predicate ; as, J^W.^ar^g xal 2q)mv aoyol ?;o~av. 



§179. roia 295 

788. — MODIFICATIONS OF Til! 

A gr 
rioi; 

itive. 3. 
i. By an adject i\ e n ord, i. 
or participle 6. I v e and it - 

Each grammatical oi ; and if 

ammatica] 

789. — mod] 

r limiting words, may th 

1. A noun modifying another ma; modified in all the ways 
in which a noon, aj a grammatii 

2. \n adjectiye qualifying a oonn ma] modified — 1. I 
adjunct 2. By a oonn. 8. By an infinitiye mi 

entence, \. By an adverb. 

3. An adverb may be modified — 1. By another ad By a 

substantive in an oblique ci 

790. — THE PREDICATE. 

L The predicate, like the subject, is either grammatical or log; 
The grammatical predicate consists of the attribute and copula, not 

modified by other words. 

The logical predicate is the grammatical, with all the words or 
phrases that modify it; thus, q ntffr iny.ua naria t(TTtv: the _ 
tieal predicate is porta iariv ; the Logical, fuxqa naria ut- 

When the grammatical predicate has no modi!' logi- 

cal and grammatical are the same. 

II. The predicate, like the subject, is either sit: 
A n dicate affirms but one th 

fioctyi^ tariv \ tTzinviov ui ai\\uoi. 

,,d predi< of two or more simple | 

affirmed of one subject ; as, 1 brixTOfl r< 

qi roiq odovTcc^ avrov, 

791. — MODIFICATIONS OF THE PREDICA I 

The grammatical predicate may be modified or limited u 
ways. 

I. When the attribute in the predicate is a noun, it : — 1. 
a noun or pronoun limiting or deecrib 

a < 1 ; • participle Limiting the attribul 

II. When the grammatical predicate is an al 

I — l. By a noun or pronoun 
By an adjunct 4. By an infinitive, S. i ; »••» 



296 EXAMPLES OF ANALYSIS. § 179. 

792. — Nouns, pronouns, adjectives, and other words modifying the 
predicate, may themselves be modified, as similar words are when 
modifying the subject. 

Infinitives and participles modifying the predicate, may themselves 
be modified in all respects, as the attributive verb is modified. 

COMPOUND SENTENCES. 

793. — A compound sentence consists of two or more simple senten- 
ces or propositions connected together. The propositions which make 
up a compound sentence, are called members, or clauses. 

794 — The propositions or clauses of a compound sentence, are ei- 
ther independent or dependent ; in other words, coordinate, or subor- 
dinate. 

An independent clause is one that makes complete sense by itself. 

A dependent clause is one that makes complete sense only in con- 
nection with another clause. 

The clause on which another depends, is called the leading clause ; 
its subject is the leading subject; and its predicate, the leading predi- 
cate. 

795. — Clauses of the same kind, whether independent or dependent, 
are connected by such conjunctions as xai, rt, ?j, rjroo, &c. 

796 — Dependent clauses having finite verbs, are connected with 
their leading clauses in three different ways ; as, 1. By a relative. 2. 
By a conjunction. 3. By an adverb. 

797. — A subordinate clause, consisting of an infinitive with its sub- 
ject, is joined to a leading clause without a connecting word. 

ABRIDGED PROPOSITIONS. 

798. — A compound sentence is sometimes converted into a simple 
one, by rejecting the connective, and changing the verb of the depend- 
ent clause into a participle. A simple sentence thus formed is called 
an abridged proposition ; as, Sh).&6)v dk QQa/.tjv, ?j/.ev tlq 0///?ccc, hav- 
ing gone through Thrace, he came to T7iebes = inadav de tiiiji&e Gqu/.^v, 
r\y.hv ttq Orjfiaq. 



799.— EXAMPLES OF ANALYSIS. 

1. — c O yofiog rov Kvqiov eot\v ao^ 7 >/£ aocpiag, the fear of the 
Lord is the beginning of luisdom. 

This is a simple sentence, of which — 

The logical subject is 6 yopoq rov Kvqiov. 

The logical predicate is iarlv aoytj rTjq aocplaq. 

The grammatical subject is go/?oc, shown to be definite by the article 

6, and restricted by rov Kvqwv. 
The grammatical predicate is iarlv aqyrj, of which iarlv is the copula 

and cLQ/tj the attribute, restricted by rtjq aoyiaq. 



/// real » hin 

The Leading c 

simple sentence, of \\ 1 1 i * - 1 1 — 
The logical sub 
r J be logical predical 
The grammatical subje 

cle 6, and rendered emphal Lc \>\ the 
The grammatical pi 

and by the adjun 
The dependent clam which — 

The Logical buI 

The grammatical subject is the same as the l<>L r i 
The grammatical predicate is 'iTnnr, modified i 

instead of oi)j«/.or, and, being a relative, it i 

verb, and al-o connects its clause with the leading clause. 



800.— SYNTACTICAL PAB 

These two sentences, thus analyzed, may i .!ly in 

the following manner: 

First Example. — O tpopog tov Kvqiov turn &Qj)i rijg o*o- 
qtiag. 

r (J, the, the definite article, in the nomi 

ing with tpopos, and Bhowing it finite. B 

art lined thus, o, > , ro, 

go ( -;< ; a noun, n asculine, second decleo 

found in the nominative singular, the 

Bubject ofs finite verb is put in the oominath 
Tov,oftlt'\ the definite article, genitive singul 

with Kwiou, and Bhowing it to 

400. 
Kvoiov, Lord, is a noun, masculi] 

It i 

limits Rule \ . ( I 
Igti . \ erb intransitive i: 

found in the prea 

Rule i 

oqxv> M'' ;l noun, feminine, fin 

It lb found in the nominative singular, the ; 
ion md is th< 

Rule VI 

IS* 



298 SYNTACTICAL PAUSING. § 179. 

riyc; (not translated), the definite article, in the genitive singular, femi- 
nine, agreeing with jo^tac, an abstract noun, 403-3. Rule, 
"The article agrees," tfec. 400. 

aoqlaq, of wisdom, a noun feminine, first declension, aoqta, -aq. It is 
found in the genitive singular, governed by ao///, which it 
limits. Rule V. (449), " One substantive governs another," <fcc. 

Second Example. — *0 'HQuyJJ/g rb qonakov, o iqoQei, avzbg 
htpiev ix A r t[xeag, — ccmstrued thus : 'HqayXiiQ avrbg 
htiitv ix Nepeag to qoticlXov o iq)OQ£i. 

c O (not translated), the definite article, in the nominative singular, mas- 
culine, agreeing with 'HQaxAtjq, definite, 403-1. Rule, "The 
article," <fcc. (400), declined 6, ay, to, <fce. 139. 

'HoaxXrjc;, Hercules, contracted for 'HguxXtrfi (133), a proper noun, mas- 
culine, third declension, 'HqanXtjt;, -zoq, contr. -oik;. It is found 
in the nominative singular, the subject of Mti/hv. "The sub- 
ject of a finite verb is put in the nominative," 421. 

avroq, himself, a definite adjective pronoun, avroq, -tj, -6, 182. It is 
found in the nominative singular, masculine, and agrees with 
'HoaxXTjq, rendering it emphatic. Rule II., "An adjective 
agrees," <fce. 371 and 394. 

%ttfitv, cut, is a verb transitive, first conjugation, liquid, te/uvw, to cut, 
1 Root Thfji, 2 rafji, 3 toju. It is found in the 2 aorist indicative 
active, third person singular, and agrees with 'HoaxXijq. Rule 
IV., "A verb agrees," &c. An irregular form for tra/it. See 
the word, § 117. Give the tenses from the first root — from the 
second — from the third. 

ex, from, is a preposition atonic (e| before a vowel), of, out of , from, and 
governs JVtpiaq, 

Nifiiaq, the forest of Nemea (without the article, being the first mention- 
ed), a proper noun, feminine, first declension, Ntuia, -ox;. It is 
found in the genitive singular, governed by ex. Rule XLVIII. 
t(i yivrl, duo, ex or it," &c. (652). 

ro, the, the definite article, 6, //, to. It is found in the accusative sin- 
gular, neuter, agrees with ^onaXov, and shows it to be definite. 
Rule, "The article agrees," <fcc. (400). 

§6naXov, club, is a noun, neuter, third declension, qotiolXov, {yondXov. It 
is found in the accusative singular, the object of, and governed 
by, vtsfitv. Rule XXV., "A transitive verb," <fcc. (564). It is 
limited by the relative clause following it. 

o, which, the relative pronoun, oq, tj, o. It is found in the accusative 
singular, neuter, agreeing with its antecedent ^onaXov. Rule 
III., "The relative agrees," <fcc. 404. It is governed in the ac- 
cusative by iqootv. Rule XXV., "A transitive verb," <tc. 564; 
it connects its clause with yoTzaXov, and limits it. 

iyoQfbp was accustomed to carry (198, Obs. 2), is a verb, transitive, first 
conjugation, pure, qoyeo), to carry, kindred to q,{()o), to bear. 
Root qpo^f (216). It is found in the imperfect indicative active, 
third person singular, contracted for iq>6(Jit, and agrees with 
its nominative auroc,* understood, referring to 'HQaxXtjq. Rule 
IV., "A verb agrees," &c. (420). 



§ 180, X8L i'kosody. 299 



PA i:t iv. 



PROSODY. 

801. — Prosody, in its common 
quantity of syllables and the construction 
wunl-, of Quantity and Metre* In I mariana, 

nQOGtpdia applies to accents. 



§180. QUANTITY. 

802. — Quantity means the relative length of tin] up in 

pronouncing a syllable, 

1. In respect of quantity, every syllable is either 

When a syllable is sometimes long, and sometimes short, b 

said to be common, or doubt nil. 

2. The quantity of syllables is determined by certain estab- 
lished rules; or, when no rule applies, by the authority oi' the 
poets. 

3. In Greek, the quantity of certain v< • 
follows : 

1. The vowels g, o, are naturally sh 

2. " t] 3 co, are naturally 1 

3. " u, i, v y are doubtral ; -co. 

4. Diphthongs and contracted syllabi . a-, Um$ 
6yleg y contracted Wflg* 



§181. 1. POSITION. 

SPECIAL BUL] 

803. — Rule I. A short or doubtful toi ^nso- 

nantS or a double letter, is almost alwa\ as, 

nokXag % — n{ 

* In the Prosody the 
with the mark for the quantity. 



300 prosody. ^ § 182. 

This rule holds good in Epic poetry, except in proper names, and in 
words which could not be used in any other situation in the verse. In 
dramatic writers, observe the following exceptions : 

Exc. A short or doubtful vowel before a inute and a liquid, 
is common ; as, Uajobxlog, or IldTQdxXog. 

Obs. 1. A short vowel before a mute and a liquid is generally short. 
But before a middle mute (/£, y, 6), followed by q in tragedy, it is mostly 
long ; and followed by I, /u, v, almost always long, both in tragedy and 
corned}?". 

Obs. 2. A short vowel before two liquids is always long, and some- 
times before a single liquid, which in this case should be pronounced as 
if double ; thus, HXafte, pronounced elXaflf. 

Note 1. A short vowel in the end of a word, before q in the begin- 
ning of the word following, is long in the dramatic poets; as, i/ne ^nov. 

Note. 2. We sometimes find a short syllable before two consonants 
(both mutes), but this is rare and should not be imitated. 



§182. II. ONE VOWEL BEFORE ANOTHER. 

804. — Rule II. A vowel before another vowel is short, unless 
lengthened by poetic license ; as, noXvafkog. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

1. a is long in the penult of nouns in tiow, aovoq; as, Ma/cton; Ma/ao- 

voq. And sometimes when the genitive ends in wroq; as, 
IJoGeidaow, IJoGsirdaowoq. 
in feminine proper names in otic; thus, Oti'iq. 

2. i is long in the penult of nouns in m»v, vovoq, and sometimes uoroq; 

as, SIquov, JlQiovoq or Jlouoroq; except /iov. 

in the penult of verbs in uo ; as, rlo) : but the Attic 

tragic writers have -ceo. 

3. i is common in the penult of nouns in va and «; ; as, y.a/Ja and y.alta. 

4. v is common in the penult of verbs in \m ; as, ia/vo) or nr/im. 

805. — Rule III. Long vowels and diphthongs are mostly 
short at the end of words, when the next word begins with a* 
vowel ; as, 

J^;d5 8 \Xmv 6 6V J ks$> :<t/ v d\l6Joeral | or xtv r/JapaL 

Obs. 1. A vowel in the end of a word, before a word beginning with 
a vowel, does not suffer elision, as in Latin, unless an apostrophe is 
substituted (85). 

Obs. 2. Two vowels, forming two syllables, frequently iu poetry 
coalesce into one; as, /dug aw, II. d. 15, where ho form a short syllable. 
This frequently takes place though the vowels be in different 'words; 
as, jyoux titiq, II e. 349. 828-2. 



§183,184. PR 

§183. III. THE D0UBTF1 L VOU BL8 IX FTBST AM) 
MIDDLE 81 LLAB] 
I \'. A d iibtf il i 

1. a i> I 

in numerals in <>u 

in dci-i 

y.f< r 

from 

k J. l \< Long in tin- p. mh: 

in the penult of verl 

3. t> is long in verbals in iy<«, r#/o,-, « r; ; 

in j. 

in the penult of verba in t \ 

in adverbs in wto* ; 



§184. IV. THE DOUBTFUL VOWELS IX FINAL 8YL- 

LABL1 
807. — Rule V. a, /, v, in th< 

[lovou, uui, yhncv. 

1. yi in the end of a 

— In nouns in fr<, »Vc, On ; 

— In the dual ip: 

— In polysyllables in 
in 4 

Bcur*Xnd 

nas the final 

— In i . 

()l<C 

— In t i 

— In feminines from adj 

— In nouns in pa 

— In pa 



302 prosody. § 184. 

2. v final is long in the names of letters ; as, nl. 

3. v final is long in the names of letters ; as, /li v, vv. 

■ in verbs in Vfn ; as iyv. 

-in fttTaZu and yQv. 

808. — Rule VI. A doubtful vowel in the final syllable, fol- 
lowed by a simple consonant, is short ; as, iiekdv, XapTitig. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

1. av is long in masculines ; as, Tixdv ; and Jidv, when not in com- 
position. 

in accusatives when their nominatives are long; as, 

jLlvudv from Alvtidq. 

in adverbs ; as, aydv. 



2. ag in xao and ipao is long ; in yao it is either long or short. 

3. aq is long in nouns of the first declension ; as, Alvnuq, /tiovadq. 
: — in words having avroq in the genitive ; as, tvydq, 

ivxpavroq. 
also in r^idq y vjudq, yQdq. 



4. w is long in nouns in w which have ivoq in the genitive ; as, 
qtjy/ulv, oqy/iwoq. 

■ in nouns which have two terminations in the nomina- 



tive ; as, a/.rZv, or axtiq. 
also in tjuiv, vfilv. 



5. vq is long in monosyllables ; as, llq ; but the indefinite rvq is 

common. 

in nouns which have two terminations in the nomina- 
tive ; as, axrlq, cc/.tiv. 

in feminine dissyllables in vq, tfioq, or v&oq; as, y.rtjtrfq, 

xvf]jni(hq; oyviq, ogw&oq; except aanlq, igiq, /agiq, and a 
few others. 

in polysyllables preceded by two short syllables ; as, 

tt X6y.au tq. 

6. vv is long in nouns which have vroq in the genitive; as, jnoaavv, 

flOGGVVOq. 

in nouns which have two terminations in the nomina- 
tive ; as, (poQy.vq, or tpoquivv. 

■ in accusatives from vq in the nominative ; as, byqvv 



from 6q>Qiq. 

in the ultimate of verbs in v/nv\ as, iyvv from (pvj.ii. 

vvr, now ; but in vvv, enclitic, it is short. 



7. vq in the end of a word is always long ; as, /tiagrvg 

8. vq is long in monosyllables; as, nTq. 

in nouns which have two terminations in the nomina- 
tive ; as, (pOQxvq, qogxrv. 

■ in nominatives which have vvroq or o? pure in the gen- 



itive; as, divy.vvq, dzvyvvvTOQ', bqgvq, oqgvoq. 

in xo)/<Fc, y.(i)f<vOoq; and 

in the last syllable of verbs in i\uv; as, iyvq. 



§ 185, 186. osody. 303 



g L86. \. DOUBT! UL V( >WELS IN' I UK lis 
01 

VII. Tli 
the oblique cases ; thus, Titos . 

1. in in tin' nominal 

2. A von < I, long by position, in 

men! in the obliqu 

a \ o\\ el lias e t b 

Likewise 
p**o£, with many words in <t, inn-, and < . 



3. oc pure in the Lrmitiv.-, from a 1< »iilt syllable in 1 
varies tin- cremenl ; as, &qv$ s tyuoft or dip! - 

4. The dative plural, after a bj nult short; aa, 



§186. VI. DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN THE INFLECTION 
OF VERBS. 

The doubtful vowels, a, i, i , 
wise specified in the Rales. 

810. — Rule VIU. a and v before c>u in y 
ways before o - / in w 
gpdci, fcfxnkn (S U, 18). 

811. — Rule IX. The future in oo 
a vowel, or from potto, u», ifto, grfitai tin* penult ; as, 

taoj, twaco ; d(>ub) y Snaou ; pQt&a*, jfyiom . 

But the future in aaco, taco, wxa>, from r_ 
the penult ; i 

an.Tu'Cco, annua o) : n.7/./V< 

812. — Rl LI X. Liquids nult in t: 

as, xqTvg), y.niico. 

813.— Ri lb XI. Ti I future, in I 

shortens the rootnay liable ; as, % ep 



304 prosody. § 187. 

THE OTHER TENSES. 

814. — Rule XII. The doubtful vowels have the same quan- 
tity in the tenses as in their roots ; thus, 

1 Root. xqZv, — y.qivo), ixyivov, y^lvofiao, l/.^ivo^rjv. 

2 Root. k(jiv, — y.t/.or/.a, ixtAQL/.tiv, xQiQ-rjGopai,, i/^i&tjv, xqiv/jGO/icu, 

EY.Qivtjv, KiKQifiav, iiu*Q.i/iijv. 

2 Root. rv7Z, — irvnov, irvno/n^v, TV7itj<T0jLiat,, etv7T7jv. 

3 Root. TV7tj — Tttvna, ixhTvn'civ. 

Exc. 1. Liquid verbs in the future active and middle, as in Rule X. 

Exc. 2. The initial u and v } in the augmented ten3es and moods, are 
long ; as, 'wo/uou, ly.6jt(tjv. 

The quantity of a doubtful vowel in the root is ascertained as fol- 
lows : 

815.- — I. Verbs in aco pure, or in gaco, ico, idea, and vco, bave 
the final vowel of the first root long, unless followed by a vowel ; 
if followed by a vowel, it comes under Rule II. All others are 
usually short. 

8 1 6.- — II. The final syllable of the second root is always short, 
unless made long by position. 

817. — III. The first root of liquid verbs is shortened in the 
future, 244-1. 

SPECIAL RULES FOR VERBS IN [il. 

8 1 8. — Rule XIII. The proper reduplication is short, unless 
made long by position ; as, vixrijfAi. The improper reduplication 
is common ; as, Irjfii or Iqfju. 

819. — Rule XIV. a, not before oa or ai, is every where 
short ; as, iordfAtv, igtccze. 

820. — Rule XV. v is long in polysyllables, only in the sin- 
gular of the indicative active ; every where else it is short ; as, 
deixrvfM, deixvvoi, deixvvioo, der/.vv[iai, &c. 

821 — In dissyllables, it is every where long; as, dv/it, dvrovy dv~ 



§187. VII. DERIVATION AND COMPOSITION. 

822. — Rule XVI. Derivatives follow the quantity of their 
primitives ; and compounds, that of the simple words of which 
they are composed ; as, 

rlfitj — arTjuoc, Ofiotijuoq, Tijli avo)Q, &c. 

Xdo<i — Atiofttdov, Mzvt/.tioq, etc. 

Aw), kvGd) — AvaavdfJOCy )J'Gr/.a/.oc^ (fee. 

oiat, oiay.oc — oitiY.OGT(Joqoq, ot.dyoro^oq, &Q. 

7iv(j — 7ivQavGrtji; f 7TV(jq)Oyoi:, <fcc. 

fa or (>Zv — QlvtihoLtto), noklvQivoq, <fcc. 



§188,189. PB060B 305 

I. — Ki i.i. XVII. a privath ilables, is 

frequently lonj 

82 1. - - \ . o >>,' i- in com] I long; a-. 



§18*. VI11. DIAL!- 

A l : 

$25. — Rule XVIII. The An 
of nouns in ; 

. of a, .*, o ; it, rcw r/ for raj i 
The Paragogio i in pronouns (the dative plur 

adverbs, IS lofl rtnii, n n, l>at. pi. rot TtnGt. 

82G. — ionic. 

1. The Comparative in wsbori 
it; as, KctXXiov, 1. xaJUfor, A. 

2. In adjectivee of time, 

3. In >nic «. ai not follow 
jyrra*. 

827. DORIC AND iBOLIO. 

1. The Doric a is long; the JSolic i 
AlvtLov) l7t7Tord, iEolic for innonfi, <kc 



828.— §189. IX. POETIC LICENSE. 

1. The last syllable of a verse is comii 
Anaplastic, and Greater Ionic. 

2. The 2v£n i.- unites two syllables into i 

-J i .i i 

H laStr // OHM * j I 

I- I I I I 

3. The .-lr.v/N makes i short syllable in tin 

- i i, L, l i 

I , , I I.I J 

A'o/' 1. The Arris means th< n of the voice, which, in I 

meter verse, is always on the first syllable i 



306 prosody. § 190. 

Note 2. A short syllable is sometimes, and but very rarely, length- 
ened at the end of a foot ; thus, 

., I I I I, I 

TV] 5 &7T0 jitcV rOQyO) p).00~l'O0)7TTq £<JTeq>CLV0)TO. 

829. — Besides these deviations from the usual rules of quantity, 
the Poets sometimes varied the quantities of syllables, as follows : 

I. They lengthened a syllable, 1. By doubling or inserting a conso- 
nant; as, tddhiGi for tdeLGt ; dnrolvq for cinoXiq. 2. By changing a 
vowel into a diphthong ; as, devo,u av for dtofiav. 3. By Metathesis ; as, 
t7TQaS-ov for Ittciq&qv. 

II. They shortened a syllable, By rejecting one vowel of a diph- 
thong ; as, tXov for uXov. 

III. They increased the number of syllables, 1. By resolving a diph- 
thong; as, avT(o for avro). 2. By inserting or adding a letter or sylla- 
ble ; as, aaG'/zroq for aaytroq ; tjfAioq for ?jXt,oq ; /9ti}qp* for fiyn. 

IV. They lessened the number of syllables, 1. By aphaeresis ; as, vto&a 
for iveqd-e. 2. By syncope; as, iyqero for iytiyiro. 3. By apocope 
and apostrophe; as, do> for dw/ta; juvob for /.ivqia. 

Other varieties will be learned by practice. Many conjectures have 
been made with regard to the ancient orthography, and the principles 
of versification as depending upon it. But the best of them deserve 
the credit of ingenuity alone; for, as they rest on no unquestionable 
authority, they are of little or no use. 



§190. FEET. 

830 — A foot, in metre, is composed of two or more syllables 
strictly regulated by time; and is either simple or compound. Of the 
simple feet, four are of two, and eight are of three syllables. There 
are sixteen compound feet, each of four syllables. These varieties are 
as follows: 

831. — Simple feet of two Syllables. 

Pyrrichius ^ ^ &toq. 

Spondeus — — tvtito). 

Iambus -~- — Xtyu). 

Trochleas — w aoijua. 

832.— Simple feet of three Syllables. 

Tribraches ^ ^ *~> noXt/toq. 

Molossus — — — tV/diXij. 

Dactylus — ^ ^ fiayTiyoq. 

Anapaest us ^ ^ — paGikvq. 

Bachius w — — infjTifc. 

Antibaehius — — ^ duxvT'tu. 

Amphibrachys ^- — ^ rid f; fit. 

Amphimacer — ^ — dti/.riTid. 



§191,192. niosoDY. 307 

833.— ( 

Choriambna — w ^ — tsfypQhaXm 

Antispastns ^ nim ai 

Ionio a majore ^ — rrich. 

Ionic a minore ^ ^ — — 

First Paeon — www detQi id a py rrich. 

Second ^ — w >w ,. an iai 

Third ^ w — w arad/jpa a pyrrich a 

Fourth w ^w w — 

First Epitrite w uHuoTin/ 

Second — w «r()oo«/orr/ ( . a trocfa 

Third w — 

Fourth -^ JUofif t Ti~;(>d a 

Proceleusmaticoa ^ w w w ,t<» 

Dispondeua offd* 

Diiambua «w — w — hikjtutF^ two iambi. 

Ditrochams — w — w dvari/rua two ti 



§191. OF METRE. 

834. — Metre, in its general sense, means an 
and feet in verse, according to certain rules; and in thia Bcnse app 
not only to an entire verse, but to a part of a verse, or to any DUO 
of verses. A metre, in a specific sense, means a eombinati 
(sometimes called a syzygy), and sometimes one foot only. 

835 — Note. The distinction between rhythm and metre is t : 
the former refers to the time only, in regard to which, two short sylla- 
bles are equivalent to one long; the latter refers both to and 
the order of the syllables. The rhythm of an anapaest and dad 
same; the metre different The term rhythm, however, is also on 
stood in a more comprehensive sense, and is applied to the bar 
construction and enunciation of feet and words in connection; th 
line has rhythm when it contains <tn 
without regard to their order. Metre reqnin 
metres, and these arranged in a t r. Thus, in this 1;; 
"sly/tr*, JSYxfjUxoi, to) nbr&ioq ao/tri Mulacu. 

there is both rhythm, as it contains six metres ofeqna] value in 
of time ; and metr< metres are arranged according to the canon 

for Hexameter heroic verse, which requires a dactyl in the 6th, a: 
spondee in the 6th place. Change the order th 
"uJo/tTz, MoiGcu, SuuXkxalj T 

and the rhythm remains as perfect as before, but the meti 

stroyed ; it is no longer a Hexameter heroic line. 



§192. THE DIFFERENT KINDS OF METfi 

836. — 1. Metre, in the general * I into nin< 

Ionic .i 



1. 


Iambic. 


4. 


Dactylic 


7. 


± 


Trochaic. 


5. 


Chonambic. 


8. 


& 


Anape 


6. 


Antispastic 





308 prosody. §192. 

These names are derived from the feet which prevail in them. 
Each species was originally composed of those feet only, from wliich it 
is named ; but others, equal in time, were afterwards admitted under 
certain restrictions. 

It often happens that two species, totally dissimilar, are united in the 
same verse, which is then termed Asynartetes. When the irregularity 
is great, and it cannot be reduced to any regular form, it is called Poly- 
schematistic or anomalous. 

837. — Note. The invention or frequent use of any species of metre 
by a particular poet, or its being used in some particular civil or reli- 
gious ceremony, or appropriated to some particular subject or sentiment, 
has been the occasion of certain kinds of verse receiving other names 
than those specified above. Thus, we have the Asclepiadean, Glyco- 
nian, Alcaic, Sapphic, and others; named from the poets, Asclepiades, 
Glycon, Alcceus, Sappho, Phalcecus, Sotadcs, Archilochus, Alcman, 
Pherecrates, Anacreon, Aristophanes, &e. So also the Prosodiacus 
(from nyoGodoq), so called from being used in the approach to the altars 
on solemn festivals ; and the Pai cemiacus, a kind of verse much used in 
the writing of proverbs (naqovuiou). 

838. — In the iambic, trochaic, and anapaestic verse, a metre con 
sists of two feet ; in the others, of one only. 

839 — '2. A verse or metre is farther characterized by the number 
of metres (in the specific meaning of the term) which it contains, as 
follows : 

A verse containing one Metre is called Monometer. 
two Metres Dimeter. 

three Metres Trimeter 

four Metres Tetrameter, 

five Metres Pentameter. 

six Metres Hexameter. 

seven Metres Heptameter. 

840. — 3. A verse may be complete, having precisely the number 
of metres which the canon requires ; or it may be deficient in the List 
metre; or it may be redundant. To express this, a verse is further 
characterized as follows : viz. 

1. Acatalectic, when complete. 

a j Oatalectio, if wanting one syllable. 

( Brachycatalectic, if wanting two syllables or one whole foot. 
3. Hypercatalectic, when there is one or two syllables at the end, 
more than the verse requires ; thus, 

yj\ how doaxovTaq ox;. JEsch. Lept. Theb. 

is denominated " trochaic dimeter catalectic ;" the first term referring 
to the species, the second to the number of metres, and the third to the 
apofhesis or ending. 

841. — Note. The two last terms, viz. that designating the number 
of metres, and that which refers to the endimr, are sometimes reduced 
to one ; thus, when a verse of a given species consists of two feet and 
a half, it is called Pcnthmimcr ; of three and a half, Hephthcmimer (five 
half feet, seven half feet) ; and when it consists of one metre and a 
half, it is called Hemiholius. 



§193, 194, II i'hosody. 309 

842. — T 

plac, 

follow 



§198. 1. IAMBIC METRE I. 

843 — A pure iambio 
A mixed iamb 
iambtu or a npo 

In t ii fourth, and tixth, an iaml 

Variation 1. The iambui in tin- odd \ 
tribrach; the spondee, into a dactyl or an . 
Variation 2 The iambus in tin- '/•'// plae 

be resolved into a tribrach. Anan;:; 

case <>t* a proper name only. 

Observe, however, 1st that a dactyl should l"- avoided i 

place; and, 2d. that resolved feet should not concur. 
Of this verse there are j»11 varieties of length, m 
trimeters (called also seiiarian, each line havi. 
?netcrs. 



§104. H. TROCHAIC METRE. Scnm II. 

844. — A pure trochaic vera ily. 

A mixed trochaic verse admits in the odd \ 
the even places, a trochee or a ttpofi 

The trochee may, in any pis I into a tr 

spondee into a dactyl or anapa st. 

A dactyl, in the odd places occurs only in I 

Trochaic verses are mostly catalectic. .\ m-i. :n of them 
consist- of rs; sometimes of din 

acatalectic intermixed. 

In tetrameter*, the second onld alwaj 



§195. III. ANAPAESTIC METRE Bchbm III. 

845. —An anapaestic verse, without any restricts 
either an attapcest, spondee, or dactyl* 

7:>c. 1. The dimeter Cat lied para 

pacst in the last place but one; and 
there. • 

Exc. 2. In some instance^ t 1 i 
leusmatic. 

Anapaesti are Bomel i 2 with oth 

are oftener in a detached tyntem by themselv< 

846. — a chiefly composed <>( dimeters under tin 

circui, 

1. When each foot, or at least each D 



310 peosodt. § 196, 197. 

2. "When the last verse but one of the system is monometer acata- 
lectic, and the last, dimeter eatalectic, with an anapaest in the second 
metre. 

In a system, this peculiar property is to be observed, that the last 
syllable of each verse is not common (as in other species), but has its 
quantity subject to the same restrictions as if the foot to which it be- 
longs occurred in any other place of the verse. 

847. — A series, therefore, of anapaestic verses, consisting of one or 
more sentences, is to be constructed as if each sentence was only a single 
verse. 

848 — Note. The monometer acatalectic is called an anapaestic base. 
This is sometimes dispensed with in a system ; in the parozmiacus, rarely 

849. — To this metre belong the Aristophanic, being eatalectic tetra 
meters ; and the proceleusmatic, consisting of feet isochronal to an ana 
paest, and, for the most part, ending with it. 



§ 196. IV. DACTYLIC METRE. Scheme, § 204, IV. 

850. — A dactylic verse is composed solely of dactyls and spondees. 
In this species one foot constitutes a metre. 

The common heroic is hexameter acatalectic, having a dactyl in the 
fifth place and a spondee in the sixth. 

Sometimes in a solemn, majestic, or mournful description, a spondee 
takes the place of the dactyl in the fifth foot; from which circumstance 
such lines are called spondaic. 

851. — The elegiac pentameter consists of five feet. The first and 
second may be either a dactyl or a spondee at pleasure ; the third must 
always be a spondee ; the fourth and fifth anapaests. 

852. — Though a heroic verse is confined to a smaller number of ad- 
missible feet than an iambic verse, several licenses are allowed which 
are not used in the latter. 

The most considerable of these are : 

1. The lengthening of a short final syllable in certain cases, viz. at 
the caesural pause, and where its emphasis is increased by its beginning 
a foot. 

2. The hiatus, or the concurrence of two vowels, in contiguous words. 
853. — That irregular sort of dactylics which Hephaestion calls 

JEolics, admits, in the first metre, any foot of two syllables ; the rest 
must be all dactyls, except where the verse is eatalectic, and then the 
eatalectic part must be part of a dactyl. 

854 — A second sort of dactylics, called by the same author Zogace- 
dics, requires a trochaic syzygy at the end, all the other feet being dactyls. 

i 

§ 197. V. CHORIAMBIC METER Scheme, § 204. Y. 

855. — The construction of an ordinary choriambic verse is very 
simple. Each metre, except the last, is a choriambus, and the last may 
be an iambic syzygy, entire or eatalectic. 

856. — The iambic syzygy (two iambic feet) is sometimes found at 



§198, 11 PB060S 811 

the beginning, and, lb 
requently. 

I 
the i erae u I ben more prop< 
i \ ery great \ ai ietj , and 



§198. VL ANTISPASTIC METRE. VI. 

858. — An antdapaal 
constructed aa folloi 

In t}ic///".s7 pla the prop : four 

By liable* ending like an la in the 1 

In the intermediate places, only an anti 
In the latti an iaml tnplete or 

pleto anti-pas' 

There is scarcely any limit to the varieties in this sp 
859 — The following are the must nsnal: 

1. In short v. rsea, the | roper foot frequent] I tin* verse 
consists of one of the above-mentioned feel and an iai 

2. All the epi; 

in the several places in the verse, particularly the fourth • 
second. 

3. If an antispastus begins the verso, and three syllabi 
whatever those syllables are, tfc is antispae 

may be considered as a portion of some of the adi 
some of them resolved. 

4. In long verses, an iambi. 

place, and then the third une varieti 

An antispastus, with an ad 
An antispastus, followed by an iambi 
Two antispasti, with an iambic ayaygy, ia called 
Antispastic dimeter catalectic, is call 



§199. VII. IONIC METRE A BiAJORE Ml. 

860 — An Ionic verse admit* 
its proper foot The verse never enda with th< 
but either with the trochaic Byzygy or the | 
varieties of this metre arc numer 
ing : 

. l. The se< Limes found in iho first pi 

Var. '2. A moloasu8 ( ) in i 

ihaic sysygy followii 

Var. 3. The i tonally joined I 

epitrite, bo thai the t wo fe< 
feet Thia is called an jirdi 

foot being, in thia caae, supplied by the redundant 
quent ; and tli 



312 prosody. § 200, 201, 202. 

Var. 4. Resolutions of the long syllable into two short ones, are 
allowed in all possible varieties. 

861. — If the three remaining pseons, or the second pseon in any place 
but the first, without an y uivdxXaatq : or, 

If an iambic syzygy or third epi trite — a choriambus, or any of the 
discordant feet of four syllables, be found in the same verse with an 
Ionic foot, the verse is then termed Epi-ionic. 



§ 200. VIII. IOJSTIC METRE A MIXORE. Scheme, § 204, 

VIII. 

862 — An Ionic verse a minore is often entirely composed of its own 
proper feet. It admits, however, an iambic syz}-gy promiscuously, and 
begins sometimes with the third paeon followed by one of the epitrites 
for an 'slvdyikacriq. 

863 — A molossns sometimes occurs in the beginning of the verse, 
and also in the odd places, with an iambic syzygy preceding. 

864 — In the intermediate places a second or third pseon is prefixed 
to a second epitrite ; and this construction is called ^Ava/J.aGiq as before. 

Resolutions of the long syllables are allowed in this, as in the other 
Ionic metre. 

865 — An Epionic verse a minore is constructed by intermixing with 
the Ionic foot a double trochee, second epitrite, or pseon without an *Av<L- 
vAacriq. 

PROSODIAC VERSE. 

866. — "When a choriambus precedes or follows an Ionic foot of either 
kind, the name Epionic is suppressed, and the verse called Prosodiacus. 
And, in general, 

This name is applied to a verse consisting of an alternate mixture 
of choriambic and Ionic feet, or of their respective representatives. 

N. B. The two species of Ionic are not to be intermixed in the same 
verse. 



§201. IX. PJEOXIC METRE. Scheme, § 204, IX. 

867. — A pseonic verse requires all the admissible feet to have the 
same rhythm with its proper foot ; i. e. to consist of jive times, or be 
equal to five short syllables. 

The first and fourth paeons are mostly used, but not in the same verse. 

The construction of this verse is most perfect when each metre ends 
with the several words of the verse, as was before remarked of the ana- 
paestic metre. 

To this head may be referred those verses which are called by some 
authors Bacchiac and Cretic verses. 



§202, THE (LESURAL PAUSE. 

868 — Besides the division of the verse into metres and feet, there 
is another division, into two parts only, owing to the natural interims- 



§203,204. PS080] 313 

sion of tli kding it, and )• rhythmical off 

This is called the pause, which i la with a n 1 iu 

distance from the beginning 
mined by the length of the \ • 

869 — Heroic 
monious when the new* falls npon tl 
Tins ii the penthemimeral caesura. When it uul 
of the fourth, I the hephtht m 

tetrameters, it- place is at tfu end of - are 

more observed by the Roman than by the Greek j 
verse, and pasonic, m> place ii 

metres (if rightly constructed) end with ■ word, tl. ;tuse 

will be produced at the « - 1 1 « 1 of each m 
of the Ionic a minore. 



§203. COMPOUND METRES. 

870. — Besidea the preceding nine species of metre, tl itions 

and modifications of tnese are very numen the 

following : 

1. A long syllable is sometime - of a verse 
consisting of similar me1 

2. In some Bpecies, the portiona of an adm 
bles are separated by the intermediate 

3. It happens not unfrequently that I 

are united in the same verse ; which is then denominated Aai I 

1. Dactylic Tetram. 4- Troch. Hemiholma 

2. Iambic Penth. -j- Troch. Hemiholius. 

3. Dactylic Dim. -4-Troch. Monom. or I 

4. Iambic syzygy -j- Troch. Syzygy, and nee versa. 
This last is called Perioi 

4. When a verse is so irregular as to contain in 

lation of the preceding rules, it is called Pox >\u ; 

thus, 

871 — To this title may be referred, 

1. A verse otherwise iambic, having a spondee in the second or 
fourth place. 

2. An iambus in a trochaic verse, Ac dta, 
These rules are exemplified in the following tab! 



§204. METRICAL TABLES. 

872 The following tables exhibit ■ seh 

allowed in each kind of metre, and the place which thej 
the tal.lcs the following abbreviations occur; \ 
tic; c. 6 B. 0. for Broth - <' ! ; I 

Uctie; and P, N. for Proper N 

aoh paetri 
double line. 

14 



314 



PROSODY. 



§204. 



873.— I IAMBIC METRE. §193. 
1. Monometer Base. 2. Dimeter Acatalectic. 



1. 2. 


) )l 
1)1)1 
) ) 1 1 ) 


N.. ' 



1. 2. 


3. 4. 


w — w — 


- — 




ZZ- 








o. Trimeter Acatalectic. 



1. 


2. 


3. 4 5. 6. 


>mS 


w — 


w — 


W — 


w — 


>— ' 


"w* V- ' 




N-^ V^ 




"" 






ww_U 



P. X. 



874.— H. TROCHAIC METRE. §194. 

Explanation of the Scheme, 

In this verse, each metre is alike. If from the trimeter scheme 

exhibited below, the first and the second metre be taken away, the 
remainder will be a scheme of the Moxometer, which is always hyper- 
catalectic or acatalectic. If the first be taken away, the remainder 
will be a scheme of the dimeter ; and if a metre be it will be a 

scheme of the tetrameter ', which is alwa; tic. 

Trimeter A caUdectic 



1. 2. 3. 4 5. 6. 



575.— III. ANAPAESTIC METRE. §195. 

Explanation of tkt Scheme. 

This scheme is dimeter. The removal of the first metre leaves it 
meter (which is called an anapa?- ») ; by prefixing one 

metre, it becomes trimeter ; and by prefixing ti: mea tetra- 

meter, which is always catalectic. A eai limeter is also called 

Parcemiac. 



§204. 'PROSODY. 

1. Dimeter A<- Parcemaic or D 



1. , 2. 


8. 


4. 




1. 


2. 


& 


4. 




WW 


— w3 

— 








— w w 


Z-~ 















wwww ( 



876.— IV. DACTYLIC METRE 

1. Dim ter. 



A. C. 
11. i'. 
Adonic 



1. 


•J 


— WW 





w *— ' 


— WW 


— 


-WW 





1. 2. 




-WW -WW 


=r~} 




w " 


— — 








3. Tc trau 



2. 3. 



ill 



JSOUCL 



4. Pent a n 



1. 


2. 


3. | 4. 


5. 


— WW 




::-,::- 




II (1(1 
1 ( 1 ( ( 1 












[-- 


WW- 


WW - 



JEjOUO. 



5, Hexameter. 



1. 


2. 8. 4. 5. 








— 


_ w w 






















— WW 


-WW -WW -WW -w~ 


- ~~ 









ir\ 



■ 

Earn 



316 



PKOSODY. 



§204. 



Logacedics. 

called also Choriambic Dimeter Catalectic. 
Alcaic (the most common). 

^ w W j _ w _ w } Logasedics only. 



877.— V. CHORIAMBIC METRE. §197. 



M. I. 



n. 



Trimeter. 
III. 



Cat. 

pure acatalectic seldom occurs. 

impure do. in which also other 
feet are intermixed, as the 
Paeons and Epitrites. 

Monometer is the same as Dact. Dim. Dimeter removes the first 
Metre. Tetrameter prefixes a metre, and is always Catalectic. 



878.— VI. ANTISPASTIC METRE. §198. 



An Antispastic Metre. 



Iambus. 



pure- 



Trochee. 

— <* In the varieties of this verse, any of the simple 
w ^ w feet under the Iambus may precede any of those 

under the Trochee. Dimeters, Trimeters, and 

w w Tetrameters, are formed as directed § 198, and 

are catalectic, acatalectic, and hypercataleetic. 

The Dochmiac dimeter and trimeter is formed 

w ~~ by repeating the Dochmiac monometer. The 

•" w Dochmiac also sometimes precedes, and some- 

— w w times follows, the Antispastus. 



Metres. I. 

=51- 
=51- 



II. 



Any form of ] 
an Antispas 
tic metre. 



3rm of ) 
tispas- >• 
tre. ) 



Antispastic Varieties. 

Cat. is called Pherecratic. 

A. C. is called Glyconic. 

H. C. is called Sapphic. 

A. C. is called Glyconic Polyschematistic 



§204. 



PBOSODY. 



817 



879.— VII. IONIC METRE, a majore, £ 
Meii II. in. 

rtr^ ww | — ^ w ) — 

pure] — ^ — ^ I — — — — w — n " 






a.s ibOTf ;in<l 






all the [MB 

Dimeter may be formed byjoinii III 

VARIETIES OF THE IONIC A MAJO 

— 3 — — 13 — ^^}~" > -' — w 

w — w w j. _ w w — , or — w w — -J ^ — -* w V ProsoDIACUB. 

Ionic a majore tetrameter B. C. i ic. 

880.— VIII. IONIC METRE, a minore, §200. 
Dimeter. Tetrameter. 

is formed by joining a Dim. I 

a Dim. A. C. A MoYoSSnS (— ) 

in the odd ]>la 

. by an iao 



C. 






The Ionic a minore, preceded or followed by ■ ••horiambus, is an- 
other form of PEOBODIAOUL For the Epi-Ioi 

881.— IX. IVEONIC OR CRETIC METRE, §201. 

A P won ic metre. Dimi:m:i:, Tm 'Tetrameter, 

— www w are formed b] tion of th< a reso- 

w — w w or w i ul j ou f — j IlU) w w i d eonimon. 



§205. SCANNING. 

882 — To tliope who I Latin 

poets, the ordinary hexameter and regular - 
will present no aiffioulty. After a UK n these, the beet 

praxis is furnished by the Choru* Usd the 

odea of Pindar ; as almost every line furnishes a different kind of Terse, 



318 ACCENTS. § 206. 

and the student is compelled to make himself thoroughly acquainted 
both with the rules of quantity and of metre in order to discover it. 

883 In scanning, for example, the Proodus in the Medea of Euri- 
pides, beginning at the 131st line, after ascertaining the quantity- of 
each syllable, and comparing the whole line with the preceding tables, 
they will be as follows : 



131 


Anapaestic 


Dim. 


Ac. 


132 


Dactylic 


Trim. 


a 


133 


Anapaestic 


Dim. 


u 


134 


Dactylic 


Trim. 


H. C. 


135 


Pseonic 


Dim. 


Ac. 


136 


Antispastic 


tt 


ii 


137 


Dactylic 


a 


" pure. 


138 


Antispastic 


u 


tt 


884. — Proceeding 


in the same w 


ay with the second Olympic ode of 


indar, it will be as follows : 







1. Periodicus, or circulating dimeter. 

2. Ionic Dimeter Catalectie. 

3. Pa3onic Dimeter Hypercatalectic. 

4. Choriambic Dimeter Catalectie. 

5. Iambic Dimeter Brachycatalectic. 

6. Dochmiac — and so on of the others. 

885 — Note. In the choruses of the dramatic writers, and the odes 
of Pindar, each line of the antistrophe is the same kind of verse, and 
often, though not always, the order of syllables is the same, with the 
corresponding line of the preceding strophe. 



§ 206. ACCENTS. 

886 — In the proper modulation of speech, it is necessary that one 
syllable in every word should be distinguished by a tone or elevation 
of the voice. On this syllable, the accent is marked in the Greek lan- 
guage. The elevation of voice does not lengthen the time of the sylla- 
ble ; so that accent and quantity are considered by the best critics as 
perfectly distinct, but by no means inconsistent with each other. These 
can be of no use to us now, as far as regards the pronunciation of the 
language, however useful in this respect they may have been to those 
by whom it was spoken. Still, however, the study of these is useful, 
as they serve to distinguish between words which are spelled alike, but 
have different significations. This difference was doubtless marked in 
the language as originally spoken bv a different intonation, which, by 
the different marks called accents, it was intended to convey to the eye. 
Thus, in English, the words des'ert, and desert', though spelled with 
the same letters, differ both in sound and meaning ; and this is marked 
by the accent. So in Greek, o/uo)q and ouoiq, spelled with the same let- 
ters, differ in meaning ; and the difference of the accent would doubt- 
less lead the Greek to express this by a difference of tone which is now 
lost. Scapula has given a list of more than four hundred words which 



§206. vrs. 

arc thui 

quant it \ oi 

887 — 'i 

able. W'h.Miil 
tiu« subjunctive rowel ; 

888. — The b 
only, and wo lenominai 

OxytonSy when b 

Pi \ when ;t 

Pry nult ; as, 

889 — TIk- two last are called I 
is not 

but il 

890 — in the 
by anol b 

891. — When two >yll. 
tracted into one, the circumflex 
eented syllable, and ■ grave or hi >, as 

if, pulis* (fi).u>\ >{i/.ion'i. VLB it' y</.. 

ut on the first of the syllab 
circumflex on the 
for oa in 
circumflex 

892. — It is evide ha( aa th 

of tin 1 last three syllal circumflex mtu 

few/ too; and words are denominate 

; as, 
gpulco for </.'/.Ao. 

. when the p 
jtieip for cpitiofAer. 

893 N. B, ( >t* many f 

is are in nae ; ' 

a as; as, 

•i that all syllal 
inally two, now ui 

of much ffc 

would -till 



320 ACCENTS. § 207. 



§ 207. PLACE OF THE ACCENT IN THE NOMINATIVE. 

894. — No rule can be given for ascertaining the proper place 
of the accent in the nominative of nouns and adjectives ; this 
is best learned from practice, and the use of a good Lexicon. 
The following observations, however, may be of use : 

1. The articles, pronouns, and prepositions, have the place of 
the accent marked in their inflexions in the grammar. 

2. In verbs, it is thrown as far back as possible, except d/u 
and tyijfiL 

3. The following have the accent on the last syllable, and are 
therefore 0x2/ tons ; viz., 

1. All monosyllables which are not contracted; as, y^iq, oq. When 
they have suffered contraction, they take the circumflex ; as, yrj> 
(yea), (pox; (qxxoq). So also av f vvv, ovv, i«j, fyvq, /uvq, vavq, ovq, 
nat;, 7tv(), most or all of which are contractions. 2. All nouns in 
fvq; as, paaifo vq. 3. All verbals in rrj(j; as, /aqay.rrjQ. 4. Ver- 
bals in rrjq; as, ^aO-^riiq) but those from verbs in •/<*, on the 
penult; as, &£rrjq. 5. Verbals in /ntj and fioq (from the perfect 
passive); as yQctfi/iij, anaanoq. 6. Verbals in roc, from the 3d 
singular perfect passive ; as, noiTjroq ; except some compounds ; as, 
unodei/.Toq. 7. Verbals in r\ and a from the 2 perf. active; as, 
GTolrjy d\aq>oQoi. 8. Diminutives, patronymics, and other deriva- 
tive nouns in vq; as, MQafiiq, (2ao~i,Uq. 9. Compounds of not,i<o, 
ciyo)y q>{Q(», ovqoq, eqyov; as, 7zai,dayo)y6q,(%(X(fO(J<x,7rv/.oi'{j6q, oi'fyt,- 
fiotqyoq (but naQOL and neql throw back the accent; as, ntQityyoq). 
10. Adjectives- in rjq not contracted; as, a).t]&rjq. 11. Compound 
adjectives in rjq; as, evyvrjq; except compounds of rj&oc and aQ/.iu) ; 
as, y.axotjOfjq, 7iodciQ/.?jq. 12. Adjectives in vq, a,a, v ; as, r t dvq, 
ySiiai rj6v. 13. Adjectives in ^o^; as, aia/qoq. 14. Adjectives in 
woq, from verbals in roq ; as, noir^y.oq from noit\toq. 15. The 
adverbial terminations i and dov; as, afreet, ojLio&vjuadov. 

895. — Accent on the Penult. 

4. The following have the accent on the penult ; viz., 

1. Diminutives in t,o~y.oq, J.oc, vo)v\ as, veavlcryoq, 7tcudi<Ty.?], vavri/.oq, 
fiioQuov. 2. Nouns in uov, denoting a place ; as, Avy.uov, efce. 
3. Nouns in vvij ; as, diy.aioGvvrj. 4. Nouns in kx, if derived from 
adjectives in oq; as, qnlla. If derived from substantives, the 
accent varies ; as, arqand from axqaroq. 5. Nouns in aa derived 
from verbs in fiw; as, fiacrUeia from ftacrdevo). 6. Almost all 
nouns denoting national relafon ; as, c Po)ftaioq. 7. Verbals in 
tw^i; as, qrjroQ, xryroo. 8. Adjectives in eiq ecraa tv; as, /a- 
Qitiq. 9. Adjectives in o^c; ; as. fo&ia&rjq. 10. Verbal adjectives 
m,;o?; as, yqanrhq. 11. Comparatives in hov\ as, fiiJLrm*. 12. 
Adverbs of quantity in anuq ; as, tQiGay.iq, no)J.ay.i,q. 13. Adverbs 
in dqv ; as, aidlrjfidtiv. 



§ 208, 209. 

retain the accent on the syllable wh< in 

as, t'.i'Tni-ft, o\ In the following cases, 

cenl is drawn back t<> the antepenult ; \ 

1. Words compounded of particl 

<hr<\ 7 i y naQa, wro, r "> from 

from U'vyi]. 

2. Words compounded of two adj 
two substantives : 

as, tpiXoGtOQyog* 



§208. GENERAL RULES. 

897. — I. If the final syllable is long, th< on the penult 

is the acute ; thus, arfrocifrov, dovad (dual ^w, 

TV7TT0J, TV7TTtO\h0. 

Obs. The Attic terminations tcor and soof, in tl 
thin.l declensions, and the [onic em in the firsts 
forming one syllable ; as, ihajytcoy, .to/.. 

898.— II. If the final syllable be .-hurt, then 

1. In dissyllables, the accent on the penult, if 
acute ; as, tvttte ; if long, with the final syllable short, tb 
is the circumflex ; as, y m tinu y dovaa (sing.). 

2. In polysyllables, the accent on the antep 
thus, arQ'QooTiog, uiOnco^m, rvinofier, tl:tt<> 

Obs. 1. The diphthongs CM and cu final, and syl' 
position only, arc considered short in accentuation ; thus, 
avfoxxog. 

Obs. 2. These rules apply to the 
all the parts of verbs except as in the following 



209. SPECIAL RULE 

899. — I. IN Til! 

1. The first declension has the circumflex on tl 
the genitive plural ; thus, uov<iu)r, from 

. The feminine <a baiyton adject 
first genera] rule ; uyicor from «; 
%tvog ; also, -/ni^Ti*)) , jkovi 



322 accents. § 209. 

2. Oxytons of the first and second declensions, circumflect the 
last syllable in the genitive and dative ; thus, tip/], rtpijg, Tifirj, 
vififjv, Tificov ; xalog, xaXov ; xaXoi, xaXoig. 

3. In the third declension, the acute accent on the last sylla- 
ble of the nominative is transferred to the penult in the oblique 
cases ; thus, aazt'jQ, Gcoztjoog, 6qm?]qc0v (Rule I.) ; naxiiq, nazi- 
qog ; zoidg, zoiddog. 

Exc. 1. The final syllable of vocatives in ov and oi change the 
acute into the circumflex ; as, fiaoilevg, fiaaiXtv ; xla&co, xlco&oi. 

Exc. 2. Mfono and fivydzno, though barytons, accent the pe- 
nult ; as, (iijTtQog. 

Exc. 3. Genitives and datives of two syllables, have the cir- 
cumflex on the final syllable long, and the acute on the final syl- 
lable short ; as, \invog, \invi, \ir\volv, fiqvav, final, 8vc5v, 8vol. But 
rig and participles follow the general rule ; as, rlvcov, fit'vzog, 
ovgi ; also, 8d8cov, dpcoav, #gogw, xodzcov, 7ial8cov, Tqcocov, ov- 
rcov, cpcozwv (of lights), ndvzwv, Tract. 

Also syncopated nouns and yvvt], except the dative plural ; 
as, nazqdg, ttuzqojv, tiu-tqcogi ; yviuixog. 

Also, a short vowel of the genitive from a long vowel in the 
nominative, throws back the accent in the vocative ; thus, dvqQ, 
dvtoog, av8Q ; 8v8alpcor, evdaipovog, 8v8aifiov. Except when 
the penult is long not by position ; as, Ma%dov, £aQ7i/';dov. 

900. — II. IN VERBS. 

1. Monosyllables, being long, are circumflexed ; as, co, e7g, 
cpi;g, ffi for Effy; 

2. A long syllable after the characteristic is circumflected, 
1st. In the active and middle voices, iu the first future of liquid 

verbs ; and in the second future of all verbs. 
2d. In the passive voice, in the subjunctive of the aorists, and in 
the subjunctive of the present of verbs in fit ; thus, g7Z8qg), 

G7T8QSig, 6718Q81V, 6718QWV, G7T8Q0V[ICU — ZV7TW, ZV710V\18V, ZV7T- 
. OlfAL, TV7lOV\lCa ZV(p&(X) ZVTl^g Zl&OO ZL&ddfiai. 

Exc. Except when the last syllable ends in nv ; as, zvnzolzi^v 
(see 1st General Rule). 

3. The third person of the optative in oi and ai has the acute 
accent on the penult ; as, z8zvcpoi, dozacu. 

Except in the futures mentioned in rule 2d. 

4. The imperatives iX&e, aW, svot, 188, la fit, have the acute 
accent on the final syllable. 

But the imperative circumflects the last syllable in the second 



§210,211. accents. 823 

ilar in the second 
oepl ytrov, TQanov, rVq 

final syllable ; tl, *, \i/. at 

TVTJHUi, TVTlil r, rnur. 

The infinitive of the finl 
middle — of both aorists p 
active voice of verba in /*/, have the ■ 
the circumflex on the long penult, and the acute on tie 
thus, '/nirut, iXacatj axovacu xvnitfd i — 

ThTmihiui, rtrvTitriUy TetVCp&CU, 

0. The participle* of the second an 
ent actii be in ///, and all ending in ok 

acute accent on the final syllable ; thus, mnor, faro?, 
rertKpefc, twpd'ug. 

The participles of the perfect passive have 
on the penult ; as, rspVjt<fc£o£. 

Except when abbreviated; as, 9misrof for Mtjfuyog* 

7. Eiui' y lam, and <//,,"/, ^ *"v. have tl n the 

final syllable of the indicative (except ti. _ular) ; tl 

iatif qaoi 

Obs. When tail is emphatical, or forms the copula 
the subject and its predicate, it throws back I 
ttP&QConog tan uooy, man is an animal ; tan -ti 

d' tan; This is commonly, though improperly, classed on 
enclitics. 

§210. IX OONSTRU* Ti 

901. — Words aa syllable, when tl. 

by apostrophe, throw the accent back ; 

Exc. l. Jftla and the prepositions an bich lose 

their accent 

JExc. 2. Prepositions placed after I 

cepted), throw back the accent ; thus, ntni- 



§211. PROCLITICS OB AT<»\ 

902 — The following ten words, when writi 
fore another word, ha 

it wee, part of the word following; vis. th< <; the 

prepositions *Y, ttq (Iq), i/.. *; j the eoojanoti nega- 

tive adverb or (c 



324 ACCENTS. § 212. 

But these words have the accent when it is thrown back upon them 
from an enclitic following; as, zlye; in the end of a sentence; as, ttwc 
ydo ov, why not ? after the word en which they rest; as, #*6s ox;, like 
a god ; aaaow h'l, in consequence of evils. Also the article, used as a 
personal pronoun, often has the accent ; as, o ydo tjX&t. 



§212. ENCLITICS. 

903 — Enclitics (from iyyMvo)) are so denominated, because, like the 
Latin que, they lean or rest their accent upon the preceding word as 
forming a part of it, and have no emphasis on themselves. They are, 

1. MoV, JUtV, JLIOV, /LIB, GOV, G£V, GOV, GB, 01% 01, £, fXVV, vlv, G(f)lV, 

Gywi, G(p&, Gy&ac,, GyiGi, Gcpiojv, and the indefinite tlq, in all cases and 
dialects. 

2. Elfii and q>ijfil in the indicative present, except in the second per- 
son singular. 

3. llij, noxu 7i(7) f Ttwq, noQh, 7T0T&, not interrogative 

4. Vi, re, at, aiv, vvv, nio, (jd, iol. 

904. RULES. 

I. Enclitics throw back their accent on the last syllable of the pre- 
ceding word when its antepenult has the acute accent, or its penult, 
the circumflex ; as, dv0^o)7Toq Igtv — rjX&e juov, Go)jud juov, ov tv. 

Note 1. In this case the acute accent is always used, though the 
enclitic may have a circumflex. 

Note 2. When the preceding word ends in a double consonant, and 
will not easily coalesce with the enclitic following, the accent remains 
unchanged ; as, 6/lujX^ jliov. 

II. Monosyllabic enclitics lose their accent when the preceding word 
has any accent on the final syllable, or the acute on the penult ; as, 
dyanaq fit, dvijo rvq, tvtcto) gz. 

Dissyllabic enclitics lose their accent when the preceding word has 
an acute, or a circumflex (in this instance regarded as an acute) on the 
final syllable ; as, aaXoq Igtiv, aaXov tivoq, for aaXbq Igxiv, aaXov rwoq. 
But they retain their accent when the penult has the acute ; as, Xoyoq 
twoq, Xoyoq Igxiv. 

Obs. The principle of these rules is, that two successive syllables in 
the same word cannot be accented, and that a circumflected syllable is 
equivalent to one acuted followed by another unaccented. 

III. If several enclitics follow each other, the last only is without 
the accent, the accent of each being thrown back on the word which 
precedes it ; as, ti — ill rlq rlva yaGi jliov. 

IV. The enclitic pronouns retain their accent after prepositions, and 
after zvtaa and r\ ; as, did gb. 

V. All the enclitics retain their accent when they are emphatic, and 
when they begin a clause. 

VI. 'Egti accents its first syllable when it begins a sentence or is em- 
phatical, or follows dX)l , d, ova, ok, or tout ; as, ova zgti. 



FINIS. 



NEW AND DIPROVED 



NATIONAL SCHOOL BOOK . 



TUBUSUED BY 



PRATT, WOODFORD & CO., 

No. 4 COUETLANDT-STREET, N. Y. 



P., "W. <fe Co. would respectfully call the attention of all intern 
the subject of education to the following works pul , aa 

text-books, in nearly every branch of study ; all of which are prepared 
by practical teachers of high reputation, and many of them are in use in 
almost every State of the Union. They have stood the test of the school- 
room, and received the sanction and approval of many of the 
educators in the country from whom numerous testimonials and 
mendations are in our possession. 



BULLIONS' SERIES OF GRAMMARS AND ELEMKJ 
TARY CLASSICS. 

This series consists of the following work*, viz : 

L— PRACTICAL I VMMAR. 

This little book contains a brief sjnop ■«• of 

English Grammar. 

of exercises, of th« .adapted to the capacity of pupils 

at an early age. — New td -*ed and improved. 



£L- -IBE lRi]NOiP£fc£ 02 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

This work is intended as a school Grammar, for the use oi classet 

pursuing this branch of study in the common schools, or of the junior 

classes in academies. It embraces all that is important on the subject* 

•xpressed with accuracy, brevity, and simplicity, and is peculiarly adapt- 

d to the purposes of instruction in public schools. 

m.— THE ANALYTICAL AND PRACTICAL ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

This work, designed for the more advanced classes in schools and 
academies, is prepared on a more extended plan than the preceding, 
though not essentially different from it. The arrangement (except in 
syntax), the definitions and rules, are the same, but with much greater 
fulness in the illustrations and exercises, intended to lead the student into 
a thorough and critical acquaintance with the structure and use of the 
English Language. 

IV.— EXERCISES IN ANALYSIS AND PARSING. 

This little work consists of selections in prose and poetry from stand 
ard writers, so arranged as to furnish a convenient and progressive course 
of Exercises in Analysis and Parsing, in every variety of style, with such 
occasional references to the grammars as are deemed necessary to explain 
peculiar or difficult constructions. To this is prefixed direction* for the 
analysis of sentences and models both of analysis and parsing. 

V.— THE PRINCIPLES OF LATIN GRAMMAR. 

This work is upon the foundation of Adam's Latin Grammar, so long 
and favorably known as a text-book, and combines with all that is excel- 
lent in that work many important corrections and improvements suggest- 
ed by subsequent writers, or the results of the author's own reflection and 
observation, during many years, as a classical teacher. 

VL-JACOBS' LATIN READER 

This work forms a sequel to the Grammar, and an introduction to the 
study of Latin classic authors. It begins with a series of simple and 
plain sentences mostly selected from classic writers, to exemplify and 
illustrate the leading constructions of the language, followed by Reading 
wessons, of pure and simple Latin, chiefly narrative, by which the pupil, 
while he becomes familiar with the construction of the language, is also 
made acquainted with many of the most prominent characters and mytho- 
logical fables of antiquity, as well as with the leading events of Roman 
history. Throughout the work, references are constantly made, at th# 
foot of the page, to the Grammar and Introduction, when necessary U 
•xplain the construction or assist the pupil in his preparations* 



VII.— FIRST I 

This work is intended chiefly for tboti \j of Gre«k 

at any early age; and lor tin ••ulains on] ram- 

mar, expressed in umple a maimer m posnib] >om- 

pletc in itself, being a Grammar, Exercises, Etead ., and Lex: 

all in one; so that the pupil, while studying this, needs do Other ' 
on tlie subject The knowledge acquired bj 

be an important preparation to tlie young Btudent for commencing Lhs 
*tudy of Greek Grammar with ease and advantage. 

VIIL— THE PRINCIPLES OF GREEK GRAMMAR. 

This work is intended to be a comprehensive manual of Greek Gram- 
mar, adapted to the use of the younger, as well as of the more advanced 
•undents, in schools and colleges. Both in Etymology and Syntax, the 
Ludnig principles of Greek Grammar are exhibited in definitions and 
rules, as few and as brief as possible, in order to be easily committed to 
memory, and so comprehensive as to be of general and easy applies 
This work is aow more extensively used than any other ol the kind in 
the country. 

IX.— GREEK READER. 

This work, like the Latin Reader, is properly a sequel to the Greek 
Grammar, and an introduction to the study of the Greek classic authors. 
It seeks to accomplish its object in the same way as the Latin Reader. 
(See above, No. VI.) With these are connected 

SPENCER'S LATIN LESSONS, with exercises in parsing, introduc- 
tory to Bullions' Latin Grammar. 

In this series of books, the three Grammars, English, Latin, and 
Greek, are all on the same plan. The general arrangement, dehniti 
rides, etc., are the same, and expressed in the same language, as nearly at 
the nature of the case would admit. To those who study 1 .. 
Greek, much time and labor, it is believed, will be saved 1 bod, 

both to teacher and pupil ; the analogy and peculiar!; 
language! being kept in view, will show what is common to all, or j 
liar to each; the confusion and difficulty unnecessarily occasioned by the 
use of elementary works, differing widely from each other in UngO 
and structure, will be avoided; and th« lent rendered 

much more rapid, easy, and sati-tm ' 

No series of Grammars having this object in view, has heretofore beta 
prepared, and the advantages which Qn mnot be obtained in on 

equal degree by the study of any other Grammars new i 
form a complete course of elementary books, in which th. 
the latest and best Grammars in each language hi DBpMSJBed 

a volume of convenient size, beautifully printed on superior paper, neatly 
and strongly bound, and are put at the lowest prion at which they eon 
be afforded. 



The elementary works, intended to follow the Grammars, namely, tL 
Latin Reader, and the Greek Reader, are also on the same plan — are pre 
^ared -with special references to these works, and contain a course a* 
•slementary instruction so unique and simple, as to furnish great facilitita 
to the student in these languages. 



BULLIONS' SERIES OF LATIN CLASSICS. 

This series contains the following works, to which others, in course of 
preparation, will soon be added, viz : 

L— OESAR'S COMMENTARIES ON THE G ALT JO WAR. 

In this work, the plan of the Latin Reader is carried on throughout 
The same introduction on the Latin idioms is prefixed for convenience of 
reference, and the same mode of reference to the grammar and introduc- 
tion is continued. The Notes are neither too meagre nor too voluminous ; 
they are intended not to do the work of the student for him, but to 
direct and assist him in doing it himself. It is embellished with a beauti- 
ful map of Gaul, and several wood-cuts representing the engines of war 
used by the Romans. 

II.— CICERO'S SELECT ORATIONS, 

With notes, critical and explanatory; adapted to Bullions' Latin 
Grammar, and also to the Grammar of Andrews and Stoddard. This 
selection contains the four orations against Catiline. — The oration for the 
Poet Archias, — for Marcellus, — for Q. Ligarius, — for king Deiotarus, — for 
the Manilian law, — and for Milo. The notes are more extended than 
those in Caesar's Commentaries, especially in historical and archaeological 
notices, necessary to explain the allusions to persons and events in which 
the orations abound, a knowledge of which is indispensable to a proper 
understanding of the subject, and to enable the student to keep in view 
the train of argument pursued. — In other respects, the proper medium 
between too much, and too little assistance has been studied, and constanl 
reference made to the Grammar, for the explanation of uncommon oi 
difficult constructions. 



Ill— SALLUSTS CATILINE AND JUGURTHA, 

On the same plan. 

Published also by the same — 

THE WORKS OF VIRGIL, with copious notes, &c, and also a tabU 
•f reference ; by Rev. J. G. Cooper A. M, 



SERIES OF ARITHMETICS. 
L Bern i.i - r, i linn 

work ii peculiarly adapted to »_ . 

mple, the dt-tiiiii 
•ubjeeti gradual and Datura! Bach Boec 

lesson, and ea< 

£reat«-r. more , ban will i 

in any work of the kind. 

'J. INTI.l.l BCTC M- AND PRAC 
Lessons ii\ Ar intended aaan intn 

Arithmetic Bj J. 1- E 

3. ELEMENTARY AND PRACTICAL ARTTHMETI tra B. 

Dodi», A. M., Professor of Mathematics and Natural Philosophy ir. 

rania University, Lexington, Kentucky. — Thai ii ■ 

The arrangement Lb natural, the Bystem con ture 

tiv improved. It is admirably adapted Co the pmpuaei of instruction 
by its char an moot of principles, the brevity 

ind thorouj 
leetnal diaeipline which it afford* 

Protl i has prepared a more advance r tho 

accommodation of those who desire a roller « m* an Alg- 

These three Arithmetics bare been prepared by teachers of great prac- 
tical experience — each of them eminent in tl. 
for which his work is designed. 



SCIENTIFIC SERIES. 

This valuable series for the use of schools embraces the following Au- 
thors and subjects: 

1. Comstock's Scries of Books of the Sciences, vii. : 

INTRODUCTION TO NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, for cLddrsn. 
RAL PHIL060PB I and enlarged. 

\ EL r.M! i 1H.MK1UY. 

Till BOTANE *rs, with cuts. 

ELEMENTS OF L ABLE PB .Y with 

outs. 



OUTLINES OF PHYSIOLOGY, both comparative and human. 

(NEW) ELEMENTS OF GEOLOGY. 

ELEMENTS OF MINERALOGY. 

NATURAL HISTORY OF BEASTS AND BIRDS, showing their com- 
parative size, and containing anecdotes illustrating their habits and 
instincts. 

The immense sale of Dr. Comstock's books, renders it probable that 
■ hey are familiar to most teachers. They are so admirably adapted t<i 
the school-room, that the u Philosophy" has been republished in several 
European countries. Revised editions of several of these works hav« 
been recently issued, including late discoveries and improvements. 

Comstock's Natural Philosophy having been carefully examined by 
the Edinburgh and London Editors, previous to its republication in 
these cities, all the corrections or additions which they found it advisable 
to make have been incorporated in the original work — so far as they 
were ascertained to be judicious and adapted to our system of instruc- 
tion. This philosophy now appears as in reality the work of three accom- 
plished authors, endorsed and sanctioned by the great majority of Amer- 
ican teachers, as well as those of England, Scotland and Prussia. The 
Chemistry has been entirely revised, and contains all the late discoveries, 
together with the methods of analyzing minerals and metals. 

2. BROCKLESBY'S ELEMENTS OF METEOROLOGY, with ques- 
tions for Examination, designed for Schools and Academies. Of thig 
work, Prof. Olmstead, of Yale College, says: — "No natural science ia 
more instructive, more attractive, and more practically useful, than Me- 
teorology, treated as you have treated it ; where the philosophical ex 
planations of the various phenomena of the atmosphere are founded 
upon an extensive induction of facts. This science is more particularly 
interesting to the young, because it explains so many things that are 
daily occurring around them, and it thus inspires a taste for philosophical 
observation, and what is more, for philosophical reasoning. I think it 
cannot fail to be received as a valuable addition to our Text Books." 

3. BROCKLESBY'S VIEWS OF THE MICROSCOPIC WORLD.— 

An elegantly illustrated work, exhibiting a variety of insects, animal- 
cules, sections of wood, crystalizations, <tc, as they appear when highly 
magnified. This i3 one of the most interesting and useful books for 
Family and School Libraries ever published. It is the only distinct trea- 
tise on the subject, is admirably prepared for the use of classes, and 
should be extensively taught in our schools. 

4. WHITLOCK'S GEOMETRY AND SURVEYING.— This is a 
highly original work: combining, in a connected and available form, 
guch analogous features of Arithmetic, Algebra and Geometry, as are ap- 
propriate to the subject, and will be found useful in the practical dutiet 
of life: giving the pupil, in a comparatively brief course of study, no1 
only a full and close knowledge of his subject^ but a comprehensive vie* 
of Mathematical Science, 



This well spoken of universally, and lfl already in use in 

tome of ti .utry. It is recommended by ProC 

niih of hlidoUetown, Prof. Dodd of Lexing 
ton, and many other eminent mathematicians. 



OLNEY'S GEOGRAPHICAL SERIES. 

1. OLNEY'S OUTLINE MAPS, AND PRIMARY GEOGRAPHY.— 
These works are intended for young pupils and form an appropriate in 
troduction to the larger works. 

2. OLNEY'S QUARTO GEOGRAPHY.— The Maps in this work (ton- 
tain but little besides what the pupil is required to learn, consequently it 
facilitates the progress of the pupil, and saves labor on the part of the 
teacher. This Geography was prepared at the suggestion of many of the 
teachers, and is already extensively introduced from preference. Few 
books have proved so uniformly acceptable for common schools. Its sta- 
tistical information is very valuable. 

3. OLXEY'S SCHOOL GEOGRAPHY AXD ATLAS.— This world 
renowned book is not behind any of its competitors, in point of execution 
and accuracy. The Atlas is probably superior to any other, and contains 
a Map of the World as known to the Ancients, besides numerous impor- 
tant tables. The whole work is as complete and correct as a new book, 
and will continue to maintain its character, though alterations will i* 
avoided as far as possible. 



THE BEGINNER'S SERIES. 

BEXTLEY'S PICTORIAL SPELLING 15< OK.— A beautifully illustrate* 

and highly attractive book for children. 
GALLAUDETS ILLUSTRATIVE DEFINER.— The beat book for teach 

ing the right use of 1 th'e art i fclOIL 

niE STUDENTS PRIMER, - plan toms 

what new, this Primer has obtained great popola 
[TIE STUDENTS SPEAKER, for young pupils. 
[HE STUDENTS SPELLING BOOK, on t ^al plan. 

author of the "Student's Primer." H 

text-book is just published, and destined, when raede 

all ethers, in public favor. Its classification of word* and arrange s e a t 



8 

of tables are such, that, " by learning to spell and define five thousand 
words, the pupil will obtain a knowledge of the spelling and significa- 
tion of about fifteen thousand" This feature alone makes it two hun- 
dred per cent, cheaper, at the same price, than any other Spelling Book 
now in use. 
A set of Readers, by the author of the Student's Series, is now in 
course of publication, which will much enhance the present great popu- 
larity of this series. 

The publishers think it proper to add that, Bullions' Analytical and 
Practical Grammar, besides being in extensive use in Academies, has been 
introduced into the public schools of Boston, and several other large cities, 
without solicitation ; and that the sale of the Student's Series has been 
such that they have been quite unable to supply the demand. Readers 
1, 2, 3, and 4, have been issued, and such is the simplicity and natural 
order of the arrangement and the interest of the pieces, that pupils pro- 
gress with great rapidity and with little apparent effort 

The publications of P., W. cfe Co., are well printed, neatly and sub- 
stantially bound, are furnished at low prices, and for sale by Booksellers 
generally. 

All visiting New- York, interested in the Book trade or Schools, are 
requested to call on the publishers, who keep constantly on hand the 
largest variety of School, Classical, and Miscellaneous Books, Pens, Ink, 
Blank Books, Memorandums, Paper, Folders, Bibles, <tc., <ta, especially 
adapted to the country trade. 

PRATT, WOODFORD & CO. 

NO. 4 COUBTLANDT-ST^ N. Y. 



I 



I 



v or c 

BINDERY 
1903 



LIBRARY OK cuNGRESS 

mill 



003 037 636 51 



